Revit Architecture 2008

Metric Tutorials

April 2007

Copyright© 2007 Autodesk, Inc.
All Rights Reserved This publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. AUTODESK, INC., MAKES NO WARRANTY, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS, AND MAKES SUCH MATERIALS AVAILABLE SOLELY ON AN "AS-IS" BASIS. IN NO EVENT SHALL AUTODESK, INC., BE LIABLE TO ANYONE FOR SPECIAL, COLLATERAL, INCIDENTAL, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN CONNECTION WITH OR ARISING OUT OF ACQUISITION OR USE OF THESE MATERIALS. THE SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE LIABILITY TO AUTODESK, INC., REGARDLESS OF THE FORM OF ACTION, SHALL NOT EXCEED THE PURCHASE PRICE, IF ANY, OF THE MATERIALS DESCRIBED HEREIN. Autodesk, Inc., reserves the right to revise and improve its products as it sees fit. This publication describes the state of the product at the time of publication, and may not reflect the product at all times in the future.

Autodesk Trademarks
The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ActiveShapes, Actrix, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Your World, Design Your World (design/logo), DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, EditDV, Education by Design, Extending the Design Team, FBX, Filmbox, FMDesktop, GDX Driver, Gmax, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HOOPS, HumanIK, i-drop, iMOUT, Incinerator, IntroDV, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), LocationLogic, Lustre, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, MotionBuilder, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, Render Queue, Revit, Showcase, SketchBook, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, Visual, Visual Bridge, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Hydro, Visual Landscape, Visual Roads, Visual Survey, Visual Syllabus, Visual Toolbox, Visual Tugboat, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, and Wiretap. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner, Discreet, Fire, Flame, Flint, Frost, Inferno, Multi-Master Editing, River, Smoke, Sparks, Stone, Wire.

Third Party Trademarks
All other brand names, product names or trademarks belong to their respective holders.

Third Party Software Program Credits
ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Copyright© 1997 Microsoft Corporation. All rights reserved. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE® and other Pantone, Inc. trademarks are the property of Pantone, Inc.© Pantone, Inc., 2002 Pantone, Inc. is the copyright owner of color data and/or software which are licensed to Autodesk, Inc., to distribute for use only in combination with certain Autodesk software products. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. AutoCAD 2008 is produced under a license of data derived from DIC Color Guide® from Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Copyright © Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. All rights reserved. DIC Color Guide computer color simulations used in this product may not exactly match DIC Color Guide, DIC color Guide Part 2 identified solid color standards. Use current DIC Color Guide Manuals for exact color reference. DIC and DIC Color Guide are registered trademarks of Dainippon Ink and Chemicals, Inc. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002).

Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved.

GOVERNMENT USE
Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Contents

Part 1

Getting Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the User Interface . . . . . . . . Performing Common Tasks as You Work in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8 Revit Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16

Chapter 1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Part 2

Developing Your Designs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Creating the Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 Adding Project Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Creating a Column Grid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Adding Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 Adding Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Creating a Foundation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 Changing Structural Member Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Adding Floors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52 Adding a Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Adding a Curtain Wall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Creating a Drop Ceiling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Creating Multi-Level Stairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Adding Entourage and Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 Linking a Service Core to the Building Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25

Part 3

Documenting Your Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Creating Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation and Section Views . . . . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying View Tag Appearance . . . . . . . Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views . Creating a View Template . . . . . . . . . . View Range and Plan Regions . . . . . . . . Using Filters to Control Visibility . . . . . . Masking Portions of a View . . . . . . . . . Working with Visual Overrides . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project . . . . . . . Creating Drawing Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Views to Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 . 112 . 115 . 121 . 126 . 130 . 130 . 133 . 136 . 137 . 140 . 146 . 146 . 149 . 153

Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Contents | v

Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Tagging Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Doors and Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Other Objects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Rooms from a Program List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Color Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Material Takeoff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Shared Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shared Parameters to a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing, Tagging, and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions . . . . . . . Exporting Project Information with ODBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 . 160 . 165 . 169 . 172 . 172 . 177 . 179 . 181 . 183 . 189 . 192 . 195 . 195 . 196 . 199 . 204 . 204 . 206 . 206 . 210 . 211 . 215 . 215 . 221 . 223 . 227 . 230 . 231 . 238 . 238 . 244 . 248 . 250 . 252 . 254 . 258 . 259 . 260 . 260 . 262 . 278 . 278 . 283 . 283 . 284 . 284 . 287 . 292 . 292 . 294 . 296

Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Changing the Base Elevation of a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Witness Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions . Creating Text Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail from a Building Model . . . . Detailing the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Detail Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Text Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Detail Components . . . . . . . . Adding Keynotes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Line-based Detail Components . Modifying a Keynote Database . . . . . . . Creating a Drafted Detail . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a Detail into a Drafting View . . Creating a Reference Callout . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View . . . . Using Note Blocks . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Note Block . . . . . Using Drawing Lists . . . . . . . . . Creating a Drawing List . . . . Using Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Symbol Legend . . . Creating a Component Legend Using Revision Tracking . . . . . . . Setting Up a Revision Table . . Sketching Revision Clouds . . . Tagging Revision Clouds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 6 Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237

Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277

vi | Contents

Working with Revisions . . . . Importing from Other Applications . Importing Image Files . . . . . Importing Text Documents . . Importing Spreadsheets . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. . . . .

. 297 . 299 . 299 . 300 . 301

Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Using Dependent Views in Documentation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Part 4

Viewing and Rendering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Viewing a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exploring the Building Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View with a Camera . . . . . . . . . Creating a Section View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Fill Pattern Colors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material . . . . . . . Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type . Creating a View Plan Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Exterior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model . Adding Trees to the Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding RPC People . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Interior Perspective View . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a New Render Scene . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Daylights and Rendering the View . . . . . . . Creating and Recording Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position . . Recording the Walkthrough . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Views for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study - Courtyard View . . . . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View . . . . . Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View . . . . . . Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations . . Creating Solar Studies - Summer and Winter Solstice . Previewing Solar Study Animation . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting the Study as AVI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exporting a Study as PNG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Internal Plan Study . . . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North for Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . Orienting to True North . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering Interior Shadow Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rendering an Interior View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 . 324 . 327 . 333 . 335 . 337 . 337 . 339 . 340 . 341 . 346 . 346 . 350 . 352 . 355 . 358 . 358 . 360 . 364 . 365 . 367 . 367 . 370 . 372 . 376 . 376 . 377 . 379 . 382 . 382 . 383 . 384 . 384 . 387 . 388 . 388 . 390 . 391 . 394 . 394

Chapter 9 Viewing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323

Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375

Chapter 12 Presentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399

Contents | vii

Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Advanced Model Graphics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing the Elevation Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet . Adding Section Views to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preparing a Section View for the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View . . . . . . . . . Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique . . . . . . . . . Working with a Presentation View Template . . . . . . . . . . . . Working in a Callout Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Isometric Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Cutaway Perspective Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotating the Analytique . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 399 . 401 . 403 . 406 . 406 . 408 . 411 . 411 . 415 . 417 . 420 . 422 . 429 . 429 . 436 . 440

Part 5

Importing and Exporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Creating a Daylight Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457

Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445

Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 459
Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461 Creating a Building from Mass Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462

Part 6

Creating

Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475
Using Families and the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Introduction to the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477

Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Creating 3D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Process Overview: Creating a Family . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Origin of a Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Priorities for Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . Managing Family Parameters and Family Types . . . . Lock geometry to reference planes . . . . . . . . . . . Defining Work Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating 2D Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Door Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing the Door Plan View Components . . . . Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry . . . . . . Assigning Materials to the Door Components . . . Defining New Door Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Window Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Window Parameters . . . . . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry . . . Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry . . Assigning Materials to the Window Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 . 480 . 481 . 481 . 483 . 484 . 490 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 491 . 495 . 496 . 497 . 498 . 503 . 506 . 508 . 511 . 512 . 513 . 519 . 521 . 526 . 538

viii | Contents

Defining New Window Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Complex Model Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a Family Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening . Modelling a Complex Wall Opening . . . . . . . . . Creating Window Frame Geometry . . . . . . . . . . Defining the Window Sash Parameters . . . . . . . . Defining Visibility Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry . . Creating the Glass Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Formulas to Define Width . . . . . . . . . . Creating Elevation Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Default Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Sill Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading Sill Families into the Window Family . . . . Creating a Length Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing the Sill Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shared Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing Nested Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project Environment . . . . . Creating a Furniture Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters . . . . . Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry . . . . Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . Defining New Furniture Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Baluster Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Baluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run . . . . . . . Creating Profile Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Rail Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Reveal Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing a Host Sweep Profile . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path . . . . . . . . . Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls . . . . . . . . Creating a Room Tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Room Tag Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Annotation Symbol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol . Adding the New North Arrow to a Project . . . . . . . Creating a Titleblock Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet . . . . . . . Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock . . . . . . . Adding the Titleblock to a New Project . . . . . . . . Creating In-Place Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family . . . . . . . Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family . . . . . . Appendix A - Exploring Family Templates . . . . . . . . . Model Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Annotation Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . Titleblock Family Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 540 . 545 . 547 . 548 . 551 . 554 . 561 . 565 . 566 . 567 . 570 . 573 . 574 . 574 . 575 . 575 . 577 . 578 . 579 . 580 . 581 . 582 . 583 . 584 . 591 . 594 . 603 . 609 . 612 . 614 . 614 . 616 . 618 . 618 . 618 . 619 . 620 . 621 . 622 . 624 . 626 . 626 . 628 . 628 . 630 . 631 . 631 . 634 . 642 . 644 . 644 . 650 . 653 . 654 . 668 . 669

Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 671
Planning a Parametric Component Family . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 672

Contents | ix

Determining Component Needs . . . . . . . . Selecting the Family Template . . . . . . . . . Creating the Component Skeleton . . . . . . . . . Adding Reference Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Dimensions and Constraints . . . . . Creating New Length Parameters . . . . . . . Flexing the Component Model . . . . . . . . Adding Solid Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Solid Extrusions . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry . . Creating Additional Solid Geometry . . . . . . Testing the Family in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . Loading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . . Testing a Family Instance in a Project . . . . . Working with Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Adding a Nested Component . . . . . . . . . Creating Formula-controlled Parameters . . . Arraying Nested Subcomponents . . . . . . . Reloading a Family into a Project . . . . . . . Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters . Creating and Applying Subcategories . . . . . Creating Material Parameters . . . . . . . . . Controlling Component Visibility . . . . . . . . . Assigning Detail Level and View Controls . . . Creating Component Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Multiple Component Types . . . . . Creating Conditional Formulas . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. 672 . 673 . 676 . 676 . 682 . 686 . 690 . 693 . 693 . 695 . 698 . 707 . 707 . 708 . 712 . 712 . 716 . 721 . 726 . 728 . 728 . 733 . 735 . 735 . 738 . 738 . 739

Part 7

Using Advanced Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 741
Flat Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Entrance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curtain System . . . Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Curved Curtain System . . . . . . . Adding a Custom Curtain Panel . . . . . . . . Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel Additional Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sloped Glazings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Storefront System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Curtain System by Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 744 . 744 . 753 . 755 . 755 . 758 . 760 . 764 . 764 . 765 . 768 . 774 . 774 . 778 . 780 . 782 . 785 . 787 . 788 . 789 . 791 . 792 . 793 . 794

Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 743

Chapter 19 Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 773
Creating Roofs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Extruded Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint . Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aligning Roof Eaves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Mansard Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Fascia, Gutters, and Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roof Fascia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Gutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Soffits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 20 Area Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 797
Using Area Analysis Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798 Creating Area Schemes and Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 798

x | Contents

Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 804

Chapter 21 Massing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 807
Using Massing Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model . . . . . . . . . . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model . Using Mass Family Files in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating New Mass Family Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Placing New Mass Families . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Joining Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Mass Elements with Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mass Elements in Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements . . . . . . . . . Creating Walls by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Floors by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Roofs by Picking Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Curtain Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Elements Created from Massings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating, Modifying, and Nesting Groups . Creating and Placing a Group . . . . . Modifying a Group . . . . . . . . . . . Nesting Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . Working with Detail Groups . . . . . . . . Creating a Detail Group . . . . . . . . Using Attached Detail Groups . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . Saving and Loading Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 808 . 808 . 813 . 815 . 815 . 816 . 819 . 822 . 822 . 825 . 825 . 828 . 832 . 834 . 837 . 842 . 846 . 846 . 853 . 857 . 859 . 860 . 863 . 866 . 866 . 870 . 870 . 876 . 880 . 882 . 889 . 893 . 895 . 899 . 900 . 904 . 904 . 905 . 913 . 916 . 917 . 921 . 932 . 938 . 939 . 940 . 942 . 942 . 943

Chapter 22 Grouping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 845

Chapter 23 Site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 869
Using Site Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Property Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings . Creating Topographic Subregions . . . . . . . . Grading the Toposurface . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding a Building Pad . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adding Site Components . . . . . . . . . . . . Tagging Site and Parking Components . . . . . Creating Parking Space Schedules . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay . Sketching Structural Walls . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning and Modifying Walls . . . . Adding Structural Columns and Beams . . . . . Adding Structural Columns . . . . . . . . Adding Structural Beams and Girders . . . Adding Joists and Purlins . . . . . . . . . Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels . . . Defining New Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplicating the Existing Design . . . . . . Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation . . . . . Creating a Framing Elevation . . . . . . . Adding Structural Braces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Chapter 24 Structural . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 903

Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 949
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 950

Contents | xi

Using Worksharing in a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals . . . . . . . Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets . . . . Working Individually with Worksets . . . . . . . . . . Using Worksets with Multiple Users . . . . . . . . . . . Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users . Creating Multiple Design Options in a Project . Creating the Structural Design Options . . Creating the Roof System Design Options . Managing Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . .

. 950 . 950 . 953 . 957 . 961 . 965 . 970 . 970 . 980 . 987

Chapter 26 Creating Multiple Design Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 969

Chapter 27 Project Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 991
Using Phasing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Phasing Your Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 992 Using Phase-Specific Room Tags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 998

Chapter 28 Linking Building Models and Sharing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1001
Linking Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Linking Building Models from Different Project Files . Repositioning Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . Controlling Linked Building Model Visibility . . . . . Managing Linked Building Models . . . . . . . . . . . Sharing Coordinates Between Building Models . . . . . . . Acquiring and Publishing Coordinates . . . . . . . . . Relocating a Project with Shared Coordinates . . . . . Working with a Linked Building Model . . . . . . . . Managing Shared Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scheduling Components of Linked Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1003 . 1003 . 1011 . 1014 . 1017 . 1019 . 1020 . 1021 . 1024 . 1026 . 1027

Part 8

Customizing Project Settings and Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1031
Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Materials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying Fill Patterns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Object Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Line Patterns and Styles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specifying Units of Measurement, Temporary Dimensions, and Detail Level Options . Modifying Project Browser Organization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating an Office Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Choosing the Base Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Project Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Loading and Modifying Families and Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Views and View Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Render Scene Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modifying Import/Export Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting up Shared and Project Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Named Print Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1034 . 1034 . 1036 . 1038 . 1039 . 1041 . 1041 . 1045 . 1047 . 1048 . 1053 . 1055 . 1056 . 1059 . 1059 . 1060 . 1064 . 1067 . 1069 . 1071 . 1072 . 1074

Chapter 29 Modifying Project and System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1033

xii | Contents

Getting Started

1

1

2 | Chapter 1 Getting Started

Introduction

1

This introduction helps you get started with the Revit Architecture 2008 tutorials and presents the fundamental concepts of the product, including:
■ ■ ■ ■

how Revit Architecture works. the terms used when working with the product. how to navigate the user interface. how to perform some common tasks in the product.

3

Using the Tutorials
In this lesson, you learn how to get started with the Revit Architecture tutorials, including where to locate the training files specified in the tutorials and how to create a new Revit Architecture project from a template file. The Contents tab of the Revit Architecture Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. Expand a title to display the titles of the lessons in the tutorial, and expand a lesson title to display a list of exercises in the lesson. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit Architecture. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit Architecture.

Accessing Training Files
Training files are Revit Architecture projects, templates, and families that were created specifically for the tutorials. The training files, like the tutorials, are bundled with the product. Training files are provided to help you work through the tutorials. In this exercise, you learn where the training files are located, as well as how to open and save them.

Where are the training files located?
Training files, by default, are located in C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training. Training files are grouped into three folders within the training folder:

Common: generic files often used to teach a concept. These files are not dependent on imperial or metric units. Common file names have a c_ prefix. Imperial: files specifically for users working with imperial units. Imperial file names have an i_ prefix. Metric: files specifically for users working with metric units. Metric file names have an m_ prefix.

■ ■

NOTE Depending on your installation, your training folder may be in a different location. Contact your CAD manager for more information.

IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials, such as templates and families, is located and accessed in the training files location. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system, all content used in the tutorials is included in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files.

What is a dataset?
A dataset is a Revit Architecture project that defines a building information model and views of the model that is used to complete the steps in a tutorial. Many tutorials include a Dataset section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. In other tutorials, you create a project from a template, rather than opening an existing dataset.

Open a dataset
1 Click File menu ➤ Open. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog, scroll down, and click the Training Files icon. 3 In the right pane, double-click Common, Imperial, or Metric, depending on the type of dataset.

4 | Chapter 1 Introduction

4 Click the dataset name, and click Open.

Save a dataset
5 To save a dataset with a new name, click File menu ➤ Save As. In many cases, the work you do in a project during a tutorial exercise becomes the starting point for the next exercise. In many tutorials, you create a project or modify an existing project, save the changes, and use the saved version of the file to begin the next exercise or lesson. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog:

For Save in, select the folder in which to save the new file. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. Note where you save the file so you can open it for additional exercises as required.

For File name, enter the new file name. A good practice is to save the dataset with a unique name after you have made changes. For example, if you open c_settings.rvt and make changes, you should save this file with a new name such as c_settings_modified.rvt.

For Save as type, verify that Project Files is selected, and then click Save.

Create a project from a template
7 To create a project from a template, rather than using an existing dataset, click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project.

8 In the New Project dialog, under Create new, select Project. 9 Under Template file, verify the second option is selected, and click Browse. In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates. 10 In the Choose Template dialog, review the Revit Architecture templates.

Accessing Training Files | 5

Templates are available for specific building types: commercial, construction, and residential. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type. For most tutorial projects, you will use the default template, and customize the project as necessary. 11 Select DefaultMetric.rte, and click Open. 12 Click OK.

Understanding the Basics
In this lesson, you learn what Revit Architecture is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work. You begin with the fundamental concepts that Revit Architecture is built upon. You learn the terminology, the hierarchy of elements, how to navigate the user interface, and how to perform some common tasks in the product.

What is Revit Architecture 2008?
The Revit Architecture platform for building information modeling is a design and documentation system that supports the design, drawings, and schedules required for a building project. Building information modeling (BIM) delivers information about project design, scope, quantities, and phases when you need it. In the Revit Architecture model, every drawing sheet, 2D and 3D view, and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. As you work in drawing and schedule views, Revit Architecture collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. The Revit Architecture parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views, drawing sheets, schedules, sections, and plans.

What is meant by parametric?
The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the model that enable the coordination and change management that Revit Architecture provides. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. In mathematics and mechanical CAD, the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters; hence, the operation of the software is parametric. This concept is important because it is this capability that delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit Architecture: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project, and Revit Architecture coordinates that change through the entire project. The following are examples of these element relationships:

The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. If you move the partition, the door retains this relationship to the partition. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. If the length of the elevation is changed, the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. In this case, the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved, the floor or roof remains connected. In this case, the parameter is one of association or connection.

How does Revit Architecture 2008 keep things updated?
A fundamental characteristic of a building information modeling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. When you change something, Revit Architecture immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Revit Architecture uses two key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. The second is its approach to propagating building changes. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do, without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design.

Element behavior in a parametric modeler
Revit Architecture uses five software element classes: host, component, annotation, view, and datum.

Hosts include walls, floors, roofs, and ceilings.

6 | Chapter 1 Introduction

■ ■ ■ ■

Components include windows, doors, and furniture. Annotations are 2D, view-specific elements that help you produce documentation. Views are dynamic representations of the model and are always up-to-date. Datums are reference elements that help you put your building together.

This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Revit Architecture elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly; programming is not required. If you can draw, you can define new parametric elements in Revit Architecture. In Revit Architecture, the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the building. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. Often, you do nothing to establish these relationships; they are implied by what you do and how you draw. In other cases, you can explicitly control them, by locking a dimension or aligning two walls, for example.

Understanding Revit Architecture 2008 terms
Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit Architecture are common, industry-standard terms familiar to most architects. However, there are some terms that are unique to Revit Architecture, and understanding them is crucial to understanding the software. This section defines the basic terms used in Revit Architecture. Project: In Revit Architecture, the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. The project file contains all the information for your building design, from geometry to construction data. This information includes components used to design the model, views of the project, and drawings of the design. By using a single project file, Revit Architecture makes it easy for you to alter your design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views, elevation views, section views, schedules, and so forth). Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements, such as roofs, floors, and ceilings. Most often, you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a building. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building; for example, first floor, top of wall, or bottom of foundation. To place levels, you must be in a section or elevation view.
Level 2 work plane cutting through the 3D view with the corresponding floor plan tiled next to it.

Element: When creating your project, you add Revit Architecture parametric building elements to the design. All elements are considered categories. Revit Architecture classifies elements by model component elements and annotation elements.
■ ■

A model component element, such as a door, desk, or roof, represents the actual 3D geometry of the building. An annotation building element, such as a door tag, elevation symbol, or room tag, helps document the model.

Understanding the Basics | 7

Family: Families are classes of elements in a category that group elements with a common set of parameters (properties), identical use, and similar graphical representation. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties, but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. For example, six-panel colonial doors could be considered one family, although the doors that compose the family come in different sizes and materials. Families are either component families or system families:

Component family files can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. System families include walls, dimensions, ceilings, roofs, floors, and levels, and are not available for loading or creating as separate files.
■ ■

Revit Architecture predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. For example, the behavior of a wall is predefined in the system; however, you can create different types of walls with different compositions. System families can be transferred between projects.

Type: Each family can have different types. A type can be a specific size of a family, such as a A0 title block or a 910 x 2110 door. A type can also be a style, such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. A family can have several types. For example, a table could come in several different sizes. Each different size would be a new type within the same family. Instance: Instances are the actual items that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the building (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances).

Revit Architecture 2008 terms

Navigating the User Interface
One of the advantages of Revit Architecture is its ease of use, specifically its clear user interface. The Revit Architecture window is arranged to make navigation easy. Even the toolbar buttons are labeled, making it easy to understand what each button represents. Revit Architecture uses standard Microsoft® Windows® conventions. If you have used any other product that follows these conventions, learning Revit Architecture is much easier.

8 | Chapter 1 Introduction

In the following illustration, the user interface is labeled. In the steps that follow, you navigate and become familiar with the user interface.

Start a new project
1 On the Standard toolbar, click .

This creates a new project based on the default template.

The Title Bar
2 Place the cursor at the top of the user interface and notice the Title Bar contains the name of the project and the view that is currently open.

By default, new projects are numbered consecutively until saved with a new name. In addition, the Level 1 floor plan view is the default open view. TIP The view opened and the view names are dependent on the template on which the project is based.

The Menu Bar
3 Click View menu ➤ Zoom.

Navigating the User Interface | 9

While working in the drawing area. On the left side of the Options Bar. You can control the visibility of the six toolbars and turn the toolbar text labels on or off within the Window ➤ Toolbar menu. Another timesaving tool for selecting commands is to place the cursor in the drawing area and right-click. Edit. Notice the design options available on the Options Bar are now applicable to doors. There are six toolbars across the top of the window just beneath the Menu Bar. Then. the shortcut key for Zoom in Region is ZR. Many of the commands also have shortcut keys to speed up the design process. You can use the toolbar grips to resize and move each toolbar. and View. 10 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Notice the bar beneath the toolbars contains wall design options. The Options Bar 5 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. The Toolbar 4 On the Window menu. A context menu appears with a list of all available commands. click Toolbar. notice a door type is specified. The buttons on the toolbar represent some of the more common commands. These shortcut keys are listed next to the command on the menu. click the command name to start the command. 6 Click Modelling menu ➤ Door.The Menu Bar across the top of the window includes standard menu names such as File. and click. you simply type the required keystrokes to run the command. To choose commands. place the cursor over the menu name. The Options Bar is context-sensitive and varies depending on the tool or selected component. The context menu changes depending on the function you are performing and what is currently selected. TIP For example.

The Design Bar 10 Click Window menu ➤ Design Bars. You use the Type Selector in two ways. 9 In the Type Selector. You can also use the Type Selector to change a component type after it has been added to the building model. Select the drop-down list to view the list of doors. the door type active in the Type Selector is the door type that is added when you insert it into the building model.The Type Selector 7 The drop-down list on the left side of the Options Bar is called the Type Selector. The list of components in the Type Selector is identical to the components listed in the Families branch of the Project Browser under the respective category. Within the drawing area. if you intend to add a door. you can select any component and then change the type from the Type Selector. Navigating the User Interface | 11 . the Type Selector displays a list of doors available within the project. you can select a component type before you add it to the building model. 8 Click Modelling menu ➤ Wall. notice the list of walls that are available. For example. First. If you select the Door tool. The Type Selector is a context-sensitive drop-down list.

■ ■ ■ ■ Basics tab: includes commands for creating most basic building model components View tab: commands for creating different views in the project Modelling tab: all the commands to create model elements Drafting tab: commands for both adding annotation symbols and creating the sheet details for the project construction documents Rendering tab: commands for creating rendered 3D images ■ 12 | Chapter 1 Introduction . containing buttons grouped by function.The Show Design Bars dialog is displayed. Each tab contains frequently used commands that are also available from the menu. 11 Click OK. The Design Bar is located on the left side of the interface. There are 10 tabs in the Design Bar. immediately below the Type Selector. You can control which tabs display by selecting them in the Show Design Bars dialog.

sheets. and group name. 3D). families. family category (doors. and groups of your current project: ■ ■ Right-click in the browser to add. Expand or compress the browser list by clicking the + or sign next to the name. reports.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Site tab: commands for adding site components and producing site plans Massing tab: commands for executing conceptual massing commands Room and Area tab: commands for making room and area schemes and plans Structural tab: commands for adding structural components to your project Construction tab: includes commands for creating construction industry information To access the commands within a tab. In the Project Browser. Navigating the User Interface | 13 . elevations. select Views (all). windows). The Project Browser 12 To the right of the Design Bar is the Project Browser. and the respective commands are displayed on the Design Bar. click the tab. families. schedules. TIP You can turn the visibility of each tab on and off by right-clicking on the Design Bar and selecting the tab from the context menu. The browser is conveniently organized by view type (floor plans. delete. walls. and rename views. You can use the Project Browser to quickly manage the views. and groups.

14 Click Settings menu ➤ Browser Organization. making it easy to add a family or group to the project or add a view to a sheet. scroll through the sorting options available for the Project Browser. Do not click. you can instantly change the sorting within the Project Browser by selecting the scheme in the Type Selector. The browser is dockable. 14 | Chapter 1 Introduction . 15 In the Browser Organization dialog. You can create and modify Project Browser organization schemes for both views and sheets. ■ 13 In the Type Selector. so you can position it wherever you want by dragging the Project Browser title bar to a new location. click Cancel. 17 Place the cursor near the center of the drawing area. You can also drag and drop from the browser into the drawing area. The cursor is displayed as a pencil. double-click the name. The Status Bar 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.■ ■ To open a view. click Wall. After you create a browser organization scheme.

19 Place the cursor over the elevation symbol arrow on the left side of the drawing area. It highlights when the cursor is over it. Revit Architecture 2008 Help 21 Click Help menu ➤ Revit Architecture 2008 Help. and notice that the preselected component switches to the main elevation symbol. click Modify. You can turn the Status Bar visibility on or off from the Window menu. In this case. 20 Press TAB. The Status Bar also provides information. in conjunction with Tooltips. Make sure you place the cursor over the arrow portion of the symbol.In the bottom left corner of the window. you can use the Status Bar and the Tab key to toggle between components and select the desired component. In the Status Bar. When attempting to select a specific component in a complex or crowded view." TIP The tooltip that displays is identical to the note in the status bar. regarding selected components within a view. Elevations: Elevation: Elevation 5. notice that the name of the preselected component is Views: Elevation: West. it tells you to "Click to enter wall start point. notice the Status Bar provides information regarding what you should do next. use the Tab key to alternate between nearby components. The elevation symbol consists of two parts. the main symbol and the elevation directional arrows. TIP When attempting to select a specific component in a crowded or detailed view. When you place the cursor over a component. Navigating the User Interface | 15 . it highlights and the status bar displays the component name. 18 On the Design Bar.

Be sure to have the Standard toolbar displayed. HTML help window to search for information and quickly display it to read or print. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. ■ ■ ■ 22 Close the Revit Architecture Help window. click . you learn to perform some of the common Revit Architecture tasks that are included in the tutorials.rvt. There are several tools that help you find information. or save commonly used pages on the Favorites tab. click Training Files. Click the Help button. You can access Help in the following ways: ■ Dialog Boxes: Dialog boxes include Help buttons. If there is no Help button displayed. Windows: From any window. search for all instances of a word or phrase on the Search tab. and the topic specific to the dialog box opens. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Toolbar: From the Toolbar. find a keyword on the Index tab. For example. You can use this tri-pane. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. press F1 to get the topic associated with the window. it will be easier to work in Revit Architecture and focus on the unique tasks for each tutorial. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire building or floor plan in the view. and then click on a specific menu command or command button for Help. rest the cursor over the Toolbar button until the Tool Tip displays. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. There are several ways to access zoom options: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ View menu commands Zoom command on the View toolbar Shortcut keys Wheel mouse Dynamic View dialog In the following steps. You can select a topic on the Contents tab. you open a dataset and practice adjusting the view with the zoom commands. Context-sensitive help is also available to provide instant help on any menu command. TIP You can control the level of Tool Tip assistance from the Settings ➤ Options menu. press F1 to get help on that dialog box. You can also press SHIFT+F1. Tool Tips: To see Tool Tips. 16 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Use zoom commands to adjust the view 1 In the tutorials. After you are familiar with how to complete these tasks. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the building model in the window.Help is available online at all times during a Revit Architecture session.

9 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region you wish to zoom. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. 6 On the View toolbar. and the view of the buiding model is sized to fit the available window. NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself automatically activates the Zoom In Region command. The zoom menu lists the zoom options and the shortcut keys for each option. this is referred to as a crossing selection. 5 Click Zoom Out (2x). and enter the shortcut keys ZR to zoom in on a region. click the drop-down menu next to the Zoom command to display the zoom options. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 17 .The 3D isometric view displays: 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom to display the zoom options menu. 8 Click in the drawing area. 7 Click Zoom To Fit.

These are the drag controls. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the lower-left corner of the screen. NOTE As you zoom in and out within a view. use a zoom menu command or the Toolbar option to zoom out within the view. display along the ends. and tops of selected walls in elevation and 3D views. 11 Zoom is also available in Dynamic View mode. display at the ends of selected lines and walls in a plan view. referred to as shape handles.10 If you use a mouse where the middle button is a wheel. and drag the cursor. To modify or add snap increments. press and hold CTRL. hold the middle mouse button (or left mouse button on a wheel mouse). on the View toolbar. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire building again. and double-click 2nd Flr. as shown: Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the wall. To display the Dynamic View dialog in a 2D or 3D view. and drag the cursor in the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel mouse. 18 | Chapter 1 Introduction . and select the wall. expand Floor Plans. click Settings menu ➤ Snaps. ■ Resize elements using drag controls 13 In the Project Browser. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. bottoms. called drag controls. Cnst. roll the wheel to zoom the view. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view dynamically. Revit Architecture uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. 14 Enter ZR. Without clicking in the dialog. When drawing or modifying a building model. 12 Use one of the following methods to zoom: ■ ■ In the Dynamic View dialog. Similar controls. On a wheel mouse. Small blue dots. click Zoom. click . expand Views (all).

In this case. click to specify the starting position. to lengthen the wall. moving the cursor to the left horizontally.15 Click and drag the left control. and click again to specify the ending position. click (Move). Some commands. you want to move the table closer to the wall. Move an element 17 Scroll the view down so you can see the couch and table in the floor plan. require two clicks to complete the command. 19 Click the lower-left endpoint of the table. After selecting the element to be moved. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 19 . such as Move and Copy. and on the Edit toolbar. 18 Select the Craftsman02 table. for example. 16 Click in the drawing area to deselect the wall.

The table and plant are returned to their original locations. you decide that you like the table better where it was placed originally. Select the plant. and drag it on top of the table. Selecting the second action in the list will undo the last two actions. 23 On the Undo menu. Undo commands 22 On the Standard toolbar. select the second item in the list. All changes you make to a project are tracked. click the drop-down menu next to . In this example. as shown. The Undo command allows you to undo several commands by clicking the drop-down menu next to the Undo command on the Toolbar.20 Click next to the lower wall. The table moves down and the lower-left corner is placed at the move endpoint. 20 | Chapter 1 Introduction . Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. 21 Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location.

26 To end the command. Press ESC twice. Performing Common Tasks as You Work in Revit Architecture | 21 . such as the Lines command. Notice that the Lines command is still active and you could continue to place lines. 25 Click in the drawing area to start the line and click again to end it. click Lines. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. click Modify. click the Undo command. 27 Close the file without saving your changes. on the Standard toolbar. Some commands. On the Design Bar. End a command 24 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. use one of the following methods: ■ ■ ■ Choose another command. or press and hold CTRL and enter Z.

22 | Chapter 1 Introduction .

Developing Your Designs 2 23 .

24 | Chapter 2 Developing Your Designs .

a curtain wall.Creating a Building Information Model 2 In this tutorial. it is good practice to test the constraints. When you constrain Revit Architecture elements to each other. a central service core. You create a retail building that contains 5 floors. If the grid moves. 25 . and a sloped roof over one corner of the building. or “flex the model” by changing parameters. For example. the wall or column will move with it. Parametric design allows you to incorporate design intent into your model. As you develop the building design. a wall or a column can be constrained to grid. you learn how to use parametric design techniques. you learn how to constrain elements and how to test the parametric relationships between them. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit® Architecture 2008. Dimensions and other positional constraints define relationships between elements in the model.

subsequent exercises instruct you to open a project dataset. After the beginning exercises. so there is no dependency on previously completed exercises.Using this Tutorial In the first 6 exercises of this tutorial. from the product library. you create a Revit Architecture project from a template provided with the software. You set up the project and create the structural frame and foundation of the building. The project datasets have pre-loaded family types and represent the correct state for beginning the exercise. 26 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . such as a door or window. you load any required family type that is not in your project. In practice.

sheets. South. Ceiling Plans. you design inside the elevation markers. Each template contains predefined settings and views appropriate for the corresponding building type.rte. and click Browse. click Training Files. locate the Project Browser. 4 In the left pane of the dialog. 7 If necessary. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. and delete them. you will use the default template. You can also add views to your project as you develop and document the building information model. you use a template that is provided with the software. Explore the project with the Project Browser 6 On the left side of the drawing screen. and elevation views created in the project by the template. and families in your project. The project is stored as a single file. only a single floor plan view and a single ceiling plan view are created. duplicate them. 2 In the New Project dialog. Creating the Project | 27 . and customize the project as necessary. Create the project from the default template 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. but contains no geometry. These views are customizable: you can rename them. you create the project that will store the retail building design and different views of the building. West. In views that display elevation markers. You can access these views by double-clicking the elevation marker arrow. and Elevations (Building Elevation). and settings. verify the second option is selected. The Project Browser contains a hierarchical tree structure that you use to navigate the views. 3 Under Template file. To create the project file. under Create new. Each marker corresponds to an elevation view in the project: North. NOTE If you create a project without a template. with an RVT extension. select Project. The new project opens. East. construction. levels. 5 Click OK. The views that display under each of these branches of the tree are the default floor plan views. For this project. schedules. views. or by opening the view in the Project Browser. In the drawing space in the right pane. The template file has an RTE extension and provides default project units. notice four elevation markers. and residential. expand Floor Plans. Revit Architecture templates are available for specific building types: commercial. expand Views (all). change their properties. reflected ceiling plan views.Creating the Project In this exercise.

You use levels to position Revit Architecture elements in your building model. This folder contains the Revit Architecture files that you need to complete all of the Revit Architecture tutorials. and on the General tab. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 12 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. Adding Project Levels In this exercise.Floor Plan: Level 1 to indicate the Level 1 Floor plan view is current. You change the names of the 2 default levels. Notice that in the top left corner of your screen. 10 In the Project Browser. You can control how often the software will prompt you to save your work. 9 Under Elevations (Building Elevation). will be accessible from the Project Browser. Two level lines. 14 For File name. the view you see in the drawing area. and click Training Files. verify that Level 1 displays as bold. As you design and document your building model. created by the template. and Revit Links branches that display at the same level as Views (all). Schedules/Quantities. delete. Families. as well as change their names. You also change the elevation of the two levels lines to the appropriate heights for the first two stories of the building. double-click Metric. Click Settings menu ➤ Options. The bold type indicates that the Level 1 Floor Plan view is the current view. Groups. you modify the 2 default project levels and add 5 levels to the project to define the 7 vertical levels of the building model.rvt) is selected. and duplicate levels. the software title bar contains the name of the software and Project 1. content and building model reports. Save the project 11 Click File menu ➤ Save As. view the Save Reminder interval. Sheets (all). as well as the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views to create foundation and entry levels for the building. heights. such as schedules and legends. 13 In the file window. click to scroll down to the bottom of the list. verify Project Files (*. Level lines are finite horizontal planes that you use to define the levels (stories) of your building information model. enter Revit Retail Building. 28 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 15 For Save as type.8 Under Floor Plans. double-click South. 16 Click Save. display in the south elevation. you add the remaining 5 levels using different techniques. You can add. notice the Legends. you will want to save your work frequently. “Adding Project Levels” on page 28. and other properties. As you complete the exercises in this tutorial. After you modify the two default levels.

4 Click Yes to rename the corresponding floor and ceiling plan views. so that when one level moves. or constrained. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). enter 0 mm. you will use the levels to position building elements such as walls. doors. enter 00 Foundation. and double-click South. enter -1800 mm. 2 Zoom to the level names at the right end of each level line. and press ENTER. Modify the two default project levels 1 In the Project Browser. to each other. and press ENTER. 7 Double-click the Level 2 text. enter 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans and Ceiling Plans. 9 Click the 01 Entry Level elevation height. TIP Because views list alphabetically or sequentially in the Project Browser. expand Views (all). 8 Click Yes to rename the corresponding views. 6 Click the 00 Foundation elevation height. and press ENTER. 5 In the Project Browser.You learn how the levels are locked. When you begin designing. it is good practice to precede the level names with level numbers so the corresponding views will list sequentially in the Project Browser. notice the Level 1 floor and ceiling plan views are now named 00 Foundation. and press ENTER. the other levels move and change with it. 3 Double-click the Level 1 text. Adding Project Levels | 29 . and windows within the building model.

and click Basics. As you move the cursor. and move it slightly upward. This is the Options Bar. you add another level. 12 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. view the Design Bar. Notice that the bar above the drawing area changes to display new tools and settings. 14 Click Plan View Types. 17 Move the cursor horizontally until a dashed green line displays alignment with the two existing levels. a corresponding ceiling plan and floor plan view will be created. click Level. click to specify the endpoint of the level line. enter 3750 mm. and enter 02 Level. The Options Bar displays appropriate options and settings for every command that you select on the Design Bar. A dashed green line indicates where the new level will be drawn. verify and Make Plan View are selected. Use the Draw option to add a level 10 Zoom out so you can see both levels in the view. under Floor Plans. 20 Click Yes to rename the corresponding level and view. using a different option. 15 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the 01 Entry Level line. right-click. verify Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected. 19 Click OK. a temporary dimension displays the height between 01 Entry Level and the cursor position. When you add the new level. 16 Enter 3750 mm. you add a level by drawing it above the 01 Entry Level. which should display by default. 30 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 13 On the Options Bar. and then move it up. 3750 mm above 01 Entry Level. and press ESC. place the cursor anywhere on the Design Bar. 21 In the Project Browser.Next. 11 On the left side of the Project Browser. click Level. and press ENTER to specify the start point of the new level line. not all the tabs are visible. 23 On the Options Bar. right-click Level 3. 24 Place the cursor on the 02 Level line. 18 In the Project Browser. Use the Pick option to add a level 22 On Design Bar. click Rename. By default. click . and for Offset. Notice that the name of the level line changes to 02 Level in the current view. Next. 3750 mm above the 02 Level line. The Design Bar provides tabs that provide quick access to many commands. The command that you use to add levels is on the Basics tab. If it does not. verify that you have created an 02 Level ceiling plan view as well. and click OK.

Adding Project Levels | 31 . as shown. or on the Design Bar. 27 Press ESC. Copy levels only when you want to use them for reference. 26 Rename the level 03 Level. 31 Clear the box to redisplay the level symbol on the right side only. add 3 levels 3750 mm apart above 03 Level. If you create a level by copying it. and zoom to the left endpoint of the line. Display a symbol at the left endpoint of the 06 level line 29 Click the 06 Roof Level line.25 Click to place the level line. and rename the corresponding views. Name the levels: ■ ■ ■ 04 Level 05 Roof Garden 06 Roof NOTE Do not use the Copy command to create the levels. Add the remaining 3 levels 28 Using either the Draw or Pick option. 30 Select the empty blue box on the left to display a level symbol at the left endpoint of the line. the associated floor and ceiling plan views are not created. click Modify to end the command.

and specify the grid line endpoint. In the following exercise. the levels are no longer constrained. click Grid. If you select a level and click its lock. Move the cursor up. select . 32 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 4 Draw the first vertical grid line: ■ ■ In the lower left corner of the drawing area. “Creating a Column Grid” on page 32. double-click 00 Foundation. The lock icon that displays indicates that the levels are vertically constrained. 3 On the Options Bar. and you can move them independently. Notice that the status bar prompts you to specify a start point for the grid line. In a later exercise. specify a start point for the grid line. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. ■ The number 1 displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. you change the columns to round hollow steel columns. until it is positioned under the top elevation marker. you place the building columns at the grid line intersections. On the Design Bar. Creating a Column Grid In this exercise. so that if the roof elevation changes. under Floor Plans. By using the grid to control placement of columns. When the grid is complete. Verify that the levels are vertically constrained with locks before you continue on to the next exercise. the column height changes as well. you create a structural grid in the 00 Foundation floor plan view of the building model. you constrain the column heights to the roof level. Notice that by moving the top level. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Test the level constraints 32 Select and drag the blue circle to the right or left to shorten or lengthen the level lines. Create vertical column grid lines 1 On the Project Browser. you ensure a level of accuracy early in your design. all the levels move.

click . and click to place the line. On the Options Bar.5 Change the grid bubble number to a letter: ■ ■ Double-click 1 inside the grid bubble. and click to place the line. for Offset. You can change what displays in grid bubbles at any point in your project. ■ The first vertical grid bay is created. enter 4500 mm. and press ENTER. 7 Add 3 vertical grid lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click to place the grid line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line B. enter 7500 mm. Enter A. Next. and click to place the line. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line D. and for Offset. ■ ■ Move the cursor to the right side of the grid line. use the Pick option to create another vertical grid line by offsetting it a specific distance from the existing line. click Grid. Move the cursor to the right side of grid line C. for Offset. enter 7500 mm. 6 Offset a second vertical grid line from the first grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. On the Options Bar. Creating a Column Grid | 33 . and then place the cursor on the grid line to display the location of the second grid line.

click and specify an Offset of 0 mm. On the Options Bar. and specify the grid line endpoint. 12 Using the Pick option and offsets of 7500 mm and 4500 mm. click Grid. Create horizontal grid lines 9 Draw the first horizontal grid line: ■ On the Design Bar. 34 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 10 Change the grid bubble letter to 1. specify a start point for the grid line just below grid line A. Move the cursor horizontally past the vertical grid line E. click Grid. click Dimension. The letter F displays inside the bubble at the endpoint of the completed grid line. ■ ■ ■ On the upper left side of the grid. as shown. add horizontal grid lines to complete the grid.8 Press ESC. 11 On the Design Bar. Dimension the grid and lock the grid bay spacing 13 On the Design Bar.

you ensure that the grid remains centered and the building will ''grow'' out from the center if its grid dimensions are changed. until it is closer to grid line A. Two pins display on the grid lines.14 On the Options Bar. click the drawing area to the right of the line to place the dimension. At the bottom endpoint of the grid line. 16 When you select the last vertical grid line. and press ESC. select grid lines C and 3. 21 Press ESC. click and drag the blue circular grip to the right. 25 Adjust the grid: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. 19 Dimension the horizontal grid lines as shown. The pins are hidden. ■ ■ Select grid line 1. until it is closer to grid line 5. click and drag the blue circular grip up. 22 While pressing CTRL. click Dimension. You must select the grid lines to redisplay the pins. By pinning these central grid lines. Creating a Column Grid | 35 . click . select each vertical grid line just under its grid bubble. 17 Click all 4 lock icons on the dimension string to lock the grid bay spacing. click Modify. At the left endpoint of the grid line. 24 Press ESC. 18 On the Design Bar. and press ESC. 15 Starting with grid line A. 23 Click Edit menu ➤ Pin Position. The locks ensure that the grid spacing cannot be accidentally changed. 20 Click the 4 lock icons to lock the horizontal grid dimensions. and select grid line A.

and on the Options Bar. click Activate Dimensions. Add columns to the grid 26 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. create a 3D perspective view with a camera in which to better view the columns. select UC-Universal Column: 305x305x97UC. 32 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. Create a 3D perspective view of the building 38 In the Project Browser. and press ENTER. If it is unlocked. You want to view the columns as if you were walking toward them. select 01 Entry Level. click Camera. 37 Select the dimension string and verify that it is locked. 27 In the Type Selector. and then select the dimension value between grid lines A and B. select all of the column grid lines. click (Grid Intersection). 36 On the Standard toolbar. select grid line A. 31 Press ESC. 30 Verify that all the grid lines are selected (red). click twice to restore the original locked grid dimension. and unlock it. 28 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Height and 05 Roof Garden. Columns that span from the 00 Foundation level to the 05 Roof Garden level are added at the grid line intersections of the column grid. 35 Enter 9000 mm. 33 While pressing CTRL. click Finish. 39 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 34 On the Options Bar.■ If necessary. ■ 29 While pressing CTRL. 40 On the Options Bar. The columns move to the new location at the intersection of the grid lines. 41 Place the camera and select its target point: ■ Zoom to the lower right corner of the column grid. 36 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . For Place By. adjust the position of the dimension strings by selecting and dragging them. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Structural Column. Next. lock it. and specify a point beyond the last horizontal grid line to place the camera. under Floor Plans. for From.

The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. and click to place the target point of the camera.■ Move the cursor next to grid bubble A. Creating a Column Grid | 37 . The 3D perspective view created by the camera displays.

45 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Rename. enter To Building. ■ ■ Right-click 3D View 1. under Views (all). Adding Beams In this exercise. you add beams to build the structure of the building model. 38 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . expand 3D Views. named 3D View 1 by default. The current view. 43 Name the view: ■ In the Project Browser. displays in bold under 3D Views. and then copy them to the subsequent levels. “Adding Beams” on page 38. 44 Save the drawing. In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.42 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can view all of the columns. You begin by adding beams to the 01 Entry Level floor plan.

The View Control Bar offers graphical shortcuts to view settings and commands. 3 Click the Detail Level icon . select each grid line. the icon on the right side of the scale. The view is currently set to Coarse. double-click To Building to view all of the beams. under Floor Plans. 8 While pressing CTRL. 2 At the bottom left corner of the drawing area. view the icons on the View Control Bar. which displays the structural elements in your view as single lines. 10 In the Project Browser. click Grid. The selected grid lines display as red. Add beams to the first level of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Adding Beams | 39 . click Beam. 6 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Options Bar. A flyout menu displays the level of detail in which you can display the elements in the current view. under 3D Views. you change the height of the columns so they extend to the 06 Roof level. click Finish. 4 Click Medium.When you finish adding beams. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. double-click 01 Entry Level. 9 On the Options Bar. 5 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar.

and click OK. All of the beams attached to the columns display as red. press and hold SHIFT. 16 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. Notice that top level beams are not connected to the columns. click Modify.Copy beams from 01 Entry Level to levels 02 through 06 11 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Select Levels dialog. which only extend to the 5th level. 40 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select 02 Level. 13 On the Design Bar. When you created the columns. and click Select All Instances. 14 Select one of the beams. click to view the default 3D view of the structure. you specified their height to reach only the 05 Roof Garden level. NOTE The default 3D view is not available in a perspective or camera view. right-click. select 06 Roof. under Floor Plans. The default 3D view is a southeast isometric view with hidden lines. double-click 01 Entry Level. 12 On the View toolbar. 15 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. The beams that you copied from the 01 Entry Level are pasted onto each subsequent level of the building.

and click Element Properties. and click OK. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. under Constraints. and click Select All Instances. All of the columns display as red. 21 With the column selected. resize the view to see the entire structure.Change the height of the columns 18 Select one of the columns. Adding Beams | 41 . 24 Press ESC. 25 In the Project Browser. 06 Roof. click . The parameter is set to 05 Roof Garden. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. The columns now extend to the top level of the building. under Instance Parameters. for Top Level. double-click To Building. but it would only change the height of the single selected column. under 3D Views. select 06 Roof. right-click. 20 Click Cancel. You could change this parameter to 06 Roof in this dialog to change the height of the column. 22 On the Options Bar. right-click. and if necessary. view the Top Level Constraint parameter.

Click Detail Level. and click Coarse. 27 At the lower left corner of the drawing. “Adding Braces” on page 43.View the south elevation of the structure 26 In the Project Browser. but want to display them in less detail. You can view the columns and beams in the elevation. on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. 42 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . as lines only. The structural elements (columns and beams) display only as lines. under Elevations. and click Hidden line. area. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click South. 28 Save the drawing.

To better add the braces to the structure. 3 On the Options Bar.Adding Braces In this exercise. Create framing elevation views 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Select the outer grid lines to place 8 elevation markers around the outside of the grid as shown. double-click the elevation marker arrow. Add braces in a framing elevation view 5 On the bottom left side of the grid. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. double-click 00 Foundation. you create 8 framing elevation views. Adding Braces | 43 . and press ESC to end the command. under Floor Plans. Each elevation marker aligns perpendicularly to the grid. verify Attach to Grid is selected. click Framing Elevation. you add braces to the four corners of the building structure.

10 Move the cursor diagonally to the right endpoint of the beam on 02 Level. 7 On the Design Bar. so that you can see vertical columns located on grid lines A and B. NOTE Make sure you snap to the endpoints of the beams when adding braces to ensure proper connectivity in the building model. click Brace. but when placed the braces are placed. 8 In the Type Selector. add 4 braces on the subsequent levels of the building as shown. press ESC. You must place them one by one to establish the proper connections between elements. NOTE Do not copy or array braces. and click to specify the endpoint of the brace. visible offsets between the beam and the brace connection points displays. verify UB-Universal Beam: 305x165x40UB is selected. 6 Use the grips that display on the crop region to adjust both sides of the view. 11 Using the same technique. After you add the final brace. click to specify the start point of the brace. The endpoints will display when you move the cursor over them. 9 Move the cursor to the left endpoint of the beam on 01 Entry Level.The associated framing elevation view displays. 44 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and when the endpoint snap displays.

and press ENTER. Adding Braces | 45 . enter 18000 mm. IMPORTANT If the brace does not move with the level. delete it and redraw it. Make sure that you use the endpoint snap to connect the brace to the beams.Lower the height of the roof (06 Roof) and the 04 Level to test the connectivity 12 Double-click the 06 Roof level height. The height of the roof lowers.

19 In the Project Browser. 17 Add diagonal braces to the structure. and press ENTER. and click the lock that displays to unlock it. double-click the framing elevation marker arrow. 46 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Activate Dimensions. under Floor Plans. and press ENTER. but this time add them from right to left. 20 Select the dimension string between grid lines A and B. 16 On the bottom right side of the grid. Add braces in another framing elevation view 15 In the Project Browser. Add brace in the remaining views and test the connectivity of the building model structure 18 Add braces to the structure in the remaining framing elevation views. as shown in the 3D view below. enter 10000 mm. enter 12000 mm. under Floor Plans. double-click 00 Foundation.13 Double-click the 04 Level height. 21 Select grid line A. 22 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay (the one that you unlocked). double-click 00 Foundation. click twice to restore the original level heights. and on the Options Bar. 14 On the Standard toolbar.

Creating a Foundation In this exercise. and drag it away from the structure. lock it. 25 Change the height of the 06 Roof level to 24000 mm. grid size. 29 In the Project Browser. Creating a Foundation | 47 . 30 Select the dimension string of the first vertical grid bay. 28 On the Standard toolbar. under 3D Views. double-click 00 Foundation. and roof height. 31 Save the drawing. “Creating a Foundation” on page 47. 26 In the Project Browser. Test connectivity of the columns. you place isolated pile caps under the building columns to create a foundation system that distributes the building load to the ground. open the 3D view and notice the change in the size. double-click 3D. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. The connected beams and braces resize as the columns move. under Elevations. beams. double-click South. and if necessary. and braces 27 Select one of the columns in the structure. 24 In the Project Browser. click 3 times to restore the locked dimension.23 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans.

4 In the left pane of the dialog. 48 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click View Properties. 6 Expand M_Pile Cap-Rectangular to display the available pile cap types (sizes). select Unlimited. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add the first pile cap 8 At the top left of the grid. 3 In the Revit dialog that displays. for Level. and expand Structural Foundation. and open Metric\Families\Structural\Foundations\M_Pile Cap-Rectangular. A warning displays. click Yes to load a new structural foundation family. and drag it to the drawing area.Before you can add the pile caps. you must load the appropriate pile cap family into the project. expand Families. In the View Range dialog. Click OK twice. you add the pile caps in the 00 Foundation floor plan view. click Foundation ➤ Isolated. under View Depth. for View Range. 10 Edit the 00 Foundation view range: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the view. 9 Close the warning dialog. Load a pile cap family 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. The foundation pile cap now displays. double-click 00 Foundation. but the current depth of the view does not allow you to view it. 7 Select 2000 x 2000 x 900 mm.rfa. click the intersection of grid line A and grid line 1. Verify the pile cap family is loaded in the project 5 In the Project Browser. click Edit. The M_Pile Cap-Rectangular family displays in the tree. where you must adjust the view range before you can view them. under Floor Plans. After you load the pile cap family. You learn how to access the families that are stored in libraries included with software. and press ESC. under Extents. The pile cap has been added in the view. In the Element Properties dialog. and how to load specific families into a project.

13 In the Project Browser.Add pile caps to complete the foundation 11 Right-click the pile cap. double-click {3D} to view the complete foundation. press ESC. and click Create Similar. under 3D Views. Creating a Foundation | 49 . When the final pile cap is placed. 12 Select each grid intersection to add pile caps that form the foundation.

All of the columns in the building model display as red. NOTE The default 3D view is the only 3D view in which the Select All Instances command is available. double-click 3D.rvt. Changing Structural Member Types In this exercise. 50 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . right-click. beam. It is not available in a perspective or camera view. and learn how to select and change multiple structural element types to refine the building structure. “Changing Structural Member Types” on page 50. and brace families into the project. 2 Select one of the columns. View the round hollow columns in the building model. and braces that you used to create the building structure. and open Metric\m_RRB_update_structure.5CHS. beams. 3 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. click Modify. you change the types of the columns. In the left pane of the Open dialog. You load new column.14 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 15 Proceed to the next exercise. select CHS-Circular Hollow Section-Column: 508x12. 4 On the Design Bar. Change the column type 1 In the Project Browser. and click Select All Instances.

double-click Elevation 1-a. click Modify. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.2x101. Because the braces that you added were actually a beam type. under Dimensions. but it is the only size of its type currently available. select M_Round Bar: 75 mm. Change the brace type 8 On the Design Bar. 13 In the Name dialog. In the following steps. under Elevations (Interior Elevation). 9 In the Type Selector. click Modify to view the new beam type in the building model. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. and click OK twice. you change the brace type. select M_HSS-Hollow Structural Section: HSS203. 20 Open the other building elevations and change the braces to M_Round Bar: 75 mm. for d. click Brace. right-click. the braces as well as the beams change.Change the beam type 5 Select one of the beams. click Duplicate. and click OK. 18 In the Type Selector. You need to create a new bar type by duplicating the 25mm bar type. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 75 mm. 15 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Type Selector. View the building model with the new structural element types 21 On the View toolbar. click Edit/New. enter 75 mm. and click Select All Instances. This not the size that you want to use. 17 While pressing CTRL. select the braces in the elevation one by one. Changing Structural Member Types | 51 . although the framing elevation displays the braces as lines only.9. The brace type changes. click . 7 On the Design Bar. for Type. 16 On the Design Bar. 19 On the Design Bar. click .6x15. select M_Round Bar: 25mm. and changing its size parameter.

you must sketch them first in a sketch editor. stairs.rvt. and railings are also created from sketches. 52 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and elements in the current view display as gray. To create floors. 2 Sketch the floor: ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Add the 01 Entry Level Floor 1 In the Project Browser. such as roofs.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_floors. You are now in the sketch editor. you add floors to the 01 Entry Level through the 05 Roof Garden level of the building. under Floor Plans. Adding Floors In this exercise. click Lines. you learn some different techniques that you can use when sketching objects. “Adding Floors” on page 52. In this exercise. Notice the Design Bar now displays the Sketch tab. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Training Files. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ On the Sketch tab. Some other Revit Architecture elements. click Floor.

Leave this dimension unlocked. 3 Place a dimension between the first horizontal grid line and the left floor edge: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. sketch a rectangular floor inside the extents of the grid. and then the 1st horizontal grid line. and click above the 1st horizontal grid line to place the dimension. Move the cursor to the left. click Dimension. 4 Dimension the space between the left floor edge and the first vertical grid line. At the top left corner of the grid. Adding Floors | 53 . Using a crossing window. past the first vertical grid line. The exact dimensions of the sketched floor are not important. select the top floor line. click . Do not lock the dimensions. 5 Dimension the bottom right corner of the grid.■ ■ On the Options Bar. If the grid changes size. Do not lock the dimension. the 01 Entry Level floor will resize with it. as you resize it in the next steps.

At the top left corner of the grid. 9 Because you do not need to modify the floor. you will add a floor to the 02 Level of the building model. 8 Select the floor. The dimensions are not visible on the finished floor. on the Design Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. Next. click . 54 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . Select the left floor edge and change the top dimension value to 300 mm. Move the cursor to the right dimension. and click the temporary dimension value. and on the Options Bar. press ENTER. Move the cursor to dimensions at the bottom of the grid. Enter 300 mm.6 Resize the floor sketch by changing its dimensions: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. You use the Pick option to create a floor from the 01 Entry Level floor geometry. this is how you would do it. The floor sketch and dimensions redisplay. If you needed to modify the floor after you created it. click Modify. and change their values to 300 mm. select the top floor line. They display on the floor sketch. and then press ESC. Select and lock the dimensions. using a different sketching technique. click Finish Sketch to create the floor. click Quit Sketch.

and for Offset.Add the 02 Level floor 10 In the Project Browser. ■ 12 At the top left corner of the grid. and press ESC. and move the cursor until the dashed green line displays in the inside of the 01 Entry Level floor. The 02 Level floor displays. On the Options Bar. 14 On the Design Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid as shown. On the Sketch tab. under Floor Plans. The 02 Level floor sketch displays. double-click 02 Level. IMPORTANT Make sure you select the 01 Entry Level floor lines and not the grid lines. ■ ■ Select the right vertical 01 Entry Level floor line. click Finish Sketch. click Floor. Select the three remaining floor lines. 13 At the bottom right corner of the grid. 11 Sketch the floor: ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. dimension the space between the 02 Level floor and the grid. click Lines. click . enter 1500mm. Adding Floors | 55 . and lock the dimensions.

The sketched floor line is aligned with the top 03 Level floor line. The 02 Level floor is visible in the view.Add the 03 Level floor 15 In the Project Browser. 19 Sketch a floor inside the 02 Level floor. click . 20 On the Tools toolbar. Click the locks to constrain the floors. click Align . 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 23 Continue to align the remaining 3 floor sketch lines with the 02 Level floor. click Floor. click Lines. The cursor changes to 2 arrows to indicate the Align command is active. 22 Click the lock to constrain the 03 Level floor line to the 02 Level floor. and then select the top line of the 03 Level floor sketch. and a lock icon displays. 21 Select the top 02 Level floor line. 56 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click 03 Level.

32 Select the floor. and enter 4500 mm. dimension the space between 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid. under Floor Plans. under Views ➤ 3D Views. View the floors in the 3D building model and test connectivity 36 In the Project Browser. 34 At the bottom right corner of the grid. double-click 05 Roof Garden. Click the lock icons that display next to the dimensions to constrain the 05 Roof Garden level floor to the grid. double-click 01 Entry Level. and click Activate Dimensions. double-click 00 Foundation. 25 Repeat the previous procedure to create a floor on the 04 Level. click Model Graphics Style. 31 In the Project Browser. 33 At the top left corner of the grid. you could place the rectangular sketch on the 04 Level. 38 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 35 On the Design Bar. 40 Select grid line A. Alternatively. and lock the edges. and on the Options Bar. double-click {3D}. click Finish Sketch. dimension the space between the 05 Roof Garden level floor and the grid.24 On the Design Bar. 30 In the Select Levels dialog. 27 Select the 01 Entry Level Floor. 37 On the View Control Bar. select 05 Roof Garden. Copy and paste the 01 Entry Level floor to the 05 Roof Garden level 26 In the Project Browser. Adding Floors | 57 . 29 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. under Floor Plans. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 39 Select the dimension string between grid line A and B. and constrain the 04 Level floor to the 03 Level floor. click Edit. 41 Click the dimension value of the first vertical grid bay. and click OK. Lock the dimensions to constrain the floors. and click Shading with Edges. and unlock it. The 01 Entry Level floor is copied at the same location onto the 05 Roof Garden level. under Floor Plans.

and lock the dimension that you unlocked in a previous step. under Floor Plans. 43 On the Standard toolbar. click to restore the grid bay size to 7500 mm. Adding a Roof In this exercise. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. “Adding a Roof ” on page 58. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. 44 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D} to view the grid.42 In the Project Browser. you add a sloped roof over the corner of the building. double-click 00 Foundation. 58 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

Add the roof 1 In the Project Browser. When a green dashed line displays. click to place the roof line. Click . The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. under Floor Plans. ■ ■ For Offset. and then move the cursor slightly to the right of the grid line.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. double-click 06 Roof. click Training Files. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Move the cursor over grid line E. click Lines. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ Select Defines Slope. or the perimeter. and specify which roof edges will define the roof slope. You sketch the footprint. and press ENTER. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. of the roof in a plan view.To create the roof. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_roof. enter 1800 mm. you use the Roof by Footprint option in Revit Architecture. Adding a Roof | 59 .

Select the lower portion of the roof line that you created from grid line E (the part you want to keep). 9 Select grid line 3 to place the final roof line. For Offset. 10 Press ESC.6 Select grid line 5. click to place the roof line. 7 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Defines Slope. move the cursor slightly below the grid line. 11 Trim the rooflines: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Continue to trim the lines until you complete the roof as shown. and then select the right portion of the roof line that you created from grid line 5. and lock it. click (Trim/Extend). 8 Select grid line C to place another roof line. and lock it. and when the green dashed line displays. The roof sketch line displays with a slope marker. enter 0 mm. ■ 60 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

click Finish Roof. 17 Select the roof. double-click 06 Roof. Change the roof slope 16 In the Project Browser. click . enter 4.00. and on the Options Bar.12 Optionally. under Floor Plans. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. View the roof 14 On the View toolbar. View the roof 19 On the View toolbar. Adding a Roof | 61 . for Slope Angle. click . and click OK. place a dimension between the roof slope edges and the grid to constrain them. 15 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southeast. under Dimensions. click . 13 On the Design Bar.

7 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ .rvt. 6 In the Name dialog. Add curtain wall segments 1 In the Project Browser. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog. The type is saved in the project. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_curtainwall. Under Horizontal Grid Pattern. for Join Condition. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ Click . click 01 Entry Level. click Edit/New. enter Retail Storefront. under Floor Plans. for Type. and click OK. Under Construction. Adding a Curtain Wall In this exercise. so if you resize the grid. Click OK twice. click Duplicate. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. “Adding a Curtain Wall” on page 62. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. When you duplicate a type. click Wall. 3 In the Type Selector. select Curtain Wall: Storefront. the curtain wall resizes with it. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. for Spacing. enter 2100 mm. for Spacing.NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. select Horizontal Grid Continuous. enter 1050 mm. You constrain the curtain wall to the grid. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. 62 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. you copy an existing family type and change its name and parameters to create a new unique type. click Training Files. you add a curtain wall.

Trim the curtain wall segments 12 On the Tools toolbar. dimension both corners of the curtain wall to the grid. 10 When a green dashed line displays. If you want to hide them. you can delete the dimension. click to place the 1st curtain wall segment. 11 Select the 3 remaining outermost grid lines to create 3 more curtain wall segments that are offset 600 mm from the grid lines toward the building interior.■ ■ ■ For Level. but opt to keep the constraint when prompted. Adding a Curtain Wall | 63 . These dimensions are not in a sketch. enter 600 mm. click (Trim/Extend). click Dimension. If the grid moves. 9 Move the cursor over the grid line 1 near its endpoint. so they remain in the view. the locks ensure that the curtain wall will move with it. For Offset. select 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimensions. For Height. and trim each curtain wall segment. and move it slightly toward the building interior. 13 On the Design Bar. select 05 Roof Garden.

View the curtain wall 14 In the Project Browser. double-click To Building. 64 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click Hidden Line. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. under 3D Views. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating an Entrance” on page 65. and click Shading with Edges. 15 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style. Click Model Graphics Style.

clear one element to clear all the elements. 6 Under Visibility. To better work with the curtain wall panels. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. under the element list. click Detail Level. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_curtainwall. 2 On the View Control Bar. and double-click South. 3 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics.Creating an Entrance In this exercise. Modify the South elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. select Curtain Panels and Structural Columns. click Training Files. 4 On the Model Categories tab. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you want to change the view so only curtain wall panels and columns display. under Views (all).rvt. click All. You also modify the panels around the doors so they are solid rather than glass. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). All the elements in the list are selected. Creating an Entrance | 65 . and click None. 5 Under Visibility. and click Medium. you replace 4 curtain wall panels with doors in the front of the building to create the main building entrance.

in the center of the 01 Entry Level. 66 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. in the Type Selector. 12 With the panels selected. 15 Zoom to the drawing extents. press and hold CTRL. select System Panel: Solid.Do not select Columns. 8 Zoom in to the entrance area. 9 On the Design Bar. click Modify. as these usually represent internal pilasters. 10 Select 1 panel. 14 In the Select View Template dialog. select Architectural Elevation. 13 Click View menu ➤ Apply View Template. 7 Click OK. and select the other panels around the entrance as shown. click the pin to remove it from each of the panels. 11 When all 9 panels are selected.

If you select View ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click To Building. 19 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. The view template applies a collection of visibility graphics appropriate to the view it is named for. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. click Detail Level ➤ Medium. under 3D Views. 18 On the View Control Bar.16 On the View Control Bar. double-click {3D}. Creating an Entrance | 67 . you see that the visibility of many of the Model element categories that you cleared in a previous step are selected. in this case an architectural elevation. 17 In the Project Browser.

click Curtain Grid. click Add or Remove Segments. 25 Select the mullion that you selected previously. 21 Zoom to the front of the building. 26 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 24 On the Options Bar. 68 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to select it. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South. 23 Press TAB until you are notified that you have selected a grid line.20 In the Project Browser. 22 Move the cursor over the curtain wall mullion as shown. and press ESC to remove the grid lines as shown. select another mullion to the right.

31 Select the newly created curtain wall panel (press TAB to cycle through selections). 30 On the Design Bar. select M_Curtain Wall Sgl Glass. click . 29 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion to the right. click Modify. Creating an Entrance | 69 . 33 Repeat for the next 3 panels. 32 In the Type Selector. 34 On the View toolbar. 35 Zoom in to the front of the building. and unpin it.27 On the Options Bar. 28 Select the center of the upper horizontal mullion. and view the new entrance. select One Segment.

and unpin it. 70 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 37 Move the cursor over the bottom mullion. press TAB until it is selected. 39 Using the same process. 3rd. and 4th panels. 38 Press DELETE. select it.36 Zoom in to the first panel. remove the mullions from the 2nd.

for Underlay. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Creating a Drop Ceiling In this exercise.40 Optionally. 1 In the Project Browser. select 02 Level. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. you create a drop ceiling on the 01 Entry Level of the building. In the left pane of the Open dialog. open the North elevation. and click View Properties. and add an entrance to the north side of the building. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_drop_ceiling. “Creating a Drop Ceiling” on page 71. under Graphics.rvt. 2 Zoom in to the lower right corner of the building. 3 Right-click in the view. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 71 . 5 Click OK. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. Use the same steps that you used to create the south entrance.

click Callout. 7 Place the callout: ■ Specify a point above the top left column. and specify a point to complete the callout. 72 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and drag the grip down to position the callout head below the grid as shown. ■ Move the cursor horizontally below the bottom right column.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The cursor changes to a pencil. which indicates you must draw the callout. select the grip closest to the callout head. 8 Select the callout.

and click Flip Section. enter Display Area. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. and drag the top grip down to display only 01 Entry Level and 02 Level. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 73 . 14 Press ESC. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and specify a point past grid line D. and click Rename. ■ ■ Specify the section start point just below the right framing elevation marker. under Floor Plans.9 In the Project Browser. right-click. 12 Draw a section line. click Section. 13 Select the section line. 15 Double-click the section marker to view the section. Move the cursor horizontally to the left. right-click Callout of 01 Entry Level. 16 Select the section box.

31 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. For Loc Line. 18 In the Rename View dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the top horizontal wall and the grid. Lock both alignments. click Ceiling.17 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Rename. and lock the dimension. 30 In the Project Browser. 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . select Basic Wall: Interior-135mm Partition (2 hr). for Prefer. 32 In the Type Selector. ■ 23 Select the bottom corner of the overhead floor. select Finish Face: Exterior. 21 In the Type Selector. click Dimension. expand Sections (Building Section). 24 On the Tools toolbar. and then specify a point near the intersection of grid lines D and 4 to draw a 5000 x 5000 mm rectangular wall inside the grid lines. and click OK. double-click 01 Entry Level. 74 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 27 On the Options Bar. Click . 19 In the Project Browser. double-click 01 Entry Level. and lock the dimension. 25 Press ESC. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Sketch. click Wall. right-click Section 1. under Ceiling Plans. and align the exterior faces of the right vertical wall and the bottom horizontal wall with the 02 Level underlay. click (Align). 28 Dimension the space between the exterior face of the left vertical wall and the grid. enter Section Display Area. select Compound Ceiling : 600 x 600 mm Grid. select Wall faces. under Floor Plans.

Creating a Drop Ceiling | 75 . 37 On the Design Bar. 39 On the View Control Bar. 38 In the Project Browser under Sections (Building Section). 35 Align and lock each ceiling line to the interior wall faces. click . double-click Section Display Area. The ceiling grid displays inside of the walls. press TAB until the chain of walls is selected.■ Click Click . 36 Press ESC. and click to select the walls. 40 Move the cursor over one of the walls. 41 On the Options Bar. ■ 34 Sketch the ceiling within the walls. click Finish Sketch. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. .

click Move. select a grid line. under Constraints. and click to select the walls. 44 Select the ceiling. and drag it to the interior face of the horizontal or vertical wall. enter 2700 mm. 43 On the Design Bar. for Base Offset. To position the grid.42 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 2700 mm. 46 Attach the walls to the 02 Level floor: ■ Select one of the vertical walls above the ceiling. On the Options Bar. click Attach. click Modify. Select the 02 Level Floor. 47 In the Project Browser. for Height Offset From Level. 48 Modify the ceiling grid: ■ To start the tiles on a wall edge. 45 In the Element Properties dialog. ■ 76 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click OK. and click . and specify a distance. press TAB until you select the wall chain. ■ ■ The walls attach to the 02 Level floor. select any horizontal or vertical ceiling grid line. on the Tools toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. for Top/Base. under Constraints. and click OK. under Ceiling Plans.

click Cancel. for Type. 50 In the Element Properties dialog.View the ceiling structure 49 Select the ceiling. and click . view the ceiling structure. 58 Move the cursor toward the top left corner of the grid. click Cancel. under Construction. 52 In the Edit Assembly dialog. click (Rotate). 53 Click OK. for Structure. 55 In the Element Properties dialog. Rotate the ceiling grid 56 Select the center ceiling grid line. click Edit. 57 On the Options Bar. click Edit/New. 51 In the Type Properties dialog. Creating a Drop Ceiling | 77 . 54 In the Type Properties dialog.

60 Press ESC. and press ENTER.59 Click. enter 45. 78 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 61 Select and drag the diagonal center grid line until it spans the corners of the ceiling grid.

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. click Shadows On. you create multi-level stairs and a stairwell that span the levels of the building. 66 Proceed to the next exercise. you must cut an opening through the floors on each level. “Creating Multi-Level Stairs” on page 79. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 79 . click Shadows Off. Creating Multi-Level Stairs In this exercise. 63 On the View Control Bar. You begin by creating a flight of stairs and stairwell on the 01 Entry Level of the building. under 3D Views. copy the drop ceiling to the other building levels. 65 Optionally.View the building in 3D with shadows 62 In the Project Browser. and then copying it to the 05 Level. After the stairs and stairwell have been copied to levels 01-05. double-click To Building. 64 On the View Control Bar.

4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 2. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_stair_. ■ 80 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Training Files. When the temporary dimensions indicate the cursor is 1500 mm from the grid line intersection. click Ref Plane. under Floor Plans. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. C. 3 On the View Control Bar.rvt. Move the cursor to the left along grid line 3. and 3. double-click 01 Entry Level. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click to specify the start point of the reference plane. Create the stair 1 In the Project Browser. and specify the reference plane endpoint on grid line B. 5 Draw 2 reference planes that you will use to locate the flight of stairs: ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor over the intersection of grid lines C and 3. You will create the stair in the area between these columns. 2 Zoom in to the area defined by grid lines B. Move the cursor vertically.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

click Stairs. Move the cursor vertically along the reference plane until the text below the stair flight displays an equal number of risers created and risers remaining. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 81 . and specify a point to create first stair flight. 7 Sketch the stair: ■ ■ Select the bottom endpoint of the right reference plane. 6 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.■ Draw another reference plane 1500 mm from grid line 2.

beyond the end of the stair. Make sure you select the stair and not the railing. 13 On the Tools toolbar. 11 On the Options Bar: ■ For Loc Line. and click to select it. including its handrails. click Wall. The complete stair displays. select Finish Face: Interior. 9 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. with a message that 20 risers have been created and that 0 remain. and select the 2nd reference plane. ■ 12 Draw walls around the stair. press TAB until the stair edge is selected. 16 Using the same technique. align the 2 vertical side edges of the stair with the 2 vertical walls and lock the alignments. Click . select Basic Wall: Generic .225mm Masonry.■ ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the left. and specify a point. click Finish Sketch to create the complete stair. 15 Select the interior face of the top horizontal wall. click Align. Move the cursor down. 14 Move the cursor over the top horizontal outside edge of the stair. 10 In the Type Selector. 82 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and lock the alignment.

Lock the dimension. but leave the stair and wall constrained to each other. click . and drag it to the left to test the stair and wall constraints. 19 Select the dimension. and press DELETE. 18 Dimension the distance from the bottom of the stair to the interior face of the bottom horizontal wall: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. select Wall faces. Select the bottom of the stair. select both reference planes. 22 On the Standard toolbar. a warning displays.17 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Click Modify. 21 Select the stair. Select the wall. Because the dimension is constrained. select the dimension value. Select the interior face of the wall. and press DELETE. click Dimension. enter 1200 mm. and specify a point away from the wall. 20 Click OK to delete the dimension. 23 While pressing CTRL. for Prefer. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 83 . The stair and walls move to the left.

You must cut an opening through the building to accommodate the multi-level stairs. 35 Press SHIFT. you can see that the stair railings penetrate the floors. 84 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 29 While pressing CTRL.Add a door to the stairwell 24 On the Design Bar. 25 In the Type Selector. TIP To flip the door swing. Under Constraints. click 34 On the View toolbar. You can see that the walls and stairs span the vertical height of the building. and click . clear Tag on Placement. select M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm. for Base Constraint. 31 Select the stair. . select 00 Foundation. press and hold the left mouse button. verify Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. Click OK. 27 Select the right side of the lower horizontal wall to place the door. 33 On the View toolbar. for Multistory Top Level. click . For Top Constraint. The Dynamic View dialog displays in the left corner of your screen. click Door. and click 30 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. and move the cursor to spin the building model. 28 On the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. but if you view the top level of the building. press the SPACEBAR before you place the door. Click OK. 32 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. select 05 Roof Garden. select all 4 walls.

45 Click Finish Sketch to complete the shaft. 37 Zoom in to the stairs. . and lock the alignments. ■ 40 Draw a rectangular shaft opening around the stairs. under Floor Plans. double-click 01 Entry Level. click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 43 Align the 2 vertical shaft sketch lines with the interior face of the 2 vertical walls. 47 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. 38 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 42 Align the top horizontal shaft sketch line with the top horizontal interior wall face and lock the alignment. click Align. 41 On the Tools toolbar. Copy the door to multiple levels 46 Select the door. 39 On the Options Bar: ■ Click Click .Create a shaft opening 36 In the Project Browser. 44 Align the bottom horizontal shaft sketch line with the bottom tread of the stair. Creating Multi-Level Stairs | 85 . and lock the alignment. 48 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name.

55 On the View toolbar. select Up to Level: 06 Roof. ■ For Top Constraint. click . By offsetting the base. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . 52 In the Project Browser. you prevent it from cutting through the 01 Entry Level floor. 53 Select the shaft. click 56 On the View toolbar. . and click OK. The shaft opening will cut through any level it touches. View the shaft and stair 50 On the View toolbar. double-click 01 Entry Level. under Floor Plans. for Base Offset. click . enter 300 mm. Under Constraints. and spin the building so you can see the roof.49 In the Select Levels dialog. Look at the top of building and notice that the shaft is not cutting an opening. and click OK. select 02 Level through 05 Roof Garden. click 51 On the View toolbar. . 57 Spin the building so that you can see the shaft opening. 86 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. You learn how to access and modify the profile and height of the wall to create a decorative wall that extends past the height of the 06 Roof Level. “Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height” on page 87. click Training Files. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height In this exercise. 59 Proceed to the next exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a wall on the 05 Roof Garden level. and open Metric\m_RRB_wall_profile.58 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest.rvt. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 87 .

8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. and draw a 10650 mm wall along grid line 3. and press ENTER. 5 In the Type Selector. Enter 1050 mm. select Core Face: Interior. click Wall. for Loc Line. 7 Move the cursor near the column at the intersection of grid lines C and 3. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Graphics.225mm Masonry. 2 Right-click in the view. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click View Properties.Add a basic wall to the 05 Roof Garden level 1 In the Project Browser. for Underlay. 10 Change the dimension value: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. select 06 Roof. 88 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . select Basic Wall: Generic . Select the wall. You must draw the wall from left to right to position it on the correct side of grid line 3. double-click 05 Roof Garden. click Modify. and click OK. Select the dimension value. 9 Dimension the space between grid line C and the left face of the wall on grid line 3. click Dimension.

15 Select the wall. 23 Press ESC. 22 Move the cursor horizontally 1520 mm to the left. 21 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical profile line. 12 Select the floor on the right side of the wall. and click to place a line. 20 On the Design Bar. double-click Elevation: South. 16 In the Go To View dialog. click Lines. and click to place a line. click Lines. click Edit Profile. Modify the profile of the wall 14 On the Design Bar.11 On the Tools toolbar. 17 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. 13 Click the lock that displays to constrain the 2 elements. The profile of the wall that you just modified displays as a purple sketch. 19 Press ESC. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 89 . and then select the right face of the wall. The South elevation displays. and click to place a line. 18 Select the top endpoint of the left vertical profile line. move the cursor up 4500 mm. move the cursor up 6000 mm. click (Align). click Modify.

Select the top horizontal profile line.24 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Options Bar. 29 On the Options Bar. and select the endpoint of the left vertical profile line. 33 Trim the profile lines: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. Press ESC. 27 Press ESC. 31 Move the cursor to the left. click Lines. Select the top right portion of the circle. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1520 mm displays. 90 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and click to place it. click the drop-down arrow that displays next to the sketching tools. Select the short right profile line. click . click Lines. and select it. 26 Snap to the endpoint of the line that you just drew. 30 Using the Quadrant snap. snap to the top of the circle. click (Trim/Extend). Select the top right portion of the circle. and click (Circle). 32 Click Modify. 28 On the Design Bar.

click Continue. 47 Click Cancel. unlock it. 44 On the Design Bar. click . 46 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the wall. Up to level: 06 Roof is selected. click Modify. select the short horizontal line on the right. Creating a Wall with a Non-Uniform Height | 91 . 41 Select the horizontal line across the middle of the profile sketch.34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Design Bar. you maintained the relationship to the roof level. move the cursor out until a circle with a radius of 1000 mm displays. 45 On the Options Bar. instead of lengthening the existing edge. 38 On the Design Bar. 35 On the Options Bar. and press DELETE. 40 On the Design Bar. 48 Change the 06 Roof level height to 19000 mm. 43 In the Warning dialog. note that for Top Constraint. click Modify. By adding extra height to the wall. 36 Snap to the endpoint of the short horizontal line. 39 In the Error dialog. click Lines. 42 On the Design Bar. You need a closed sketch to complete the profile. click Finish Sketch. click . click Modify. click Finish Sketch. click the Close button. under Constraints. and click to place it. and press DELETE.

You learn how to load these components into the project. click to restore the original height of the roof. 52 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. “Adding Entourage and Site Components” on page 92. double-click 3D. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. Adding Entourage and Site Components In this exercise. 92 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . 51 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. View the wall 50 In the Project Browser.49 On the Standard toolbar. create a sidewalk on 2 sides of the building. and place people and a car on and next to the sidewalk. and how to place and adjust them in project views. you place planters on the 05 Roof level to create a roof garden.

double-click 05 Roof Garden. Create the roof garden 1 On the Project Browser. as shown.rvt. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_host.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. move the cursor over the planter and move it to the right to display a dashed green line that helps you to place the next planter. select M_Planter : 1200 x 1200mm. click Training Files. TIP After you place the 1st planter. between grid lines C and D. 4 Add 3 planters on the inside of the floor and grid line 5. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 3 In the Type Selector. click Component. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 93 .

click Duplicate. and press ESC. click Edit/New. 11 In the Project Browser. 7 Click to place a tree in the center of each planter. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. select the 2 remaining trees. double-click {3D}. and click OK. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Southwest. click . 19 In the Project Browser. 15 In the Name dialog.5 On the Basics tab. and in the Type Selector. for Type. and on the Options Bar. select Tree . The height of the trees no longer extends past the roof. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. for Plant Height. double-click 05 Roof Garden. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. and then click OK twice. under Floor Plans. 94 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .Deciduous: Cornus Florida 4. enter Cornus Florida 1. click . 10 View the roof. under 3D Views.Deciduous: Cornus Florida 1. Create a sidewalk outside of the building 20 In the Project Browser. enter 1500 mm.5. under Other.5 Meters. click Component. double-click 01 Entry Level.5 Meters. 18 While pressing CTRL. select M_Tree . 8 On the View toolbar. 17 Click Apply. under Floor Plans. and notice that the trees that you placed in the planters protrude through the roof. 12 Select 1 of the trees. 6 In the Type Selector.

29 Select the right vertical floor line. 28 Select the bottom horizontal floor line. sketch a line between grid lines 4 and 5. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 95 . 26 Using the same method. and click to sketch a line. 23 On the Options Bar: Click . 25 Press TAB until a line that is offset 2400 mm below grid line 5 displays between grid lines A and B. enter 0 mm. ■ ■ For Offset. click Lines. for Offset. enter 2400 mm. and click to place the line. and click to sketch a line. 24 Move the cursor over grid line 5 between grid lines A and B. click Floor. 22 On the Design Bar.21 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar.

click (Trim/Extend). The completed sidewalk displays. move the cursor up 900 mm. 35 Select the line that you just drew. and then select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5.30 On the Options Bar. and click to finish the line. 34 On the Tools toolbar. 32 Select the top endpoint of the right vertical line. click . 33 Select the left endpoint of the line between grid lines A and B. 36 Select the line between grid lines A and B. 96 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Finish Sketch. and then select the line that you sketched along the bottom horizontal line of the floor. and click to finish the line. 38 On the Design Bar. clear Chain. 31 On the Options Bar. 37 Select the line that you sketched between grid lines 4 and 5. and then select the horizontal line near grid line 1. move the cursor to the right approximately 1200 mm.

for Height Offset from Level. click . create a new type for the sidewalk element. enter -250 mm. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. for Type. 43 Click OK twice. RPC people are represented by a circle. In plan view. 39 Select the sidewalk. Place 2 people on the sidewalk 46 Zoom to the lower right corner of the sidewalk. click Edit/New. click Duplicate. as it is currently a floor element. 44 In the Element Properties dialog. 42 In the Name dialog. 52 Move the cursor toward the column. 50 Click to place Alex on the sidewalk. select Rotate after placement. enter Sidewalk. 53 In the Type Selector. and click to place her on the sidewalk. select M_RPC Male: Alex. Adding Entourage and Site Components | 97 . 48 In the Type Selector. 51 Move the cursor so the rotation line displays along Alex’s line of sight and specify a point. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. select M_RPC Female: Cathy. and specify a point to rotate him so he is facing the column. 45 Click OK. and on the Options Bar. and second line inside the circle indicates the person’s line of sight.Next. click Component. near Column E5. The circle is divided in half by a line. under Constraints. 47 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 49 On the Options Bar.

click the car. you select the sidewalk as a host for both the Alex and Cathy RPC components. 59 In the camera view (3D View 1). 61 In the Project Browser. Next. and place it along the sidewalk behind him. select M_RPC Beetle. you ensure that the components remain on the same plane as the host. 62 Zoom in to the area where Alex and Cathy are standing. 57 Press ESC. When you select a host for a component. for Offset. 63 Select and drag both Cathy and Alex above the sidewalk. and click . 56 Press the spacebar to rotate it until it is facing away from Alex.54 Rotate Cathy so she is facing Alex. click Camera. under Constraints. 64 Select Cathy. and on the Options Bar. click Pick Host. 58 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 98 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . double-click West. under Elevations. and click OK. and place it in the corner of the scene as shown. 55 In the Type Selector. enter -300 mm. 60 In the Element Properties dialog.

and replace them with a service core. and on the Options Bar.65 Click the sidewalk. both Cathy and Alex will move with it. 68 Select and move both Cathy and Alex until they are standing on the sidewalk. 66 Select Alex. If the sidewalk changes height. “Linking a Service Core to the Building Project” on page 99. 69 Using the same method. 67 Click the sidewalk. under 3D Views. you remove the multi-level stairs and stairwell that you created in a previous exercise from the building. View the front of the building 70 In the Project Browser. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 99 . click Pick Host. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project In this exercise. double-click To Building. 71 Proceed to the next exercise. pick the sidewalk as the host for the car. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it.

including the stairs. By deleting the stairwell from the 06 Roof. 100 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . so it will cut through the floors of the building. press SHIFT. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Zoom in to the stairwell. double-click 06 Roof. walls. under Floor Plans. and open Metric\m_RRB_add_host_style_railings. Notice that there is no longer a stairwell in the building. click 5 On the View toolbar. click . and shaft opening. After the service core is linked to your project. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Remove the stairwell from the building model 1 On the Project Browser. click Training Files. you must cut another shaft opening around it.The service core is contained in an external file that you link to your current project. 4 On the View toolbar. and spin the building.rvt. . 3 Select the entire stairwell. you delete the entire stairwell. and press DELETE.

8 In the left pane of the Add Link dialog. and then select the top horizontal core wall. 14 Select the top horizontal floor line. double-click 01 Entry Level. select m_RRB_link. under Floor Plans. click (Align). The building service core displays in your drawing. under Positioning: ■ ■ Select Manually place.rvt. Linking a Service Core to the Building Project | 101 . 9 In the Metric folder. 10 At the bottom of the dialog. 13 On the Tools toolbar. click Training Files. Select Cursor at center. You cannot constrain elements in the current project to elements in linked models. Do not click the lock to constrain the core and floor. 11 Click Open. 12 Specify a point to place it between grid lines B-D. 7 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Revit.Link a new service core into the building model 6 In the Project Browser.

Under Constraints. click . select Chain. click Finish Sketch. Click OK. 19 Trace the outer edges of the core elements to sketch the service core as shown: 20 On the Design Bar. 102 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . click Opening ➤ Shaft Opening. 16 On the Design Bar.Create a shaft opening for the service core 15 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 17 On the Options Bar. for Base Offset. click 24 On the View toolbar. 18 On the Options Bar. enter 300 mm. 21 Select the shaft opening and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Up to level: 06 Roof. For Top Constraint. View the service core in the building model 23 On the View toolbar. click Lines. click .

The rendering displays. Notice the glass railing in the foreground. expand Renderings. NOTE You may close the project with or without saving it. you cut away a portion of the floor on the 02 Level of the building. and double-click Lounge Perspective. You can see that the service core cuts through the floors of the building.. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 103 . 2 In the left pane of the dialog. press SHIFT. click Training Files. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings In this exercise. and spin the building to get a better view of the core. you add glass railings around the floor edges. click Training Files.rvt. where it is hosted within a railing family. 3 In the new project. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings_. and open Metric\m_Conference. 25 Proceed to the final exercise. You copy the railing type into your project from another project. After you modify it. “Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings” on page 103. In the left pane of the Open dialog. in the Project Browser.rvt. This is the railing that you want to add to your model. Open a different project and view a rendering of the building lounge 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Families. 14 Select the bottom horizontal floor 700 mm to the left of grid line C. Modify the 02 Level floor 11 In the Project Browser. click (Split). click Modify. double-click 02 Level. and on the Options Bar.rvt. 17 Select the right endpoint of the floor where you split it. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Revit Retail Building. click OK. and select Glass. 8 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. Handrail only. click Edit. 5 Expand Railing. 12 Select the floor. and drag it to the right until it intersects with grid line D. 16 Select the left endpoint of the floor where you split it. 9 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 13 On the Options Bar. and click to split the floor. 15 On the Design Bar. and expand Railings. 10 Close the warning dialog that displays. The floor sketch displays. press and hold CTRL.rvt or m_RRB_modify_floor_add_railings. under Floor Plans. 6 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. and drag to the left until it intersects with grid line B.Copy the railing types into the retail building project 4 In the Project Browser. and Parapet. 104 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

click .18 On the Design Bar. and click to place it. and click to draw another line. 25 Select grid line B. click Lines. 27 On the Tools toolbar. select the left vertical sketch line along grid line B. click (Align). and click the lock to lock the alignment. select the right vertical sketch line along grid line D. 28 Align the horizontal sketch lines with each other as shown. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 105 . 22 Select the endpoint of the right horizontal line that you just sketched. and click the lock to lock the alignment. 21 Sketch the same lines in the opposite direction on the right side of the floor sketch. move the cursor vertically 1500 mm. 20 Move the cursor horizontally to the right 1500 mm and click to draw another line. and lock the alignment. 23 Complete the sketch as shown. move the cursor vertically until the line is 1500 mm long. 24 On the Tools toolbar. 19 Select the left endpoint of the floor. 26 Select grid line D.

Lock the dimensions. 35 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click . click Dimension.rvt project. click Dimension. select Glass.29 On the Design Bar. click Yes to attach the top of the walls on 01 Entry Level to the bottom of the 02 Level floor. and click OK. 36 Select the floor lines to sketch the railing around the inside of the floor line as shown. click Finish Sketch. 31 In the Revit dialog. 33 On the Design Bar. Add railings around the floor 32 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This is the railing type that you copied from the Conference. for Type. 38 Dimension the railing sketch to the edge of the floor and lock the dimension. 30 On the Design Bar. click Railing. 106 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model . and dimension the floor sketch lines as shown. 37 On the Design Bar. enter 100 mm. click Railing Properties. For Offset. 34 In the Element Properties dialog.

41 Place the camera and camera target as shown. A new 3D view of the interior of the 02 Level displays.39 Click Finish Sketch. Click Model Graphics ➤ Shading with Edges. You can view the railing that you just added. 42 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics ➤ Hidden Line. Modifying a Floor and Adding Railings | 107 . click Camera. View the floor and railings 40 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

43 Close all project drawings.■ Click Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region to hide the frame around the view. 108 | Chapter 2 Creating a Building Information Model .

lofty ceilings.Documenting Your Projects 3 In this section of the tutorials. We wish to thank BNIM Architects. Located in Kansas City’s popular Crossroads Arts District. The additional 4th floor and non-historic north facade will be modernized to include a 4th floor penthouse. As the building is slated to receive historic tax credits. 109 . and north facing balconies for the 2nd and 3rd floor units. and a roof garden. balconies. BNIM Architects was selected to convert the existing building into a 22-unit condominium featuring concrete floors. you learn to create construction documentation in Revit Architecture 2008. the existing building shell will be maintained and restored. exterior fire stairs. the Freighthouse Flats project is an exciting renovation of an historic three-story warehouse into new urban luxury loft living spaces. a Kansas City-based architectural firm for providing their Freighthouse Flats renovation project to use for the tutorial datasets in this section.

110 | Chapter 3 Documenting Your Projects . slight modifications to the building design have been made.NOTE For training purposes.

Adding Views and Sheets to a Project 3 In this tutorial. section. and detail views Modify the appearance of tags and other annotation on plans Set visibility and graphic controls in views to produce different presentation effects Create projects sheets that contain project views ■ 111 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Create new project views. including plan. elevation. you begin the construction documentation for the Freighthouse Flats project.

how to create section and elevation views. You also duplicate the project site plan to create a vicinity plan. You learn how to create new views from existing views. and how to create views from callouts that you place in other views. You duplicate the Level 1 and Level 2 floor plans to create Level 1 and Level 2 furniture plans. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you learn how to create views from a building model. you create new plan views of the building model by copying existing views and then modifying the copied views.Creating Views In this lesson. 112 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Level 1 Furniture Plan created from the Level 1 floor plan Vicinity Plan created from the Site plan Dataset ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

select Level 2. 9 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. double-click Level 2 Furniture Plan. expand Floor Plans. Use an alternate method of view duplication to create a Level 2 furniture plan 5 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 6 Click View menu ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 furniture plan 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. 2 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Furniture Plan. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. and click OK. and right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click Copy of Level 1 ➤ Rename. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views. and click OK. 7 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of Level 2 ➤ Rename.rvt. Duplicating Plan Views | 113 . 8 In the Rename View dialog.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. under Floor Plans.

and click OK. hide the display of the elevation markers in the view. right-click Site ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 11 Under Floor Plans. 114 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 14 On the View Control Bar. and click 1: 1000.Duplicate a view and change the scale as required 10 In the Project Browser. double-click Vicinity Plan. 15 Select the body of the south elevation marker. under Floor Plans. Next. right-click Copy of Site ➤ Rename. enter Vicinity Plan. click the current scale. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Rename View dialog.

18 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Creating Elevation and Section Views In this exercise. All of the elevation markers on the plan are hidden.16 Right-click. and click Hide in view ➤ Category. you create an additional section and elevation view of the building model. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 115 .

3 In the Type Selector. select1:100.South East elevation view Section view Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. click Elevation. under Floor Plans. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 Specify a point in the drawing in front of the angular wall to place an elevation marker. Add an elevation marker to the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Building Elevation. NOTE Elevation markers are context sensitive and will automatically try to align parallel to model geometry. 4 On the Options Bar. 116 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. double-click Level 1. for Scale.rvt.

enter South East. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 117 . under Elevations.Modify the elevation extents 6 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). double-click South East. 7 Select and move the upper horizontal line of the elevation until it extends past the upper-left corner of the building. 8 On the Design Bar. 10 In the Rename View dialog. and select the head of the elevation marker that you just placed. click Modify. click Modify. Rename and view the new elevation 9 In the Project Browser. right-click Elevation 1-a ➤ Rename. 11 In the Project Browser. and click OK.

13 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. and double-click Level 1. ■ Move the cursor down. 118 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . under Views (all). Modify the section line 17 Click the blue arrows below the section line head to reverse the direction in which the section is cut through the building. 14 In the Type Selector. for Scale. expand Floor Plans. 16 Draw a section line through the building: ■ Specify a point above the top wall of the building between grid lines 2 and 3. and specify the section line endpoint between the endpoints of grid lines 2 and 3. select 1:100.Draw a section line on the Level 1 floor plan 12 In the Project Browser. click Section. select Section: Building Section.

20 Add a jog to the section line: ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Click the midpoint of the section line. click Split Segment. Creating Elevation and Section Views | 119 . and move them to just outside of the left side of the building. drag it to the right until it cuts through the stair. 19 Click the blue arrows below the section tail twice to cycle through the section tail options and add a section head to the section line endpoint. and click to place it.18 Select the blue triangular grips on the left side of the section extents.

24 Select gridline F. and drag the top segment of gridline F to the right. select the blue break mark that displays under the grid bubble. click Modify. and double-click Section 1. 120 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . expand Sections (Building Section). View the new section 22 In the Project Browser.21 On the Design Bar. 23 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium.

Creating Callout Views | 121 . 26 Click File menu ➤ Save. you create new views: an enlarged stair plan view and a detail view. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress. Stair callout on the Level 1 floor plan Resulting callout view .rvt.Enlarged Stair Plan Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. To create each view. Creating Callout Views In this exercise. you draw a callout around the geometry in another view to specify the contents of the each new callout view.25 On the Design Bar. click Modify.

click Modify. Select the grip on the leader line that is closest to the callout head. 3 In the Type Selector. 5 Draw the callout around the large stair in the center of the plan: ■ Specify a point to the upper-right of the stair. 122 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . click Callout.Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. 4 On the Options Bar. and move it to the left side of the callout boundary. and specify a point to complete the callout. double-click Level 1. select 1:50. and select the callout boundary. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 6 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ On the Design Bar. for Scale. ■ Move the cursor to the lower-left of the stair. select Floor Plan.

and drag it down slightly to create a jog in the leader line. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating Callout Views | 123 . enter Enlarged Stair Plan. 8 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans.■ Select the middle grip. and click OK. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Open the callout view 10 Double-click the callout head. The Enlarged Stair Plan view displays. click Modify. right-click Callout of Level 1 ➤ Rename.

Create a detail view callout 11 In the Project Browser. and specify a point above and to the right of the roof overhang. for Scale. 13 In the Type Selector. 14 On the Options Bar. ■ Move the cursor diagonally down. select 1:50. double-click Section 1. 12 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to the left and below the roof overhang. 124 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 15 Create the callout: ■ Zoom in to the upper-left corner of the building. click Callout. select Detail View: Detail. under Sections (Building Sections).

double-click Roof Overhang Detail. under Detail Views (Details). and right-click Detail 0 ➤ Rename. 18 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK.16 Modify the callout leader as shown. Creating Callout Views | 125 . 17 In the Project Browser. enter Roof Overhang Detail. Open the detail callout view 19 In the Project Browser. expand Detail Views (Details).

Modifying View Tag Appearance In this exercise. Existing stair callout head and boundary 126 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you modify the appearance of tags in a view so that they conform to office CAD standards.20 Click File menu ➤ Save. You change the appearance of the section mark head. the elevation markers. and the callout head and boundary that you placed in previous exercises.

4 On the Design Bar. 15 Under Category. 12 For Section Tag. and click OK. double-click Level 1. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. and click Open.rfa. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. for Section Head. Section Tail – Filled. click Training Files.Filled. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. select Custom-Section Head: Section Head – Open. Modify the section mark head 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Load into Project.Modified stair callout head and boundary Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and click OK. 10 On the floor plan. and click OK. Section Tail . select Section Head . 6 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Section Tags. . 9 In the Type Properties dialog. select the section line. and click 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. select the current project. 8 In the Name dialog. clear any others. and click OK twice. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 127 . and can be applied to the section line. select Custom-Section Head. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Views_in_progress.rvt. open Metric\Families\Annotations. under Floor Plans. The new section mark head that you want to apply to either endpoint of the section line displays. enter Section Head – Custom. click Duplicate. Modify the line weight of the section line and mark 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. click the Annotation Objects tab. click Edit/New. scroll to Section Line. The Custom-Section Head family is now loaded in the project.Custom.

Click OK. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. 22 In the Name dialog. and click Open. 27 Click OK twice. . The new callout head that you want to apply to the callout displays. and click OK. click Training Files. click Duplicate. clear all others. On the floor plan. notice the updated section marks that display at each endpoint of the section line. For Dimensions ➤ Width. and select 2. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. and select 3.5mm Square.rfa. select 12. For Line Weight. select Custom-Callout Head. 30 On the Design Bar. select the current project. 19 Click OK.16 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 18 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. enter 12. click Edit/New. for Elevation Tag. 32 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Callout Tags. under Graphics: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Shape. 17 Under Category.5mm Square. Modify the shape and weight of the elevation markers 20 Click Settings menu ➤ View Tags ➤ Elevation Tags. enter 12. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. select 3. click Load into Project. scroll to Section Marks. 128 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. On the floor plan. click 25 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Select an elevation marker in the drawing. open Metric\Families\Annotations.5 mm. 31 In the Load into Projects dialog. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. select Square. Modify the callout head 28 Click File menu ➤ Open. notice the square elevation markers that display.

select Custom – Callout Head: Callout Head. 35 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Callout Head. 34 In the Name dialog. enter . 45 For Line Pattern. and select 7. enter 6 mm. . scroll down to Callout Boundary. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radius. click Edit/New. Modify the callout boundary 41 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. select Dash. 49 Click OK. 43 Under Category. select . 47 Select Callout Leader Line. The custom callout head displays on the floor plan. click 37 In the Element Properties dialog. 46 Under Category. Modifying View Tag Appearance | 129 . 38 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 Click OK twice. expand Callout Boundary.33 In the Type Properties dialog. Click OK. and on the Options Bar. Custom – Callout Head w/ 6mm Corner Radiusand click OK. 42 In the Objects Styles dialog. 40 Press ESC. For Corner Radius. 44 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. click Duplicate. The new callout boundary displays on the floor plan. select the callout. click the Annotation Objects tab. 48 Click in the Line Weight/Projection field. 36 In the drawing. for Callout Tag. and select 4.

click Training Files. masking regions. you create a view template containing specific presentation quality visibility settings. Setting Visibility and Graphics Options in Views In this lesson. 2 Select the outer crop region that displays around the view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Set a crop region for the view 1 In the Project Browser. you learn how to control the visibility and graphic characteristics of elements in views. 130 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and features blue triangular grips and break marks. You learn to create view templates. and visual overrides.rvt.50 Click File menu ➤ Save. and double-click East. view regions. and apply it to multiple elevation views. under Elevations. you create presentation views that feature elevations of the building. The crop region displays as red. To accomplish this. filters. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG. Creating a View Template In this exercise. Presentation view Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. View templates provide and easy way to transfer visibility settings to multiple drawings.

click Zoom to Fit. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Extents.3 Select and move the blue triangular grips to resize the crop region as shown. click Modify to hide the crop region grips and display it as black. 4 On the Design Bar. click Detail Level: Coarse ➤ Medium. 6 On the Project Browser. Create and apply a view template to an elevation drawing 9 On the View Control bar. and click Properties. right-click East. 13 Under Visibility. clear Entourage. 11 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Visibility. clear: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Callouts Elevations Grids Levels Sections Creating a View Template | 131 . 5 On the View Toolbar. 8 Click OK. under Elevations. clear Crop Region Visible. 12 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

and click OK. and click Create View Template From View. 132 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 21 In the Select View Template dialog. 18 In the View Templates dialog. click Shadows Off ➤ Shadows On. grids. enter Black and White Presentation Elevation. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Project Browser. select Black and White Presentation Elevation. right-click North. levels. elevation markers. click Apply. Callouts. under Elevations. click OK.14 Click OK. double-click North. and click Apply View Template. 20 In the Project Browser. right-click East. and section lines are now hidden in the view. 15 On the View Control bar. The settings in the view template create a presentation-quality elevation view. under Elevations. 17 In the New View Template dialog. and click OK.

and the exterior area on the south side of the building. you modify the view range and create view plan regions to adjust the display of elements in the building Penthouse and Roof Plan. Under View Depth. for View Range. for Level. 2 In the Project Browser. 23 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. You want to display the exterior roof terraces from Level 4 on the penthouse and roof plan. select Level Below (Level 4). Click OK twice. double-click Penthouse. right-click.rvt. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. under Extents. Adjust the view range of the Penthouse plan 1 In the Project Browser. select Penthouse. View Range and Plan Regions In this exercise.22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. NOTE The Penthouse plan now shows the level below to provide additional context to the view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. for Bottom. select Level Below (Level 4).rvt. as this structure has not yet been documented in any of the views. View Range and Plan Regions | 133 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 4 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. and click Properties. click Edit. under Floor Plans.

click Edit. for View Range. and click Properties. select Level 4.Adjust the view range of the Roof plan 5 In the Project Browser. right-click. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. for Level. select Roof Plan. under Floor Plans. Under View Depth. double-click Roof Plan. for Bottom. Click OK twice. select Level 4. under Extents. 6 In the Project Browser. 8 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. 134 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

click Region Property. click Plan Region. for Level. View Range and Plan Regions | 135 . 16 On the Design Bar. 15 In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. for View Range. click Modify. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. for Bottom. select the left endpoint of the outer wall. NOTE A Plan Region allows you to modify the view range of a specified area defined by the extents of the Plan Region. select Unlimited. 17 On the Design Bar. click Edit. Under View Depth. click 12 Sketch a plan region: ■ ■ (Rectangle).Create a plan region to show exterior space on the south side of the building 9 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Move you cursor diagonally. select Unlimited. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and select the endpoint the gridline shown below. under Extents. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. 10 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. In the left corner of the building.

under Views (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 136 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . you visually audit the drawing to make sure the fire-rated walls are placed correctly. and click OK. select Walls. under Filters. 7 In the Filters dialog. 4 At the bottom of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. 5 In the Filters dialog.18 Click File menu ➤ Save. After you apply the filter. click Edit/New. click the Filters tab. 3 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. under Categories. in this case. enter Rated Walls. 6 In the Filter Name dialog. expand Floor Plans. select Fire Rating. Using Filters to Control Visibility In this exercise. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. click (New). You use a filter to quickly apply visual changes to the walls based on defined parameters. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. the fire-rated walls on the floor plan display with a solid red fill. 8 Under Filter Rules: ■ For Filter by. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. the fire rating of the walls. and double-click Level 1.

Masking Portions of a View In this exercise. Masking Portions of a View | 137 . click No Override. under Basic colors. 16 Click OK. select the red color. 11 Select Rated Walls. 17 Using the same method. select Solid Fill. click Add. but the overrides associated with the filter must be reapplied as well. for Color. On the Filters tab of the Visibility Graphics dialog. for Rated Walls. and click OK. you use masking regions that you sketch over the areas that you want to hide. under Projection/Surface. for Pattern. 18 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. you obscure or ''wipe out'' geometry in portions of a view. To accomplish this. 15 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click OK. The Rated Walls filter can be reapplied to the drawing at any time. and click OK. click Remove. 13 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 10 On the Filter tab. 9 Click OK. click Override under Patterns. 14 In the Color dialog. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. 12 On the Filter tab.■ ■ Select contains. click OK. Enter Hr. apply the red solid fill override to Cut Patterns as well. 19 Remove the filter: ■ ■ Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. The fire-rated walls now display without the solid red fill.

6 Modify the crop region to get close to the desired view at the bottom left. 2 Select Copy of Level 1. under Floor Plans. right-click. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress.Masking regions sketched over the upper corners of a view Unit plan view with upper corners masked Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. right-click Level 1 ➤ Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 4 On the View Control Bar. click Show Crop Region. 5 On the View menu. 138 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. enter Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. as shown.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser.

click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 9 On the View Control Bar. 12 On the Options Bar. Use a masking region to hide additional model geometry that does not need to be shown 10 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. and adjust the view again until it displays as shown. 13 Sketch 2 masking regions as shown. click Masking Region. Masking Portions of a View | 139 . NOTE This specifies the line type for the border of the masking region. click (Rectangle).7 On the View menu. select Invisible lines. 11 In the Type Selector. 8 Select the crop region.

under Floor Plans. You create poche for the walls and you hide and modify the display of certain elements on the presentation plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-VG_in_progress. 15 View the effects of the masking regions on the floor plan. Working with Visual Overrides In this exercise. 140 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 1 In the Project Browser.Level 1. and apply different visual overrides to create presentation effects. right-click Unit 18 Plan .14 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch.rvt. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing. you create a presentation plan of one of the residential units on the Level 1 floor plan. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and click 1: 50. Create poche for walls 5 Select the diagonal bottom wall. click in the Patterns field. and click Rename. enter Presentation Unit 18 Plan – Level 1. 10 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. 9 On the left side of the Color dialog. right-click. under Pattern Overrides. 4 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. click black. under Visibility. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. right-click. 11 Click OK twice. 6 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. select Walls. Working with Visual Overrides | 141 . for Color. 7 Under Cut. click No Override. click the current scale. select Solid fill.NOTE Duplicate with Detailing is selected so that the masking regions are retained in the new view. and click OK. and click Override. for Pattern. 2 Select the Copy of Unit 18 Plan – Level 1.

click Modify. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog.Set the visibility and graphics of other categories in the view. clear Grids. 142 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. Hide elements in the view by category 17 Select the lamp on the table on the floor plan as shown. under Visibility. clear Floors. 13 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 16 Under Visibility. 15 Click the Annotation Categories tab.

19 Select 1 of the chairs around the long table on the floor plan as shown. and click Hide in View ➤ Category.18 Right-click. Working with Visual Overrides | 143 .

under Lines. for Pattern. select the sofa. the Visibility/Graphics dialog opens to the category of the object (Furniture) selected by default. select Dash. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Category. and click OK.20 Right-click. click Override. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. 27 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog. for Color. 28 For Color. 23 In the Color dialog. 144 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . and click OK twice. click Projection Lines. click a purple color. By using the previous method to make the selection. right-click. Modify visibility and graphics by element 26 On the floor plan. select a bright green color. click By Category Override. 22 In the Line Graphics dialog. 24 In the Line Graphics dialog. 29 In the Color dialog. 25 Click OK twice. click No Override. 21 Under Projection/Surface.

32 Select one of the lamps. click . The lighting fixtures and grid lines that you hid previously display in a dark red color. Working with Visual Overrides | 145 . Reveal hidden elements in a view 31 On the View Control Bar. click Modify. The hidden crop region is also revealed. click . right-click. and click Unhide in view ➤ Category. 33 On the View Control Bar.30 On the Design Bar.

click Training Files. 146 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . how to add views to the sheets. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click. click Sheet. you learn how to create sheets within a Revit Architecture project. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats.Creating Sheets. and click OK. select A0 metric. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Creating Drawing Sheets in a Project In this lesson. TIP If the View tab is not displayed in the Design Bar.rvt. Creating Drawing Sheets In this exercise. you create project drawing sheets that report the project information in the sheet titleblocks. and how to make changes to the building model from a view on a sheet. Create a project sheet 1 On View tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click View.34 Click File menu ➤ Save.

and select the title block. Creating Drawing Sheets | 147 . under Identity Data: ■ ■ (Properties). click Modify. 5 When the title block highlights. enter Site Plan.Unnamed. on the Options Bar. For Sheet Name. 3 In the Project Browser. NOTE The vertical time and date stamp in the lower-right corner of the sheet view automatically updates every time the project file is saved. enter A101. The title block that you selected is a family that has already been loaded into the project. Change the sheet name and number 4 On the Design Bar. click 6 In the Element Properties dialog.A title block and drawing borders are displayed on the drawing sheet. The text fields in the titleblock family (shown below) contain labels that associate the project information parameters with the appropriate text fields. expand Sheets (all). For Sheet Number. The new sheet is displayed in the Project Browser with the name A102 .

10 In the Element Properties dialog. For Project Name. for Project Address.■ Click OK. 148 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . enter Freighthouse Flats. click Edit. continue to add project information: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Project Issue Date. enter J. enter For Approval. click Modify. enter the following address: ■ ■ 123 Main Street Anytown. For Project Status. Smith. Site Plan displays in the title block as the sheet name and is appended to the sheet name in the Project Browser. For Project Number. Display additional project information in the sheet title block 9 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Information. enter 15 May. 7 On the Design Bar. The Sheet Number has been updated to display A101. 2007. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. MA 12345 12 Click OK. enter 2007-1. 11 In the Edit Text dialog. 8 Zoom in to the lower-right corner of the title block. under Other. The new project information displays in the titleblock. For Client Name. 14 Click OK.

rvt. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. you add views to the sheets that you created in the previous exercise. and click Save. right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. 2 In the Project Browser. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. Adding Views to Sheets In this exercise. select the new sheet name. enter Floor Plan. 3 Move the cursor to position the lower-right corner of the view in the lower-right corner of the sheet. right-click. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save As. select Level 1. and click to place the view. The border of the view displays as red to indicate that you can reposition it on the sheet. 4 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Modify.Stairs In the following exercise. Create additional sheets 19 Using the same method as you did in the previous steps.Floor Plan.Elevations A106 . Adding Views to Sheets | 149 . and click Rename. and drag it to the sheet. 16 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 21 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress. select A0 metric. Drag the Level 1 floor plan onto a sheet to create a floor plan 1 In the Project Browser.Elevations A107 . create the following new project sheets: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A103 . for Name. under Sheets (all).Sections A108 . you add views to these sheets.rvt.Layout Plan A104 . double-click A102 . and click OK.Elevations A105 . 18 In the Sheet Title dialog. under Floor Plans.Create a floor plan sheet 15 In the Project Browser. 17 In the Project Browser.

8 On the Design Bar. align it with the East elevation. 150 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .The red border around the view no longer displays. and click to place it. under Sheets (all). 6 In the Project Browser.Elevations. drag East to the upper-right corner of the sheet. under Elevations (Building Elevation). and click to place it. 7 Drag the North elevation to the lower-right corner of the sheet. Add elevation views to the A104-Elevation sheet 5 In the Project Browser. double-click A104 . click Modify.

drag Building Section to the upper-right corner of the sheet. for View Scale.Add the Building Section view to the A107-Sections sheet 9 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all). and click OK. and on the Options Bar. 15 Drag the view to reposition it next to the Building Section view. Notice the title bar also needs to be resized. 16 Select title bar. 10 Under Sections (Building Sections). Adding Views to Sheets | 151 . select 1:5. click 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and use the blue endpoint grips to resize it so that it spans the length of the view. double-click A107 . 11 Under Detail Views (Detail). and click to place it. click Modify. and click to place it. drag Roof Overhang Detail to the left of the Building Section view on the sheet. Change the scale of the detail view 13 Select the Roof Overhang Detail on the sheet. . 12 On the Design Bar.Sections.

152 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 19 On the Design Bar. 21 Zoom to the stair callout. View updated annotation on referenced views 20 In the Project Browser.NOTE If you find it difficult to select the left grip on the title bar.Stairs. under Sheets (all). click Modify. Notice that the callout tag has been automatically updated to reference the correct sheet. and click to place it. double-click A108 . zoom in to the grip. 18 Under Floor Plans. and press TAB until it highlights. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Create a sheet with stair and stair detail views 17 In the Project Browser. move the cursor over it. drag Enlarged Stair Plan to the upper-right corner of the sheet.

under Sheets (all).Sections. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View In this exercise. you must first activate the view on the sheet.22 Zoom in to the section line heads and the east and north elevation markers. you learn how to modify a building model directly from the drawing sheets that you created from its views. In order to do this. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. and notice they also reference the correct sheet numbers. Change the roof elevation 1 In the Project Browser. Modifying the Building Model from a Sheet View | 153 . Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. and then make changes and deactivate the view. double-click A107 . Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.

and press ENTER. 7 In the Project Browser. 154 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 5 On the Design Bar. 8 Click File menu ➤ Save. 4 Double-click the Roof elevation height. 3 At the right end of the Roof level line. 6 Right-click. and click Activate View. Notice that the Roof Plan elevation has been updated. right-click.2 Select the building section view. double-click North. enter 16700 mm. and click Deactivate View. click Modify. under Elevations (Building Elevation). zoom in to the name and elevation of the level.

right-click Sheets (all) ➤ New Sheet. Create a view of the building to place on the title sheet 5 In the Project Browser. After you create the sheet. 6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. For Sheet Name. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 155 . 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Sheet Number. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Floor Plans. and click OK. enter T. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. The camera view displays. select the new sheet name. 7 Place the camera as shown. You modify the view to hide the view title. select A0 metric. double-click Level 1. enter Title Sheet. Click OK. right-click. and click Properties. as it is not necessary to display it on the title sheet. click Camera. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Creating Sheets_in_progress.Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet In this exercise. you create a perspective view of the building and place it on the sheet. 3 In the Project Browser.rvt. you create a title sheet for your drawing set. Create a new sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

Title Sheet. select Far Clip Active. Under Extents. 13 In the Project Browser. double-click T . for Eye Elevation. Click OK. 11 On the View Control Bar. For Target Elevation. enter100000 mm. 156 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project . 10 Select the crop region and adjust the view to fit the building. Under Camera. click Show Crop Region ➤ Hide Crop Region. 12 On the View Control Bar. 14 Under 3D Views. enter 18000 mm. enter 1500 mm. click Shadows off ➤ Shadows on. drag 3D View 1 onto the sheet.8 On the Options Bar. click 9 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . under Sheets (all). For Far Clip Offset. and click to place it in the center of the sheet.

Under Model Crop Size. 23 In the Type Properties dialog. 21 In the Type Properties dialog. . click Edit/New. Creating and Modifying a Title Sheet | 157 . Click Apply. 17 Reposition the view on the title sheet. under Graphics. 24 Click OK twice. click Modify. 22 In the Name dialog. select Scale (locked proportions). click Size. click Duplicate. for Show title. 25 On the Design Bar. and then click OK. click 20 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Remove the title bar on the view 18 On the Design Bar. 16 In the Crop Region dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Change. for Height. 19 Select the view on the sheet. and on the Options Bar. The title bar no longer displays on the sheet.15 With the view selected. select No. and click OK. on the Options Bar. enter Viewport/no title mark. enter 635 mm.

and close the exercise file.26 Click File menu ➤ Save. 158 | Chapter 3 Adding Views and Sheets to a Project .

in your Revit Architecture 2008 projects. You also learn to create different types of schedules. 159 . such as doors and windows.Tagging and Scheduling 4 In this tutorial. you learn how to tag rooms and other components of floor plans. such as room and window schedules.

and click Room and Area. click Room Separation. right-click in the Design Bar.Tagging Objects In this lesson. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . The Room command with the Tag on placement option selected allows you to place and tag rooms with one command. expand Floor Plans. You learn how to ■ ■ ■ ■ Sequentially tag rooms on a floor plan Tag doors and windows Modify tag placement and mark text Tag other objects. 160 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . such as furniture Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms In this exercise.rvt. you sequentially place and tag the rooms on the floor plan. Because of the open style floor plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Level 1. you learn how to use some of the annotation features included in Revit Architecture. 3 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 2 Zoom in to the upper area of the floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects. NOTE If the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar is not active. click Training Files. you need to create room separation lines to define the rooms to be tagged. Adding room separation lines breaks up an open space to make it easier to add rooms. Add room separations 1 In the Project Browser.

and click the opposite wall to create a horizontal room separation dividing the kitchen from the dining area (top area of the drawing).4 Click the endpoint of the short horizontal wall on the left. as shown: 6 Use the same method to create a horizontal separation above the stair to divide the dining area from the living area. move the cursor to the right. as shown: 5 Use the same method to create a vertical separation to divide the kitchen from the entry area on the right. Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 161 .

Tag rooms sequentially 12 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 13 On the Options Bar. 11 In the Tags dialog. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Room Tag. The crosshair graphic represents the room area being tagged. 10 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 Move the cursor to the room at the upper right of the plan view. The room tag number displays in blue. 15 On the Design Bar. indicating that it can be edited. and the rectangle contains the room tag. click Training Files. 162 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Modify.rfa. click Load. and click to place the room and tag. verify that Tag on placement is selected. click Room. Load room tag annotation family 8 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags.7 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Tags dialog. and select the room tag. click Modify. click OK.

enter Entry. and press ENTER. click Modify. ■ Sequentially Placing and Tagging Rooms | 163 . 17 Click the room text label. and press ENTER.16 Zoom in on the tag number. click Room. 19 Place another room and tag: ■ ■ ■ On the Design Bar. Align the tags by moving the cursor until a dashed green line displays between the placed tag and the one that displays at the tip of the cursor. Move the cursor into the room to the left of the one previously tagged. Click to place the new room and tag. 18 On the Design Bar. enter U18-1. click it.

and edit the tags as shown (Toilet.NOTE The second tag that you place displays the sequential number U18-2. 22 Use the same method to place rooms and tags. 164 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and press ENTER. and Living): Hide the room separations 23 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. enter Kitchen. Sequential letters are also supported. 20 On the Design Bar. Dining. 21 Click the room text label. click Modify.

rvt. Tag rooms on upper level 25 In the Project Browser. 30 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save As. Tag Level 1 doors 1 If necessary. click Room Tag. 28 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you learn how to place door and window tags. 27 Starting with the Balcony (area near the stair). click Modify. Tagging Doors and Windows | 165 . Model Categories tab. Tagging Doors and Windows In this exercise.24 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. You learn how to add tags to the floor plan and how to simultaneously tag multiple untagged doors and windows.Level 2.Level 1. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . and moving clockwise. The rooms are already placed. 26 On the Design Bar. in the Project Browser. expand Floor Plans.rvt. double-click Unit 18 Plan . clear Room Separation. but they need to be tagged. expand Lines. and click OK. click to place a room tag in each of the 5 rooms.

6 Click the door tag for the entry door. clear Leader. enter U18-2. and on the Options Bar. enter U18-1. under Identify Data. 3 On the Options Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 166 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. click (Properties). and click OK. 4 Select 5 doors in the upper area of the floor plan: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Entry door Kitchen pantry door Pocket door in toilet Closet door in dining room Living room door 5 On the Design Bar. for Mark. 7 Select the kitchen pantry door to the left. and press ENTER.2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

double-click Unit 18 Plan .Level 2. 13 On the Design Bar. under Category. 10 Select the tag for the pocket door on the right. and drag it down to center it in the doorway. Tag Level 2 doors 12 In the Project Browser. 11 Select the tag for the closet door and move it to the right of the door. click Tag All Not Tagged.9 Using one of the methods you just learned. select Door Tags. 14 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tagging Doors and Windows | 167 . rename the other 3 door tags to match the corresponding room tags. and click OK.

expand Floor Plans. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Training Files. 19 In the Tags dialog.15 Move the door tags to center them in the doorway. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Window Tag. and click OK.rfa. 21 Click OK. click Load. 23 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 16 Edit the numbers of the door tags as shown: Place window tags 17 In the Project Browser. 18 Click Settings menu ➤ Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. select Window. click Tag All Not Tagged. 20 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and double-click Level 1. 168 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

26 On the View toolbar. Tagging Other Objects In this exercise. 25 Under Floor Plans. and click OK. 5 At the confirmation prompt. 7 Select each of the chairs and the table to place tags. click Tag ➤ By Category. and double-click Unit 18 Plan . 3 On the Options Bar. Tagging Other Objects | 169 . Zoom flyout.Level 1. click Tag All Not Tagged. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to tag furniture objects. Window tags are placed in the Level 2 plan view. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Add furniture tags 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. double-click Level 2.24 Zoom to the lower-right area of the drawing to view the window tags. click Yes to load a tag. 4 Select a dining room chair. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Zoom To Fit to see the entire drawing.rfa. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Leader. click Training Files. and modify the tag placement and display. 28 Select Window Tags. 27 On the Design Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Tagging Objects_in_progress. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Furniture Tag.

Modify tag placement 10 Zoom to the dining table. 13 Optionally.8 Select the furniture in the living room. 15 Select the tag for the table (TBL-1). 14 Click Modify. and on the Options Bar. clear Leader. 9 Click Modify. and drag it above the chair tag. 170 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . and drag it up to form an angled leader. modify the position of the chair tags to move them closer to the chairs. 12 Click the elbow control. Notice that the chair and table tags overlap. 11 Select the tag for the table.

Change tag style 19 Draw a selection box around the top area of the drawing to select the furniture. click Tag All Not Tagged. select M_Furniture tag : Standard. 20 On the Options Bar. and on the Design Bar. click (Filter Selection).16 Drag the table tag to the center of the table. Tagging Other Objects | 171 . Tag furniture on Level 2 17 In the Project Browser. All furniture in the floor plan is tagged. under Floor Plans. and click OK. double-click Unit 18 Plan . click Modify.Level 2. 18 On the Design Bar.

click Check None. 172 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . select Furniture Tags. you create a window schedule for the building model shown below. Creating a Window Schedule In this exercise. 23 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click Modify. Defining Schedules and Color Diagrams In this lesson. You also learn to add schedule keys to a project by creating a room schedule and room color diagram. 22 In the Type Selector. select Furniture Tag: Boxed. you learn to add schedules.21 In the Filter dialog. Schedule keys allow you to define common items that can be used by multiple objects within a schedule. and click OK.

You then select a window in the instance schedule and use the Show command to locate it in a view of the building model. you group and sort the windows in the instance schedule. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams. click Training Files. that is. Finally.You begin by creating a window instance schedule. Next. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. you change the window instance schedule to a type schedule. in which windows are listed by window type. Creating a Window Schedule | 173 . Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. a schedule that lists every window in the building.

TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. right-click in the Design Bar. under Category. The Comments field is moved under Scheduled fields. click the Fields tab. enter Building Window Schedule. and click View.Create a window schedule 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click Level 1. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Comments and click Add. 6 Under Available fields. order the fields as shown in the following illustration by selecting them and clicking Move Up or Move Down. click Schedule/Quantities. select Windows. 7 Using the same method. expand Floor Plans. 9 Click OK. 4 For Name. and click OK. Define the fields to display as columns in the window schedule 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 174 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . add the following fields to the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Height Level Type Mark Width 8 Under Scheduled fields.

However. and on the Options Bar. and click OK twice. 11 If the confirmation dialog displays. Creating a Window Schedule | 175 . this can be a time-consuming process. for Sorting/Grouping. click OK to search through relevant views of the building model. select Type Mark. you are prompted to open one that does. If no open view shows the selected element. 16 On the Sorting/Grouping tab of the Schedule Properties dialog.A schedule is created that contains every window in the building model. Select a window in the schedule and locate it in the building model 10 Select a cell in the window schedule with the C14 Type Mark. Group and sort the window schedule by type mark 14 In the drawing area. click Show. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click Close. right-click the schedule. click Edit. NOTE By clicking Show. and double-click Building Window Schedule to redisplay the window instance schedule. under Other. for Sort by. expand Schedules/Quantities. 13 In the Project Browser. 12 In the Show Element(s) in View dialog. The window that corresponds to the information in the schedule row is displayed in a relevant view of the building model. and click View Properties. you can display other views of the building model that include the selected window. in large building models with many views.

and click View Properties. 176 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Change the schedule from an instance schedule to a type schedule 19 Right-click on the schedule. sorted by type mark. The type mark is changed to A and the schedule is resorted. under Floor Plans. so that the types are sequentially named from A to H. 22 Click OK twice. 18 Click OK to confirm that you want to change the type mark for all windows of this type. for Sorting/Grouping. The window type schedule is displayed. change the Type Mark in the first row from 19 to A. 20 In the Element Properties dialog. as shown: 24 In the Project Browser. 21 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click Level 2. 23 Change the Type Mark for the other window types.The window schedule is displayed. and press ENTER. click Edit. under Other. clear Itemize every instance. Change type mark from the schedule 17 In the window schedule.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Categories. For Discipline. click OK. Under Parameter Data. 6 Use the same method to create 2 more window parameters: Jamb Detail and Sill Detail. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and sill conditions for a window can be found. select Construction. you cannot use them to tag objects. 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Head Detail. for Name. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule In this lesson. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. click Add to create the new parameter. you add schedule columns for parameters that are not standard for the scheduled object. 5 Click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. These parameters cannot be shared with other projects and. expand Schedules/Quantities. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and double-click Building Window Schedule. For Group parameter under. select Windows to associate the parameter with the Windows category. select Type. you want to add columns to the window schedule to describe the detail where head. 26 Click File menu ➤ Save As.rvt. unlike shared parameters. jamb.rvt. In this case.25 Zoom to the lower area of the floor plan to see that the window tags have changed. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Project Parameters. Adding Project Parameters to a Window Schedule | 177 . The new project parameter Head Detail is displayed in the Project Parameters dialog.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. for Fields. and while pressing the left mouse button. and click Properties. under Available fields. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Head Detail Jamb Detail Sill Detail 11 Use the Move Up control to move the new parameters up in the list. click Group. click in the Head Detail header. Group headers in the schedule 13 In the schedule. enter Window Details. 12 Click OK twice. so that they are listed before Comments. 178 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . Jamb Detail. under Other. select the following fields.Add project parameters to the schedule 8 In the Project Browser. right-click Building Window Schedule. TIP To select all 3 headers. click Edit. and Sill Detail. move the cursor over the Jamb Detail and Sill Detail headers. 14 On the Options Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 15 In the grouping field above the detail headers in the schedule. select Head Detail.

and place the unit-based door schedule on a sheet with the unit plans. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Count Family and Type Head Height Sill Height Width Mark 7 Click the Filter tab. under Type Mark A. for Head Detail. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. This filter checks each door in the project to see which unit it is associated with. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter In this exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. Create a new door schedule for Unit 18 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Click OK. select Doors. and specify the following values for Filter by: ■ ■ ■ Select Mark in the first field. Verify Schedule building components is selected. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Enter U18 in the third field.Level 1. click the Fields tab. enter Unit 18 . Under Name. click Schedule/Quantities. select the following fields. you create a unit-based door schedule and use a filter to limit the selection of doors to a single unit. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. View Level 1 of the building 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Unit-Based Door Schedule with a Filter | 179 . and double-click Unit 18 Plan .16 You can add values for the new project parameters directly in the schedule. for Jamb Detail. Verify the Phase is Phase 1. expand Floor Plans. enter 3/A107.rvt. For example. 6 Under Available fields. enter 1/A107. 5 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. enter 2/A107.Door Schedule. You then hide the column used for the filter. and for Sill Detail. and produces a schedule that includes only the doors in Unit 18. Select contains in the second field.

but is not included as a column in the schedule. The Mark field is used to filter the entries in the schedule. 16 Zoom in to see the details of the door schedule. 13 In the Project Browser. and specify the following options: ■ ■ For Sort by. 180 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 14 Click to place the schedule in the upper-left corner of the sheet. click Modify. Place the schedule on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. Clear Itemize every instance (to group the like door types into one row). select Family and Type. The schedule includes the count and type for doors in Unit 18 only. and double-click A102 . click Unit 18 .Unit 18. 11 Under Field formatting.Door Schedule. 15 On the Design Bar.8 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. 9 Click the Formatting tab. select Mark. expand Sheets (all). select Hidden Field. and click OK. and drag it to the sheet. 10 Under Fields.

NOTE In some cases in this tutorial. under Available fields. and click OK. 19 On the Design Bar. 20 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Schedule/Quantities. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Create a room schedule 1 In the Project Browser. select Rooms. Creating a Room Schedule In this exercise. You also add programmed rooms to the schedule for the public spaces in the building. 5 Using the same method. 7 To the right of Header text. Creating a Room Schedule | 181 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. select Bold to display the schedule headers in bold font. add the following fields to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ Name Level Area 6 Click the Appearance tab. right-click in the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Select the fields to display as columns in the room schedule 4 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. select Number. double-click Level 1. click Modify. and click View. 8 Click OK. you create a room schedule for the first floor plan. and click Add. 3 In the New Schedule dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. under Category. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. The Number field is moved under Scheduled fields. Notice that several rooms have been defined in the floor plan. The wider column makes it easier to read the door descriptions. 18 Select the control at the top of the schedule for the Family and Type column and drag it to the right to expand the column width. partial schedules are shown for illustration purposes.rvt.Modify the width of a schedule column on the sheet 17 Select the door schedule on the sheet.

add 5 more rooms. select Storage. 12 Edit the room names in the schedule: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the schedule. For 104. and the Level and Area values are displayed as Not Placed because the room is not placed in the floor plan. select Corridor. and press ENTER. and press ENTER. The room Number is U17-9. 101-106. For 102. and press ENTER. enter Corridor. 11 Using the same method. 182 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . For 105.NOTE The Appearance settings only take effect when the schedule is placed on a drawing sheet. The rooms are displayed at the bottom of the list and numbered sequentially. The bold header is not noticeable until you place the schedule on a drawing sheet. for room 101. A new row is displayed at the bottom of the schedule. for Name. enter Storage. next to Rows. 10 Edit the number to be 101. enter Building Entry. click New. For 103. Add new rooms to the schedule 9 On the Options Bar.

enter Stair. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. In the Line Graphics dialog. select 9. and press ENTER. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. and click OK. Under Custom colors. click Override. double-click Level 1. 3 Change the display of room separation lines: ■ In the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the bright green swatch. click the Lines field.rvt. 2 Click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. You also change the bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas of the plan. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List In this exercise. For Room Separation. In the Lines field. place rooms from a program list. click Room Separation. 13 Click File menu ➤ Save. Specify style for room separation lines 1 In the Project Browser.■ For 106. expand Lines. under Visibility/Graphics Overrides. Add room separation lines 5 Zoom in to the center of the building. you add room separation lines. click the Color field. and click OK. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 183 . and modify room names. under Projection/Surface. For Weight. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Click OK.

7 Click to add 2 room separation lines to the right side of the drawing in the corridor. Place rooms from a program list 9 On the Design Bar. draw the horizontal line. First. click Room. click Modify. Draw a vertical separation line from the wall endpoint to the new corridor separation line. 184 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 8 On the Design Bar.

13 For Offset. select 101 Building Entry. for Room.Placed rooms are indicated with a crosshair graphic in the drawing. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 185 . for Room. 12 On the Options Bar. select 102 Storage. 10 On the Options Bar. enter 2400 mm. 11 Click to place the room in the newly-defined entry area (lower-right).

Notice the area values for the Storage rooms in the schedule. These values will change after you change the room bounding behavior of walls in the storage areas. Place 104 in the space to the left of 103. click Modify. and zoom in to the Corridor.14 Click to place the room in the area to the left of Building Entry. double-click Room Schedule. Place 106 in the space with the stairs. 16 On the Design Bar. 18 In the Project Browser. Place 105 in the lower space to the left of the kitchen. under Floor Plans. double-click Level 1. Change the room bounding behavior of walls 17 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. 15 Use the same method to place the following rooms. as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Place 103 in the space above room 101. 186 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

enter As Selected. Create key schedule 24 On the View tab of the Design Bar. double-click Room Schedule. while pressing CTRL. select the 3 small walls (in the 2 storage areas). and click Add. 29 On the Options Bar. under Category. select Base Finish. under Available fields. 22 On the Design Bar. click (Properties). Floor Finish. under Constraints. 23 In the Project Browser. 30 For Key Name. click Modify. 27 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Units. and click OK. clear Room Bounding. click New to add a new row. The Room Style Schedule displays without data.19 While pressing CTRL. 25 In the New Schedule dialog. click Schedule/Quantities. 26 Select Schedule keys. and click OK. 28 Click OK to create the new room style schedule. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the area for the storage rooms has increased as a result of the change in the room bounding behavior of the walls. and for all 3 finishes. select Rooms. as shown: 20 On the Options Bar. Scheduling Rooms from a Program List | 187 . and Wall Finish.

for Fields. 36 In the Project Browser. and click Add. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. for Room Style. 34 In the Schedule Properties dialog. click (Filter Selection). 35 Click OK twice. 42 In the Filter dialog. 41 On the Options Bar. click Room Style. click Zoom To Fit. for Available fields. Zoom flyout. double-click Level 1. The Room Style column is added to the Room Schedule. add 2 more key names: Service and Public. 37 Under U17-8. under Other. 40 Draw a selection box around floor plan. right-click Room Schedule. click Check None. Specify the Room Style for Level 1 rooms 38 In the Project Browser. select Units. under Floor Plans.31 Using the same method. and click OK. 39 On the View toolbar. click Edit. double-click Room Schedule. 32 In the Project Browser. under Schedules/Quantities. and click Properties. 188 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . All rooms are selected in the floor plan. select Rooms.

for Name. under Identity Data. Notice that the Room Style is Units for all rooms on Level 1. and click OK. 6 For Color. for Room Style. under Floor Plans. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. select Room Type. you create a room color scheme (based on the type of the rooms in the floor plan). 3 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 45 In the Project Browser. 47 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Room Color Diagram In this exercise. and double-click Level 1. 46 Edit the Room Style for rooms 101 through 106: ■ ■ For rooms 101. enter Room Type. select Units. The Room Style specification will be used later to determine color fill in a room color diagram. Create a room color scheme 1 In the Project Browser. 103. You also edit the colors used in the color scheme and modify the properties of the color scheme legend. 11 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. 7 Since you are creating a new color scheme. at the warning prompt. select Public. expand Floor Plans. select Room Style. under Schedules/Quantities. All rooms on Level 1 now have the room style defined. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 4 In the New Color Scheme dialog. 2 Click Settings menu ➤ Color Fill Schemes. and click Properties. select Service. click OK. under Views (all). 5 For Title.43 On the Options Bar. click (Properties). 44 In the Element Properties dialog. right-click Level 1. and 106. double-click Room Schedule. click the Color Scheme field. 104. 8 Click OK. enter Room Type. 9 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 189 . For rooms 102 and 105. click (Duplicate). Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and apply it to the Level 1 view. and click OK.rvt.

click Color Scheme Legend. expand Lines. Add a color scheme legend 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 18 On the Options Bar. 190 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 21 In the second row of the table (Public). 20 In the Options panel at the bottom of the dialog.12 For Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click Edit. 22 In the Color dialog. click Edit Color Scheme. under Custom color. clear Visible. 13 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. select Foreground. and click OK. click the value in the Color column. 16 On the Design Bar. select blue. and click OK twice. for Display Color Fill in. 19 In the first row of the Scheme Definition table (none). Change the fill colors applied to the rooms 17 In the drawing area. A legend displays at the tip of the cursor. click Modify. 15 Click in the lower right of the drawing area to place the legend. select the color legend. and clear Room Separation.

24 Click OK. Creating a Room Color Diagram | 191 . 28 Under Title Text.23 Use the same method to change the colors for Service and Units to cyan and gray respectively. for Swatch Width. and click OK twice. on the Options Bar. (Properties). 27 In the Type Properties dialog. under Graphics. Specify properties for the legend colors and title 25 With the legend still selected. for Size. click Edit/New. enter 5 mm. enter 25 mm. click 26 In the Element Properties dialog.

you have already determined the roof configuration for the building. Creating a Material Takeoff In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the roof area of the building. under 3D Views. You then add formulas to the material takeoff to produce cost estimates. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click {3D}.rvt. You learn to change the roof family type and create a material takeoff schedule for the roofing materials.29 On the Design Bar. Create a material takeoff 1 In the Project Browser. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Color Diagrams_in_progress. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. click Modify. 192 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

select the roof of the building and the smaller roof for the elevator penthouse. select Roofs. 9 Using the same method. under Category. 4 In the Type Selector. 8 On the Fields tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. Creating a Material Takeoff | 193 . 12 Click OK. and specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Sort by.EPDM. 5 On the Design Bar. 13 Expand the column widths to see all of the information. add Material: Description and Material: Area to the Scheduled fields. and specify the following values: ■ ■ Under Fields. select Material: Area. For Then by. and click OK. select Calculate totals. The Roof Materials Takeoff Schedule displays. click Modify. Under Field formatting. under Available fields. Clear Itemize every instance. select Family and Type. 6 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Material Takeoff. select Basic Roof : Wood Joist . click Family and Type. 11 Click the Formatting tab. select Material: Description. 7 In the New Material Takeoff dialog.Insulation on Plywood Deck . and click Add. Select Grand totals. 10 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab.3 While pressing CTRL.

17 Click Calculated Value. Add cost information and a formula to calculate estimated cost 14 In the Project Browser. and click Add. 194 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . under Other. 18 In the Calculated Value dialog. right-click Roof Material Takeoff. and under Fields.40 50. 16 In the Material Takeoff Properties dialog.TIP Double-click the column dividers to expand the columns to fit the text. 19 For Formula. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. for the Material: Cost field. and click OK twice. for Fields. click Material: Cost. 20 Click OK. and click Properties. enter Material: Area*Material: Cost /(1000mm^2). for Name. click Estimated Cost. The /(1000mm^2) is required to remove the formatting of the fields so the cost estimate value can be calculated.80 5. enter the following values: Material: Description EPDM Plywood Rigid Insulation Wood Joist Value 16 13.35 The Estimated cost is calculated. under Available fields. and click Properties. 21 Click the Formatting tab. click Edit. enter Estimated Cost. 23 In the Material Takeoff. 24 In the Project Browser. 22 For Field formatting. select Calculate totals. right-click Roof Material Takeoff.

Scheduling Shared Parameters In this lesson. Scheduling Shared Parameters | 195 . tag the line. In this lesson. An example of the use of shared parameters is the need to add specific parameters to a family component for scheduling and tagging when those parameters are not present by default. select Fixed. click Estimated Cost. For Rounding. and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. Creating a Shared Parameter File In this exercise. for Formatting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters. ensuring consistency across families and projects. and are defined and stored in an external file. you learn how to use shared parameters to define additional parameters that are not included in predefined instance and type parameters. These shared parameters can be added to any family. regardless of category. under Fields. 28 Click OK 3 times.25 In the Element Properties dialog. 26 On the Formatting tab of the Material Takeoff Properties dialog. click Training Files. Their values may also be aggregated and reported within Revit Architecture multi-category schedules. Adding shared parameters to a family allows you to create a tag and schedule to track this specific information. select 2 decimal places. 29 Click File menu ➤ Save. and reporting the shared parameters. This lesson demonstrates the solution for this situation and covers the process of setting up shared parameters. and schedule the total distance of each path. You draw a travel path line. click Edit. 27 Click Field Format. you create an exiting plan for the building. you create a shared parameter file. either within family components or within the project template. creating a generic tag to tag the family. For Units.rvt. adding the shared parameters to a family.

enter Travel Distance. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. double-click Exiting Plan-Level 1. you add the shared parameters you created to a family file. for Name. 4 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. for Name. under Floor Plans. and click OK. under Groups. 3 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. You then create a generic tag to tag the family. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click Save. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select Length. 196 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click New. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click OK. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family In this exercise.rvt. 1 Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. for Type of Parameter. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress. click New. click Create. enter Exiting. click Training Files. enter OfficeStandardsParameters. NOTE Shared parameter files are typically stored at a network location for use in all projects. click New. and click OK. 2 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. 7 Under Parameters. for File name.1 In the Project Browser. 9 Under Parameters. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. for Name. 11 Click OK. and save the exercise file as m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress.txt. enter Path ID.

enter Length. Adding Shared Parameters to a Family | 197 . 11 In the Family Types dialog. verify that Parameter group is Exiting and that Path ID is selected. otherwise the family loads into the current project. If you have multiple projects open. select m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_progress. 10 Use the same method to add Travel Distance as a shared parameter. select Shared parameter. Create a tag using shared parameters 15 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Annotation Symbol. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Travel Line. 13 On the Design Bar. 3 On the Design Bar. 14 If necessary. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog. under Dimensions. 6 In the Shared Parameters dialog. under Parameters. and click OK. and click OK. select Constraints. click Load into Projects. Click Training Files. in the Load into Projects dialog. 9 In the Family Types dialog. click Add.rfa. under Parameters. and click OK.2 In the Left pane of the Open dialog. and click Select. and click OK. 7 For Group parameter under.rvt. 12 Click Apply. for Travel Distance Formula. group it under Dimensions. and select Instance. the Load into Projects dialog displays for you to select the project. The Family Types dialog displays the parameters that are currently available for this family category. 4 In the Family Types dialog. following the equals symbol (=). click Family Types. click Add. 8 Select Instance.

click Label. 17 Select Generic Tag. and open Metric\Templates\M_Generic Tag. 18 Zoom in to the intersection of the reference planes. click Training Files. 25 Click above the intersection of the reference planes. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog.rft. under Parameters. click Select. 20 Click the intersection of the reference planes in the drawing window to display the Select Parameter dialog. 26 On the Design Bar. click Label. and use the same method to select the Path ID parameter. 22 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Modify.rft. and click OK 3 times. and click Open. 24 On the Design Bar. 198 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . click Add. 23 In the Shared Parameters dialog. select Travel Distance. 19 On the Design Bar.16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.

28 Select the Note in the upper-left area of the drawing window. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save. and click OK. click Load into Projects. select Path ID. and click Save.Tagging. 32 On the Load into Projects dialog. for File Name. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 199 . You then tag the travel lines and give them a path ID. After the lines are tagged. you place the travel line family in the Level 1 and Level 2 exiting plans. under Floor Plans.rvt is selected.27 In the drawing window. verify that m_Freighthouse_Flats-Shared Parameters_in_Progress. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Schedules-Shared Parameters_in_progress.Tagging.rvt. 30 In the Save As dialog. so that it is positioned just above Travel Distance. enter M_Travel Distance Tag. Placing.rfa. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters In this exercise. Placing. 29 Click File ➤ Save As. and move it down. and press DELETE. Dataset Continue using the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. double-click Exiting Plan . Create Level 1 exiting travel path 1 In the Project Browser. you create a schedule that totals the travel distances in each exiting plan for each path ID.Level 1. 31 On the Design Bar.

click Component. 3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the right. 5 Specify a start point for the path at the left end of the corridor as shown. and click in the center of the corridor. select Chain.2 Zoom in to the corridor. 200 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . above the exterior door as shown.

12 On the Design Bar. click Component. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 13 While pressing CTRL.Tagging. select the 2 dashed travel lines. click Tag ➤ By Category. click Modify. through the door. for Path ID. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 1-1. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 201 . 8 On the Design Bar. verify that Chain is selected. and click (Properties). 17 On the Options Bar.7 Move the cursor down. and click OK. click Modify. Create Level 2 exiting travel path 15 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Options Bar.Level 2. double click Exiting Plan . and click outside of the building. under Constraints. 11 Select each of the travel path lines. 9 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. clear Leader. Placing. under Floor Plans.

22 Click at the center starting point. 202 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 19 Move the cursor up through the door.18 Click in the horizontal corridor below the door on the right side of the floor plan. 20 On the Design Bar. click Modify. and click. and click above the door to the stair. and click to specify the first segment of the path as shown. click Component. move the cursor near the right corner. move the cursor to the left. 21 On the Design Bar.

enter Level 1 Exit Distance. verify that <Multi-Category> is selected. under Category. Create a schedule to total the paths on each plan 31 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 30 Use the same method to specify the Path ID for the right exit path to 2-2.23 Move the cursor down. 24 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Design Bar. 25 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Tag ➤ By Category. 26 Select each of the travel path lines. 32 In the New Schedule dialog. select the 2 dashed travel lines for the left exit path. for Path ID. (Properties). 28 While pressing CTRL. and click in the stair. enter 2-1. 33 For Name. under Constraints. and click 29 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Placing. click Modify.Tagging. click Modify. and Scheduling a Family with Shared Parameters | 203 . and click OK.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. select contains. 45 In the Rename View dialog. and click Rename. and click OK. enter 2-.34 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. and click Add. select Travel Distance. 204 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling . 42 Click OK. click Training Files. 49 Click File menu ➤ Save. The Level 1 Exit Distance schedule displays. you schedule Uniformat Assembly Codes as they are applied to Revit Architecture components. for Filter by. in the third field. right-click the Design Bar. 40 Click the Formatting tab. 47 In the Element Properties dialog. while pressing CTRL. right-click Level 1 Exit Distance. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Path ID and Travel Distance. in the second field. select Path ID. for Filter. 37 Click the Sorting/Grouping tab. click Edit. and click OK twice. 44 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. right-click Level 2 Exit Distance. 43 In the Project Browser. enter Level 2 Exit Distance. under Available fields. select Calculate Totals. 48 In the Schedule Properties dialog. under Other. right-click Copy of Level 1 Exit Distance. 39 Clear Itemize every instance. you create a wall schedule that includes columns for the Uniformat Assembly Codes and assembly descriptions of the scheduled walls. 35 Click the Filter tab. enter 1-. 46 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and in the third field. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Create a wall schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Schedules/Quantities. 38 For Sort by. in the first field. 36 For Filter by. 41 Under Fields. select Path ID. and click View. and under Field formatting. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes In this lesson. The Level 2 Exit Distance schedule displays. Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions In this exercise.

Drywall w/ Metal Stud. click the Value field. 8 In the Choose Assembly Code dialog. 4 Under Available fields. expand C . Scheduling Uniformat Assembly Codes and Descriptions | 205 .Partitions .Interior Construction\C1010 Partitions\C1010100 .152 mm. and click the browse button. Assign an assembly code to a wall type in the project 6 In the Project Browser. and click OK twice. expand Families\Walls\Basic Wall. and click Properties. 7 In the Type Properties dialog. for Assembly Code.2 In the New Schedules dialog. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog.Interiors\C10 . select the following fields. and click OK. and click Add to add them to the schedule in order: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Area Volume Width Length Assembly Code Assembly Description 5 Click OK to complete the schedule. right-click Generic . under Categories. click C1010145 .Fixed Partitions. select Walls. click the Fields tab.

12 Click OK in the remaining dialogs. select a location for the database file. 3 Click New. click Export ➤ ODBC Database. 206 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .rvt. The process that you use to export the database is similar for any other ODBC-compliant database. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Uni-Format. 6 Click Finish. 9 Under Directories. you learn how to export project information to an ODBC (Open DataBase Connectivity) compatible database. 10 Close the exercise file. and click OK to create the database. click Training Files. and open the database in Microsoft Access. expand the Assembly Description column to see the description. you learn how to export project information into a Microsoft® Access 2000 database. Additionally. tables that list instances only are created for levels and rooms because these categories do not have types. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access In this exercise. 4 In the Create New Data Source dialog. click Create. and click Next. under Database.9 In the schedule. under Database Name. 10 When the confirmation displays. Revit Architecture creates 2 tables for the following categories of elements (see below): one that lists all of the element instances in a project and one that lists all of the element types in a project. 1 On the File menu. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 In the OBDC Microsoft Access Setup dialog. 2 In the Select Data Source dialog. click the File Data Source tab. 7 In the ODBC Microsoft Access Setup dialog.mdb for Database Name. Exporting Project Information with ODBC In this lesson. 8 In the New Database dialog. click OK. enter Revit_Project. and click Next. 5 Enter RevitDSN for the name of the DSN. select the Microsoft Access driver (*mdb). click OK in the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

a table is also created for each key schedule in a project. In addition to the tables for instances and types in a category. in addition to the Id column. Elements IDs are also used to establish relationships between elements in different tables. and some instance tables include a RoomId column containing the ID of the room that the instance is in. 13 Close the exercise file. so that each table of elements includes an Id column. Exporting Schedule Information to Microsoft Access | 207 . This table contains one row for each Uniformat Assembly Code. One final table is also exported: Assembly Codes. The exported columns are the same as the columns in the key schedule. These parameters are also exported and contain the ID of the key element. The table of types includes an Assembly Code column that references the Assembly Codes table. instance tables include a TypeId column containing the ID of the instance’s type. as long as the category is one of the categories that Revit Architecture exports. The columns of the table are Assembly Code and Assembly Description. Each key schedule gives elements in its category a new parameter. For example.A unique element ID is used to identify exported elements. which is used for choosing one of the keys from the key schedule.

208 | Chapter 4 Tagging and Scheduling .

209 . and how to annotate and dimension your Revit Architecture 2008 projects.Annotating and Dimensioning 5 In this tutorial. you learn how to change the base elevation of a project.

Project levels report elevation relative to other levels in the project 210 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning .Changing the Base Elevation of a Project In this lesson. You accomplish this in Revit Architecture by defining levels as either project or shared levels. you learn how to relocate the base elevation of a project. or you can change the base elevation and add its value to the levels above it. You can change the base elevation without changing the elevation value of every other level in the project. as the base elevation of most projects is rarely at 0 mm.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. Relocating a Project | 211 . the height of the elevations above Level 1 report height relative to Level 1. you relocate the base elevation of a building from 0 m to 10000 m.Relocating a Project In this exercise. and open m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. In the left pane of the Open dialog. After you define the building levels as shared and relocate the project.rvt.

the parameter for all the levels in the project would change. 8 Select the Level 1 line. expand Views (all). and you create a new shared level type for only Level 1. Under Constraints. In order for the levels to report height relative to the new base elevation after the project is relocated. click (Properties). The base elevation now reads 10000 mm. to better demonstrate how shared levels work. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. The elevation of the other levels remains the same. Relocate the project 7 Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Relocate this Project. only the Elevation Base parameter of Level 1 is shared at this time. you specify the new location of the project. select Shared. and press ENTER. you must set the Elevation Base parameter to Shared. enter8 mm Head . and double-click South. By entering 10000 mm in this step. 5 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Duplicate. 9 Move the cursor above the elevation line. The south elevation is displayed. 2 Select the Level 1 line to display it as red. and click OK. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). Level 1 displays an elevation value of 0 mm. The levels in the project are not shared. By selecting the Level 1 line.Shared Elevation. enter 10000 mm. 6 Click OK twice. you specify the point (0 mm) from which you want to relocate the project. In the Name dialog. However. 10 On the View menu. 3 On the Options Bar.Define Level 1 as a shared level 1 In the Project Browser. If you did that now. 212 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. for Elevation Base. so changing the height Level 1 would change it only in relation to the other levels in the project.

12 In the Type Selector.Define the remaining project levels as shared 11 Select the Loft level line. 14 In the Project Browser. click Modify. double-click North. select Level : 8 mm Head . The changes in elevation have propagated to this view. Relocating a Project | 213 . under Elevations. as well as other views of the building model. 13 On the Design Bar.Shared Elevation. The reported value of the Loft level changes to take the new base elevation value into consideration.

Shared Elevation. the Penthouse level. and the Roof Plan level. In the Type Selector. and select Levels 2-4. On the Design Bar.15 Define the remaining levels as shared: ■ ■ ■ Press and hold CTRL. 214 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Modify. All the building levels now report elevations relative to the base elevation. select Level : 8 mm Head .

In Revit Architecture. expand Views (all). Temporary dimensions display automatically when you create and insert components. and double-click Level 1. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and learn to work with dimensioning constraints to control placement of elements in the model. In this case. radial. multi-segmented. expand Floor Plans. permanent dimensions are created automatically. although you must turn on their visibility to view them. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. Creating Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to create permanent dimensions to control and document your building models. you learn how to use dimensioning tools and constraints in Revit Architecture to dimension and space planter boxes on the north side of the building. You place linear. there are 2 types of dimensions: temporary and permanent. Dimensioning | 215 . “Dimensioning” on page 215. and angular dimensions. Linear and multi-segmented dimensions Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Permanent dimensions must be explicitly created.16 If you want to save your changes. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.rvt Place an overall linear dimension 1 In the Project Browser. except when you sketch profiles to complete families. click File menu ➤ Save As. Dimensioning In this lesson.

and are created by selecting individual reference points. and when a green dashed line displays along the right side of the curtain wall. The default dimensioning options display on the Options Bar. select it. snap to wall centerlines. By default. 216 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select it. click Dimension. dimensions are aligned. 3 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top left side of the view. and when a green dashed line displays along the left side of the curtain.2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 4 Move the cursor over the curtain wall on the top right side of the view.

click Dimension. Creating Dimensions | 217 . indicating that you cannot change the distance between the curtain walls without first unlocking the dimension. The lock displays as locked. 7 On the Design Bar. Only aligned and angular permanent dimensions can be constrained in this way. Place a multi-segmented dimension 8 On the Design Bar.5 Move the cursor above the view. click Modify. 6 Click the lock that displays on the dimension string to lock the dimension. and click to place the dimension.

select the right side of the curtain wall. select Wall Faces. Make the dimension segments equal to space the planters at equal distances 18 With the multi-segmented dimension selected. and click to place the multi-segmented dimension. and continue to select the endpoints and faces of the planters. and select it. 11 Using the same method. 16 After you select the reference points on the final planter. 14 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.9 Select the left side of the left curtain wall as you did in a previous step. and move the cursor over the left endpoint of the first planter to the right. 10 Press TAB until the left endpoint of the planter displays. but below the first dimension that you placed. for Prefer. and select its left exterior face. above the plan view of the building. click to make all the dimension segments equal and reposition the planters equal distances apart from one another. select the right endpoint of the planter. 218 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 Move the cursor to the right. 12 13 On the Options Bar. 17 Move the cursor up.

26 Select the radial dimension. For Prefer. 27 Select the blue square grip that displays under the dimension value and drag it slightly up and to the right. Creating Dimensions | 219 . 22 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Radial). and select it. Place a radial dimension with a Typ. select Wall faces. click Modify. suffix 20 Zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Move the cursor over the left exterior curved face of the planter until it highlights. click Modify. click Dimension. 24 Move the cursor outside the wall.19 On the Basics tab. 25 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and specify a point to place the dimension.

220 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 34 Select the horizontal line. click (Properties). For Prefer.. 29 In the Element Properties dialog. on the Options Bar. 33 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Angular). for Suffix. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 30 On the Basics tab. enter Typ. Place an angular dimension 31 Zoom to the planter near grid line 5. and click OK.28 With the dimension still selected. verify Wall faces is selected. click Modify.

38 Proceed to the next exercise. you learn to automatically dimension a linear wall and its openings (windows) on the Level 3 floor plan of the building.This line is the edge of a mass that represents the neighboring building. When you dimension the wall. you select only the wall. instead of the wall and each individual opening reference point. 35 Select the left exterior face of the planter. and click to place the dimension. 36 Move the cursor to the left to resize the dimension arc. click Modify. This automatic dimensioning option provides a convenient way to quickly dimension walls with multiple openings. 37 On the Basics tab. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions In this exercise. Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions | 221 . “Creating Automatic Wall Dimensions” on page 221.

select Openings. You will dimension the short bottom horizontal wall that includes 3 windows. Click Options. 222 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . select Wall centerlines. expand Floor Plans. 3 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Prefer. These options ensure that the wall dimension includes the openings. and double-click Level 3. For Pick. expand Views (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.Automatic wall dimension Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Click OK. select Entire Walls. and that the opening widths are referenced in the overall dimension string. and select Widths. Select automatic dimensioning options 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Dimension. 4 In the Automatic Dimension Options dialog: ■ ■ Under Select References.rvt Open the Level 3 floor plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

expand Views (all). click Modify. for a multi-segmented dimension. and learn how to change the location of witness lines after you place dimensions. When you place dimensions. 7 On the Basics tab. However. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. Controlling Witness Lines In this exercise.rvt Override default dimension witness lines 1 In the Project Browser. Controlling Witness Lines | 223 . 6 Move the cursor down below the plan view. 2 Zoom to the planter on which you placed a radial dimension. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click to place the automatic dimension string.Place the dimension 5 Select the bottom exterior wall. you specify their origin on the Options Bar. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. where the witness lines referring to interior walls would be located on the centerline of each wall. you learn to override dimension witness line settings as you place dimensions. “Controlling Witness Lines” on page 223. in some cases. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 1. For example. you may need to override their settings on an instance basis. you may want to locate the two outermost witness lines on the exterior face of each wall.

and click to place the dimension. verify Wall centerlines is selected. select Individual References. move the cursor down. 5 Move the cursor over the left side of the planter. 4 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Prefer. select the right edge of the planter. 224 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 6 Press TAB to cycle through the selection options until the left face of the planter highlights. For Pick.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 7 Using the same method. click Dimension. and select it.

9 Press TAB until the bottom left endpoint is highlighted. and select it. Controlling Witness Lines | 225 . 10 Using the same method. and specify a point to place the dimension.8 Move the cursor over the bottom of the planter on which you placed the angular dimension. select the bottom right endpoint. 11 Move the cursor down.

Adjust the witness line location on the end dimensions to align them to the faces of wall 17 Select the dimension that you just placed. select Wall centerlines. 13 On the Options Bar. select the centerline of each of the 6 remaining partition walls. and zoom in on the right end of the dimension.Dimension the partition walls to center lines 12 On the Basics tab. click Dimension. 14 Move the cursor over the left partition wall in the top left corner of the plan. and drag the dimension down the wall. for Prefer. select the green grip that displays in the middle of the tick mark. 226 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . 15 Moving the cursor to the right. click Modify. and when the wall centerline highlights. 18 Press and hold SHIFT. and click to place the dimension. select it. 16 On the Design Bar.

After you create the new family type. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions In this exercise. you learn how to duplicate the dimension family type of dimension on the floor plan and then modify its parameters to create an office standard dimension style. 20 Release SHIFT. “Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions” on page 227. and click the blue middle grip until the dimension aligns with the outer face of the partition wall.19 Release SHIFT. and using the same methods. select the top blue grip and drag it up to create a witness line gap. 21 Zoom to the partition wall on the left side of the plan. 22 On the Basics tab. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. click Modify. you change the Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 227 . create a witness line gap and align the dimension to the outer left face of the wall.

and select the lower dimension. 228 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Under Text. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim. For Text Font.2 mm. zoom to the planter between grid lines 3 and 4. and text size parameters to create dimensions that better conform to your office standards. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. for Text Size. enter 3. 2 Click (Properties). select CityBlueprint. select Arrow 30 Degree. text font. Angular and linear dimensions with office standard text and arrows Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Modify the parameters of the new Office Standard type 6 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 5 In the Name dialog. and click OK. for Tick Mark.rvt Duplicate an existing dimension type 1 On the Level 1 floor plan.dimension tick mark. enter Office Standard. click Duplicate.

click Modify. 10 On the Basics tab. The dimension that you selected previously now displays the new Office Standard family type. If CityBlueprint does not display in the list. ■ Click OK twice. click Modify. Creating an Office Standard Dimension Type from Existing Dimensions | 229 . select another font.NOTE Fonts that are available in this list are the Windows fonts installed on your system. and select the bottom dimension. 9 In the Type Selector. 7 On the Basics tab. select Linear Dimension Style: Office Standard. 8 Move the cursor to the planter on the right.

11 Using the same method. 12 Proceed to the next lesson. and modify it to use the office standard parameters. You create a new office standard text note type by duplicating the family type of a note on the floor plan. and how to add leaders to the text notes. you add text notes on the Level 1 floor plan of the building. create a new angular dimension type. Creating Text Annotation In this lesson. You learn how to change the text font and size of text notes. 230 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . “Creating Text Annotation” on page 230. select the angular dimension on the planter.

3 On the Options Bar. 4 Move the cursor above grid line 4. and click and drag to create a text box. but below the upper dimension string. Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Anno_Dim.Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan In this exercise. you add text notes to the Level 1 floor plan. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 231 . click (None). for Leader. click Text. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. zoom to planter near grid line 5.rvt Add a text note 1 On the Level 1 floor plan. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.

9 In the Type Properties dialog. select and drag the top left blue symbol to relocate the text box. enter EXISTING BUILDING. for Text Size. 7 Select the text box. If so. Create a new text note family type by duplicating the existing type 6 On the Design Bar. select Arc Leaders. enter 6 mm. 8 In the Element Properties dialog box. and click . and click OK.5 In the text box. under Graphics. 11 Under Text. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. 232 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . click Edit/New. 10 In the Name dialog box. enter 6 mm Arial Notes. You may have to move the text box to avoid overlapping other elements on the floor plan. and click OK. and click OK. click Duplicate.

Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 233 . A downward pointing leader displays on the right side of the Planting Bed text box. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Add Right Arc Leader). and enter Planting Bed. 14 Create another text box to the right of grid line 4.Create a text box with leaders 13 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 16 Select the Planting Bed text box. 15 On the Design Bar. click Text.

21 Select the Planting Bed text box to select both the text and leaders. click Modify. 234 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . Click Rename.■ Click (Add Left Arc Leader). select CityBlueprint. Under Graphics. select Arrow 30 Degree. and click OK. 23 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ . click Modify. 24 On the Design Bar. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. for Text font. click Edit/New. 20 On the Design Bar. Click OK twice. for Leader Arrowhead. Under Text. 19 Select the blue grip at the end of the left leader. Reposition the leaders 18 Select the blue grip at the end of the right leader. for New. In the Rename dialog. Another leader displays on the left side of the Planting Bed text box. and drag it down to point to the bottom of the planter. enter Standard Notes. and click 22 In the Element Properties dialog.

click to place the text box.Add another note using the Standard Note type 25 On the Design Bar. 27 On the Options Bar. over the Planting Bed text. for Leader. 29 Move the cursor up and to the right. click (Arc). 28 Click the inside bottom face of the rounded planter near grid line 3. click Text. select Text: Standard Notes. Adding Text Notes to the Floor Plan | 235 . 30 When green dashed lines that indicate it is aligned with the Planting Bed text. 26 In the Type Selector.

and enter 457 mm Conc. Wall. 236 | Chapter 5 Annotating and Dimensioning . and save the exercise file with a unique name. 33 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. click File menu ➤ Save As. 32 If you want to save your changes.31 Click in the text box.

you learn how to create details in Revit Architecture 2008. using detail components to represent materials like lumber. For a detail that you do not want to associate with the model. like a standard door header condition.Detailing 6 In this tutorial. The "drafted" detail that you create is not parametrically linked to the building model. and metal studs. plywood. These components display at the required scale. You can detail directly in a view of the building information model. 237 . you use a separate drafting view in which to create the detail.

and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. They are also view specific. region objects. you detail the roof overhang of a project building. you must define the view in which you want to create a detail. and then complete the detail by adding break lines and text notes. 238 | Chapter 6 Detailing . add detail components. that you add to the view are visible only in this view. and insulation objects. You define that view by creating a callout view within a section view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and use the model as an underlay for the detail. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. Detailing the View In this exercise. click Training Files. as well as detail lines. you detail the view of the roof edge. The detail components that you add to the view are two-dimensional family objects. In order to detail from the building model. You load detail components.rvt. In the callout view. you add notes and dimensions to the detail view. which means that all detail components.Creating a Detail from a Building Model In this lesson. you trace over the building model geometry. After you add components.

and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 8 Delete the component. You load and place the component so that it is in the project to use in a repeating detail. 12 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 6 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 16 Click OK twice. Detailing the View | 239 . click the bottom of the exterior wall to select the start point.5mm. double-click the detail callout head. click Yes to load a Detail Items family. 2 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. select As underlay. and click OK. 5 In the alert dialog. click in the space below the roof overhang to place the component. enter Corrugated Metal Siding. 17 In the drawing area. click Edit/New. click . 14 In the Type Properties dialog. Place a repeating detail 9 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. click Repeating Detail. Load and place a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 15 For Spacing. and click Open. click Detail Component. navigate to Metric\Families\m_Corrugated Metal. 7 In the drawing area. 13 In the Name dialog. select Corrugated Metal. click Training Files. enter 406. for Pattern ➤ Detail. 10 On the Options Bar. Exact location is not important. The roof overhang detail displays.Display a detail view 1 In the upper left corner of the building model.rfa.

■ Click Modify. and press DELETE. NOTE The detail component endpoint may not coincide with the geometry extents. click Detail Component. Add lumber detail components 22 On the Design Bar. 240 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 20 Move the component end point: ■ ■ ■ Select the corrugated metal component. and on the Edit toolbar. Select the endpoint of the geometry of the corrugated metal component as the move start point. 23 On the Options Bar. click Load. Select the bottom edge of the roof joist as the move end point. 21 Select the original instance of the corrugated metal component.18 Move the cursor up to generate the graphics for the repeating detail. click Modify. 19 On the Design Bar. Specify a point high enough so the siding reaches the underside of the roof overhang. click (Move).

26 Place the plywood component to the right of the metal component as shown in the following illustration. TIP You may need to use the Move command to adjust the position of the plywood.24 In the left pane of the Open dialog. verify that M_Plywood-Section 19mm is selected.rvt. and click Open. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 06-Wood and Plastic\06100-Rough Carpentry\06160-Sheathing\M_Plywood-Section. 30 On the Design Bar. 32 To properly orient the component. and place it in the detail view as shown. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Roof Edge Components. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. click Training Files. 28 In the left pane of the Load File as Group dialog.rfa. Load components as a group 27 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. 34 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 200mm Nominal. press SPACEBAR 3 times. you load them as a group from a single file. 31 In the Type Selector. Detailing the View | 241 . click OK. 29 In the Duplicate Types dialog. click Training Files. 33 Click the top right corner of the plywood to select the insertion point. Because you still have several components to load. 25 In the Type Selector. and click Open.

click the Flip instance arrows. select Chain.Add wallboard detail component 35 In the Type Selector. 242 | Chapter 6 Detailing . NOTE You can also press SPACEBAR as you place the component to flip the justification. 39 Select the horizontal segment. Add insulation 40 On the Design Bar. The wallboard segment is now on the underside of the roof joist. 36 On the Options Bar. 37 Place the wallboard component as shown. select M_Gypsum Wallboard-Section : 16mm. 38 Click Modify. click Insulation. and click Modify.

Select the right midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move end point. click (Move).41 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Width. and on the Edit toolbar. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 300mm Nominal. Add lumber components 45 On the Design Bar. ■ Click Modify. 42 Place 2 segments of insulation. For Offset. Select the left midpoint of the 50 x 200mm component as the move start point. as shown. 44 Move the upper segment: ■ ■ ■ Select the upper segment of insulation. Detailing the View | 243 . enter 140mm. select to near side. 47 Click to place the component at the lower left corner of the roof overhang as shown. 46 In the Type Selector. click Detail Component. 43 Click Modify.

they are view specific. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.48 In the Type Selector. select M_Plywood-Section : 19mm. 5 Select the vertical plywood component. select M_Rigid Insulation-Section : 63mm. select Thin Lines. and lock the component. meaning they display only in this view. Like detail components. drag the endpoint up to the top of the 50 x 200mm component. 2 In the Type Selector. click Detail Lines. 49 Place the component directly above the 50 x 200mm component.rvt. 4 Click Modify. Add detail lines 1 On the Design Bar. “Adding Detail Lines” on page 244. 52 Click Modify. you add lines to your detail. 244 | Chapter 6 Detailing . Adding Detail Lines In this exercise. 3 Sketch a detail line from the lower right corner of the 50 x 300mm component to the lower left corner of the 50 x 200mm component. 51 Add the insulation above the plywood you just placed. as shown. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Add rigid insulation 50 In the Type Selector.

select Thin Lines. 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Add detail lines around the 50 x 300mm component. Trim and extend the lines as necessary to get the desired result. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. and press ENTER. click Detail Lines. enter 10mm. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). For Offset. as shown. 12 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. and press ENTER. 7 In the Type Selector.Add offset lines 6 On the Design Bar. Adding Detail Lines | 245 . For Offset. 10 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the lines at the top of the 50 x 300mm component and the roof joist. as shown.

19 Zoom in to the area where the roof joist and the corrugated metal component abut.Draw detail lines 14 On the Options Bar. and clear Chain. 18 In the Type Selector. draw the detail lines as shown. click (Draw). as shown. 246 | Chapter 6 Detailing . select Chain. select Thin Lines. 15 Draw a small diagonal line at the bottom left corner of the 50 x 300mm component. and draw the detail lines as shown. 16 On the Options Bar. 17 Draw a horizontal line as shown.

and click OK. right-click. 26 In the Type Selector.20 Move the top horizontal line down so that it overlays the Penthouse level line. Modify display properties 21 In the drawing area. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). When you turn the display model off. click ➤ Hide Crop Region. 24 On the View Control Bar. Add a vapor barrier 25 On the Design Bar. 28 Select the interior edge of the vertical segment of gypsum wallboard. select Do not display. and then select the interior edge of the horizontal segment. the model elements such as walls and floors no longer display in this view. for Graphics ➤ Display Model. For Offset. Adding Detail Lines | 247 . and click Properties. and press ENTER. under Views ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 22 In the Project Browser. enter 10mm. click Detail Lines. What remains are the detail components and lines that you added. select the Penthouse level line. select Vapor Barrier. right-click Roof Overhang Detail. 23 In the Element Properties dialog.

248 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 32 Click Modify.rvt. 33 If a break line does not completely mask the portion of the detail that it is intended to mask. 31 Add break lines at the bottom and the right of the detail. TIP To rotate the break line as you place it. click Detail Component. you add text notes to complete the detail. Add text notes to the detail 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 30 In the Type Selector.29 On the Design Bar. select M_Break Line. “Adding Text Notes” on page 248. 34 Proceed to the next exercise. click Text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. press SPACEBAR as necessary. Adding Text Notes In this exercise. select the break line and use the shape handle grips to modify it.

2 On the Options Bar. enter Typ. click Dimension. 3 Add the leaders and notes as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the detail to specify the location of the arrow. and click (Properties). Click in the drawing area to end the text insertion command. for Text ➤ Suffix. Click again to specify the location of the text box. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 5 Click the left outer edge of the 50 x 300mm component. 6 Click Modify.. Adding Text Notes | 249 . click (Arc) to create an arced leader. Enter the text. and click the left edge of the corrugated metal component. Add a dimension to the detail 4 On the Design Bar. 7 Select the dimension line.

and click OK. “Creating Detail Components” on page 250. Creating Detail Components In this exercise. Create a duplicate drawing 1 In the Project Browser. right-click. right-click. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate with Detailing.rvt. pressing TAB. and press DELETE. click Select All Instances. on the Options Bar. while pressing CTRL. click 6 In the Filter dialog. and selecting the chain. enter Roof Overhang Detail . 3 In the Rename View dialog. Convert detail lines to components 5 Use a window to select the entire roof detail. select a text note. click Roof Overhang Detail. 8 Zoom in to the metal coping. You can also select all the linework by highlighting a segment. clear Detail Items and Dimensions. 7 Click Modify.Keynotes.9 Click File menu ➤ Save. Remove text notes 4 In the drawing area. select all the coping linework. right-click. (Filter Selection). 10 Proceed to the next exercise. The selected lines need to be replaced with detail components in order for them to accept a keynote. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). and click OK. you modify the previously drawn detail so that you can annotate it with keynotes rather than text notes. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 2 Select Copy of Roof Overhang Detail. and save the exercise file. and click Rename. 250 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

18 In the Save As dialog.rft. 11 In the left pane of the New dialog. Creating Detail Components | 251 . clear Detail Items. click the bottom left endpoint of the metal coping. 24 On the Options Bar. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save As. click Training Files. 16 Click Modify. 10 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. click . The original linework remains selected. enter Roof Edge. click Load into Projects. for File name. double-click it in the Project Browser. select Medium Lines.Keynotes view is not the open view. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component. 12 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard. 20 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. in the Type Selector. and the component can be placed in the detail. 15 Use a window to select all linework.9 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. Add components to the detail 19 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Detail Component. and click OK. The component family is now part of the roof overhang detail. and click Open. 23 Using a window. 22 Click Modify. select the coping. While pressing SHIFT. 14 Click Modify. deselect any extraneous lines that are also selected. navigate to your preferred location. 21 To place the component. NOTE If the Roof Overhang Detail . and click Save. 25 In the Filter dialog. 13 Click the intersection of the reference planes to place the linework.

“Adding Keynotes” on page 252. select the rigid insulation as the object to tag. Add keynotes to components 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 252 | Chapter 6 Detailing . navigate to 07000 ➤ 07200 ➤ 07210 ➤ 07210. 2 In the alert dialog. click Yes to load a Keynote Tag family to the project. click Training Files. click on the upper end point of the drip edge to place the component. The underlying linework is deleted and the detail component remains in the drawing. 31 Using the same method used previously. Adding Keynotes In this exercise. click Keynote ➤ Element.rvt. Click the rigid insulation on the roof to place the tag. and click OK. 30 In the drawing area. and click Open. you place keynotes on objects. and click Open. click Training Files. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Metal Fascia w_Drip Edge. navigate to Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Keynote Tag. 29 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 32 Proceed to the next exercise.26 Press DELETE. In the Keynotes dialog.rfa. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click to place the leader arm. 27 On the Design Bar. delete the underlying linework. 28 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 Add the tag: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the drawing area.rfa. and add keynote data to components that do not have data associated with them. click Detail Component. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 63mm Rigid Insulation.B5. click Load.

select the metal fascia with drip edge. For the 50 x 200. use keynote 06160.C1. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. click in the Value column. For the 2 instances of the 16mm Gypsum Wallboard.I1. 6 Click Modify. use keynote 06110. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. use keynote 06110. Because you defined the keynote parameter as part of the component properties. For the 19mm Plywood Siding.F1.D11.5 Tag additional components: ■ ■ For the plywood decking.F1. use keynote 06110.D11.D1. click Keynote ➤ Element. use keynote 07645. Assign keynote parameter to a component 7 In the drawing area. use keynote 09250. 11 Click OK 3 times. For the 50 x 150. FasciaProfile_1. Adding Keynotes | 253 . 19mm Plywood. use keynote 06160. Roof Edge4. Tag the metal fascia with drip edge. For the metal coping. navigate to 07645. click Edit/New.G1. the keynote is automatically read when you place the tag. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For the 50 x 300. 12 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. and click 8 In the Element Properties dialog. 13 Tag components: ■ (Properties).

you convert detail lines to detail components so that you can add keynotes to them. click Training Files. 15 In the Type Selector. 5 In the drawing area. a repeating detail cannot be keynoted. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. select the horizontal line under the roof overhang as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. Creating Line-based Detail Components In this exercise. 17 Keynote the component.14 On the Design Bar. click Lines.rft. and click Save. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. 6 Lock the line. “Creating Line-based Detail Components” on page 254. for File name. 22mm Corrugated Steel . select Medium Lines. click Load into Projects. Create a detail component 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 7 Click File menu ➤ Save As. and click Modify. 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. 4 In the Type Selector. navigate to Metric\Templates\Metric Detail Component line based. select Corrugated Metal. You do this in order to keynote the component. 8 In the Save As dialog. enter m_Medium Line Detail Component. and select the right end point. 16 Place an instance of the component directly on top of the bottom segment of the corrugated metal repeating component. using keynote 07460. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. Convert detail lines to components 10 In the drawing area.20 Ga. 18 Save the file. select the left end point of the reference line. click Detail Component.A8. and click Open. 254 | Chapter 6 Detailing . navigate to your preferred location. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components. click in the Value column. Add light line components 26 Zoom to the roof overhang. click Load. and hidden) used in the view. click Training Files. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. select Medium Line Detail Component. and click . 28 In the Type Selector. 23 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Edit/New. 15 Click Modify.11 Press DELETE. 30 Click Modify. 31 Select the component. 20 Click OK 3 times. 18 In the Type Properties dialog. 25 Next. m_Invisible Line Detail Component. select m_Light Line Detail Component. 13 In the Type Selector. 36 In the Keynotes dialog. click Detail Component. invisible. click Duplicate. and click OK. The deleted line needs to be replaced with a detail component in order for it to accept a keynote. and m_Light Line Detail Component. 14 Add the component in the location of the previously deleted horizontal line. 29 In the drawing area. 12 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 24 While pressing CTRL. navigate to 07000 ➤ 07500 ➤ 07530 ➤ 07530. and click (Properties). 17 In the Element Properties dialog.A1. 34 In the Name dialog. enter EPDM Membrane. Single-Ply Membrane Roofing. click Detail Component. click Duplicate. click Edit/New. Creating Line-based Detail Components | 255 . enter Prefinished Metal Soffit Panel. click Detail Component. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. 19 In the Name dialog. 16 Select the component. click the end points at the top of the roof. you create line-based detail components for other line weights (light. 27 On the Design Bar. 35 In the Type Properties dialog. for Identity Data ➤ Keynote. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Open. 22 On the Options Bar. 37 Click OK 3 times. You add the components to the project and keynote them. Load line-based detail components 21 On the Design Bar.

and click the lower end at the break line. and click . 42 Using the same method used previously. Add a vapor barrier component 51 On the Design Bar. select Chain. select m_Hidden Line Detail Component. on the Edit toolbar. click Detail Component. and click .G1. 54 Create the component by drawing over the vertical and horizontal dashed detail lines that represent the vapor barrier. click Detail Component. click 50 Move the air barrier to the right. name the component 50 x 200 Framing. name the component Air Barrier. (Move). 256 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 53 On the Options Bar. and assign it keynote 07260. against the 3/4" plywood.A5. 44 On the Design Bar. and assign it keynote 06110. 39 Add the Light Line Detail Component to the underside of the overhang. 47 Select the component. 45 Click the upper end of the repeating detail. 46 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. 41 Select the component just added. 49 With the component selected.38 On the Design Bar. click Detail Component. 48 Using the same method used previously. 43 Zoom to the repeating component. 52 In the Type Selector.

click Keynote ➤ Element. and Vapor Barrier. 57 Select the vertical hidden line component. 58 Using the method used previously. 61 In the drawing area. add keynotes for the EPDM Membrane.55 Click Modify. Air Barrier. 60 On the Design Bar. 50 x 200 Framing.A4. and assign it keynote 07260. leaving the detail component lines. 56 Delete both dashed detail lines. and click . Creating Line-based Detail Components | 257 . name the component Vapor Barrier. Add keynotes 59 Zoom to the drawing extents.

and click . Enter 07463. name the component Batt Insul.A1. 258 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click File menu ➤ Save. 70 In the drawing area. and press TAB. 66 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click Load into Projects..A9. you add keynote information for a detail component to the database text file. The database file opens in a text editor. 72 Proceed to the next exercise. draw a line in the center of the large vertical segment of insulation. 68 Select the component. and close the text editor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. navigate to Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Metric. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. click Detail Component. Add information to the text file 1 In Windows Explorer.rfa.txt. and assign it keynote 07210. in the Type Selector. 2 Add keynote information for the metal soffit: ■ ■ ■ ■ Position the cursor at the end of the line that begins with 07460. You are then able to assign the keynote to the component in the drawing.rvt. Enter 07460. add a keynote for the component. and press TAB. 64 Save the file as m_Invisible Line Detail Component. and press ENTER.A4. select the component. 67 In the drawing area. 3 In the text editor. Enter Pre-Finished Metal Soffit. and double-click m_Example_RevitKeynotes. select Invisible Lines. “Modifying a Keynote Database” on page 258.Create an invisible line component 62 Click Window menu ➤ m_Medium Line Detail Component. 63 In the drawing area. 69 Using the method used previously. 65 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. Modifying a Keynote Database In this exercise. 71 Save the file.

Creating a Drafted Detail | 259 . 12 Apply various keynote styles: ■ ■ In the drawing area. under Path Type. Drafted details are created in drafting views and are not directly based on building model geometry. and click OK.Update keynote settings 4 In Revit Architecture. In the Type Selector. as there is no parametric linkage to any building model components. under Keynote Table. select Absolute. 14 Save the file. 13 Click Modify. 6 In the Select Keynote File dialog. The descriptive text for each keynote displays. you can reference it within the model and place it on a sheet. 9 In the drawing area. and click OK. you learn how to create a drafted detail.txt. and click to place the note. click Browse. Creating a Drafted Detail In this lesson. click Keynote ➤ Element. You can create details in drafting views when you do not need to create callout views from the building model. Each keynote displays as a simple number. After you create a drafting view. 10 In the Keynotes dialog. You can create drafted details using the drafting tools in Revit Architecture or by importing details from an existing detail library. 5 In the Keynoting Settings dialog. Work with keynotes 8 On the Design Bar. 11 Click Modify. select the metal soffit (horizontal line under the overhang). select all the keynotes. select M_Keynote Tag : Keynote Number. and click Open. click to place the leader. These details do not update with changes to the building model. 7 In the Keynoting Settings dialog.A1. click Settings menu ➤ Keynoting. ■ Change the keynote style back to the boxed number type. navigate to 07463. navigate to m_Example_RevitKeynotes. ■ Select Keynote Tag : Keynote Text.

m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. 5 Enter zf to zoom to the detail. click Training Files. select Reference other view. you place an existing detail in a new drafting view to create a drafted detail. The detail that you import is in DWG format. 260 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 6 In the Project Browser. select Black and white. select 1 : 5.Importing a Detail into a Drafting View In this exercise. Click Open. Import a complete detail in DWG format 3 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. select Center-to-center. 4 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. For Positioning ➤ Automatically place. Create a new drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. and click Rename. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Reference Callout In this exercise. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter EPDM Metal Coping. expand Views (all) ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). “Creating a Reference Callout” on page 260. Dataset Use the dataset you used in a previous exercise.rvt. right-click Drafting 1. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. For Layer/Level Colors. 7 In the Rename View dialog. click Callout. and click OK. Create the callout view 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. Navigate to Metric\m_Roof Edge Detail.dwg. and select Drafting View: EPDM Metal Coping. you create a callout in the section view of the building model to reference the metal coping detail that you previously imported. double-click Roof Overhang Detail to open it in the drawing area.rvt. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. under Views (all) ➤ Detail Views (Detail). for Scale. The detail is imported as an import symbol.

for New.4 Add the callout bubble by dragging a rectangular bubble around the metal coping. click Modify. 12 Click OK twice. and click OK. Creating a Reference Callout | 261 . and double-click the callout. 8 In the Element Properties dialog. click Edit/New. delete the existing value. enter Detail . Display the reference view 13 On the Design Bar. and click Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. Modify detail view properties 7 In the Project Browser. and use the callout grips to move the callout head. The metal coping detail that you imported previously displays. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.No Reference. for Graphics ➤ Reference Label. The callout head no longer displays a reference label. 10 In the Rename dialog. click Rename. 6 Select the callout. 5 Click Modify. right-click EPDM Metal Coping.

15 Under Drafting Views (Detail . so you use Revit Architecture tools to draft the detail. 2 In the New Drafting View dialog. 17 Click Window menu ➤ Detail View: Roof Overhang Detail. There is no existing DWG file for this door detail. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Modeling elements at this level of detail may be time consuming and can reduce the overall performance of the product. for Name./Det.No Reference). verify that the scale is 1 : 5. The callout is updated with the sheet information. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Detailing. enter Header @ Sliding Door.Elev. you create a door head condition in the new drafting view. Create a drafting view 1 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drafting View.rvt./Sect. drag EPDM Metal Coping onto the sheet. 16 Click on the sheet above the Roof Overhang Detail to place the drafting view. 3 On the View Control Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. double-click A105 . “Creating a Detail in a Drafting View” on page 262 Creating a Detail in a Drafting View In this exercise. 262 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 18 Save the file. and click OK. under Views (all) ➤ Sheets (all).Add the drafting view to a sheet 14 In the Project Browser.

select Wide Lines. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the 2x6 lumber as the start point. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. for Name. select M_Nominal Cut Lumber-Section : 50 x 150mm Nominal. select the width dimension. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 14 Click OK 3 times. 18 While pressing CTRL. 6 Click in the drawing area to place 2 instances as shown. 11 In the Name dialog. click 13 In the Fill Patterns dialog. click Filled Region. . 16 Select the left edge of the region. select the left and bottom edges of the region. enter Gyp. Draw a rectangle as shown. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 17 Click Modify. and enter 20.Add a detail component 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 19 In the Type Selector. click Duplicate. Create a filled region 7 On the Design Bar. Board. Press SPACEBAR to rotate the component as you place it. select Gypsum-Plaster. click Region Properties. 5 In the Type Selector. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 263 . click Edit/New. click Detail Component. and click OK. click .5mm. 15 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. You sketch filled regions to represent gypsum wall board. 12 In the Type Properties dialog.

and drag the bottom up to just below the top of the upper 50 x 150. Mirror the region 21 Select the filled region. click 22 On the Options Bar. click Finish Sketch. (Draw). Select the midpoint of the upper 50 x 150 as the start point.20 On the Design Bar. Move the cursor up. click 23 Draw the mirror line: ■ ■ (Mirror). and on the Edit toolbar. 24 Select the mirrored region. 264 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and click above the top of the region as the end point.

click Filled Region. 29 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. click . click 32 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 36 Align the wood region to the 50 x 150: ■ ■ On the Tools toolbar. in the Type Selector. select Medium Lines. 30 In the Name dialog. enter Wood .Finish. for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Select the right edge of the lower 50 x 150.25 Click Modify. 27 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 34 Draw the region: On the Options Bar. Add wood filled regions 26 On the Design Bar. for Graphics ➤ Fill Pattern. 35 Select all the linework for the wood region. 37 On the Design Bar.Finish. click Edit/New. click Finish Sketch. ■ ■ ■ Select the lower left corner of the left gypsum board region as the start point. Draw a rectangle as shown. and select the right edge of the wood region. and click OK. click (Align). . select Wood . Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 265 . 33 Click OK 3 times. click Region Properties. verify that the thickness is 19mm.

click (Align). click .5mm. 41 Beginning at the lower right of the wood region. verify that the width is 19mm and the height is 63. sketch the new region as shown. 46 On the Tools toolbar. For Offset. 45 Select the top of the vertical wood region to place the reference plane above it. You use the reference plane as an alignment reference for the gypsum board region above it. 40 On the Options Bar. click Filled Region. 39 In the Type Selector. click Finish Sketch. select Medium Lines. click Ref Plane.38 On the Design Bar. 44 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick). Add a reference plane 43 On the Design Bar. enter 6mm. 42 On the Design Bar. 266 | Chapter 6 Detailing . and press ENTER.

■ ■ ■ For Offset. and press ENTER. For Offset. and press ENTER. click (Trim/Extend). click Finish Sketch.47 Click the reference plane. 54 On the Tools toolbar. enter 0. 56 On the Design Bar. 55 Select the small vertical line of the door panel sketch. and click to select the point. click Filled Region. and click to select the point. 50 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). Move the cursor down 305mm. 48 Click Modify. Move the cursor left 25mm. Add a door panel 49 On the Design Bar. 51 Select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. Select Chain. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 267 . and select the bottom horizontal line. enter 10mm. 53 Draw the door panel outline: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the top endpoint of the offset line. and click the bottom of the gypsum board region. Move the cursor right 25mm. and click to select the point. 52 On the Options Bar: Click (Draw).

61 Click Modify. navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_A307 Bolts-Side. 63 Repeat for the right detail line. click Detail Lines. and click Open. 65 On the Options Bar.2mm. click Training Files.rfa. 67 Add the bolt to the right side of the lower wood region as shown. For Offset. and press ENTER. 268 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Load. 58 In the Type Selector. Add mounting/sliding hardware 64 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. enter 76. 60 Select the left. top. click Detail Component. 59 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Click (Pick Lines). select Medium Lines. 62 Select the left detail line. enter 3mm.Add mounting/sliding hardware 57 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. select the height dimension. 66 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and right edges of the door panel region.

navigate to Metric\Families\Detail Components\Div 05-Metals\05090-Metal Fastenings\M_Expansion Bolts-Side. 76 In the Type Selector. NOTE Exact sizes and positioning are not critical when creating the remainder of the detail. and click Open. Add detail lines 75 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 269 . click Load. 69 Select the bolt. use the images as a guide. 72 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 71 On the Options Bar. 70 On the Design Bar. 74 Select the expansion bolt.rfa. drag the right shape handle until the bolt end is just past the midpoint of the 50 x 150.TIP Press the SPACEBAR as necessary to rotate the bolt to the correct orientation. click Training Files. 73 Add the component to the left side of the lower 50 x 150. 68 Click Modify. select Wide Lines. 77 Draw a line at the base of the bolt head as shown. click Detail Component. drag the left shape handle until the nut is against the detail line. click Detail Lines.

84 On the Design Bar. click Detail Lines. 82 Select the rectangle. 85 On the Options Bar. 270 | Chapter 6 Detailing .78 On the Design Bar. click . 80 On the Options Bar. 79 In the Type Selector. click . and on the Edit toolbar. click 83 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. (Mirror). click Detail Lines. select Thin Lines. 81 Draw the rectangle to the left of the wide line as shown. 86 Draw a small rectangle between the mirrored rectangles as shown.

90 In the Type Selector. Do not extend the line to the vertical detail line. drag the top end above the mirrored rectangles as shown. as shown. Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 271 . select Medium Lines. 91 Draw a small line from the midpoint of the left mirrored rectangle to the left.87 Click Modify. 88 Select the detail line to the left of the lower wood region. click Detail Lines. 89 On the Design Bar.

94 Select the mirrored line on the right. and press ENTER. 96 Beginning at the end of the 3mm line.92 Select the line. and on the Edit toolbar. 272 | Chapter 6 Detailing . 95 On the Design Bar. 97 On the Options Bar. and click to place the arc as shown. enter 3mm. click (Mirror). draw a line up to the height of the other detail line. click Detail Lines. click . 93 Select the wide detail line as the axis of reflection. 98 Click the end of the detail line on the left. select the length dimension.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 273 .99 Click Modify. select the left edge of the horizontal wood region. TIP Rotate and move the break lines as necessary to adjust the masking elements. 106 Click to place the dimension. and click Modify. and select the right edge of the adjoining vertical region. 102 In the Type Selector. 101 On the Design Bar. 105 In the drawing area. Add two break lines 100 Zoom to the drawing extents. click Detail Component. click Dimension. select M_Break Line. 103 Add two break lines as shown. Add dimensions 104 On the Design Bar.

112 In the Options Bar.107 On the Design Bar. 113 In the drawing area. select Linear Dimension Style : Linear 2. Add text notes to complete the detail 111 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click (Add Right Arc Leader).5mm Arial. 114 Enter Gyp. click Dimension. 110 Select the dimension line. 108 In the Type Selector. 116 Drag the end of the new leader to the other gypsum board region. and click Modify. drag the text for the smaller dimension. and click to place the text. Board. select the gypsum board region on the left. click to create an arced leader. 274 | Chapter 6 Detailing . click Text. and click Modify. using the Drag Text grip. 109 Add a multi-segment dimension line as shown. 115 Select the note.

Creating a Detail in a Drafting View | 275 .117 Add leaders and text notes to the detail as shown. 119 Save the file. click Modify to end the command. 118 On the Design Bar.

276 | Chapter 6 Detailing .

such as images and text into project sheets ■ ■ ■ 277 . including: ■ ■ Creating a note block containing typical construction notes Creating a drawing list that is automatically populated based on filter selections Creating the 2 most common types of legends produced for construction: annotation legends and building component legends Tracking and documenting revisions in the project Importing resources from other applications.Finishing the Sheets 7 In this tutorial. you perform tasks to provide finishing touches on your project documentation.

and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Sheet Keynote . click Symbol. Load a generic annotation family 1 In the Project Browser.Finishing-Sheets. and double-click East.Hexagon. click Training Files. The note block can be used to schedule parameters assigned to a generic annotation family. 3 Click Yes to load a generic annotation family into the project. 7 On the Design Bar. you create a typical note block to annotate repairs and renovations to the exterior of the building. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Using Note Blocks In this lesson. you add typical construction notes to sheets and then create a note block to expose the notes text. 5 On the Options Bar. expand Elevations (Building Elevation).rvt. click Modify. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 8 Drag the endpoint of the leader to position it on the right front door. enter 1.rfa. click Training Files. 4 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Note Block In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats. 6 Click in the drawing area to the right of the building to place a hexagon tag. 278 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Number of Leaders.

enter Seal existing doors and insulate. for Text. on the Options Bar.9 Drag the midpoint of the leader to position it as shown: Create annotation marks for items requiring notes 10 With the tag selected. click (Copy). click (Properties). Creating a Note Block | 279 . and click OK. and click above the tag to place a copy. under Identity Data. 13 Select the tag. 12 On the Edit toolbar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog.

Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. 16 For Tag. 19 On the toolbar. as shown: NOTE To create a vertical mirror image. and click to create a vertical mirror image of the tag so the leader points toward the building. click (Mirror). 20 Select the tag on the left. click (Properties).14 With the copy selected. enter Repair existing door surround. 17 Click OK. position the cursor over the hexagon tag until a vertical bar displays. 280 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . clear Copy. 18 Use the same method to make another copy of the tag and place it on the left side of the building. and click. on the Options Bar. 15 For Text. enter B. and on the Options Bar.

select Tag. Create. Clean opening and repair as required for new window installation. for Sort by. select Tag. continue tagging the building as shown in the following illustration: Tag A B C D E F G H Text Seal existing doors and insulate. click Modify. 25 Specify values in the Note Block Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. Repair existing door surround. and moving counter-clockwise. Creating a Note Block | 281 . Clean and repair stone parapet cap as required. 22 Optionally. 24 In the New Note Block dialog. using the table as a reference. Remove all existing windows. for Note block name. enter Exterior Construction Notes.21 On the Design Bar. Repair as required. Tuckpoint as required. Clean exterior brick wall. and click Add. Clean and repair existing stone trim as required. Select Text. Contact Historic Preservation District official for specific requirements. Clean existing concrete loading dock. and click OK. Saw cut existing brick wall. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. Clean cut and repair wall as required. and click Add. and place a note block on a sheet 23 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Note Block. under Available fields. format.

enter 6 mm in the second field. and click Save. 28 In the Project Browser. and select Bold. select Center. 29 In the Project Browser. expand Sheets (all). 31 On the Design Bar. 27 In the column header (text). The Exterior Construction Notes block displays. enter Description.■ ■ On the Formatting tab. 33 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Elevations. 34 Save the file as Metric\m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 30 Click to place the block in the upper-left corner of the sheet. For Header text. 282 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . for Heading. On the Appearance tab. verify Arial in the first field. expand Schedules/Quantities. select Exterior Construction Notes. enter Mark. and drag it to the sheet.rvt. and for Alignment. 26 Click OK. click Modify. and double-click A103 . 32 Zoom in to see the note block. and drag the right column control to expand the column to display the note text.

Title Sheet. select Sheet Number.Using Drawing Lists In this lesson. and click Add. and drag it to the sheet.Title Sheet. you quickly create a drawing list that is automatically generated from the drawings available in the project. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. and click Add. 1 In the Project Browser. Creating a Drawing List In this exercise. enter T. in the first field. under Sheets (all). Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. 5 In the list title field. ■ 4 Click OK. in the second field. expand Schedules/Quantities. 6 In the Project Browser. The drawing list displays. you create an automatically populated drawing list for placement on the title sheet of the project. Select Sheet Name. select Sheet Number. for Sort by. for Filter by. 7 In the Project Browser. select does not equal. select Sheet Number. enter Sheet Index. Using Drawing Lists | 283 . and in the third field. double-click T . double-click T . select Sheet Index. under Sheets (all). Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. under Available fields. On the Filter tab.rvt. 3 Specify values in the Drawing List Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Fields tab. 2 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Drawing List.

doors. and so on). 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. NOTE A component that is placed in a legend does not count as an additional instance of the component in the Revit Architecture building model. Annotation legends are made up of components such as section markers and door tags that are paired with text that identifies them. door frame schedule. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. annotation legends are often referred to as symbol legends. and click OK. and door frames. The two most common types of legends produced for construction documents are annotation legends and building component legends. 10 Zoom in to the drawing list. Creating a Symbol Legend In this exercise. On construction documents. 284 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . On construction documents. click Modify.8 Click to place it on the sheet in the lower-right corner. Using Legends Legends provide a way to display a list of the various building components and annotations used in a project. you add the completed symbol legend to multiple sheets for easy reference. for Name. enter Typical Symbol Legend. and expand the right column to accommodate the text. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson.rvt. building component legends are often called schedules (wall type schedule. windows. 9 On the Design Bar. Finally. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. you create a legend view and add symbols and text to it using a text type you create by duplicating an existing text type and modifying the type properties. Metric\m_Freighthouse_FlatsFinishing-Sheets_in_progress. Building component legends list and identify components such as walls. click New ➤ Legend. and thus is not added to the number of instances of that component listed on a schedule or note block.

selecting each from the Type Selector and placing it in the legend as shown. click . Because the text size for the symbol legend is not available in the Type Selector.Circle M_Door Tag M_Window Tag Sheet Keynote . Add text to the legend 11 In the Type Selector. 13 Working from the top down. you create a text type with the necessary size. enter 3mm. 10 For Text Size. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. 4 Add the following symbols to the legend view. 6 On the Options bar.Add symbols to the legend 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click Edit/New.Hexagon : Tag Create a text type 5 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ M_Section Head . 12 Enter Detail Callout for the text note. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 9 For Text Font. and click to the right of the first symbol to specify the text start point. and click OK twice. enter the following text for the remaining symbols in the legend: ■ ■ ■ Level Indicator Door Tag Window Tag Creating a Symbol Legend | 285 . for Name. click Text. enter Legend Text.Filled Level Head . You do this by duplicating the standard text type and modifying the type properties. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Duplicate. select Arial. click Symbol. and click OK.

expand Legends. and click to place it. and click to place it.Unit 18. click Modify. 19 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. click Typical Symbol Legend. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. drag it to the lower-right corner of the sheet. under Sheets. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 286 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . 15 In the Project Browser.Site Plan/Floor Plan. expand Sheets (all). The symbol legend is added to the project sheet. click Typical Symbol Legend. and double-click A101 . double-click A102 . 17 On the Design Bar.■ Sheet Keynote Place the symbol legend on a sheet 14 In the Project Browser. 18 In the Project Browser.

For View. Add components to the legend 4 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a legend view 1 On the View menu. For Host length. and press ENTER. select1 : 50. 3 For Scale. and click OK. Creating a Component Legend | 287 . click Modify. 5 On the Options Bar. select Medium for Detail Level. 21 On the Design Bar.20 In the Type Selector. you create a building component legend for the wall types in the building model. select Viewport : No Titlemark. 2 In the New Legend View dialog. select Section.rvt. enter 4th Floor Wall Types. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. for Name. enter 900 mm. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save. Creating a Component Legend In this exercise. A legend view is unlike any other view and can be placed onto multiple sheets for reference where required. You use the text type that you created in a previous exercise to create annotations that identify the material used in each wall component. 8 Click directly below the first wall to place a second wall. click New ➤ Legend. 6 On the View Control Bar. click Legend Component. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Family. select Walls: Basic Wall: 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 7 Click near the top left of the drawing area to specify the insertion point for the wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You then add the completed legend to a project sheet.

10 Select the second wall. for Family. verify that Text : Legend Text is selected. click Text.9 On the Design Bar. 288 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . select Walls : Basic wall : 4th Floor Exterior. Add titles to the legend components 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Modify. 12 In the Type Selector.

Creating a Component Legend | 289 . 20 Use the following illustration as a guide for entering the text annotations on the lower wall component. for Leader. 17 Click the right side of the Wall Type 1 component to specify the leader start point. for example to force a line break between ''Wall Type 1'' and ''Patio Divider. NOTE Press ENTER to force the text to start on the next line. click to add text with a single-segment leader. 18 Click to the right of the wall to end the leader and specify the text start point. 14 Click below the upper wall component to specify the start point for the text.13 On the Options Bar. pressing ENTER between component descriptions. The text note with leader is added to the legend. and enter Wall Type 1 Patio Divider. click to add text without a leader. 19 Enter the following text. and click Modify on the Design Bar: 33mm Decking 50x100 Stud 33mm Decking. Add text to the legend 16 On the Options bar.'' 15 Click below the lower wall and enter Wall Type 2 Exterior Wall.

The floor plan and legend are added to the new sheet. under Legends. 30 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 29 In the project Browser. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 22 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. Tile views in the drawing window 27 In the Project Browser. 26 On the Design Bar. select 4th Floor Wall Types. 24 Click to place the floor plan on the right side of the sheet. click Modify to end the command. and click New Sheet. double-click Level 4. The open drawings are both visible. double-click 4th Floor Wall Types. 25 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select Level 4.Place the legend on a sheet 21 In the Project Browser. drag it onto the sheet. and drag it to the new sheet. under Floor Plans. 290 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . and click to place it in the upper left corner of the sheet. 23 In the Project Browser. 28 Click Window menu ➤ Close Hidden Windows. right-click Sheets (all). allowing you to select a component type in one drawing and then apply the type in the second drawing.

Creating a Component Legend | 291 . The view zooms in to the patio divider wall. 33 In the floor plan view. Notice that the eyedropper changes to filled. indicating that it captured the wall type properties. select the Wall Type 2 component. 34 Draw a rectangle around the lower-right area of the floor plan including the patio divider wall. click (Match Type). enter ZR to zoom to a specific region. 32 In the 4th Floor Wall Types Legend view.Match a component type 31 On the Tools toolbar.

click if you do not want to save the change to the wall type. You can create a sequence of revisions. 292 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . The wall type in the floor plan matches wall type 2 from the Wall Type Legend. Changing the detail level displays the hatching for each material of the wall component. Using Revision Tracking Revit Architecture provides tools that enable you to track revisions to your project.35 Select the patio divider wall. Setting Up a Revision Table There are likely to be changes to your construction documents after you have issued the original set of documents for bid or after you have received a signed contract. 37 Optionally. and can then display the revisions in schedules that appear in the titleblock of each project sheet. These changes can be due to owner requests. You can use revision tags to notate the revision clouds. 38 Click File menu ➤ Save. contractor inquiries. select Medium for Detail Level. and you can draw revision clouds around elements in your project that have changed. 36 On the View Control Bar.

or changes in building material availability.rvt. In general. all tags and schedules display the numeral 1. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 2 On the Settings menu. Using the table. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence in which they are added to a sheet. If Visible is not selected. any revision cloud you draw to indicate this particular revision is not visible in the view in which you create it. yet as concise as possible. the revisions are numbered according to the sequence of revisions in the Revisions dialog. if the active revision is number 1. 6 Verify that Issued is cleared. When Issued is selected. Setting Up a Revision Table | 293 . you can specify the numbering method for revisions in a project. the revision is locked and issued to the field. 7 Under Visible. If you select By Sheet. revision descriptions should be comprehensive. verify that By Project is selected for Numbering Method. under Floor Plans. enter Relocate 4th floor partition dividing walls. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. When you use this option. you use the Revisions command to open a revision table in which you can add rows that represent a sequence of revisions. double-click Level 4. This is the date the revisions are sent out for review. enter a date.unanticipated changes in construction conditions. verify that Cloud and Tag is selected. For example. click Revisions. 3 In the Revisions dialog. In this exercise. you would turn off visibility only after a revision was issued. Specify a revision numbering method 1 In the Project Browser. and you can add data such as release date and description to each revision. Add a revision to the project 4 For Release Date. In most instances. 5 For Description.

move the cursor up. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Modify a wall 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Select the partition. Sketching Revision Clouds In this exercise. click (Move).rvt. You can draw multiple revision clouds for each revision. Revision clouds have read-only properties. and click to reposition the divider closer to the upper wall. but each cloud is visible only in the view in which it is sketched. 2 Zoom in to the left area of the drawing to see the 4th Floor Balcony Divider. 3 Select the divider. double-click Level 4. under Floor Plans. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 4 On the Edit toolbar. which are inherited from the revision table you created for the project. you make changes to the project floor plan. and then indicate the changes graphically with a revision cloud. You can sketch revision clouds in all views except 3D views. 294 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . including revision number and revision date. 9 Click File menu ➤ Save.8 Click OK.

click Revision Cloud. 8 In the drawing area. and move the cursor clockwise to create a segment of the revision cloud. click Finish Sketch.6 On the Design Bar. Revit Architecture is now in sketch mode. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. 9 Click to end that segment and begin a new segment. click near the partition you moved. Add a revision cloud 7 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Sketching Revision Clouds | 295 . 10 Continue adding segments until the cloud encompasses the area that you changed. The revision cloud is displayed around the modified partition.

double-click Level 4. 2 Zoom in to the area with the revision cloud. you load a revision tag into the project. for Line Weight. Tagging Revision Clouds In this exercise. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. Load a revision tag 1 In the Project Browser.Modify revision cloud style 12 Select the revision cloud. click Tag ➤ By Category. 13 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 16 Click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans. 15 Under the Revision Clouds category. and then apply the tag to the revision cloud in the current drawing. select 6. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save. click the Annotation Objects tab. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 296 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .rvt. The tag number that is displayed in the drawing is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table in a previous exercise.

If the cursor is just inside the cloud. on which you place a revised view. 5 In the Tags dialog. notice that M_Revision Tag is the loaded tag for Revision Clouds. click OK. 7 In the left pane of the dialog. 11 Click to place the tag. you prevent further changes to the revision. 10 In the drawing area. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 8 In the Tags dialog.Unnamed. The number is based on the numbering method you specified when you set up the revision table. Because you chose to number by project. Working with Revisions | 297 . Because there are no tags loaded for revision clouds.rvt. After you make the necessary changes to the project and add the revised views to a sheet. The information you added to the revision table in a previous exercise is displayed in the revision schedule. Tag a revision cloud 9 On the Options Bar. position the cursor just outside the revision cloud to the left. Because a real-world project can undergo several revisions before it is completed. you need to add one. select Leader. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. double-click A107 . You then issue a revision. which creates a record of the revision and locks it from further changes. You do this by issuing the revision. under Sheets. scroll down to Revision Clouds. Working with Revisions In this exercise. the tag is displayed inside the cloud. click Tags. 2 Enter ZR and zoom to the revision schedule in the sheet titleblock.rfa.4 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\M_Revision Tag. The tag displays the revision number of the cloud. click Training Files. you create a sheet view in your project. In the Tags dialog. and because the revision is the first in the project. 6 Click Load. the cloud is tagged as number 1. you create additional revisions in the revision table. 12 Click File menu ➤ Save. Add a revised view to a sheet 1 In the Project Browser.

A new row is added below the existing rows in the revision table. 6 In the Revisions dialog. under Add. Create additional revisions 5 Your project may have several revisions before it is completed. select None for each issued revision. you can no longer modify it. On the Settings menu. 8 If you want to hide issued revisions in the drawing. select Issued. for Visible.Issue a revision 3 On the Settings menu. 4 For the Sequence 1 revision. click Revisions. 7 Enter the appropriate information for this revision. click New. click Revisions. You cannot add revision clouds to the revision in the drawing area. nor can you edit the sketch of the existing clouds. NOTE After you issue a revision. and click OK. 298 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . You can continue to add revisions.

and place it on a sheet. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. Importing Image Files In this exercise. 2 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. Importing from Other Applications | 299 . text. m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. you learn to import information from other applications. and open Common\Freighthouse Logo. 1 In the Project Browser. and spreadsheets. into a project.rvt. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets. click Training Files. double-click T .JPG. 4 Click in the upper right area of the sheet to place the logo. such as images. you import a logo image in JPG format into a project.9 Click OK. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. Importing from Other Applications In this lesson.Title Sheet.

6 Select the text. 4 Click and drag to place a text box on the right side of the sheet. for Leader. Copy the text 5 Open the Training Files\Common\Bidding Statement. click Text. you import text from another application using a cut and paste function to populate a text object on a sheet. click Modify. click to add text without a leader.5 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Create a text element on the title sheet 1 In the Project Browser. double-click T . 3 On the Options Bar. 7 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. 300 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. under Sheets.doc text file in another window. Importing Text Documents In this exercise.Title Sheet 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

NOTE Some formatting may be required once the text is placed in Revit Architecture. Now that you have the worksheet in a raster format. click File menu ➤ Print. This exercise demonstrates a common method. with the new text box still selected. 11 Click File menu ➤ Save. under Sheets. 2 Open the Microsoft Excel worksheet. 4 Under Printer. The only way to do this is to convert the spreadsheet file to a raster format (JPG or BMP) and import it as an image. click Edit menu ➤ Paste from Clipboard.xls. select the document writer. and open Common\Fixture Schedule. click Modify.Unit 18. double-click A102 . you could use a screen capture utility to save the worksheet in BMP or JPG format. click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ Image. The text is pasted into the new text box on the sheet. This step has been completed for you.JPG. 7 In the Revit Architecture window. 1 In the Project Browser. NOTE You need to print/export the spreadsheet to a raster format. click Training Files. you have existing information in a spreadsheet format and would like to use it in the project.Paste the text on the sheet 8 In the Revit Architecture window. for File name. 3 In Microsoft Excel.rvt. 11 Zoom in to see the Fixture Schedule. Importing Spreadsheets In this exercise. 9 Click to place the image on the sheet. 8 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click OK. 9 On the Design Bar. 6 In the left pane of the Save As dialog. for Name. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Save. and saved as Fixture Schedule. 10 On the Design Bar. click Desktop.JPG. This process may vary from system to system. enter Fixture Schedule. Training Files\Common\Lighting Fixtures. click Modify. Importing Spreadsheets | 301 . m_Freighthouse_Flats-Finishing-Sheets_in_progress. 10 Zoom in to view the pasted text.mdi.

12 Click File menu ➤ Save. 302 | Chapter 7 Finishing the Sheets .

called dependent views. 303 . as well as a large lab building. or footprint. you break up the plan into sections. The drawings include the aviary and observation area of the site. you work with a large project for a bird sanctuary. for the sanctuary will not fit onto a plotted sheet as one plan. To effectively document this project.Using Dependent Views 8 In this tutorial. The large floor plan.

304 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views .Dependent view of lab building Dependent view of aviary and observation platforms Dependent views can be placed on sheets for documentation purposes.

| 305 .

4 In the Rename View dialog. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. under Level 2. and click Rename. for Name. right-click Dependent on Level 2. click Training Files. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan and elevation Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split and to provide links to the dependent views Apply the specifications of the dependent views to other views in the project Add dependent views to sheets for documentation Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views In this exercise. enter Level 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. double-click Level 2.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Project Browser.Using Dependent Views in Documentation In this lesson. and click OK. 2 In the Project Browser. select the crop region. 5 Click in the drawing area. right-click Level 2. 306 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and on the Zoom flyout of the View toolbar. you ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create split dependent views of a large floor plan view Add a matchline to the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on sheets Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Apply dependent view specifications to other views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The dependent view opens. under Floor Plans.Aviary. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Zoom To Fit. 6 In the drawing area.

and the model crop is the interior crop region. 7 Select the inside (model crop) control on the right and drag it toward the center of the view to crop out the lab building. confining the view to the upper-left area of the drawing (the aviary). Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 307 .The following image shows a plan view with the model and annotation crop regions visible. The annotation crop is the exterior crop region. 8 Click the inside control on the bottom and drag it up.

15 Select the crop region. and click OK. click Zoom To Fit. click Zoom To Fit. 16 Use the inside controls to crop the view to the lower-right building (the labs). 308 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region). right-click Level 2.9 On the View Control Bar. and on the Zoom flyout. 12 In the Project Browser. for Name. right-click Dependent on Level 2. 13 In the Rename View dialog. 11 In the Project Browser. 10 On the Zoom flyout.Labs. enter Level 2 . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 14 Click in the drawing area.

double-click Level 2. Add matchline to indicate split view 21 In the Project Browser.17 Select the outside control on the left and drag it to the left to reveal the notes. click Matchline. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 309 . under Floor Plans. 22 On the View tab of the Design Bar. click Zoom To Fit. 19 On the View Control Bar. click (Hide Crop Region). Matchlines are annotation lines that you add to a view to indicate where a view is split. click Modify. The outside controls adjust the annotation crop region. 20 On the Zoom flyout. 18 On the Design Bar.

23 Draw the matchline by specifying the following points: ■ Click above and to the right of the intersection of the lab building and the aviary. and click.) ■ ■ ■ ■ Move the cursor down and click just above the lab building. 310 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . (Align with the second column of lab cubicles. Click just below the lower intersection of the lab building and the aviary. Click above the left corner of the lab building. click Finish Sketch. Move the cursor left about 4800 mm. 24 On the Design Bar.

28 For Line Pattern. click the Annotation Objects tab. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 311 . 30 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 31 In the Project Browser. select Double Dash.Unnamed. select 9. 34 Click to place the view in the center of the sheet. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 33 In the Project Browser. right-click A101 . and click Rename.Aviary. for Line Weight. Create sheets and place dependent views 29 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. click Level 2 . click OK to accept the default titleblock.25 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. for Name. and drag it onto the sheet. 26 In the Object Styles dialog. expand Sheets. and click OK. 32 In the Sheet Title dialog. 27 Under Matchline. enter Level 2 Aviary.

for Target view. 38 On the View tab of the Design Bar. rename the sheet Level 2 Labs. You add view references near the matchline to annotate and link to the dependent views.Labs dependent view on the sheet. verify that Floor Plan: Level 2 .35 On the Design Bar. and place the Level 2 . under Floor Plans. click View Reference. double-click Level 2. Add reference annotations to sheets 37 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 40 Click to the left of the top of the matchline. 36 Use the same method to create another sheet.Aviary is selected. 312 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 39 On the Options Bar.

42 Click to the right of the top of the matchline. 41 On the Options Bar. 44 On the Design Bar. 43 Use the same method to add View References above (A101) and below (A102) the lower-left end of the matchline.Labs.The Sheet number of the dependent view displays to the left of the matchline. 47 On the View Control Bar.Aviary. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 313 . click Zoom To Fit. double-click Level 2 . NOTE Double-clicking a view reference opens the dependent view that it references. 46 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Level 2 . click (Show Crop Region). for Target view. click Modify. under Floor Plans. 45 On the Zoom flyout.

314 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. leaving 4 rooms visible in the view.48 Select the crop region. the tags for Cubicles 3 and 14 display. right-click. NOTE View references display in all views except for the view that it is referencing. click the far right control. select the room tag for Cubicle 3 (upper-right room tag) in the annotation area. after modifying the annotation crop region. and drag it slightly to the right to expand the annotation region so you can see the view reference. 50 Use the same method to hide Cubicle 14 (directly below Cubicle 3). Notice that the view reference for the aviary does not display in the aviary dependent view. 49 If.

New dependent views display in the Project Browser under the primary view. 53 In the Select Views dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). 55 On the Zoom flyout. Using Dependent Views for Floor Plan Views | 315 . select all views in the list. you can apply the view and crop region specifications to parallel views of the same scale. but are not placed on sheets. click Zoom To Fit. under Floor Plans. Apply dependent view settings to other plans 52 In the Project Browser. 54 In the Project Browser. click Zoom To Fit. Notice that the matchline and crop regions from Level 2 are applied to Level 1. 56 Double-click Dependent on Level 1. right-click Level 2. expand Level 1. and click OK.51 On the View Control Bar. and click Apply Dependent Views. 57 On the Zoom flyout. and double-click Dependent (2) on Level 1. After you have set up dependent view configuration for one view.

right-click South Elevation. 2 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. expand South Elevation. select the Crop Region.Left. and click Rename. right-click Dependent on South Elevation.rvt Create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click South Elevation. 4 In the Rename View dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you ■ ■ ■ ■ Create dependent split views of an elevation view Annotate the primary view to indicate where the view is split Place dependent views on a sheet Add view references to the primary view to link to dependent views Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The dependent view opens. 5 In the drawing area. enter South Elevation .Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views In this exercise. for Name. 3 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 316 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . The matchline is already placed in the view. and open Metric\ m_Dependent_Views. and click OK.

and click OK. and click Rename. click (Hide Crop Region).Right. 8 In the Project Browser. and drag it toward the center of the drawing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Select the crop region. and drag it toward the center of the view. 17 In the Sheet Title dialog.6 Select the inside crop region control on the right. right-click South Elevation. cropping the view to the aviary. 13 On the View Control Bar. 7 On the View Control Bar. under Sheets. right-click Dependent on South Elevation. enter South Elevation . right-click A103 Unnamed. and click Rename. for Name. Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 317 . enter South Elevation. cropping the view to the lab building. for Name. Create a sheet and place both dependent views on the sheet 14 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet. and click OK. click OK to accept the default titleblock. 15 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. 12 Select the inside crop region control on the left. 16 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Rename View dialog. click (Hide Crop Region). 9 In the Project Browser.

20 In the Project Browser. 19 Click to place the elevation view at the top of the sheet. 318 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . 25 On the Options Bar. 24 On the Views tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. click View Reference. 22 On the Design Bar. click South Elevation . click South Elevation .Right. and drag it onto the sheet. 27 Click to the left of the bottom of the matchline. under Elevations.Left is selected. 21 Click to place the elevation view at the bottom of the sheet. under Elevations.18 In the Project Browser. double-click South Elevation. verify that Elevation: South Elevation .Left. 23 In the Project Browser. for Target view. 26 Click to the left of the top of the matchline at the center of the elevation. and drag it onto the sheet. under Elevations.

South Elevation. under Sheets (all). Using Dependent Views for Elevation Views | 319 . 30 On the Design Bar. double-click A103 . click Modify. 29 Click to the right of the top and the bottom of the matchline. select Elevation: South Elevation .Right. for Target view.28 On the Options Bar. 31 In the Project Browser.

and use the annotation crop controls to modify it. you can modify the annotation region for the dependent view from the sheet.NOTE If the view references are not visible. 320 | Chapter 8 Using Dependent Views . and click Activate View. Right-click the view. Select the crop region.

Viewing and Rendering 4 321 .

322 | Chapter 9 Viewing and Rendering .

Viewing 9 In this tutorial. More specifically. how to control fill pattern colors. You learn how to access and create building model views and how to change the visibility of building components and annotations within views. you learn how to change the visibility of detail components. and how to use plan regions within floor plans and reflected ceiling plans. 323 . you learn to create and customize views of building information models.

Open an elevation view of the building model 1 On the left side of the drawing area. expand Views (all). on the Standard toolbar. sections. You also learn how to control the visibility of different building components and annotations within building model views.rvt. The Project Browser is displayed by default between the Design Bar and the drawing area. Exploring the Building Model In this exercise. 324 | Chapter 9 Viewing . The current file name is displayed in the Project Browser title bar. including elevation and three-dimensional views. you learn how to access different views of the building model. and double-click East. click Training Files. click . 2 In the Project Browser. expand Elevations.Viewing a Building Model In this lesson. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. locate the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Viewing_Exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and learn how to control the visibility of building components and annotations within views. Both hidden lines and window tags display in the east elevation view. You create elevations. you learn to create and customize user-defined views of a building information model. and three-dimensional (3D) views. TIP If the Project Browser does not display. A new view displays a wireframe view of the east elevation view of the building model.

This change is applied only to the active view. 7 Click OK. Notice that window tags continue to display in the view. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides for Elevation: East dialog. and click Hidden Line. the east elevation. The 3D view is displayed in a new viewing window. click . click Visibility/Graphics. The window tags are no longer displayed in this view. click the Annotation Categories tab. Exploring the Building Model | 325 . The east elevation view displays with hidden lines. click Model Graphics Style. Turn off the display of window tags in the elevation view 4 On the View menu. This hides the lines that show through to the exterior of the elevation view. Create a 3D view of the building model 8 On the View toolbar. 6 Under Visibility. scroll down and clear Window Tags.Display the elevation view with hidden lines 3 On the View Control Bar. The default name of the view is {3D}. This change is applied only in this elevation view.

click X to close the view. enter My 3D View. You can pan.9 On the View toolbar. click to reorient the view. 18 In the Project Browser. expand Views (all). The view follows the movement of the cursor. 12 Press and hold CTRL. and notice that the cursor displays as a magnifying glass This indicates that you are in zoom mode. 326 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and spin the building model by clicking the appropriate button in this dialog. Notice that the view name is updated in the title bar of the viewing window and in the Project Browser. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. . Move the mouse to pan the view. 11 Pan the view by clicking and dragging the cursor in the drawing area. 17 In the upper right corner of the viewing window. 15 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you can enable pan mode by pressing and holding the middle wheel button down. under 3D Views. and click Rename. NOTE If you have a pointing device with a middle wheel. . right-click {3D}. 16 In the Rename View dialog. and expand 3D Views. double-click My 3D View. 10 Move the cursor to the drawing window and notice that it now displays as a hand This means you are in pan mode. Save the current 3D view 14 In the Project Browser. you can enable zoom mode by rolling the middle wheel. 13 View the Dynamic View dialog in the lower left corner of the screen. zoom. and click OK.

expand Floor Plans. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera In this exercise. eye height. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. Create the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating a Perspective View with a Camera” on page 327. outside of the dimension lines. and double-click Level 1. Cameras define the eye point. Specify the second point in one of the rooms in the building. you create a perspective view of the building model with a camera. m_Viewing_Exercise. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. and click View.Notice that the view continues to display with hidden lines and no window tags. expand Views (all). right-click in the Design Bar. 3 Add the camera to the view by specifying two points: one for the camera position and the other for the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point in the top right corner of the drawing. the new view named 3D View 1 is displayed by default in a perspective view. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 327 . click Camera. After you specify the second point (the view target). and distance from the target.rvt. as shown in the following illustration.

Move the cursor up and down in the view to move the cursor forward and backward. Change the camera projection settings 6 On the View menu. down. Press and hold the left mouse button. 7 In the Dynamic View dialog.4 To resize the view to see the entire floor model. 8 To move the camera eye position higher or lower: ■ ■ ■ Click Dolly and move the cursor into the perspective view. 5 On the View menu. Move the cursor up. and sideways to see how the view changes. click the Walkthrough tab located at the bottom of the dialog. click Dynamically Modify View. 328 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Press and hold the left mouse button. select the blue control grips on the sides of the crop region and move them out. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 9 To move the camera forward and backward in the view: ■ ■ ■ Click Forward/Back and move the cursor into the perspective view. You can use the walkthrough controls in this dialog to move the camera position and change the view.

and target 12 On the Window menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All To Fit. 11 Adjust the view as shown in the following illustration. Press and hold the left mouse button. Move the cursor side to side in the view to rotate the view. You may need to reposition the view with the other controls. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 329 .10 To rotate the camera around the target: ■ ■ ■ Click Turn and move the cursor into the perspective view. height. Change the camera position. 13 On the View menu. Four views of the model display in the drawing area. click Tile.

16 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 1.14 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The camera and the view direction of the camera are displayed in the appropriate views. 330 | Chapter 9 Viewing . right-click 3D View 1. and click Show Camera. The border of the window that contains the Level 1 view highlights. double-click 3D View 1. under 3D Views. 15 In the Project Browser.

■ 3D View 1 immediately updates to show the change. select the camera target point (the magenta grip). Use a section box to clip the model 19 On the View toolbar. and move it to another location. and click Element Properties. click Model Graphics Style. and click Shading. Click OK. TIP The updated view depends on the location of the camera before you change the elevation values. click to create a new 3D view. 20 On the View Control Bar. 3D View 1 should update immediately after you move the target point of the camera. under Camera. right-click. enter 15000 for Eye Elevation and 1700 for Target Elevation. Creating a Perspective View with a Camera | 331 . 18 Change the target and eye elevation of the camera by modifying its properties: ■ ■ Select the camera in My 3D View.17 In My 3D View. In the Element Properties dialog.

23 In the Element Properties dialog. 24 Click the section box. 332 | Chapter 9 Viewing . 22 On the View menu. A section box is displayed around the model. The section box highlights and grips are displayed on its faces. A rotation tool is also displayed.21 Rotate the view as shown in the following illustration. and click OK. click View Properties. select Section Box. 25 Select and move the lower right grip on the section box closer to the model. under Extents. as shown in the following illustration.

and rotate the section box around the model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Creating a Section View In this exercise. you create a section view by sketching a section line in a plan view.26 Click and hold the rotation tool. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and maximize this view. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating a Section View” on page 333. double-click Level 1.rvt. click Section. m_Viewing_Exercise. Creating a Section View | 333 . expand Floor Plans. Sketch a section line in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.

and drag the section depth grip below the middle horizontal wall as shown in the following illustration. 4 On the Design Bar. Notice a dashed green box with blue grips is displayed on the section line. or in the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. double-click the section head. You may need to zoom closer to the walls in order to see the fill pattern. and then click to the right of the lower right wall to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration.3 Click to the left of the left wall of the building model. The box represents the extents of the section view as well as the viewing direction of the section. click Modify. select the section view. View the section 5 To view the section. NOTE Fill pattern is dependent on the zoom ratio. and click Open View. select Floor Plan: Level 1. 8 Select the section line. right-click. expand Sections. and click Find Referring Views. 7 In the Go To View dialog. 334 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and double-click Section 1.

click Modify. Notice the change in the view direction. double-click Level 1. Notice the change in section depth. Creating Elevation Views | 335 . 13 Click the control arrows to flip the section view. An elevation symbol displays at the end of the cursor. “Creating Elevation Views” on page 335. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add an elevation symbol 1 In the Project Browser. Creating Elevation Views In this exercise. Change the view direction of the section 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. move the cursor around the building model.rvt. under Floor Plans. you learn to create an elevation view in a project by adding an elevation symbol to a plan view. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Without clicking in the drawing area. click Elevation. 12 Select the section line. Notice that the elevation symbol arrow points to the nearest wall as you move through the building model. 10 Double-click the section head to display the section view. Control arrows are displayed near the section tag. click Modify. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You may need to adjust your zoom settings to see the elevation symbol. m_Viewing_Exercise. and select and move the section depth grip under the lower wall.9 On the Design Bar. 15 Double-click the section head to display the section view. double-click Level 1. 14 On the Design Bar.

Do not select the arrow. The elevation is named Elevation 1 . under Elevations.b. place the cursor inside the building facing the lobby entrance. The check mark in the right box indicates the current elevation view. and click. zoom in. 5 On the Design Bar. Elevation 1 . indicating the possible elevation views that you can create. and double-click the elevation symbol arrow. View the elevation 6 To view the new elevation. 336 | Chapter 9 Viewing .a.4 To create an elevation view of the building lobby. Make sure the elevation symbol is pointing towards the lobby doors. double-click Level 1.b. 10 In the Project Browser. The elevation symbol is displayed with four check boxes. 9 Select the box shown in the following illustration to add a new elevation view. 7 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. Elevation 1 .a by default. click Modify. double-click Elevation 1 . 8 Select the center of the elevation symbol.

12 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you can choose the wall fill color for a wall type. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors | 337 . This includes walls. you can set the fill pattern color for the brick to red. you can set the color of the coarse scale fill pattern for wall types. Controlling Fill Pattern Colors In this lesson. such as Brick on CMU.11 If you want to save your changes. click Save As. In addition. roofs. you learn to control the fill pattern colors of a material. where each layer is assigned a different material. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and other families. You can control the fill pattern color of the cut and surface patterns for objects that obtain their fill pattern definition from materials. You change the color of the cut and surface patterns in the brick material assigned to the exterior wall in the building model. For example. in a compound wall. you learn to control the fill pattern color of a material and set the coarse scale fill pattern color of a wall type. on the File menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. floors. in this case. click Training Files. such as the one below. Controlling the Fill Pattern Color of a Material In this exercise. a shade of gray.rvt. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and open Common\c_Showroom. This means that in views with a coarse level of detail. and the insulation color to pink. and applies to phasing override materials as well.

9 In the Materials dialog.Brick for Name. 2 On the Settings menu. click Color. 4 Under Cut Pattern. select red. Notice the different fill patterns assigned to each layer within the floor and wall structure. View the surface pattern of the exterior brick walls 6 In the Project Browser. and double-click 3D. The brick cut pattern on the left is displayed as red.Filled). expand Views (all). click Materials. expand Sections (Section Head . 5 In the Color dialog.Level 3. select Masonry . A color is assigned to both the Surface Pattern and Cut Pattern options in the dialog. 7 Zoom in on the brick pattern of the exterior walls. and click OK twice. 3 In the Materials dialog.Change the color of the brick cut pattern for the exterior walls 1 In the Project Browser. click Materials. The surface pattern of the brick is black. and double-click Wall/Floor Join . expand Views (all). 338 | Chapter 9 Viewing . Change the brick surface pattern from black to white 8 On the Settings menu. Each layer is designated by the material settings of the layer. expand 3D Views. select Masonry .Brick for Name.

c_Showroom. “Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type” on page 339. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type | 339 . you learn to set the coarse scale fill pattern color for a wall type.rvt. The surface pattern of the brick is now white. 3 Click Cancel to exit the dialog without making any changes. 11 In the Color dialog. View the detail level setting of the view 1 In the Project Browser. Setting the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern Color for a Wall Type In this exercise. and click OK twice. select white. click View Properties. expand Floor Plans. click Color. You change the coarse scale fill pattern from the default color of black to a shade of gray for a wall type. 2 On the View menu. and double-click Level 1. The view level of this view is set to display in Coarse detail as indicated by the Detail Level instance parameter value under Graphics. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Views (all). The walls in the floor plan that you work with are displayed with a gray fill pattern when displayed in a view with a coarse level of detail. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.10 Under Surface Pattern.

click in the Coarse Scale Fill Color value field. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. select Solid fill for Name. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. Notice that the surface pattern and color of the brick wall that display in a coarse detail level are not applied because the detail level is set to Fine. 14 If you want to save your changes. click in the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern parameter value field and click 9 In the Fill Patterns dialog. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and save the exercise file with a unique name. and click Fine. 7 In the Color dialog. Creating a View Plan Region In this lesson. the Coarse Scale Fill Color is black and the Coarse Scale Fill Pattern is set to none. 10 On the Design Bar.Change coarse scale fill pattern color of the arced wall 4 Select the south arced wall. on the File menu. By default. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. 13 Zoom in on the arced wall. The wall type is displayed as solid gray within any view where the Detail Level is set to Coarse. click Modify. View the arced wall in fine detail 11 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. although they may have 340 | Chapter 9 Viewing . click Save As. right-click. select a shade of gray. and click Element Properties. you work with a split-level building model that requires a different view range than the rest of the view. Plan regions are closed sketches that you can create in floor plan and reflected ceiling plan (RCP) views only. the plan regions cannot overlap each other. . double-click Level 2. click Edit/New. and click OK three times. 12 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. If you create more than one plan region in a file. click Detail Level.

coincident edges.rvt. Plan regions do not work with linked Revit Architecture files. and open Metric\m_Plan_Region. you create a plan region in the Level 1 floor plan of the following building model. If you are not familiar with view ranges in Revit Architecture. you can display the stepped portion of the walls in the Level 1 floor plan. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. line type. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and you cannot control their visibility. refer to the online Help for more information. By creating a plan region in the view with a different cut plane height. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 341 . or pattern. it does not display in the Level 1 floor plan. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan In this exercise. Because the stepped portion of the walls in the building model is above the cut plane height in the Level 1 floor plan view. line color. click Training Files.

and the view depth plane. 3 In the Level 1 view. click .View the Level 1 floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. view range. right-click in the Design Bar. the top and bottom clip planes. TIP If the View tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand Floor Plans. 342 | Chapter 9 Viewing . and double-click Level 1. Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the bottom right. click Lines. Add a plan region to view the stepped portion of the model 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. The cut plane height of the view range for this view is 1200 mm. You use the view range property to control the cut plane. expand Views (all). which is similar to the view range for plan views. sketch the plan region using the blue tick marks for guidance: ■ On the Design Bar. The stepped portion of the project walls and windows are not displayed because the cut plane does not intersect any of the model geometry above this height. ■ ■ ■ Specify a point at the intersection of the two dashed blue lines on the top left. and click View. In the following illustration. On the Options Bar. so you can view the height of the walls and windows. click Plan Region. the south elevation is also displayed. Plan regions have a single property.

This means that the plan region view is going to cut all geometry at 2800 mm above Level 1. The Level 1 floor plan should display as shown in the following illustration. you specify that the level used to define each plane (cut plane. click Finish Sketch. 4 Select the plan region. 8 Click Apply. Press ESC to end the command. Creating a Plan Region in a Floor Plan | 343 . The plan region displays as a dashed green line. When you select the plan region. enter 4000 for the Top Offset. top and bottom clip planes. and then click OK twice.■ ■ On the Design Bar. click Modify. right-click. and click Element Properties. select Parent View’s Level (Level 1) for Cut Plane. and enter 2800 for the cut plane Offset. under Extents. click Edit for View Range. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. the line turns red. 6 In the View Range dialog. By selecting Parent View’s Level. and view depth) in the view range is the same as the level used to define the corresponding plane in the parent view. 7 Because the top clip plane value cannot be set lower than the cut plane.

on the File menu. click Save As. and save the exercise file with a unique name. 10 If you want to save your changes. 11 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.The following illustration demonstrates how the level 1 floor plan view is being viewed with the plan region. 344 | Chapter 9 Viewing .

billboards. you learn to use the AccuRender® Radiosity and Raytrace features in Revit Architecture 2008 to create rendered interior and exterior views of your building information model. AccuRender is the rendering engine incorporated into Revit Architecture that is used to produce rendered views.Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs 10 In this tutorial. and to create walkthroughs of your building information model. to place and render decals to create signs. 345 . and posters.

you select a scene that defines the model environment. You work with a building model that already has material applied to it. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model In this exercise. and then raytrace the view to produce the final rendered exterior view. After you create the perspective view. the floor. When you complete these changes. you raytrace a region of the building that includes the exterior wall. change the material of the front terrace of the building from the default material to asphalt. and create the perspective view that you want to render. add realistic three-dimensional trees to the building site. you learn how to view and modify the material that is applied to a building component in a building model. you: ■ ■ ■ change the texture of the brick material applied to the exterior walls of the building. define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions on the front curtain wall. You also learn to create a new material and apply it to a building component. 346 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Rendering an Exterior View In this lesson. In this exercise. you learn how to create an exterior perspective view of a building model and render it with the AccuRender Raytrace feature. and the curtain wall to view and verify the material and texture changes. You learn to create and apply materials to a building model.

4 In the Element Properties dialog. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. right-click in the Design Bar. Verify that the material defined for the exterior finish layer (Layer 1) of the building model is Masonry . click Materials. 3 On the Options Bar. under Name. under Construction. verify that Co-house . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Properties dialog.rvt. click Training Files. Change the brick texture of the exterior wall finish material 7 On the Settings menu.Brick. select Masonry . View the finish material of the exterior walls 1 Verify that the 3D view of the townhouse building model is displayed. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. and click the tab in the context menu. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 347 . 8 In the Materials dialog. 9 Under AccuRender. click Wall. click . 6 Click Cancel three times to return to the 3D view of the building model without making any changes to the exterior finish at this time. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. and click Edit/New. click Edit for Structure.Cavity Wall .Heavyweight block is displayed for Type.Brick.

10 In the left pane of the Material Library dialog. under _accurender. click Duplicate. 19 Click OK four times. 348 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Modify.200mm.Plain. click Modify and select the terrace in front of the building. click Edit for Structure. 23 Under AccuRender. expand Metals. click Edit/New. expand Masonry and click Brick. 28 Select one of the curtain wall mullions on the exterior face of the building. 17 In the Edit Assembly dialog. and click . 25 Under Name. click Materials. click next to Texture to display the Material Library. and click Aluminum. 21 In the Materials dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog. Define a new polished aluminum material and apply it to the curtain wall mullions 20 On the Settings menu. Change the material of the terrace from the default material to asphalt 13 On the Design Bar. select Carib. Polished and click OK. select Site . under Construction. 11 Under Name. enter Aluminum. You can view the new brick texture when you raytrace a region of the building in a later step. select Polished. for Layer 2. 24 In the Material Library. 18 In the Materials dialog. under Name. 27 On the Design Bar. 14 On the Options Bar.Asphalt. 12 Click OK twice.Running. under Name.A preview of the brick texture that is currently assigned to the walls is displayed in the right pane of the Material Library. . 22 In the New Material dialog. verify that Floor : Floor 1 displays in the Type Selector. and click 15 In the Element Properties dialog. under _accurender. 26 Click OK twice. click in the Material field that contains Default Floor.

and click OK. and draw the rectangular region shown in the following illustration. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. 33 Click OK three times. and then click . and curtain wall mullions to which you made material changes. under Name. Applying Materials and Textures to the Building Model | 349 . click . under Materials and Finishes. This completes the changes in materials and textures that you make for the building model.TIP If you do not select the curtain wall mullion on the first selection. click No. click Edit/New. select Aluminum. Make sure the region includes the exterior walls. 35 Move the cursor over the building model. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. Raytrace a region of the building to view the material changes that you made 34 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. select Exterior under Type. Polished. select the curtain wall mullion again. 29 On the Options Bar. click Region Raytrace. 36 In the Scene Selection dialog. press TAB to cycle your selection through different building model components. 32 In the Materials dialog. verify that New is selected. When Curtain Wall Mullions: Rectangular Mullion displays in the Status Bar at the bottom of the screen. floor. click in the Material field. 37 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.

producing a photorealistic effect. and curtain wall mullions are rendered (this takes a few moments). when you render an exterior view of the model. expand Views (all).rvt. m_Cohouse. Add red maple trees to the site 1 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . In a later exercise. 38 On the Design Bar. “Adding Trees to the Site” on page 350. click Display Model to end the Region Raytrace command and redisplay the building model in hidden line wireframe. floor. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Cnst. 39 Proceed to the next exercise. you place two different types of trees on the building site.The portion of the building that you selected is raytraced and the materials that you changed and applied to the exterior walls. the leaves of the trees display as indicated by the season and location specified in the render scene settings. and double-click 1st Flr. expand Floor Plans. Adding Trees to the Site In this exercise.

and add it to the site 6 On the Design Bar. and click to place a tree. right-click in the Design Bar. Continue to place trees until you have added several red maples to the building site as shown in the following illustration. select any of the deciduous trees. click Site Component. Create a new type of tree. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. 7 In the Type Selector. 5 Move the cursor to a location on the building site.2 Zoom out so you can easily view the area surrounding the building model. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.Deciduous : Acer Rubrum . Available tree types are listed in the Type Selector by their Latin names. Adding Trees to the Site | 351 . 4 In the Type Selector. and click Site Component. and click . The tree that you selected in this step is a red maple.9 Meters. click Modify. and click Site. select M_Tree .

and then click display the Plant Library. 11 In the Type Properties dialog. you define the exterior perspective view of the building model that you want to render. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. m_Cohouse. expand Trees and Shrubs. and click Deciduous. Creating a Perspective View In this exercise. 12 In the Plant Library. “Creating a Perspective View” on page 352. The black oak is shorter than the red maple trees that you added to the site. 14 In the Type Properties dialog. as shown in the following illustration. enter Black Oak. and click OK.rvt. click in the Value field for Plant Name. 16 Move the cursor to the building site. 9 In the Type Properties dialog.8 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Proceed to the next exercise. to 17 Press ESC to end tree placement. and click OK twice. Black. select Black Oak for Type Comments. 10 In the Name dialog. under Other. under accurender. 15 Under Other. 13 Under Name. and click OK. click Duplicate. and place two black oak trees. enter 7000mm for Plant Height. select Oak. 352 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Edit/New. under Identity Data.

view open. Cnst. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and the camera target point: ■ ■ Specify the first point on the site facing the building to position the camera. 3 Select and move the crop boundary grips until the perspective view displays as in the following illustration. on the View tab of the Design Bar. Creating a Perspective View | 353 . click Camera. The new perspective view is displayed.Place a camera in the first floor view 1 With the 1st Flr. Specify the second point in front of the building facade to define the target point of the camera.

5 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. and click Show Camera. double-click 1st Flr. view. 6 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust the field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. The camera position is displayed in the 1st Flr. right-click 3D View 1 (the default perspective view name). The red triangle represents the FOV (field of vision) angle and the back clipping plane of the view. Cnst. 354 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .Modify the camera position and back clipping plane in the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under Views (all). Cnst. expand 3D Views.

double-click Exterior. 8 In the Rename View dialog.7 In the Project Browser. “Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View” on page 355. and click OK. enter Exterior. and environment settings that you use to render the view.rvt. date. m_Cohouse. lighting. Display the perspective view 1 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. you select a scene and specify time. place. and click Rename. under 3D Views. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View In this exercise. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 355 . 9 Proceed to the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. right-click 3D View 1.

and click Sun.You must define a scene because this is the first time settings are being applied to this view. 5 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 7 Under Date. and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. click the Solar Angles tab. under Scene Settings. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to adjust the minutes precisely. enter 10 (October) for Month and 5 for Day. click OK to accept the existing scene (Scene 1). and drag the slider to set the time to 2:30 PM. 356 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 6 Select By Date. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. Time. 8 Under Time. click Settings.

verify that Automatic Sky is selected. and enter bo. Render the perspective view 24 On the Design Bar. The Ground Plane tab displays. Dark. under Scene Settings. under Scene Settings.9 Click the Place tab. USA. click Site. select Ground Plane. select Grass. 13 Enter . and select Boston. 28 If you are prompted to turn off the lights in the scene.20 for Cloudiness. 20 In the Name list. 25 Enter 150 for Resolution. select Good for Quality. under Background Color. 19 In the Material Library. click Capture Rendering. 10 Click in the Cities list. The rendered exterior perspective view is displayed. Rye. The rendered view is saved in the project and can be accessed from the Project Browser. 22 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. 16 In the Environment dialog. 18 Click Material. click No. 11 Scroll down. click Environment. 27 On the Options Bar. Save the rendered view 29 On the Design Bar. 12 Click the Settings Tab. 23 Under Raytrace Settings. click Image Size. 21 Click OK twice.) 14 Click OK. MA. 17 Under Advanced. and click OK. 26 On the Design Bar. 15 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. and click OK. select Autumn for Plant Season. under _accurender. Selecting a Scene and Rendering the View | 357 . click .00 (many clouds. This setting produces a level of cloudiness in the sky that ranges from 0 (no clouds) to 1. click Raytrace.

and finally. m_Cohouse. you render an interior view of the building model that you worked with in the previous lesson. 32 If you want to save this exercise. Adding RPC People In this exercise. “Rendering an Interior View” on page 358. RPC people are represented by a circle in plan view and resemble real people only when rendered in a 3D view. 358 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . on the File menu. click Save As. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.30 On the Design Bar. Cnst. expand Renderings. 33 Proceed to the next lesson. and double-click 2nd Flr.rvt. To create the rendered scene. use both Radiosity and Raytracing to render the view. define the view and render scene settings. click Display Model to end rendering and redisplay the wireframe perspective view of the building model. expand Floor Plans. Rendering an Interior View In this lesson. Redisplay the rendered view 31 In the Project Browser under Views (all). and save the exercise file with a unique name. Open second floor plan to display the interior scene that you will render 1 In the Project Browser under Views (all). you add two RPC people to the interior view that you render in a later exercise. and double-click Exterior to display the rendered view of the townhouse that you saved. you add ArchVision realpeople (RPC people) to the floor plan of the second floor.

3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. click Component. select M_RPC Female: Cathy.2 Zoom in on the left side of the living room as shown. 5 On the Options Bar. 7 Repeat steps 4 . 4 In the Type Selector. Adding RPC People | 359 . and then move the cursor to rotate her so she is facing up and to the right (northeast). 6 Click to place Cathy to the right of the sofa and below the table. select Rotate after placement.6 to select and place M_RPC Male: Alex to the right of Cathy and facing up and to the left (northwest).

360 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Camera. 2 Add the camera to the view by specifying points for the camera position and target point: ■ Specify the first point on the floor plan facing the table and RPC people to place the camera. Add a camera 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. “Creating the Interior Perspective View” on page 360. you create the interior perspective view that you will render in the final exercise in this lesson. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt.8 Proceed to the next exercise. m_Cohouse. Creating the Interior Perspective View In this exercise.

■ Specify the target point of the camera in front of the corner of the table. but you must adjust the field of vision and far clipping plane to display more of the view. double-click 2nd Flr. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 361 . 3 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. The interior perspective is displayed. Cnst.

and click Rename. 7 In the Crop Region Size dialog. under Size. enter 178 mm for Height. double-click 3D View 1 to redisplay the interior perspective view. right-click 3D View 1. 5 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. 362 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .4 Select and move the FOV boundary grip to adjust field of vision and back clipping plane as shown in the following illustration. enter 229 mm for Width. 8 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Resize the perspective view 6 On the Options Bar. and click OK. click the dimensions for Size.

click View Properties. click to display the 3D view of the building model. Creating the Interior Perspective View | 363 . 11 On the View menu. and select the section box. and click OK. 14 On the Design Bar. A section box is displayed around the building model.9 In the Rename View dialog. click Modify. 13 In the Element Properties dialog. select Section Box. enter Interior. 12 On the View menu. Grips are displayed on the section box. click Shading to view the effects of the section box when you add it. 15 Select and move the section box grips until only the room that you added RPC people to and that you want to render is visible. Add a section box to limit the extents of the rendered view 10 On the View toolbar. under Extents. and click OK.

and Place from the Specify Solar Angles list. 8 Under Date. and environment settings used to render the view. 364 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . select Interior. double-click Interior to display the interior perspective view. under 3D Views. 16 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. on the Main tab. 11 Click in the Cities list. Time. Select the render scene settings 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Creating a New Render Scene In this exercise. and click OK. place. TIP Use the left and right arrow keys to precisely adjust the minutes.This process allows you to limit the geometry that will be rendered when you create a rendering of your interior view. click the Solar Angles tab.rvt. 3 In the Scene Selection dialog. and enter Interior Scene for Name. Notice that the name of the tab changes to Date and Time. verify that Daylight Savings Time is selected. you create a render scene to specify the time. and click Sun. click Environment. under Background Color. specify a file location and name for the scene settings. date. and drag the slider to set the time to 8:30 PM. 9 Under Time. 4 Under Type. 10 Click the Place tab. and click Save. 7 Select By Date. 5 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. enter 6 (June) for Month and 6 for Day. click OK. By limiting the geometry. m_Cohouse. and select Boston. and enter bo. “Creating a New Render Scene” on page 364. 14 Click Save. 17 In the Environment dialog. 15 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. 12 Scroll down. 6 In the Sun and Sky Settings dialog. verify that Automatic Sky is selected. Display the interior perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. click Settings. you reduce the rendering time. USA. under Scene Settings. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under Scene Settings. 13 Click the Settings tab. MA. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Use Sun and Shadow Settings from view. select New.

select {3D}. 20 In the Material Library. When you define daylights for the curtain wall panels.18 Under Advanced. select Summer for Plant Season. such as windows and doors. You can select families with transparent materials. 23 In the Render Scene Settings dialog. you define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall and render the view. click Daylights. double-click {3D}. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View In this exercise. click Radiate. click Site. 22 Click OK twice. and click OK. 2 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. Curtain Wall 1). you allow sunlight to pass through the panels when you render the view. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. Render the perspective view 4 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. click OK. 3 Select the curtain wall on the second floor (Walls: Curtain Wall. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. under accurender. 5 On the Design Bar. under Use View’s Section Box. 6 In the Radiosity Information dialog. m_Cohouse. The 3D view of the building model with the section box is displayed. The Ground Plane tab displays. 21 In the Name list. select Ground Plane. as daylight sources. select Grass. 19 Click Material. Defining Daylights and Rendering the View | 365 . Dark. under 3D Views. Rye. double-click Interior. “Defining Daylights and Rendering the View” on page 365.rvt. 24 Under Scene Settings. Define daylights for the glazed panels of the curtain wall 1 In the Project Browser.

The RPC people do not display in the view until you raytrace them in the next steps. on the File menu. click Raytrace. 10 Close the exercise file. 8 On the Options Bar. 9 If you want to save your changes. which can take several minutes.The radiosity process. Light bounce is calculated for each individual light. and click The raytraced perspective view is displayed and now includes the RPC people. the following rendered view is displayed. and save the exercise file with a unique name. You learned to use both the Radiosity and Raytracing features included in the AccuRender render engine. begins. select Medium (150 dpi) for Resolution. When radiate completes. By completing the two rendering lessons included in this tutorial. 7 On the Design Bar. 366 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . you rendered an exterior and an interior view. . click Save As.

In a plan view. you learn how to create and record animated walkthroughs of your building models in Revit Architecture 2008. You create a walkthrough that begins in the breakfast room of the townhouse. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. elevation. and you create it by specifying points that create the spline. proceeds through the dining room. you must select or define a scene. but you can also create it in a 3D orthographic view. Recording a Walkthrough After you create a walkthrough. Usually you define the walkthrough path in a plan view. click Settings ➤ Project Units. but you can also define it in a 3D. You can edit the walkthrough path by selecting and moving the key frames. you can also specify the height of the camera along the walkthrough path. which is the path that a camera will follow through your building model. you learn how to create and edit a walkthrough of the first floor of a townhouse. and change unit formats as desired.Creating and Recording Walkthroughs In this lesson. If you prefer to use Metric values. you can record the walkthrough by exporting it to an AVI file that you can play with any available video player independent of your Revit Architecture software. and ends in the far corner of the living room. or section view. Creating and Editing a Walkthrough The first step in creating a walkthrough is to define the walkthrough path. Additional frames that comprise the walkthrough are created between the key frames. The walkthrough path is a spline. Creating a Walkthrough In this exercise. NOTE Some Imperial values are used by default in this exercise. Creating and Recording Walkthroughs | 367 . you can select one of the following display options for the building model in your walkthrough: ■ ■ ■ ■ Wireframe Hidden Line (wireframe view with hidden lines) Shaded or Shaded with Edges AccuRender (Raytrace) IMPORTANT If you record your walkthrough AVI with the AccuRender display option. A walkthrough is created in a 3D perspective view by default. Each point becomes a key frame in the walkthrough.rvt. When you export your walkthrough to an AVI. and open Common\c_Townhouse.

or the first key frame. TIP If the tab that you need does not display in the Design Bar. 368 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click the tab in the context menu. Edit and play the walkthrough 7 In the Project Browser under Views (all). of the walkthrough. expand Floor Plans. 4 Move the cursor under the text label in the Breakfast room. expand Views (all). click Walkthrough. right-click in the Design Bar. 6 After you specify the final point of the walkthrough path in the Living room. and click to specify the start point.Create a walkthrough of the first floor of the building model 1 In the Project Browser. and double-click 1st Floor. The floor plan of the first floor of the townhouse is displayed. on the Options Bar. verify that Perspective is selected to create the walkthrough in a 3D perspective view. 3 On the Options Bar. click . expand Walkthroughs. 5 Specify four additional points to define key frame positions on the walkthrough path as shown in the following illustration. and double-click Walkthrough 1.

The last frame of the walkthrough is displayed. 9 On the Options Bar. If it is not. click the dimensions for Size to change the size of the walkthrough frame crop region. select the crop boundary. enter 16" for Width and 9" for Height. click Edit Walkthrough. 13 On the Options Bar. surrounded by a crop boundary with grips as shown in the following illustration. Your frame may look a bit different from the frame in the illustration because the walkthrough path is not precisely the same. and click OK. The frame that is displayed is frame 300 of 300 frames in the walkthrough. click Zoom ➤ Zoom Out (2x). verify Field of view is selected. Two options are displayed on the Options Bar: Edit Walkthrough and Size. Creating a Walkthrough | 369 . 14 Click . 12 On the View menu. The walkthrough controls are displayed on the Options Bar. 10 In the Crop Region Size dialog. 11 Under Change. 8 Verify that the crop boundary of the walkthrough frame is selected and is displayed as red with blue grips. and select the crop boundary.

press ESC. 370 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . 16 On the Options Bar. c_Townhouse. click Edit Walkthrough. Clearing this option disables the far clipping plane of the camera. and click OK. enter 1 for Frame. you learn how to edit the walkthrough path and change the camera position in the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position In this exercise. The current display is wireframe with hidden lines. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 17 Click . 18 When the walkthrough stops playing. click .rvt. NOTE To stop playing the walkthrough at any time. enter 60 to reduce the total number of frames in the walkthrough from 300 to 60. double-click 1st Floor.15 In the Walkthrough Frames dialog. Edit the walkthrough path 4 On the Options Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. proceed to the next exercise. Change the properties of the camera 1 In the Project Browser under Floor Plans. clear Far Clip Active. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. and press ENTER to set the walkthrough to play from the beginning (the key frame). The walkthrough path is displayed in the floor plan of the first floor. under Extents. The walkthrough plays. “Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position” on page 370.

The camera is displayed at the first key frame position on the walkthrough path in the breakfast room. 6 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the target point of the camera (the magenta grip). and adjust it to view the kitchen as shown in the following illustration. Changing the Walkthrough Path and Camera Position | 371 . Your walkthrough path may vary from the one in the illustration so do not be concerned if the camera displays at a slightly different location. Blue grips are displayed at each key frame. select Path for Controls. You can move any camera target or key frame position.

9 On the Options Bar. When you export the walkthrough. and drag it to the location shown in the following illustration. the Full Frames (Uncompressed) option is available to all users. but that do not suffer loss due to compression quality. you record the walkthrough that you created in the previous exercise by exporting it to an AVI. NOTE The available Compressor options are specific to your current computer system. specify 15 for Frames per Second. 372 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs . click Export ➤ Walkthrough. shaded. It produces files that are larger than compressed files.7 Click the third key frame position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. and click Save. without opening Revit Architecture 2008. Play the walkthrough to view the changes that you made 8 In the Project Browser. shaded with edges. 2 In the Save As dialog. and then click to play the walkthrough. 1 On the File menu. you can select to display the walkthrough in wireframe. 3 Under Output Length. select <Shading> for Display mode. and click OK. specify a path and a file name for the AVI. If you are unsure of what option to use. select any codec (compression/decompression) that is available on your system for Compressor. under Walkthroughs. 5 In the Video Compression dialog. 6 Double-click the AVI file to play the walk-through from the location that you specified in step 3. 10 Proceed to the next exercise. double-click Walkthrough 1. Recording the Walkthrough In this exercise.rvt. “Recording the Walkthrough” on page 372. 4 Under Format. c_Townhouse. The AVI is recorded. click Edit Walkthrough. hidden line. or with AccuRender raytracing.

perhaps to 6” wide x 4” height. Reducing the size of the output images and managing the frame rate lets you create realistic and smooth movement. specifying the number of frames. and with a frame rate of from 15-30 frames per second. on the File menu. then you are moving from the breakfast area to the living room window in 10 seconds. 9 Close the exercise file without saving your changes.7 Try creating other walkthroughs. Recording the Walkthrough | 373 . and save the exercise file with a unique name. If you had 150 frames and a frame rate of 15 seconds. click Save As. reducing the size of the image. 8 If you want to save this exercise.

374 | Chapter 10 Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs .

you create interior and exterior views of a building information model to be used in solar studies that you define. In this tutorial. you learn how a solar study of different perspective views of a building can support passive solar design by showing where shadows fall during the warmest time of the day and at different times throughout the year. You specify settings for summer and winter solstice solar studies and export one solar study as a video and the other as a series of images.Creating Solar Studies 11 The ability to create solar studies for a specific project and site can be very valuable for creating sustainable designs. Exterior solar studies can show the impact of shadows on a site by the terrain and the surrounding buildings. 375 . More specifically. Interior solar studies can illustrate how effectively natural light penetrates inside a building during specific times of the day and year.

A 3D view is created. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 376 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and open Common\c_Solar_Study. click Training Files. you customize a 3D external view of the building to enhance Solar Study analysis. ■ ■ ■ A courtyard perspective view illustrates how shadows impact the site and buildings.Creating Views for Solar Studies In this lesson. and double-click 01 Entry.Courtyard View In this exercise. A plan view provides information on how sunlight and shadows play on the floor of a building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. expand Floor Plans. click Camera. as shown. 3 Click in the lower right corner of the drawing area outside of the courtyard to place the camera and click in the upper left corner above the courtyard to place the camera target point. 1 In the Project Browser. A cut section view enables you to see the effect of shadows and light on the interior of a building. Creating a Solar Study . you learn to create three 3D views of a building information model for use with solar studies. expand Views (all). Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. The view you create may differ slightly from the illustrations in the exercises because of minor variations in camera placement.

and save the exercise file with a unique name. expand 3D Views. enter Solar Study . under Floor Plans. as shown. and click OK. “Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View” on page 377. 8 In the Project Browser. click Modify. click Save As. and click Rename. click Spin and move the cursor in the drawing area to adjust the view.4 On the View toolbar. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. if necessary. 6 On the Design Bar. as shown. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View | 377 .Courtyard View. 9 In the Rename View dialog. Create section 1 In the Project Browser. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. 7 Click the view boundary to select it. 5 In the Dynamic View dialog. 2 Enter ZR to zoom in on the house. you create a section cutaway view.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. right-click 3D View 1. double-click 01 Entry. click to reorient the view. 10 On the File menu. Creating a Solar Study Section Cutaway View In this exercise. and drag the blue circular controls to see more of the perspective view.

and click Rename. to reorient the view. click Section. click . 5 On the Design Bar. 8 In the Rename View dialog. 4 Click to the right of reference plane 9 between A and B and. enter Section for Solar Study Cutaway. 6 To view the section.3 On the Design Bar. double-click the section head. and then click to the left outside of the house to sketch the horizontal section line shown in the following illustration. Create 3D section view 9 On the View toolbar. expand Sections. and click OK. right-click Section 1. click 10 On the View toolbar. 7 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 378 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

NOTE With the detail level set to Coarse. then select Medium. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. as shown. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click Rename. 13 On the Design Bar. 17 To hide the section box. click Modify. changing to Medium or Fine provides a better view for a shadow study. such as floor plans and ceiling plans. and click OK. click Callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. 3 Click in the upper left corner and lower right corner to sketch a selection around the site. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. In some cases. under 3D Views. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. so no shadows will be cast from these elements. as shown. 14 In the Project Browser.11 In the Dynamic View dialog. and click OK. 15 In the Rename View dialog. Typical plan views. then Fine. NOTE A plan view of a shadow study should be created in a 3D view with top orientation. to expand the dialog. double-click 01 Entry. some structural elements are shown as a single line rather than solid and do not cast a shadow. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view down and to the right. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. clear Section Boxes. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View In this exercise. right-click {3D}. you create a plan cutaway view. do not display many elements in 3D. under Floor Plans. enter Solar Study Section Cutaway. “Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View” on page 379. select Section: 12 In the Dynamic View dialog. 18 On the File menu. including the house.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. On the Annotation Categories tab. click Detail Level ➤ Coarse. and under Orient to a View. click Save. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 379 . click Section for Solar Study Cutaway.

as shown. and click Rename. 9 In the Dynamic View dialog click to expand the dialog. Create 3D Plan View 7 On the View toolbar. 12 Select the section box in the drawing area. 6 In the Rename View dialog. as shown. to reorient the view. 5 In the Project Browser. 10 In the Dynamic View dialog. 380 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . and click OK. right-click Callout of 01 Entry. under Floor Plans. and under Orient to a View. enter Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. 11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. double-click Callout of 01 Entry. click . 13 Select the blue down arrow control at the bottom of the model and drag down to expose the full first level of the model. click 8 On the View toolbar. 14 Select the blue up arrow control in the center of the model and drag up to expose the second floor of the building.4 In the Project Browser. select Floor Plan: Solar Study Callout for Plan Cutaway. click Spin and move the cursor to adjust the view to the right and back to view the front side.

21 On the File menu. under 3D Views. click Save. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. right-click {3D}. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. Display study views 22 In the Project Browser. double-click each of the sun study 3D views that you created in this lesson: ■ ■ ■ Solar Study . enter Solar Study Plan Cutaway. and click OK. 18 In the Project Browser. 19 In the Rename View dialog. 20 On the View Control Bar. 17 On the View Control Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. so you can see into the building from the top. Creating a Solar Study Plan Cutaway View | 381 .Courtyard View Solar Study Plan Cutaway Solar Study Section Cutaway These views will be used in additional lessons in this tutorial.15 Select the Roof. under 3D Views. and click Rename. 16 On the View Control Bar.

and click OK. . expand Views (all). expand 3D Views. and click Duplicate.Courtyard View. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. and click OK. Click the Single-Day tab. single-day. click Changing the place in this dialog changes the setting defined for the project. 11 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. and time. you specify the location. MA. CA. select Los Angeles. enter Summer Solstice. For this study. as well as a time interval for the frames of the solar animation. click . 10 Under Place. and preview the effects of each study as an animation. The Sun and Shadows Settings dialog displays. 8 Confirm that One Day Solar Study . click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. USA. 6 Click the Multi-Day tab. Los Angeles. The animations of solar activity at a particular place and time allow you to study the impact of natural light and shadows on the buildings and site. You can create a still. For the Single-Day solar study. and double-click Solar Study . 5 Click the Single-Day tab. date. 3 Select Cast Shadows. Dataset Continue to use the customized c_solar_study. For the Multi-Day solar study. 9 In the Name dialog. 7 Create a Single-Day study from an existing study. click .Boston. Creating Solar Studies . 382 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . or multi-day solar study. for City.rvt dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 On the View Control Bar. You can change the intensity of the shadows by dragging the slider in the Shadow field. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and time range. you create a solar study for winter and summer solstice.Saving Solar Study Settings and Previewing Animations In this lesson. date range.Summer and Winter Solstice In this exercise. you specify the location. Create summer solstice study 1 In the Project Browser. USA is selected. leave the slider at 50. you create a single-day solar study for the summer solstice.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. confirm that Summer Solstice. Previewing Solar Study Animation In this exercise. 2 On the View Control Bar. verify that the value is set to 15 minutes. Los Angeles is selected. 8 On the Options Bar. select June 22. under Frame. . you can specify to go to a specific frame in the solar study animation: ■ ■ Under Frame. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. Under Frame. click Save. For Time Range. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. You can select the level to be used for shadow display. Los Angeles. you preview the solar studies you created in the previous exercise. click To display the next key frame. 19 On the File menu. ■ ■ To display the previous sequential frame. Notice that 01 Entry is selected as the level. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click OK. under Sun and Shadows Settings. 20 Proceed to the next exercise. Los Angeles. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click the control buttons to preview the animation: ■ To display the previous key frame. Create winter solstice study 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. you want to see how the shadows fall on the terrain and not for a specific level. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click OK. for Date. 7 On the Options Bar. on the Single-Day tab. “Previewing Solar Study Animation” on page 383. Clear Ground Plane at Level. and click OK. 13 Select Ground Plane at Level. 2006. 18 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. select December 22. and click OK. click . NOTE If you clear Sunrise to sunset.Courtyard View is currently displayed.12 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog: ■ ■ For Date. enter Winter Solstice. 16 In the Name dialog. 2006. verify that Sunrise to sunset is selected. enter 20 and press ENTER. 14 In this case. click OK. ■ For Time Interval. and click Duplicate. Preview winter solstice animation 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study . select Winter Solstice. click . enter 10 and press ENTER. click . Previewing Solar Study Animation | 383 . you can specify the start and stop times for the solar study. 6 On the View Control Bar.

you export the summer solstice solar study as an AVI file. approximately as shown. You also export the winter solstice solar study as a series of PNG format images. and click OK. 11 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click outside of the text box to end the command. . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. click . 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. showing the progression at 15-minute intervals for the location and date specified. 13 On the View Control Bar. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Los Angeles. Exporting Solar Studies In this lesson. click . under Sun and Shadows Settings. AVI files are standalone video files that can be easily distributed and viewed by colleagues or clients. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click To play the animation from start to finish. 3 Label areas in the house: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. 14 On the Options Bar. 384 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . ■ NOTE You can stop viewing the animation at any time by clicking Cancel in the Status Bar. under Floor Plans. click . Each PNG is a still image of a sequential frame in the animation. PNG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. approximately as shown. The solar study animation plays. double-click 01 Entry. click OK. 2 Enter ZR and zoom in on the house. Preview summer solstice animation 9 On the View Control Bar. Click and enter Dining. Click in the drawing area and enter Living Area. Exporting the Study as AVI In this exercise. select Summer Solstice. you annotate a floor plan to identify different activities for the building and export a solar study for a cutaway view as an AVI video file. on the Single-Day tab. click Shadows ➤ Preview Solar Study. Annotate view for solar study 1 In the Project Browser.■ To display the next sequential frame. click Text.

6 On the View Control Bar. On the Options Bar. NOTE The building is a shell and you are considering alternative layouts for the interior space. on the Single-Day tab. as shown. and click OK. click . click . and double-click Solar Study Section Cutaway. select Section Boxes. and click OK. 11 To display the section box. Exporting the Study as AVI | 385 . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click Lines. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. click OK. 8 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. ■ ■ ■ Click in the drawing area and sketch a rectangle around the living area. expand 3D Views. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.4 Sketch rooms: ■ On the Design Bar. Los Angeles. 5 In the Project Browser. On the Annotation Categories tab. Click in the drawing area and sketch around the Dining area. Sketching the living and dining room areas in the house and using a solar study to determine where direct light is in the floor plan helps to determine the best layout. as shown. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. verify that Cast Shadows is selected. select Summer Solstice.

14 Click outside of the section box. verify that Hidden Line is selected. clear Section Boxes. and enter 5 to 50. Under Format. for Model Graphics Style. you only enter one dimension and the other one is calculated automatically. Export as AVI 16 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. To maintain the proportions of the frame. and click OK.12 In the drawing area. enter 450 in the first field (width). 17 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon on the left to save the file to the computer Desktop. select AVI Files. On the Annotation Categories tab. Under Output Length. The equivalent zoom percentage is also set if you specify frame dimensions. select Frame range. 386 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. verify that the value is set to 15. 13 Click the right blue control and drag the right edge of the section box to reveal the roof overhang. For File name. enter Summer Solar Study Section Cutaway . NOTE ZR for Zoom To Region to make it easier to select the control. For Frames per second. For Save as type. For Dimensions. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed. as shown. if necessary. 15 To hide the section box.Los Angeles. select the section box. and enter ZF to zoom to fit the building to the drawing area.

6 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. such as JPEG. Under Format. enter Winter Solar Study Section Cutaway . as shown: Exporting a Study as PNG | 387 .NOTE The first and last few frames (sunrise and sunset) show large triangular shadows from the terrain. click Save. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 19 In the Video Compression dialog. 20 On the File menu. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the Desktop. of the animation separately. TIFF. 2 On the View Control Bar. 18 In the Save As dialog. enter 450 in the first field (width). BMP. The animation plays as the files are saved to the Desktop. Export as PNG 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Section Cutaway is displayed. 8 In the Save As dialog. To view the animation. or GIF. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Under Output Length. click . or any single-frame format. you export the Winter Solstice Solar Study to create a solar animation that is output as individual ping (PNG format) graphics. it is recommended that you first create a folder to export to because the export process creates several files. Limiting the range from 5 to 50 omits these frames. on the Single-Day tab. “Exporting a Study as PNG” on page 387. for Model Graphics Style. In this example. For Dimensions. For File name. For Save as type. click OK. for Compressor. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. and click OK. and click in the second field (height) to see the value dynamically changed.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select PNG. 3 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Los Angeles. The resulting PNG images are date and time stamped. NOTE Uncompressed AVI files can be zipped to reduce the file size.Los Angeles. verify that the value is set to 15. and click OK. depending on the Frame Range. For Frames per second. NOTE When you export to PNG. click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise. select Winter Solstice. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. select Frame range. you open each image. Exporting a Study as PNG In this lesson. and enter 5 to 10. The AVI can then typically be played from within the zip file. or frame. the Frame Range was set to just 5 files to avoid cluttering the Desktop. 7 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click the Desktop icon. click Save. verify that Hidden Line is selected.

rvt dataset you saved in the previous lesson. you create an internal solar study for a plan to determine where shadows fall inside the building during the warmest part of the day. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create a 3D view of a plan and create a solar study to animate the effects of natural light on the inside of the building. under 3D Views. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. 388 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . Creating an Internal Plan Solar Study In this lesson.9 On the File menu. Creating an Internal Plan Study In this exercise. Create plan interior view 1 In the Project Browser. click Save. 2 Select the section box in the drawing area.

Creating an Internal Plan Study | 389 . as shown. 5 Select the roof. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Top.NOTE Enter ZF for Zoom To Fit if necessary to see the entire building on the screen. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. 3 Select the blue left arrow control and drag it to the left to expose the roof overhang and posts. and on the View Control Bar. Hiding the roof allows you to see how shadows fall on the interior floor of the building.

and click Duplicate. 390 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. 18 On the File menu. clear Section Boxes. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. For Time. Click Detail Level ➤ Fine. and click OK.Create multi-day solar study 6 To hide the section box. click the Multi-Day tab. and click OK. 12 In the Name dialog.Week Interval. click Save. MA. click 10 On the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Click the Desktop icon. you compare how shadows display when the project is oriented to Project North and when it is changed to True North. 11 Select Multi Day Solar Study . 15 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. 16 In the Video Compression dialog. USA. and click OK. In the Save As dialog. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. click Shadows ➤ Solar Study Off. under Sun and Shadows Settings. On the Annotation Categories tab. for Compressor. For Time Interval. 13 Specify values for the multi-day study: ■ ■ ■ . 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Orienting to True North for Solar Studies In this lesson. 8 On the View Control Bar.Boston. for File name enter 2pm . 9 On the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. for name enter 2pm Los Angeles Plan Cutaway. and click Save.Los Angeles . Clear Ground Plane at Level so that the shadows fall on the terrain. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 7 Adjust settings on the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Shadows ➤ Shadows On. select Full Frames (Uncompressed). specify 2:00 pm. and click OK. 17 On the View Control Bar. Notice that the dining area receives full sun during the warmest part of the day. select One week.

select Cast Shadows. Notice that the shadows display in an upward direction in the cutaway view. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. For example.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Orienting to True North Drafting convention is that project north is the top of the view. click . 7 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. so you may need to make your own adjustment for specific studies. you would set the time to 1:00 PM rather than 12:00 PM. 11 Under Date and Time. change the time back to 12:00 PM. select Summer Solstice. and click OK. 2 On the View Control Bar. click the Still tab. 10 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. Then. specify 11:00 AM for time. 5 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 9 Under Date and Time. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. on the Still tab. 4 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. and click OK. 8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. to see the sun at its highest point on June 22. NOTE Solar Studies do not have a Daylight Savings setting. View still solar studies 1 Confirm that the 3D View Solar Study Plan Cutaway is displayed in the drawing area. Orienting to True North | 391 . In this exercise. and select Winter Solstice. click . and click OK. click . Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. you create still solar studies and observe that the shadows extend straight up when the project is set to the default orientation of Project North. you change the orientation to True North to see how the change in orientation can impact solar study accuracy. click Apply.

On the Options Bar. double-click 01 Entry. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. and click OK. under Graphics. click the Still tab. for Orientation. enter 45 and press ENTER to set the angle of rotation. 13 On the View Control Bar. in the Angle from Project to True North field. under Floor Plans. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. select True North.12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 392 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies . click OK. and select Winter Solstice. Rotate project to True North 17 In the Project Browser. and select View Properties. Notice that the project rotates in the view. 18 Orient the project to True North: ■ ■ ■ ■ Right-click in the drawing area. NOTE You must go to a plan view to set True North and you must change the view graphics to True North before you can change the angle value. and click OK. click . Click Tools menu ➤ Project Position/Orientation ➤ Rotate True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog.

for File name. click the Single-Day tab. verify that AVI Files is selected. Notice that the shadows lengthen now that the project is oriented to True North. Export animated solar study 26 Export the animation: ■ ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ Animated Solar Study. click . including the angle from True North. click Shadows ➤ Advanced Model Graphics. 20 Click View menu ➤ Refresh. 21 On the View Control Bar. 22 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 24 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. and click Apply. under 3D Views. 19 In the Project Browser. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. Los Angeles. 25 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click OK. are saved with the project. In the Save As dialog. click Summer Solstice. click the Still tab. For Save as type. enter True North Summer Solstice Plan Cutaway. Orienting to True North | 393 . click OK.NOTE Settings for the location and orientation. select Summer Solstice. 23 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

4 Render the scene: ■ ■ ■ On the Options Bar. Right-click in the drawing area. under Graphics. This would include some exterior views and most interior views. click Save. and click Save. for Scene. double-click Solar Study Plan Cutaway. double-click each of the following views to review the available views for rendering: ■ ■ ■ to house from SW to west facade of house living area This view most accurately shows the interior of the living room. select Winter solstice 2pm in LA. On the Options Bar. you render an interior view to observe how sunlight and shadows play in a specific room. you also capture the image and export it as a JPEG file for future use. 2 In the Project Browser. The scene is rendered in full color at draft resolution. and select View Properties. 29 On the File menu. 1 In the Project Browser. and click in the second dimension field to see the value calculated automatically. for Orientation. Rendered views will also show shade from plants and seasonal foliage. Click the Desktop icon. and click OK. select Project North. under 3D Views. On the Options Bar. under 3D Views. under Floor Plans. Rendering an Interior View Shadow calculations are not reliable for camera views in which a shadow would fall onto the camera’s location in the view. Refer to “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345 for additional information on rendering. Dataset Continue to use the c_Solar_Study. for Dimensions. and click OK. 3 On the Rendering tab of the Design Bar. 28 Once you are finished with the study. capturing it. it is a best practice to change the view graphics setting back to Project North for documentation and annotation purposes: ■ ■ ■ In the Project Browser. The animation plays as the AVI file is saved to the desktop. ■ 27 In the Video Compression dialog. double-click 01 Entry. click GO. Rendered views do not have this limitation. select Draft (75 dpi). In the Element Properties dialog. Since a rendered image is temporary. and exporting it as a JPEG image.rvt dataset you saved in the previous exercise. verify that Full Frames (Uncompressed) is selected. JPEG format images can be easily displayed on a web site or sent via e-mail. enter 600 in the first field. 394 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .■ Under Format. click Raytrace. for Compressor. Rendering Interior Shadow Views In this lesson. In this exercise. for Resolution. you confirm that the winter solstice has sunlight in the living room by creating one rendering. NOTE Retain the 45° value for the Angle from project to True North to maintain accuracy in shadow display for this project.

7 Review some captured images of the building. click Export Image. for Resolution. click Capture Rendering. and click Save. select JPEG.■ ■ On the Options Bar. Rendering an Interior View | 395 . In the Project Browser. NOTE Rendered views are temporary. select Presentation (300 dpi). so use the Capture Rendering option to save the view in the project. 5 On the Design Bar. click GO. for Save as Type. The scene is rendered in high resolution. In the Save As dialog. click Save. under Renderings. double-click each of the following images: ■ ■ ■ living area summer living area winter to house and studio summer solstice 8 On the File menu. On the Options Bar. 6 Export the image as a JPEG: ■ ■ on the Design Bar. Notice that you can clearly see where light enters the windows and how the shadows fall on the floor.

396 | Chapter 11 Creating Solar Studies .

you learn several graphic techniques using these above mentioned tools to create an "analytique. tailoring the presentation is just as important as the accuracy of the content. The architect's primary goal in documentation is to communicate the intent of the design. In this series of exercises. you explore the stylistic approach. There are two directions you can choose when organizing presentation graphics: realism and stylistics. A majority of tools in Revit Architecture 2008 are intended to describe number. They include the Accurender® Plug-in for Rendering. length. an outside reviewer. and line quality without the measurement of its thickness is to transcend "building" and to recognize the "architecture. and details. type. or the client. the Linework Tool. To express texture beyond material specifics. There remain many options in the software that do not quantify specific dimensions so much as they explain the subjective complexity of the work. you learn various methods of effectively communicating your design intent to your audience by creating presentation views. Whether the audience is the general contractor. there are several options for expressing the architecture." The analytique is a classic Beaux Arts method of representing a work of architecture for analysis by graphically showing the relationship among plans. For the realistic approach. sections. and other quantifiable elements within the context of contract documents. elevations. Advanced Model Graphics. In this tutorial. and Section Boxes. tutorials on the Accurender features of Revit Architecture can be found under “Rendering Views and Creating Walkthroughs” on page 345. You can use the analytique to graphically compare the organization and forms of a particular 397 ." In Revit Architecture. a consultant.Presentation Views 12 In this tutorial.

398 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .building or space by superimposing and overlapping measured drawings at multiple scales. Co-house. Using the pre-built building model. you organize an analytique by creating and modifying several views.

you create a presentation floor plan. click Training Files. change the visibility settings to remove unwanted documentation. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique In this lesson. and open Metric\m_Cohouse. expand Floor Plans. you create a copy of the plan.rvt. you create a copy of a floor plan in preparation for the analytique. Adding a Floor Plan View to the Analytique | 399 . In order for the floor plan to fit into the analytique. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (all). A copy of the floor plan is created and opened. Preparing a Floor Plan for the Analytique In this exercise. Copy the floor plan 1 In the Project Browser. and place the plan on a dark background for contrast. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. right-click 2nd Flr. Cnst.

3 In the Rename View dialog. exit the menu. NOTE Stair text is considered part of a stair component rather than an annotation. and click OK. This turns off the visibility of all tags. under Floor Plans. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. click Save As. Up Arrow. enter Presentation Second Floor Plan. 10 On the File menu. 7 Under Visibility. click in the drawing area. click the Scale control and select 1:100. Cnst. and clear DOWN Text.2 In the Project Browser. right-click Copy of 2nd Flr. 8 Click OK. Down Arrow. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. UP Text. Notice the immediate change in the line weights. dimensions. elevations. and click Rename. and so on in this view. sections. Modify visibility/graphics 4 On the View menu. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. click the Annotation Categories tab. expand the Stairs category. 6 Click the Model Categories tab. Notice that no annotations display in this view. 400 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 5 In the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. Modify view scale 9 On the View Control Bar at the bottom of the drawing area. click Visibility/Graphics. this represents the view getting smaller.

click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select By Date. and click Save. The Sun and Shadows Settings are shared with Accurender and can also be used when rendering. name the project m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. navigate to the folder of your choice. MA. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. the darker the shadows. modify. specify the following: ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 7 In the Manage Place and Locations dialog. The Shadow intensity dictates the darkness of the shadow display. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Modify advanced model graphics settings 1 If the Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan is not the active view. select Sun and Shadow Settings. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click Advanced Model Graphics. “Using Advanced Model Graphics” on page 401. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows and add a sense of texture to the new floor plan view. click the Place tab.rvt. on the Still tab. Time and Place. click for Place. and click OK. select Cast Shadows. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. 8 Select Boston. NOTE Shadows can be cast in all view styles except Wireframe. At that place.11 In the Save As directory. ■ Under Intensity. USA for City. The higher the number. you can specify one place where the project resides within the world. you can create. Within a Project. double-click it in the Project Browser.rvt. click . Using Advanced Model Graphics | 401 . Using Advanced Model Graphics In this exercise. 6 Under Settings. 5 Under Settings. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. Under Shadows Properties. specify 35 for Shadow. and delete multiple locations in order to analyze a single prototype.

15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 10 Select Ground Plane at Level.NOTE For this step. This gives the plan depth and creates a sensation of space beyond what you can normally express in a plan view. 17 On the File menu. under Sun and Shadows Settings. Cnst. click . click Save. 12 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. This turns off the shadows cast on the ground. This is the level the shadow will be cast upon. be aware that if you enter a different city. you can enter any city you wish. specify 10/27/2006 for Date and 1:00 PM for Time. 9 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. 11 Click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. This plan view is now ready to be added to a sheet. and click Advanced Model Graphics. clear Ground Plane at Level. under Settings. 14 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 16 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. click OK. and click OK. “Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet” on page 403. however. Notice the series of shadows based on the specified sun angles. 402 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 18 Proceed with the next exercise. and select 1st Flr. Turn off the ground plane shadows 13 On the View Control Bar. most of the images in the remainder of this tutorial may differ from those on your screen depending on the settings that you choose.

and click OK. and notice a view title displays. right-click the Design Bar. 3 On the View tab of the Design Bar. TIP If the View tab is not available. select Floor Plan: Presentation Second Floor Plan. 2 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. you add the floor plan to a sheet and modify the view to enhance the contrast. and click to place it. click Add View. select Arch Portrait. 7 Zoom in around the viewport. click Sheet. The viewport displays at the tip of the cursor. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 403 . 5 Move the cursor to the center of the sheet as shown. Create a new sheet 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and click View. click Modify. 4 In the Views dialog.Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet In this exercise. Notice the blank D-sized sheet is portrait oriented. 6 On the Design Bar. and click Add View to Sheet.

click OK. 12 In the Name dialog. Notice the viewport no longer displays a view title. you need to create a new viewport type that does not display the view title. This activates the Presentation Second Floor Plan within the context of the sheet. Create a new viewport type 8 Select the viewport in the center of the sheet.Because the view title needs to be removed for the analytique. under Graphics. click . For this analytique. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. 404 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . enter Presentation. select No for Show Title. and click Activate View. you will create a dark filled region for the floor plan view. click Duplicate. To accomplish this. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a solid fill background for contrast 15 Right-click the viewport. click Edit/New. and click OK. and click OK. 9 On the Options Bar. you need to create a base of contrast for the centered plan. 13 In the Type Properties dialog. 11 In the Type Properties dialog.

The space between the perimeter of the building model and each line should be equidistant. click . You may want to zoom in while sketching some details. and click OK. 25 In the Name dialog. enter Solid Black. 19 Draw a rectangle around the view as shown. 21 Starting at the upper-left corner of the building model. click Edit/New. The lines shown below are enhanced for training purposes. use the Trim tool to clean up gaps or overlapping intersections. 18 On the Options Bar. draw a chain of lines around the exterior face of the building model as shown. you must define the inner perimeter by drawing a chain of lines around the perimeter of the building model. When you are finished drawing the chain. click Filled Region. 17 In the Type Selector.16 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 22 On the Design Bar. Adding the Floor Plan to a Sheet | 405 . click . You enter sketch mode where you define the line type. and select Chain. fill properties. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select Invisible Lines. 24 In the Type Properties dialog. select the entire chain (use TAB) and change the line type back to Invisible lines by selecting it from the Type Selector. 26 In the Type Properties dialog. Now that you have defined the outer perimeter of the filled region. click Duplicate. for Fill Pattern. click . If necessary. and you should take advantage of endpoint snapping when available. 20 On the Options Bar. click Region Properties. and the boundary of the region. create the interior chain of lines using Medium or Wide lines. under Graphics. TIP Use care when sketching this chain. TIP If you have difficulty sketching using invisible lines.

click Finish Sketch. and click View Properties. select Solid Fill. 28 In the Type Properties dialog.27 In the Fill Patterns dialog. “Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique” on page 406. 33 In the Element Properties dialog. you copy an elevation view and use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the view. enter Presentation for Sheet Name. click Save. and click OK. and click OK. and click OK. scroll down. under Name. Notice how the filled region enhances the view contrast. Preparing the Elevation Analytique In this exercise. you create an elevation and add it to the presentation sheet that you created in the first exercise. 35 Proceed with the next lesson. click OK. 406 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 29 In the Element Properties dialog. Name the sheet 31 Right-click anywhere on the sheet. 34 On the File menu. 32 Right-click the edge of the sheet. Adding an Elevation View to the Analytique In this lesson. verify that the Background is Opaque and the Color is Black. and click Deactivate View. 30 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data.

expand the Doors category. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. under Views (all). Modify visibility/graphic overrides 4 On the View menu. click Override. scroll up. under Visibility. click in the Walls row. clear Visible. under Pattern Overrides. and click OK. right-click South. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. click in the drawing area. click Visibility/Graphics. A copy of the south elevation view becomes the active view.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Copy and rename the elevation view 1 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. 3 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. under Visibility. 2 In the Project Browser. 9 Click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. TIP If the Visibility/Graphics option is not active. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. on the Model Categories tab. right-click Copy of South. expand Elevations. enter Presentation South Elevation. 6 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog. 8 Click the Annotation Categories tab.rvt. and click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics again. and clear Show annotation categories in this view. 7 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. under Elevations. exit the menu. 5 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Preparing the Elevation Analytique | 407 .

you can create more interesting shadows on the elevation view. 11 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 15 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click Duplicate. you add the Presentation South Elevation view to the Presentation sheet. select Cast Shadows. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 16 In the Name dialog. under Settings. click Save. 19 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. specify 35 for Shadow. and click OK. verify that Hidden Line is the selected Style. Changes made within the Advanced Model Graphics dialog are applied only to the active view. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Elevation. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet In this exercise. “Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet” on page 408. 13 Under Intensity. 20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. click . select By Date. 14 Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 17 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. By changing the angle of the sun. 18 Specify 2:30 PM for Time. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 408 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click OK.Apply advanced model graphics 10 On the View Control Bar. 12 Under Shadow Properties. Time and Place. and click OK.

Notice the viewport displays a view title. expand Sheets (all). and double-click A105 .rvt. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 3 In the Views dialog. Add a view to the sheet 1 In the Project Browser. select Elevation: Presentation South Elevation. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 4 Center the viewport above the presentation plan view as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise.Presentation. under Views (all). TIP Use the snap feature to snap the viewport to the center reference plane. and click Add View to Sheet. click Add View. Adding the Presentation Elevation View to the Presentation Sheet | 409 .

select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify.5 In the Type Selector. Notice the view title no longer displays. 7 On the Design Bar. 6 Drag the Presentation South Elevation viewport downward until it shares an edge with the presentation floor plan. 410 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

You also create a view template for presentation views and apply it to other views. You add silhouette edges and filled regions to the views.8 On the File menu. Adding Section Views to the Analytique In this lesson. 9 Proceed with the next lesson. “Adding Section Views to the Analytique” on page 411. you create section and callout views and place them in the analytique. Adding Section Views to the Analytique | 411 . click Save. you create and modify the section view that you later add to the analytique. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique In this exercise.

Create a callout of the section view 5 In the Project Browser. double-click 1st Flr. you will create a callout around the building model components within the section view. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 412 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . To accomplish this. under Floor Plans. Section 2 is added to the building model. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Sections (Callout 1). 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Add the section shown below. and use the flip arrows if necessary. TIP You can also change the scale of the section view after you create it. To fit correctly in the analytique. Adjust the controls to modify the extents. Add a section in a plan view 1 In the Project Browser.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. select 1: 100 for Scale.rvt. Cnst. and double-click Section 2. this view needs to be rotated 180 degrees. The section should cut through the center of the building model and extend past the front of the building (lower wall). click Section.

and click OK. clear Visible. 15 Under Visibility. select 1 : 100 for Scale. TIP You can also open the callout in the Project Browser by double-clicking Callout of Section 2 under Sections (Callout 1). click the Model Categories tab. under Sections (Callout 1). and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. enter Presentation Section 2. 8 Draw a callout around all the building model components within the section view as shown. This turns off the visibility of all wall surface patterns in this view. 7 On the Options Bar. click in the Walls row. click Override. 14 In the Visibility/Graphic Overrides dialog. right-click Callout of Section 2. Modify Visibility/Graphic Overrides 13 On the View menu. In the Projection/Surface Patterns column for Walls. Rename the callout 9 On the Design Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). and click Rename.6 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Preparing a Section View for the Analytique | 413 . click Callout. double-click Presentation Section 2. 10 In the Project Browser. under Pattern Overrides. click Modify. 11 In the Rename View dialog. 12 In the Project Browser. Use the controls to adjust the precise location of the boundary and to move the callout head so it is readily identifiable. 16 In the Fill Pattern Graphics dialog.

22 On the Options Bar. The outer crop boundary (indicated with dashed lines) shows the crop region for annotation elements. Notice that the crop regions no longer display. and clear Show annotation categories in this view.17 Under Visibility. Revit Architecture displays 2 boundaries. 414 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. The inner crop boundary shows the crop region for model elements. This turns off the visibility of all annotations in this view. clear Annotation Crop. Hide the crop boundary 21 Select the crop boundary. 18 Turn off the visibility of the following model categories: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Casework Ceilings Furniture Lighting Fixtures Specialty Equipment 19 Click the Annotation Categories tab. When you select the crop boundary. click . 20 Click OK. and clear Elevation Swing. scroll up. under Extents. expand the Doors category.

Click Apply. TIP You may need to move the dialog off to the side in order to see the view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View | 415 . In addition. 3 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. Add shadows to the section view 1 If Presentation Section 2 is not the active view. select Cast Shadows. double-click Presentation Section 2. you apply silhouette edges to contrast the edges of the view. you use advanced model graphics to cast shadows on the section view. Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View In this exercise. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. Notice that the shadows displayed do not offer much contrast. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. Under Shadows Properties. open the Project Browser and. “Adding Shadows and Silhouettes to a Section View” on page 415. and click Advanced Model Graphics. 2 On the View Control Bar. under Sections (Callout 1). specify 35 for Shadow. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. 25 Proceed with the next exercise. Under Intensity.rvt.24 On the File menu. click Save.

select Relative to View. and click OK. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. you create a new Sun and Shadow setting in order to make a presentation view with more contrast. and click OK. select Override Silhouettes. click . You can modify this line style by selecting Line Styles from the Settings menu.In the steps that follow. 4 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. “Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique” on page 417. 12 Proceed with the next exercise. under Settings. click Save. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Section. 9 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 10 Under Silhouette Edges. Notice application of heavy line weights to the edges of the building model. click OK. was added to this dataset for training purposes. 7 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Notice the shadows on the view provide more contrast and a sense of depth. TIP You can also use the linework tool to emphasize individual surface edges. 416 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Advanced Model Graphics. specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. click Duplicate. specify an Altitude of 70 degrees. 5 In the Name dialog. Apply silhouette edges 8 On the View Control Bar. TIP The current view of your model may vary from the illustrations in the tutorial based on the placement of the section line in the previous exercise. NOTE The line style. 11 On the File menu. select Directly. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. ■ Under Sun and Shadows Settings. under Silhouette Edges. Silhouette Edges. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog.

and click to place the selected view.Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique In this exercise. The view title no longer displays. select Section: Presentation Section 2. 3 In the Views dialog. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. Add the view to the presentation sheet 1 In the Project Browser. you add the Presentation Section 2 view to the analytique and rotate the view 180 degrees. 5 In the Type Selector. 4 Move the cursor under the centered plan view as shown. click Add View. select Viewport: Presentation. click Modify. and click Add View to Sheet.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. 6 On the Design Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. under Sheets (all). Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 417 .Presentation. double-click A105 .

and either enter the degrees of rotation or click to specify the end radius. and press ENTER. specify 3 o’clock as the rotation start point. Rotate the callout view 7 In the Project Browser. and enter 180 to specify the number of degrees of rotation. Using a clock as a reference. 8 Select the callout that you added previously. under Sections (Callout 1). double-click Section 2. click .Notice the section needs to be rotated 180 degrees. 418 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 9 On the Edit toolbar. move the cursor in the direction of the rotation. In the steps that follow. you click to specify the start radius. you accomplish this by rotating the callout within the section view. 11 Move the cursor a slight distance counter-clockwise. To rotate an object. 10 Specify the start radius to the right of the callout.

Presentation. double-click A105 . Notice the extents need to be adjusted to fit around the edges of the building model. Notice that the Presentation Section 2 view has rotated 180 degrees and now needs to be repositioned. the callout rotates 180 degrees. and drag it up and to the left as shown. Adding the Presentation Section to the Analytique | 419 . 14 Select the Presentation Section 2 viewport. 12 Drag the callout extents until they extend just past the perimeter of the edges of the building model as shown. Reposition the viewport 13 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).After you enter the rotation value and press Enter.

under Sections (Callout 1). m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. you add the modified view to the presentation sheet. you create a view template for presentation views in order to reduce repetitive work while creating subsequent views. 3 In the New View Template dialog. After applying the view template to a new section view. “Working with a Presentation View Template” on page 420. 420 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . click Create View Template from View.rvt. 16 On the File menu. Create a presentation view template 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Section 2. and click OK. 4 In the View Templates dialog. click OK.15 On the Design Bar. 17 Proceed with the next exercise. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. click Save. enter Presentation. 2 On the View menu. Working with a Presentation View Template In this exercise.

under Sections (Type 1). select Section: Presentation Section 1. 15 Right-click the viewport. click Apply View Template. annotations. 7 In the Rename View dialog. select Presentation. and click Rename.Presentation. Working with a Presentation View Template | 421 . you can use a view property to accomplish the same thing. Apply presentation view template 8 On the View menu. 13 Place it to the left of the plan view. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. Now. and elevation swings no longer display. 14 In the Type Selector. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Activate View. rather than repeat numerous steps to prepare this view for the analytique. under Sections (Type 1). and click OK. click Add View. you can simply apply the presentation view template. and click Add View to Sheet. right-click Section 1. enter Presentation Section 1.Create a new presentation view 5 In the Project Browser. Add the view to the presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . 9 In the Select View Template dialog. under Sheets (all). and click OK. Rather than use a callout to rotate this view after it is added to a sheet. 12 In the Views dialog. lighting fixtures. click View Properties. select Viewport: Presentation. Notice the furniture. 16 On the View menu. right-click Copy of Section 1. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar.

20 On the File menu. 21 Proceed with the next exercise. Working in a Callout Analytique Typically. click Save. such as a tracery window or column capital.17 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 Right-click the viewport. “Working in a Callout Analytique” on page 422. traditional analytiques contain a detail. 19 Move the view so the walls line up similar to the image shown. and click OK. 422 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . you create a wall section and add it to the right side of the analytique. under Graphics. and click Deactivate View. In this exercise. select 90 degrees Counterclockwise for Rotation on Sheet.

and click OK. 3 Draw a callout around the front balcony as shown. enter Presentation Callout.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. click Modify. under Sections (Type 1). right-click Callout of Section 1.rvt. and modify the extents and the callout head location as shown. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar. After you add the callout. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 5 In the Rename View dialog. select the callout. Create callout 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Presentation Callout. 4 In the Project Browser. under Sections (Callout 1). 6 In the Project Browser. click Callout. double-click Section 1. Working in a Callout Analytique | 423 . and click Rename. under Sections (Callout 1).

under Extents. 9 In the Element Properties dialog.7 Select the crop boundary and adjust the bottom so that there is a small gap as shown. and click OK. 8 Right-click. 424 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . clear Crop Region Visible. This gap is used later in the exercise to place a fill region. clear Annotation Crop. and click View Properties.

click Add View. and click Activate View. 14 In the Type Selector. Working in a Callout Analytique | 425 . 19 Right-click the callout presentation view. 20 Select the callout presentation viewport. 13 Place it on the right side of the presentation sheet. click View Properties. and click Add View to Sheet. and click Deactivate View. 15 On the Design Bar. double-click A105 . click Modify. select Viewport: Presentation. specify a value of 22 for Scale Value 1. Modify presentation callout on sheet 16 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.Presentation. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. and move it into the position shown below. select Section: Presentation Callout.Add callout to presentation sheet 10 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View menu. and click OK. select Custom for View Scale. 11 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Views dialog. under Sheets (all).

426 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . turn on the crop region from the view properties dialog. You can sketch all of them at once or one filled region at a time. You do not have to replicate the image exactly. you add a heavy base to the floors and a poche to the base. The intent of the analytique is not so much a measured construction document as it is a stylized representation of the architectural forms. Apply filled regions to presentation callout 21 In the Project Browser. the easiest method is to apply filled regions to the presentation callout. and make adjustments as necessary. under Sections (Callout 1).NOTE If the presentation callout view does not fit properly on the sheet. Click Finish Sketch on the Design Bar when you are finished. 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Although there are several methods you could use to create these areas of contrast. 23 On the Design Bar. In the steps that follow. The composition set for the analytique is now complete. 22 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. select Solid Black for Type. sketch the filled regions on the floors and roof shown below. and click OK. hide the crop region and deactivate the viewport. 25 Using the drawing tools on the Options Bar. click Region Properties. When finished. activate the viewport. click Filled Region. double-click Presentation Callout.

click Filled Region. 29 On the Options Bar. under Sheets (all).26 On the Project Browser. and sketch the rectangle shown below. double-click A105 . and click Activate View. 28 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.Presentation. Add poche region 27 Right-click the presentation callout viewport. Working in a Callout Analytique | 427 . click .

and drag the left and bottom extent until the entire poche region displays. under Extents. click Finish Sketch. 31 On the View menu. Notice the entire poche region does not display because the crop region does not encompass the new filled region. 32 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. 33 Select the crop region. select Crop Region Visible. and click OK. 428 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .30 On the Design Bar.

under Extents. You then add each view to the presentation sheet. 37 On the File menu. You then add perspective views to the presentation and annotate the sheet. and click OK. you create isometric 3D views and use section boxes to create cutaways with shadows. 38 Proceed with the next lesson. and apply shadows to the views. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes | 429 . you create three similar isometric views with different cutaways. 36 Right-click the presentation callout viewport.34 On the View menu. “Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes” on page 429. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views In this exercise. 35 In the Element Properties dialog. click Save. Creating 3D Cutaways with Section Boxes In this lesson. click View Properties. clear Crop Region Visible. and click Deactivate View.

double-click Isometric. 2 On the View menu. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Cast Shadows. click Orient ➤ Southwest. 7 In the Name dialog. Under Shadows Properties. and click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. and click 1 : 200. specify 35 for Shadow.rvt. click . Apply advanced model graphics 4 On the View Control Bar. 3 On the View Control Bar. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. 6 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. enter Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric. 5 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. and click Advanced Model Graphics. click Duplicate. click the Scale control. Under Intensity. Create southwest isometric view 1 In the Project Browser. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. 430 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . under 3D Views.

select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. 14 In the Project Browser. click View Properties. right-click Isometric 1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. under Extents. 15 In the Project Browser. right-click Isometric. and click OK. enter Isometric 2. and click Rename. 11 Under Silhouette Edges. under Settings. 10 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. right-click Copy of Isometric 1. double-click Isometric 2.8 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. under Silhouette Edges. Specify an Azimuth of 135 degrees. Rename and duplicate isometric views 12 In the Project Browser. Specify an Altitude of 45 degrees. Select 1st Flr. under 3D Views. Select Relative to View. select Section Box. under 3D Views. 16 In the Rename View dialog. and click OK. 18 On the View menu. in the list. under 3D Views. enter Isometric 1. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Directly. Cnst. select Override Silhouettes. and click OK. 9 Click OK. Notice the section box that displays around the building model. 13 In the Rename View dialog. under 3D Views. Select Ground Plane at Level. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 431 . Add a section box to Isometric 2 17 In the Project Browser. and click Rename.

22 In the Project Browser. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the second floor as shown. When you are finished. click Modify on the Design Bar. TIP Notice there is also a rotation symbol. right-click Isometric 2. under 3D Views.20 Select the section box. 432 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 21 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. right-click Copy of Isometric 2. These allow you to modify the extents of the section box. Before turning off the visibility of the section box. 23 In the Project Browser. Notice the grips that display on each face of the section box. and click Rename. under 3D Views. make a duplicate of the view. You can use this to rotate the section box.

and click OK. 26 To hide the section box. or turn off the visibility of railings and stairs using the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Add isometric views to the presentation sheet 33 In the Project Browser. double-click A105 . double-click Isometric 2. you stack the three isometric views in a vertical column on the presentation sheet to show the continual erosion of the structure.24 In the Rename View dialog. clear Section Boxes. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 433 . click Modify on the Design Bar. and click OK. 31 To hide the section box. drag Isometric 3 underneath the left section view as shown and. 27 On the Annotation Categories tab. either adjust the plane location. enter Isometric 3. 34 In the Project Browser. 30 Select the controls for the top plane of the section box. under Sheets (all). Notice the section box no longer displays. Modify the section box of Isometric 3 28 In the Project Browser. Next. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. 25 In the Project Browser. When you are finished. and drag the plane downward until it cuts halfway through the first floor as shown. and click OK. the stairs and railings may display. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. double-click Isometric 3. 32 On the Annotation Categories tab. select Viewport: Presentation. clear Section Boxes. under 3D Views. In such a case.Presentation. 29 Select the section box. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. NOTE Depending on the precise location of the top plane of the section box.

Notice the filled region partially covers the view. You resolve this problem in the steps that follow. under 3D Views. in the Type Selector. in the Type Selector. 434 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 36 In the Project Browser.35 In the Project Browser. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 2 underneath Isometric 3 as shown and. under 3D Views. select Viewport: Presentation. drag Isometric 1 underneath Isometric 2 as shown and.

47 On the Design Bar. redraw the portion of the filled region so it follows the boundary of Isometric 1. You may need to use the split tools and trim tools to modify lines along the way. 42 Click OK twice. 38 Select the poche filled region. 41 In the Type Properties dialog. and click Activate View. select Solid Black for Type. 44 Using the drawing tools.Modify filled region boundaries 37 Right-click the Presentation Callout viewport. 43 On the Design Bar. The image below shows the lines redrawn. click Finish Sketch. click Region Properties. click Lines. 46 In the Element Properties dialog. click Region Properties. 39 On the Design Bar. 40 In the Element Properties dialog. This will make it easier to draw lines. select Transparent for Background. select Concrete for Type. and click Deactivate View. under Graphics. 48 Right-click the Presentation Callout view. and click OK. Creating Cutaway Isometric Views | 435 . click Edit. and on the Options Bar. You change this back to solid fill when you are done. 45 On the Design Bar. and then click Edit/New.

you add it to the presentation sheet. click Save. click Camera. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views In this exercise. you create the final view for the analytique.rvt. “Creating Cutaway Perspective Views” on page 436. 436 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 50 Proceed with the next exercise. a cutaway perspective view. Cnst. double-click 1st Flr. Create a perspective view 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View tab of the Design Bar.49 On the File menu. Adding a camera is a two-click process: first you specify the eye location. m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. and specify the range and direction just outside the upper right corner of the building model. After adding shadows and silhouette edges to the view. 3 Place the camera in the southwest corner of the view as shown. then you specify the eye direction and range. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. under Floor Plans.

specify 35 for Shadow. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Hidden Line for Style. click the Advanced Model Graphics control. select Cast Shadows. 6 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 437 . and click Advanced Model Graphics.The view opens immediately. Under Intensity. Under Sun and Shadows Settings. click . Add shadows and silhouette edges 5 On the View Control Bar. 4 Adjust the crop boundary so the entire building model fits within it. Under Shadows Properties.

and click OK. and click OK. select Sun and Shadow Settings Isometric for Name. under Extents. A section box now cuts through the building model. and click OK. select Silhouette Edges for Silhouette style. You may need to adjust the location of the crop boundary as well. select Override Silhouettes. Notice the controls that display on each plane. Add a section box 10 On the View menu.7 In the Sun and Shadows Settings dialog. click View Properties. select Section Box. 12 Select the section box. 8 In the Advanced Model Graphics dialog. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 9 Under Silhouette Edges. under Silhouette Edges. 438 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . 13 Use the section controls to modify the location of each respective plane until your view resembles the following image.

clear Section Boxes. 16 In the Crop Region Size dialog. Because scale does not apply to perspective views. 21 In the Project Browser. click View menu ➤ View Properties. Creating Cutaway Perspective Views | 439 . you must specify the actual size of the image. drag 3D View 1 onto the presentation sheet. Add the view to the presentation sheet 20 On the Project Browser. Clear Crop Region Visible. and place it in the upper-left corner as shown. and click OK.Presentation.14 Select the crop boundary. under 3D Views. click Size. select Scale (locked proportions). 15 On the Options Bar. After placing it. and click OK. 18 To hide the crop region. click View menu ➤ Visibility/Graphics. under Sheets (all). On the Annotation Categories tab. and click OK. enter 165 mm for Width. 19 To hide the section box. under Change. double-click A105 . go to the Type Selector and select Viewport : Presentation. 17 Under Model Crop Size.

enter Title. and click OK. 5 In the Name dialog. you complete the analytique by adding text to the presentation sheet. enter Description. 13 Add a title to the analytique as shown. click OK. click Edit/New.rvt. under Text. 23 Proceed with the next exercise. Add a title and description 12 In the Type Selector. select a font. click Edit/New. and click OK. 3 In the Element Properties dialog. 2 On the Options Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. under Text. 9 In the Name dialog. click . 4 In the Type Properties dialog.22 On the File menu. click Text. “Annotating the Analytique” on page 440. click Duplicate. select the same font as the title. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you saved in the previous exercise. specify a text size of 40 mm. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select Text : Title. specify a text size of 6 mm. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Create new text types 1 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Annotating the Analytique In this exercise. 440 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views . m_Cohouse_Presentation_Views. click Duplicate. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. click Save. 8 In the Type Properties dialog.

18 On the File menu. click Modify. 15 In the Type Selector. select Text : Description. Annotating the Analytique | 441 . 17 On the Design Bar.14 Click in the drawing window to complete the title text. click Save. This completes the Presentation Views tutorial. 16 Add a description of your choosing and add it to the analytique as shown.

442 | Chapter 12 Presentation Views .

Importing and Exporting 5 443 .

444 | Chapter 13 Importing and Exporting

Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

13

In this tutorial, you learn how to export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk®3ds Max® or Autodesk®VIZ, where you render it and create a daylight analysis. Autodesk 3ds Max is a professional three-dimensional animation package that provides robust animation, modelling, and workflow functionality for the most complex problems in design visualization and visual effects. Autodesk VIZ is a 3D modelling, rendering, and presentation software application that provides state-of-the-art image creation technologies for communicating and sharing your design intent. For simplicity, this tutorial uses 3ds Max, but the same workflow applies in VIZ. NOTE To complete this tutorial, you must have Autodesk 3ds Max 9 installed on your system. If you do not have 3ds Max installed on your system, or if you have an earlier version of the software, you can download a free trial from the Autodesk website.

445

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you export a Revit Architecture building model to Autodesk 3ds Max and render it. To export the building model to 3ds Max, you select a 3D view of the building in Revit Architecture and export its geometry and data to a DWG file. You then link the DWG file to a new 3ds Max scene. NOTE You can also import the DWG file into 3ds Max, but linking allows you to easily update the 3ds Max scene with any changes that you make to the Revit Architecture model after you initially import it. After you link the DWG file in 3ds Max, you quickly render a view of the building model. The AccuRender materials that are applied to elements in the Revit Architecture building model can be rendered in 3ds Max. After you make some minor adjustments to the materials, you add a daylight system and a sky to produce a more polished rendering.

Dataset
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Common\c_Export to 3DS.rvt.

Export a Revit Architecture building model to a DWG file
1 In the Project Browser, under Views (all), expand 3D Views, and double-click To Building. The view of the building that you want to render in 3ds Max displays.

446 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

There are a few steps you can take to reduce the geometry and data in the model to make the export process more efficient. You can change the detail level of the view, use a section box to limit the view geometry, and turn off visibility of building elements. Because this building model is small, it is not necessary to use any of these options at this time.

2 Click File menu ➤ Export ➤ CAD Formats. 3 In the Export dialog:

For Save in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Under File Naming, verify that Automatic and Long are selected. If these options are selected, a file name that consists of the dataset name appended with the view name automatically displays for the File Name.

Click Options.

4 In the Export Options dialog, under Solids (3D views only), select Export as ACIS solids, and click OK. The 3D elements in the building model will be exported as ACIS solids, or as 3D objects with multiple sides. If you select to export as polymesh, each element would be exported as an object made up of multiple polygons that are joined, or ''meshed'' together. When exporting to a DWG for use in Max, it is recommended that you export building models to DWG as ACIS solids. 5 In the Export dialog, click Save. 6 In the alert dialog, click OK to ignore the view crop boundary. The building model is exported to a DWG file in the Training location that you specified. 7 Minimize Revit Architecture but keep it open, as you modify the building model and reload it later in the tutorial. Next, link the file to a 3ds Max scene and render it. Link a DWG file to 3ds Max if you anticipate making changes to the building model that you want to reexport to 3ds Max. Import files when you want to export only one iteration of a design for use in 3ds Max.

Create a 3ds Max scene
8 Open 3ds Max, and if the Welcome screen displays, click Close. 9 Click File menu ➤ New. 10 In the New Scene dialog, select New All, and click OK. 11 Click Customize menu ➤ Units Setup.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 447

12 In the Units Setup dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under Display Unit Scale, select US Standard. Verify Feet w/Fractional Inches is displayed. Under Lighting Units, select American. Click OK.

13 Click File menu ➤ Save As, and save the file as RAC Building.max.

Link the Revit Architecture building model to 3ds Max
14 Click File menu ➤ File Link Manager. 15 In the File Link Manager dialog, click the Presets tab. 16 Under Named Presets, select Revit, and click Modify. This preset contains the desired settings for linking Revit Architecture building models. 17 In the File Link Settings: DWG Files dialog, click the Advanced tab. 18 Verify Use scene material assignments on Reload is selected. This setting ensures that material changes that you make in 3ds Max will be preserved if you reload the DWG file. 19 Click Cancel. 20 In the File Link Manager, click the Attach tab, and click File. 21 In the Open dialog:

For Look in, browse to C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RAC 2008\Training\Common. Select c_Export_to_3DS.rvt-3DView-ToBuiliding.dwg, and click Open.

22 In the File Link Manager dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Preset, select Revit. Click the Attach tab. Click Select Layers to include. A dialog listing all the layers that were created when you exported the Revit Architecture building model to the DWG displays.

23 In the Select Layers dialog:
■ ■

Select Select from list. Scroll to view the layers, and verify that a check mark displays to the left of each layer name to indicate it is selected. In this tutorial, you want all the layers visible, but you can use this dialog control the layers that display in your 3ds Max scene.

Click OK.

24 In the File Link Manager, click Attach this file. 25 In the Proxy Object dialog, click Yes.

448 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

The file opens in the 3ds Max, and 4 different views of the building model display. Only the single camera position that created the 3d To Building view was exported with the Revit Architecture building model.

26 Close the File Link Manager.

Adjust a scene for rendering
27 On the bottom right of the screen, click in the Perspective viewport to set it current. The edges of the viewport are highlighted in yellow when the viewport is current. 28 In the top left corner of the viewport, right-click the Perspective viewport label, and click Views ➤ Camera: To Building.

29 Adjust the view:

■ ■

In the lower-right corner of the screen, click Click in the Camera: To Building viewport.

(Dolly Camera).

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 449

Press and hold the mouse button, and drag the cursor toward you until the view is adjusted as shown.

Render the scene

30 On the Main toolbar, click

(Quick Render).

The scene renders and the rendering displays in the Render window. There are a couple of adjustments that you want to make to the rendering, including the quality of the glass and stone materials. Because this is an exterior view, you also want to add a daylight system (a sun) and a sky in the background.

31 Close the render window. NOTE If you want to save any of your renderings as you progress through this tutorial, at the top of the render window, click .

450 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Improve the quality of the glass and stone materials in 3ds Max

32 On the Main toolbar, click

(Material Editor). (Get Material).

33 In the Material Editor, under the bottom left side of the material slots, click 34 On the left side of the Material/Map Browser, under Browse From, select Scene.

All of the materials applied to the Revit Architecture elements that were exported to the DWG file with the elements display in the right pane of the browser. 35 In the list of materials, select and drag Glass to one of the material slots at the top of the Material Editor.

36 In the Instance (Copy) Material dialog, verify Instance is selected, and click OK. 37 In the Material Editor, change the color of the glass:
■ ■ ■

Under Templates, select Glass - Clear. Under Physical Qualities, for Diffuse Color, click the color swatch. In the Color Selector, specify a golden brown color, and click Close.

38 Change the quality of the stone material on the retaining wall:

■ ■

In the Material Editor, select another slot, and click

(Pick Material from Object).

In the Camera: To Building viewport, move the cursor over the retaining wall and click to select it.

■ ■

In the Material Editor, under Templates, select Stone. Close the Material Editor and the Material Map Browser.

Render a Revit Architecture Building Model in 3ds Max | 451

Add a sun and sky
39 Click in the Top viewport and zoom out until you can see the entire building and the camera. 40 Click Create menu ➤ Lights ➤ Daylight System. 41 In the Daylight Object Creation dialog, click Yes.

42 In the Top viewport, to the right of the building, click and drag to place and size the compass rose. 43 Move the cursor down and to the right to place the sun.

44 On the right side of the screen, locate the Command panel and click 45 Under Daylight Parameters, under Position, click Setup. 46 Under Location, click Get Location. 47 In the Geographic Location list, select Boston, MA, and click OK. 48 Under Site, for North Direction, enter 250. 49 Under Time:
■ ■ ■

(Modify).

For Hours, enter 12. For Month, enter 7. For Day, enter 21.

452 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

For Year, enter 2007.

50 Click Rendering menu ➤ Environment, and verify that the Environment tab is displayed. 51 Under Common Parameters, and under Background, click the color swatch, and set the background color to a sky blue color.

Render the scene

52 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene Dialog).

53 At the bottom of the panel, for Viewport, select Camera: To Building, and click the lock that displays next to the selector. The lock lets you adjust the scene in other viewports (which become active as you use them), and then click Render to render the viewport you originally chose. When off, Render always renders the active viewport. 54 Under Output size, click 640 x 480. 55 Click the Advanced Lighting tab, and under Select Advanced Lighting, select <no lighting plug-in>. 56 Click Render. The scene is rendered and displays the adjustments you made to the glass and stone materials, as well as the addition of the daylight system and sky.

57 Click File menu ➤ Save. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max” on page 453.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max
In this exercise, you create and render 2 similar cutaway views of the building model. You use 2 different techniques to create the cutaway views. You create the first view in Revit Architecture using a section box to limit or ''cut away'' geometry from the building in the front of the To Building 3D view. You then export the geometry to the DWG file you created in a previous exercise, and reload it in the Autodesk 3ds Max scene. You learn how to use a section box to limit the building model geometry that you export, a technique that is useful and time-saving when exporting large building models.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 453

A cutaway view created by a section box in Revit Architecture and rendered in 3ds Max

After you create the first cutaway view, you create a similar view in 3ds Max by adjusting the visibility of the curtain wall elements so they are not visible to the camera, and then rendering the scene in the To Building viewport. Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt and RAC Building.max.

Create a Revit Architecture cutaway view
1 Maximize Revit Architecture. 2 In the 3D To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 3 In the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, select Section Box, and click OK. 4 Click View menu ➤ Zoom Out.

454 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

A section box displays around the view.

5 Select the section box so that grips display. 6 Select and move the grips until a cutaway view displays as shown.

7 Click File menu ➤ Save.

Reload the cutaway view in 3ds Max and render it
8 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max. 9 When the file is reloaded, render it again.

Rendering Cutaway Views in 3ds Max | 455

Create a cutaway view in 3ds Max
10 Open Revit Architecture. 11 In the To Building view, right-click, and click View Properties. 12 To restore the view, in the Element Properties dialog, under Extents, clear Section Box, and click OK. 13 Export the building model to the DWG file again, and reload the DWG in 3ds Max.

14 In 3ds Max, on the Main toolbar, click

(Select Objects by Name).

15 At the top of the Select Objects dialog, enter curtain to select all the Curtain Wall Panel and Curtain Wall Mullion objects that display in the left side of the dialog. 16 At the bottom right of the dialog, click Select. The components of the curtains wall are selected. You will create a named selected set to control the camera’s visibility of these objects.

17 On the Main toolbar, click

(Edit Named Selection Sets).

18 In the Named Selection Sets dialog, click set name. 19 Close the Named Selection Sets dialog.

(Create New Set), and enter Curtain Wall for the selection

20 Right-click in the view, and click Object Properties. 21 In the Object Properties dialog, click the General tab. 22 Under Rendering Control, clear Visible to Camera, and click OK.

23 On the Main toolbar, click

.

A cutaway view, similar to the one that you created with the Revit Architecture section box displays. 24 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating a Daylight Analysis” on page 457.

456 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Creating a Daylight Analysis
In this exercise, you create a daylight analysis of the Revit Architecture building model in 3ds Max. The analysis will uses daylight levels in a specific location to display a spectrum of colors on the building model. The colors indicate the different levels of light incident on each building surface. The blue and green colors indicate low light levels, while the red, yellow, and orange colors indicate high levels of light. A daylight analysis can be a useful tool in determining the sustainability of your Revit Architecture building models.

Dataset

Continue to use the datasets you used in the previous exercise, c_Export to 3DS.rvt, and RAC Building.max. 1 In 3ds Max, click Rendering menu ➤ Environment. 2 In the Environment and Effects dialog, under Exposure Control, select Pseudo Color Exposure Control. Pseudo Color Exposure Control is a lighting analysis tool that provides you with an intuitive way of visualizing and evaluating the lighting levels in your scenes. It maps luminance or illuminance values to pseudo colors that show the brightness of the values being converted. 3 Under Pseudo Color Exposure Control:

Under Display Type, for Quantity, select Illuminance. Illuminance displays values of light incident on surfaces.

■ ■ ■ ■

For Style, select Colored. For Scale, select Logarithmic. Under Display Range, for Min., enter 100. For Max, enter 8000. The display range sets the lowest and highest values to represent in the rendering. Although this tutorial provides display range values, when you create your own daylight analysis you will probably want to test different display ranges to get the results that you want.

4 On the Main toolbar, click

(Render Scene).

Creating a Daylight Analysis | 457

The scene renders and displays a true color rendering in the Render window. The 256 color daylight analysis is then created.

5 If desired, in the Render window, click 6 Save and close the 3ds Max scene. 7 Maximize Revit Architecture.

, and save the file.

8 Save the exercise file with a unique name, or close the file without saving it.

458 | Chapter 13 Exporting to Autodesk 3ds Max or VIZ

Importing SketchUp Files

14

The ability to import SketchUp® files directly into Revit Architecture allows you to quickly integrate sketch concepts into the Revit environment and reuse the SketchUp model without having to manually rework it. Once the model has been imported, you can easily add detail with Revit components. In this tutorial, you import a SketchUp file into a Revit Architecture project as an in-place mass family.

After you import the SketchUp model, you create a small building from the front mass form. You use the mass faces of the mass form to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building.

459

460 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass
In this exercise, you create a Revit Architecture project, and import a SketchUp model into the project as an in-place mass family. The in-place mass family is saved only in context of the project, and not in the library.

Create a Revit project
1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Project. 2 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.rte. 4 In the New Project dialog, click OK. 5 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 6 In the Save As dialog, for File name, enter Import SketchUp, and click Save.

Import a SketchUp model
7 On the Design Bar, click the Massing tab. TIP If the Massing tab does not display in the Design Bar, right-click in the Design Bar, and click Massing on the context menu that displays. 8 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Create Mass. 9 In the informational dialog, click OK. 10 In the Name dialog, enter SketchUp Model, and click OK. 11 Click File menu ➤ Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. 12 In the Import/Link dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Click the Training Files icon. Double-click the Common folder. For Files of type, select SketchUp Files. Click the Sketchup file, buildings.skp. Under Import or Link, for Layers, select All. This option allows you to select what to import: all elements, visible elements, or select from a list.

■ ■ ■

Under Layer/Level Colors, select Preserve colors. Under Positioning, select Manually place, and select Cursor at center. For Place at level, select Level 1. In a new project, Level 1 is the only choice. An existing project may have options for many levels to choose from, depending on the complexity of the project.

Under Scaling, for Import units, select Auto-Detect.

Importing a SketchUp Model as a Mass | 461

You can have Revit automatically detect and convert incoming units to project units (Auto-Detect) or you can specify the units for the SketchUp drawing if you know that information.

Click Open.

The model displays in the view on the Level 1 floor plan. 13 Click to place the lower right building inside of the elevation markers.

14 On the View toolbar, click

.

15 Enter ZR to zoom in on the lower right building. 16 On the Design Bar, click Finish Mass. NOTE A warning message displays because the mass contains only mesh geometry. The mesh geometry (faces) will be used in another exercise to create Revit elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs. 17 In the warning dialog, click the Close button.

18 Proceed to the next exercise, “ Creating a Building from Mass Faces” on page 462.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces
In this exercise, you use the faces of the front mass form to create Revit Architecture elements, such as walls, curtain walls, and roofs, that compose the building. The mass faces are not converted to Revit elements: they remain in the project. You turn their visibility off to view only the building.

462 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

After you create the building from the mass faces, you modify the roofs and add doors to complete the design.

Create roofs from mass faces
1 Zoom in to the front mass form, and on the View Control Bar, click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges.

2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 3 In the Type Selector, verify Basic Roof: Generic - 400mm displays. 4 On the Options Bar, for Level, verify Level 2 is selected. 5 Move your cursor over the top face of the left mass, and when the cursor displays a plus sign, select the face so that it highlights in red. The cursor displays a plus or a minus sign, indicating that you are adding or subtracting faces to and from the selection.

6 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. A roof is created from the mass face. (It is difficult to see the roof in the current view. To see the new roof, on the View toolbar, click to turn off mass visibility in the view. Click again to display masses.)

7 With the Roof by Face command still active, on the Options Bar, verify that Select Multiple is selected. This option enables you to select more than 1 face when you create a roof. 8 Select the top 3 faces of the mass on the right.

Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 463

9 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof. 10 Adjust the view:

■ ■

On the View toolbar, click

.

In the Dynamic View dialog, click Spin, and move the cursor in the drawing area until you can see the middle mass.

11 Right-click, and click Cancel to end the Spin command. 12 On the Design Bar, click Roof by Face. 13 Select the top 4 faces of the mass.

14 On the Options Bar, click Create Roof.

464 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files

select Core Face: Exterior. for Loc Line. click Modify to end the command. 20 In the Type Selector. Create walls from mass faces 18 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. to turn off the mass visibility in the view. click Wall by Face. and display only the roofs that 17 Click again to redisplay the masses. This option lets you create the walls on the inside of the mass. verify Basic Wall: Generic . 22 Select the 4 mass faces that have been highlighted in red below.15 On the Design Bar. click you created. 21 On the Options Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 465 . click . and adjust the view so you can see the front of the mass form. 16 On the View toolbar.200mm displays.

27 Select the left face of the left mass. 29 Using the same technique. 26 In the Type Selector. 24 Click to redisplay the masses. 28 On the Options Bar. verify Curtain System: 1500 x 3000mm displays. click Curtain System.23 On the View toolbar. create the 2 curtain systems shown below. click Create System. click to view only the walls and roofs. 466 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . Create curtain systems from mass faces 25 On the Design Bar.

Create a roof from a mass face 33 On the Design Bar. and select it. select the other wall. and on the Options Bar. click .30 On the View toolbar. and adjust the view so you can see the back of the mass forms. 32 Select the 5 walls highlighted below. click Create Roof. click Roof by Face. 34 Select the mass face shown below. TIP If you have difficulty selecting a wall that shares an edge with another wall. press TAB until the desired wall highlights. Create walls from mass faces 31 On the Design Bar. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 467 . click Wall by Face.

36 Select the 4 mass faces shown below. and select the mass face shown below. click Wall by Face. Create the final wall 37 On the Design Bar. 39 Click to redisplay the masses. 468 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .Create additional curtain systems from mass faces 35 On the Design Bar. click Curtain System. click Create System. click to view the building that you have created. and on the Options Bar. 38 On the View toolbar.

click in the view. under Floor Plans. specify a point for the camera target.Create a 3D perspective view of the building with a camera 40 In the Project Browser. 42 Place the camera and its target: ■ ■ ■ On the View tab of the Design Bar. as shown. 44 On the View toolbar. 43 Resize the view by moving the frame grips until you can see the building. double-click Level 1. In the far left corner of the building that you created. and click in the drawing area to hide the grips. and curtain systems that make up your building Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 469 . click Camera. specify a point to place the camera. The view frame is highlighted in red and its grips display. 41 Zoom out beyond the drawing extents. The perspective view created by the camera displays. roofs. Below the right corner of the view. to view only the walls.

click Modify. 46 On the Options Bar. and select the left curtain system in the view. 470 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files . select Center. Click OK. Under Grid 1 Pattern. click .You may need to resize the view again. Under Grid 2 Pattern. 48 Repeat the preceding steps to change the justifications of the 2 other curtain systems in the view. Click the frame to display its grips. Change the justification of the curtain systems 45 On the Design Bar. click 47 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . select Center. for Justification. for Justification. Modify the roofs 49 On the Views toolbar.

56 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. double-click 3D View 1. and adjust the view so you can see the front of the building. 55 On the View toolbar. under 3D Views. click . Add doors to the building 54 In the Project Browser. 57 In the Type Selector. under 3D Views. Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. verify M_Single-Flush: 0915 x 2134mm displays. 52 In the Project Browser. 58 Add doors to the building as shown below. click Door.50 Select each roof to display its grips. Creating a Building from Mass Faces | 471 . double-click {3D}. and click Cancel to end the command. 51 Right-click. 53 On the View Control Bar: ■ ■ Click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. and move the roof edges as shown below.

472 | Chapter 14 Importing SketchUp Files .59 Save and close the drawing.

Creating Families 6 473 .

474 | Chapter 15 Creating Families .

Changes to a family type definition ripple through the project and are automatically reflected in every instance of that family or type within the project. shape. Each family element can have multiple types defined within it. In this tutorial. they are still related and come from a single source. material set. you learn about the various types of families and the Family Editor. thus the term family. This keeps everything coordinated and saves you the time and effort of manually keeping components and schedules up to date.” The term family describes a powerful concept used throughout Revit Architecture to help you manage your data and make changes easily. Even though various types within a family can look completely different. each with a different size. 475 .About Families and the Family Editor 15 All elements in Revit Architecture 2008 are “family based. or other parameter variables as designed by the family creator.

This makes file management much easier. There are. Using the Family Editor. Host-based families have components that require hosts. floors. exterior. and partition wall styles. Family templates are either host-based or standalone. exceptions to this rule. Standard component families can exist outside of the project environment and have an . because there is only one file to track. while many more are stored in component libraries. You work with the Family Editor to create and modify components. You also learn about the Family Editor. Standalone families include columns. NOTE You can use “Transfer Project Standards” to copy system families from one project to another. transfer them from one project to another. you learn about the three types of families and how they are used within a project and how they are created. and save them from a project file to your library if needed. Standard Component Families Standard component families are loaded by default in project templates. Family templates assist you in creating and manipulating component families. For example. generic.rfa extension. You can either duplicate and modify an existing component family or create a new component family based on a variety of family templates. you create a family within predefined templates that contain the intelligent objects needed to create the particular family type. Some family types are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and cannot be created or modified outside of the project environment. An example is a door family hosted by a wall family. You provide the information necessary to uniquely describe the family geometry. 476 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor .Using Families and the Family Editor One of the many advantages of using Revit Architecture is the ability to create your own families of components without having to learn a complex programming language. You can load them into projects. floors. Introduction to Families Most families are created in the Family Editor and saved as separate files with an . but you cannot create new system families. foundation. however. the types would all be saved as one file which can then be loaded into any project. has wall types that define interior. and roofs. for example. and furniture. such as a dome roof. In addition. The following illustration shows different types within the basic walls family. You can duplicate and modify existing system families. trees. All different types that you create are stored with the master family file. The basic walls system family.rfa extension. if you create a family called "double-hung window" that includes types with several sizes. In this lesson. Walls. Revit Architecture has three types of families: ■ ■ ■ System Standard Component In-place System Families System families are pre-defined within Revit Architecture and comprise principle building components such as walls. and roofs are examples of these types of families. there is another type of family that allows you to create any shape or form required for a particular project and have Revit Architecture recognize it as a particular component type. and when and how to use it.

You create in-place families only within the current project. To add a family to your project. However. you learn about the Family Editor. Introduction to the Family Editor You can use the Family Editor to create both real-life building components and graphical/annotation components. custom wall treatments. you can drag it into the document window. for example. You do not have to carry the original family file along with the project. and when to use it. Families are listed in the Project Browser under their respective component category. or 3D. 3 Navigate to the library or location of the family. Families store all of the necessary geometry to display the two-dimensional (2D) and three-dimensional (3D) versions of particular objects. it is saved with the project. so they are useful for objects unique to that project. you need to reload the family in the project to see the updated family. or you can load it using the Load From Library. you learned about the different types of Revit Architecture families and when to use them. as well as the level of detail associated with that view. if you change the original family. In-place Families In-place families are either model or annotation components in a particular project. Family element visibility can be dependent of your viewing direction.The following illustration shows host-based window and door family components in a wall. The following illustration shows a building model of the Pantheon without a roof and with an in-place roof family. and also a standalone furniture family component. In this section. Introduction to the Family Editor | 477 . 4 Select the family file name and click Open. how to access it. After the family has been loaded in the project. elevation. 2 On the File menu. Load Family command on the File menu. and the category that you use determines the component’s appearance and display control within the project. In the final exercise. such as plan. Adding a family to a project 1 Open or start a project. You have a choice of categories when you create in-place families. click Load From Library ➤ Load Family.

it should be available within the Type Selector. In this case. navigate to a family file. 7 Specify 2D and 3D geometry display characteristics with sub-category and entity visibility settings. If you find a close match. it opens within the Family Editor.rfa extension and it will open Revit Architecture in the Family Editor. 5 Add label dimensions to create type or instance parameters. consider checking the web library and other web resources. you learn when to use the Family Editor. if you have exhausted your external resources. 9 Save the newly-defined family. you will inevitably come to a point where you need a specific component for your design. how to access it. 3 Next. With Revit Architecture open. you can click File ➤ Open. It is far easier to modify an existing component within the Family Editor than to create it from scratch. 478 | Chapter 15 About Families and the Family Editor . modify it as needed. 5 Finally. 2 If there isn’t a component family loaded in the project. 8 Define family type variations by specifying different parameters. and then load it into the project. you can search the component library loaded on your local hard drive. 4 Add dimensions to specify parametric component geometry. How to use the Family Editor You can access the Family Editor in several ways. such as newsgroups. When to use the Family Editor During the design process. 2 Define sub-categories for the family to aid in controlling visibility of the object. There is a logical thought process that you should follow: 1 Is there a component of this type already loaded into this project? If so. presume it is a bay window that you require.In this exercise. Within the Windows® environment. 6 Flex the new model to verify correct component behavior. and click Open. 3 Lay out reference planes to aid in drawing component geometry. and the general procedure for creating a standard component family. You can have a project open and the Family Editor open simultaneously. you can double-click any file with an . and click Open. When the family opens. Also consider any internal family libraries that may exist on the network. open it in the Family Editor. and then load it into a new project and see how it performs. select the appropriate template. General procedure for creating a standard component family 1 Select the appropriate family template. you should then try to find the component that most closely resembles it. This will be apparent because the only Design Bar tab available is Family. To start a new family. you should create a new component family using one of the family templates as a starting point. click File ➤ New ➤ Family. 4 If you can’t find the component you require.

You create a furniture family. Using the installed templates. you learn how to create specific Revit Architecture 2008 families. When you create an in-place family. you create an in-place family. In each lesson.Creating Components in the Family Editor 16 In this tutorial. not within the Family Editor. This allows you to create the family in the context of the current project. a lighting fixture. In addition. you start with a simple door family and then move onto a window family. you create it within the project file. 479 . you learn how to create a different type of component. and several annotation families.

and Sweep. switch between the different host types. There can be more than one closed loop in the sketch but they must not touch or intersect each other. When you are in sketch mode. Revolve. materials. create different host types for testing purposes. The sample below shows a start angle of 0° and an end angle of 180°. You can also join the geometry of different solids with the Join Geometry tool. Revolve: The sketch for a revolved object must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. 480 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and test after each step. it automatically cuts the solid. you can no longer select or modify an element that is not in the sketch. fill patterns. and export settings for selected geometry. Base and Top. Step 11: Test the family in a project environment. Blend: A blend contains two sketches. The sketches must not touch or intersect each other. Step 5: Dimension the reference planes and create parameters. Step 4: Create the skeleton of the family by adding reference planes in all required views. If you place the void before you add the solid. Blend. both of which must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. use the Cut Geometry tool to create the cut. click Finish Sketch on the Design bar. Step 7: Add 2 or more types in the Family Types dialog with different values for the parameters. Note that no geometry is created. To quit the sketch mode. lineweight settings. tests at this point ensure that the skeleton of the family works correctly. and pin those reference planes. ■ Extrusion: The sketch for an extrusion must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. The start and end angles of the revolution can be defined in the Revolution properties. line patterns. build geometry. if the family includes a host. continue to incrementally add reference planes. Step 3: Use the Element Properties dialog to define the reference planes that represent the origin of the family. line colors. if required. Sweep: A sweep contains two sketches: a 2D Path that can be a closed or open.Creating 3D Geometry All tools for creating 3D geometry can be accessed in the Family Design Bar. Subcategories are used to define visibility settings. Step 9: Create a single level of 2D and 3D geometry and lock it to the selected reference planes. Step 6: If the selected family template is a host-based template. You can unjoin solids or cancel the cutting of a void on a solid using commands available on the Tools toolbar: ■ ■ ■ ■ Join Geometry Unjoin Geometry Cut Geometry Don’t Cut Process Overview: Creating a Family Follow this best practice process for creating a family: Step 1: Select a family template. ■ ■ ■ When a void is placed on a solid. Step 10: Repeat the flex procedure until reasonably complete. and a Profile that must be a closed loop with no intersection between the sketch lines. There are four different methods to create Solid geometry and/or Void geometry in the Family Design Bar: Extrusion. Step 2: Define additional subcategories. Each sketch is set to a different height. Step 8: Test (flex) the family: switch between the types. The first line of the path defines the work plane for the profile. Solids and Voids are sketch based.

The furniture family in this lesson has the shape of two boxes. and on the Options Bar. you define the skeleton of the family with reference planes in plan and elevation views before you create geometry. Defining the Origin of a Family | 481 . The intersection of these reference planes now defines the origin and the insertion point of the family in plan view. 5 While pressing CTRL. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 6 Select the horizontal reference plane named Center (Front/Back). click to pin the reference planes. verify that Defines Origin is selected for the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. You should name reference planes to easily identify them in all views. . 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and create one below. verify that Other ➤ Defines Origin is selected. and click OK. Select a family template 1 Close all open projects or families. and click OK. 4 Navigate to Metric ➤ Templates. on the Edit toolbar.Defining the Origin of a Family The intersection of 2 reference planes in a view defines the origin and the insertion point of a family in a project. 8 Using the same method. and the family contains 2 reference planes in this floor plan. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane above the existing horizontal reference plane. click Ref Plane. You have created a new furniture family. and create one to the right. NOTE The direction of the reference planes is not important. click 7 In the Element Properties dialog. 3 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the existing vertical reference plane. select Metric Furniture. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Level is open. and click Open. select both reference planes. The floor plan Ref. therefore new reference planes are required in plan and elevation views. Adding Reference Planes Next.rft. click Training Files. You can control which reference planes are used as origin in the Element Properties dialog.

482 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . on the Options Bar. You name reference planes so that you can identify them in different views. click .4 Click Modify. for Identity Data ➤ Name. enter Left. Name reference planes 5 Select the left reference plane and. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK.

Front. and on the Options Bar. and click OK. The priority is specified as the Is Reference value in the Element Properties dialog for the reference plane. click . The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. for Other ➤ Is Reference. The reference allows minor strength snapping. The reference does not snap and shows no shape handles. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes Revit Architecture includes several predefined priorities that you can apply to a reference plane. Defining Priorities for Reference Planes | 483 . and Back. These are predefined system priorities that define a direction (for example. Shape handles display if the reference plane is dimensioned with an instance parameter. The reference plane can be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. Is Reference Value Not a Reference Definition The reference plane can be used in a family. as shown. If a reference plane defines the left edge of a family. define the priorities of the reference planes you have created. the strong reference is always captured first. left. These behave the same as strong references. right. When you dimension a family and a strong and a weak reference are close together. but cannot be accessed in a project for alignment or dimensioning. top). select Left. 1 Select the Left reference plane. name the other reference planes Right. Weak Reference Strong Reference Directional References According to these rules. The reference plane allows minor strength snapping. use Left for the Is Reference value.7 Using the same method. 2 In the Element Properties dialog.

enter 750mm. and press ENTER. The dimension can have a fixed value or can be driven by a parameter.3 Using the same method. Width. We want drive Length. 4 Select the Left reference plane and the Right reference plane. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter 300mm. select Add Parameter. and Back). specify the Is Reference value to correspond to the name of each reference plane (Right. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click above the planes to place the dimension. 1 Dimension the horizontal reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. 6 Select the dimension line. 5 Click Modify. select Dimensions. Click OK. Click the temporary dimension. for Name. click Dimension. For Group parameter under. 7 On the Options Bar. and press ENTER. Note that the Length parameter has been added to the dimension string. Front. Click the temporary dimension. enter Length. and Height as parameters of the furniture family. Repeat for the other reference plane. for Label. 2 Dimension the vertical reference planes: ■ ■ ■ Select one of the new reference planes. 484 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Repeat for the other reference plane. Dimensioning Reference Planes The dimension controls the behavior of the location of reference planes.

11 Click each of the vertical reference planes.9 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 485 . 12 Using the same method. and click the EQ symbol above the dimension. dimension the horizontal reference planes. dimension the outer horizontal reference planes with the Width parameter. click Dimension. Add a multi-segment dimension 10 On the Design Bar. click to place the dimension.

14 Create 2 horizontal reference planes and 2 vertical reference planes within the existing outer reference planes. you need to specify the Is Reference values. enter 50mm for the left temporary dimension. and click OK.Add base reference planes 13 On the Design Bar. Position and dimension the 4 new reference planes with a fixed distance from the outer reference planes. and Base Back. Base Front. and click . Base Right. but do not appear in the project. name them Base Left. select Not a Reference. and press ENTER. click Ref Plane. 16 While pressing CTRL. 18 Click the Base Left reference plane. 15 Using the Element Properties dialog. Now the reference planes can be used in the family. Because the base planes should not be used as a reference for dimensions or alignments. 17 In the Element Properties dialog. for Other ➤ Is Reference. 486 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click the base reference planes.

21 Select the Left and Base Left reference planes. position the remaining new reference planes.19 Using the same method. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 487 . click Dimension. 20 On the Design Bar. and lock the dimension.

dimension all other reference planes for the base with the outer reference planes. The front view displays. You can dimension reference planes in plan. Click OK. 28 Change the lower temporary dimension to 150mm. Make sure that you use consistent views to add dimensions. elevation. you add a reference plane and the Height parameter of the family in the Front view. Next. Under Is Reference. double-click Front. and click 27 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 24 On the Design Bar. For Identity Data ➤ Name. and lock the dimensions. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. 25 Create 2 horizontal reference planes above the existing horizontal reference plane. select Not a Reference. enter Base Bottom. the family contains a level and a reference plane that defines the origin of the family in the elevation view. 23 In the Project Browser. 26 Select the middle reference plane. 488 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .22 Using the same method. By default. and section views.

navigate to Training/Metric/Families. click 31 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . The basic skeleton of the furniture family is completed. Under Group parameter under. Click OK. select Dimensions. click Dimension. and click to place the dimension. 32 On the Design Bar.rfa. 33 Select the lower reference plane and the Base Bottom reference plane. enter Top. 34 Lock the dimension. Under Is Reference. select Top. for Name. 38 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. enter Height. 36 Click Modify. for Label. 37 Select the last dimension added. 30 With the top reference plane still selected.29 Select the top reference plane and change the temporary dimension to 1450mm. In the next exercise. 39 Click File menu ➤ Save. For Identity Data ➤ Name. on the Options Bar. Dimensioning Reference Planes | 489 . Click OK. and save the file as Cabinet. you create 2 types of the family in the Family Types dialog. select Add Parameter. 35 Dimension the lower reference plane and the Top reference plane.

4 In the Name dialog. and click OK. Family types allow you to predefine variations of a family. create a new type named 800 x 1000 x 1800. Best practice is to perform the first tests when the reference planes. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. clicking OK adjusts the geometry and closes the dialog. click New. 1 In the Project Browser. For Length. for Height. check the family as often as possible by switching between different types. double-click Ref. 8 Using the same method. create a new type named 1000 x 2000 x 2800. for Width. for Name. 7 Click Apply. enter 1800. for Height. 10 Click Apply. but no geometry has been added. parameters. Family types are also a good way to test your family for correct behavior. clicking Apply adjusts the geometry without closing the dialog. NOTE In order to see changes applied to the reference planes. enter 1000. 9 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click in the titlebar of the Family Types dialog and drag it so that both the dialog and the drawing area are visible. enter 2000. click Family Types.Managing Family Parameters and Family Types Parameters and their values can be managed in the Family Types dialog. When a family is loaded in a project. Level. Note that the reference planes and the dimensions adjust according to the entered values. enter 1000. 3 In the Family Types dialog. under Floor plans. enter 800. enter 2800. for Width. Note that the name of the type you have created is displayed in the Name selection box at the top of the dialog. For Length. 6 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. each type is represented with selected parameters. 490 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . NOTE In the Family Types dialog. 11 Click OK. 5 Using the same method. and dimensions are specified. under Family Types. the types defined in the family editor appear in the project. enter 600 x 1500 x 1600.

double-click Ref. You constrain the extrusions to the reference planes you created in previous exercises. select the geometry. Because you lock the planar edges in plan view. Creating Solid Forms Use the simplest form to create solid geometry for a furniture family. The Family Editor offers multiple tools to set a work plane current: Define a work plane before adding geometry: Using the Work Plane dialog. Change a work plane for existing geometry: You can also use the Work Plane dialog to change the work plane for existing geometry in a drawing. Sketch an extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. create an extrusion from the plan view. you use extrusions to model the solid geometry of a cabinet family. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Defining Work Planes Any solid/void form is created on a work plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Lock geometry to reference planes | 491 . Level. you access the Work Plane dialog by clicking (Plane) on the Tools toolbar. In such an instance. under Floor Plans.Lock geometry to reference planes Locking sketch lines: Lines of a sketch can be locked to a reference plane in plan view to ensure that the edge of the solid is maintained if the dimension of the reference plane changes. there is an option on the Sketch tab of the Design Bar to Set Work Plane. This option will display the Work Plane dialog. Reference planes have the ability to define a work plane if they are named. where you can define the plane. A work plane is a planar surface on which you can add sketch lines or others components. Creating Geometry In this lesson. In that case. you can select a named reference plane or define a work plane by picking a plane or a line in the drawing area before you sketch geometry. Define a work plane in sketch mode: While in sketch mode. Locking edges of solid/void forms: In elevation view. you only need to lock the top and bottom edges of the solid geometry. Make sure that you have set an appropriate work plane when you create 2D or 3D geometry in your family. edges of a solid form can also be locked to reference planes. and click Edit Work Plane on the Options bar.

When the setup is more complex. with multiple reference planes or when you need to sketch with the Line tool.3 On the Options Bar. You can use the Align tool to align the sketch lines with the desired reference planes. When the parameters Length and Width change. An example of sketch lines drawn off of reference planes An example of sketch lines aligned on the desired reference plane 492 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . the extrusion is changed accordingly in plan view. click Finish Sketch. click . do not sketch directly on the reference planes. 5 Lock each line of the sketch with the reference plane. The sketch of the extrusion is now locked to the outer reference planes in plan view. 4 Sketch the rectangle directly on the outer reference planes. NOTE Only sketch directly on the desired reference planes when the situation is clearly arranged. 6 On the Sketch tab.

click (Align). under Elevations. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Front. 10 Lock the dimension. NOTE You can also drag the top edge of the solid geometry with the extrusion shape handle to the top reference plane and lock it. 9 Select the Top reference plane as the alignment reference. 8 On the Options Bar. Creating Solid Forms | 493 .Adjust extrusion height 7 In the Project Browser.

Level. Create the base geometry 12 In the Project Browser. The base should display only in elevation and 3D views. under View Specific Display. 13 On the Design Bar. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. and click the top edge of the extrusion to align to this reference plane. double-click Ref. under Elevations. 23 Save the file.11 Align the bottom of the extrusion to the Base Bottom reference plane and lock the dimension. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Floor Plans. click . 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and lock all the sketch lines with the reference planes. clear Plan/RCP. 20 Click Modify. double-click Front. 19 Select the Base Bottom reference plane as the alignment reference. 494 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 21 Click the base geometry and on the Options Bar. click . 14 On the Options Bar. 18 On the Tools toolbar. 17 In the Project Browser. 15 Sketch the rectangle directly on the reference planes for the base (the inner reference planes). click Visibility. and click OK. click Finish Sketch.

The lines display again. The family geometry should change each time you apply a different type. NOTE You have to exit Symbolic Line mode to lock the geometry. click Family Types. and lock the geometry. they show only in views that are parallel to their creation view. click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Element. elevation. select the base geometry and the furniture geometry. 5 On the Options Bar. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. 8 While pressing CTRL. and section views of the family. 12 In the Family Types dialog.Creating 2D Geometry You can create families using 3D and 2D geometry. 13 Click OK. elevation. and lock the geometry. click Symbolic Lines. use model lines to display additional lines in the 3D view of the family. 7 Draw a symbolic line from the lower left corner to the top right corner. Creating 2D Geometry | 495 . click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Reset Temporary Hide/Isolate. 3 On the View Control Bar. verify that the Line tool is active. the software automatically creates the correct plan. 6 Draw a line from the top left corner of the reference planes to the lower right corner. For example. By design. Symbolic lines: these can be added in plan. under Detail Levels. double-click Ref. under Floor plans. select both lines and. and click Apply. For the furniture family. 14 On the View Control Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. and section views. Test the family 11 On the Design Bar. lines need to be added as symbolic illustration in plan views. Click Modify. Level. and click the locks to create the constraint. They are view direction specific. but not in coarse. click Visibility. the lines need to appear in medium and fine detail levels. When you use 3D geometry. There are 2 methods for adding 2D geometry available from the Family tab of the Design Bar: Model lines: these can be added in all views. select a different family type. 9 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 While pressing CTRL. and click OK. as the current displayed detail level is Coarse. Hiding the existing solid geometry before you create the symbolic lines helps you create the lines on the intersections of the reference planes. 1 In the Project Browser. clear Coarse. select the symbolic line. on the Options Bar. The lines are greyed out. Model lines and symbolic lines can also be constrained to reference planes.

496 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the View Control Bar. This opens a predefined 3D view. Loading a Family into a Project Families can be loaded directly from the family editor into selected open projects. set a 3D view of the family current. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. The last view creates the thumbnail view of the family. 5 Save the file. 4 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Save View. double-click View 1. under 3D views. 3 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northwest. Before you save the family.The geometry of the furniture family is complete. Save a 3D view 1 In the Project Browser.

9 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. this view is maintained when the family is opened again. and click to place them. you create new door types based on size and assign parameters respectively. you can create additional types with different dimensions in a project. click Load into Projects. 13 Close all open projects or families. 12 On the Views toolbar. Creating a Door Family In this lesson. The family is loaded into the new project.NOTE If you save the family in a 3D view different than the default {3D} view and if you have saved the orientation of your view. click . You can press SPACE to change the orientation of the type. you create a custom door family based on the definition of a flush exterior door. expand Families ➤ Furniture ➤ Cabinet. 7 Click Window menu ➤ Cabinet. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Click Modify. drag each of the types into the drawing area. After you create the door leaf as an extrusion. Creating a Door Family | 497 . under Cabinet. click (3D). If required.rfa 3D View: View 1 to switch to the family. Create a project 6 On the Standard toolbar. All the family types you created are listed as options.

Drawing the Door Plan View Components In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.You also learn how to constrain the door design by adding labelled dimensions to specify values for the door width. click Training Files. you draw the plan view components for the new door family. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Door.rft. 498 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and thickness. Create a new family based on the default door template 1 Close any open projects or families. height. The door type has a variable height and width.

click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. The door opening is aligned and locked to the reference planes. 7 Enter ZF. select Doors [projection]. 6 Maximize the window. Labelled dimensions. Floor Plan: Ref. click Tile. are also displayed. click Symbolic Lines. 9 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Window menu.4 On the View menu. and represent the door opening profile. The reference planes that display are part of the default door template. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 499 . Level. Draw the door panel plan view representation 8 On the Design Bar. sketch a 1000 mm x 50 mm rectangle for the door leaf as shown. 11 Starting at the door hinge point on the lower left corner of the door opening. click . part of the door properties. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. 10 On the Options Bar. Notice the four tiled views.

Dimension the door panel 12 On the Design Bar. 500 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 13 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the door panel as shown. click Dimension. 14 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the door panel to the bottom edge as shown.

Because labelled dimensions are parameters. click Modify. select Width for Label. 19 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the vertical dimension that controls the door width. 17 On the Options Bar.Add dimension labels to the door leaf 15 On the Design Bar. Drawing the Door Plan View Components | 501 . 18 Select the horizontal dimension that references the door thickness. a user can change the value of the Width parameter and all dimensions labelled with it change accordingly. NOTE This same label is applied to the dimension referencing the door opening. select Thickness for Label.

along with the witness line controls. click Symbolic Lines. 23 On the Options Bar. 502 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 22 In the Type selector. the arc is selected so you can see the arc center and each end point. then you specify each end point. select Plan Swing [cut]. TIP If the Arc from Center and End Points command is not visible on the Options Bar.Draw the door opening plan view arc 20 Select the dimension with the two EQ symbols and move it. click the down arrow button. 25 Select the upper right corner of the door opening for the arc start point. and select the command from the menu. When drawing an arc from center and end points. you first specify the arc center. In the image below. and select the intersection at the upper left corner of the door opening for the arc center point. 26 Select the upper left corner of the door leaf for the arc endpoint. 24 Enter SI. 21 On the Design Bar. so it doesn’t visually interfere with the door swing location. click . as shown.

you create the solid geometry of the door leaf with an extrusion. 1 In the Project Browser. click Set Work Plane. 2 On the Design Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 503 . click Lines. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. select Reference Plane: Exterior for Name. 3 On the Design Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. enter 50 mm for Depth. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry In this exercise.Add a reference plane for the exterior face of the door 27 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry” on page 503. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click . 5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 7 Select the upper left corner of the door opening for the first corner of the rectangle. and then select the lower right corner of the door opening for the second corner of the rectangle. under Specify a new Work Plane.

TIP When you add the witness line to the exterior face of the extrusion. click Dimension. 504 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 9 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 10 On the Design Bar. 11 Add a horizontal dimension from the exterior face of the door extrusion to the interior face of the door extrusion. double-click Left. click Finish Sketch.8 On the Design Bar. then click to specify the dimension witness line. use the TAB key to toggle to the extrusion reference.

Medium. and Fine are selected. 17 On the Options Bar. select Thickness for Label. and clear Plan/RCP. Level. 18 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. click Modify and select the dimension. under View Specific Display. verify that Coarse. click Modify. and When cut in Plan/RCP. Creating the Door Leaf Solid Geometry | 505 . select Front/Back. 16 Select the door leaf extrusion. 14 In the Project Browser.12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. click Visibility. Specify the visibility of the door leaf in plan view 15 On the Design Bar. 19 Under Detail Levels. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. Left/Right. 13 On the Options Bar.

Red/Stained. Assigning Materials to the Door Components In this exercise. click . click Modify. click for Texture. click OK. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Oak. 4 In the Materials dialog. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. enter Oak Door for Name. for Material. under AccuRender. 6 Click OK. click . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. The door leaf is assigned the new Oak Door material.Dark. 16 In the Element Properties dialog. select Oak Door for Name.20 On the Options Bar. 7 In the Materials dialog. “Assigning Materials to the Door Components” on page 506. click Materials. The solid geometry of the door is now complete. 5 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK. 3 In the New Material dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. Create a new material based on the existing red oak material 1 On the Settings menu. you assign a material to the door leaf. 15 On the Options Bar. Assign the Oak Door material to the door frame 14 Select the interior door frame extrusion. select Panel for Subcategory. It also defines its appearance when rendered. 19 Repeat the previous five steps for the exterior frame extrusion. 506 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . and click OK. Assign the Oak Door material to the door leaf 8 Select the door leaf extrusion.No Gloss. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Proceed to the next exercise. click Duplicate. 13 On the Design Bar. under Materials and Finishes. click OK. and click OK. This material designation controls how it displays in shaded and hidden line views. 2 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. click 11 In the Materials dialog. click OK. click 17 In the Materials dialog. for Material. under Name. 9 On the Options Bar. select Oak Door.

under 3D Views. View the new door 20 In the Project Browser.The door frame is assigned the new Oak Door material. and select Shading with Edges. Assigning Materials to the Door Components | 507 . The Oak Door material is now assigned to the door leaf and door frame. 21 On the View Control Bar. 22 Zoom in on a door corner. Flex the door model 23 Zoom out to view the entire door. click the Model Graphics Style control. under Views (all). double-click View 1.

25 In the Family Types dialog. Try to move the dialog off to the side so you can still see the door family next to it. 2 In the Family Types dialog. This allows you to apply changes made in the dialog and see how the new door reacts. and click OK. Under Other. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. enter 2500 mm for Height. 26 Return the door parameters to their original values. you define new door types based on the door model that you have created. 28 Proceed to the next exercise. 27 Click OK. Click Apply. enter 925 x 2000mm for Name.Flexing the new family is an important part of the design process. Define new door types with various heights and widths 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you ensure it adjusts to the changes it may encounter once loaded into a project. Enter 1500 mm for Width. In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1000 mm for Width. 24 On the Design Bar. By flexing the new component. click Family Types. enter 75 mm for Frame Width. Notice the door geometry adapts to the new dimension values. under Family Types. enter 125 mm for Frame Width. 508 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click Apply. “Defining New Door Types” on page 508 Defining New Door Types In this exercise. click Family Types. 3 In the Name dialog. enter 2000 mm for Height. Under Other. click New.

11 Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Load. 10 In the Family Types dialog. You now have three new door types defined within your door family. enter 1220 x 2134mm for Name. navigate to the location where you saved the door family.4 In the Family Types dialog. click New. enter 2000 mm for Height. enter 750 x 2100mm for Name. Define the third new door type. 9 In the Name dialog. Click Apply. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Save. select Project. and click OK. 5 Under Family Types. Place new door types in the project 21 On the Design Bar.rte. 16 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. click New. 15 In the New Project dialog. Enter 925 mm for Width. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.rfa. click Training Files. 13 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new door family with the name. 19 On the Options Bar. 12 On the File menu. Enter 750 mm for Width. 7 In the Family Types dialog. and click OK. click Browse. 6 In the Name dialog. under Template file. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.rfa. Training Door. Enter 1220 mm for Width. Use the default wall selection in the Type Selector. 8 Under Family Types. enter 2100 mm for Height. enter 2134 mm for Height. Define the second new door type. select it. 20 In the Open dialog. and click Open. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click New ➤ Project. Defining New Door Types | 509 . 22 Draw a wall segment 8000mm long. Load the new door family into a new project 14 On the File menu. click Door. and click OK. Click Apply. 17 Under Create new. Click Apply. click Wall. Training Door.

24 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges. select Training Door : 750 x 2100mm. 29 Add this door to the center of the wall as shown.23 On the View toolbar. 25 On the Design Bar. click Door. 28 In the Type Selector. select Training Door : 925 x 2000mm. 510 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 In the Type Selector. 27 Add the door to the left side of the wall as shown. click the Model Graphics Style control. click .

you assign new dimension values to the window to create new types within the window family. 32 You can close all files without saving. Finally. You create the window frame. This completes the lesson. Creating a Window Family In this lesson.30 In the Type Selector. and specify values for the window width. 31 Add the third door type to the right side of the wall as shown. you create a custom window family based on the definition of a fixed rectangular window with nine lights. Creating a Door Family. glazing and mullions as extrusions. You now have three new flush exterior doors based on the new door family prototype. and mullion offset. Creating a Window Family | 511 . height. select Training Door : 1220 x 2134mm. You then assign parameters to the window family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the nine-light prototype. default sill height. and create the window sash as a sweep.

rft. The label name. these specific type parameters are adjustable once the window is part of a project. you specify the parameters for the new window family. also one of the window properties. this is the keyboard shortcut for Zoom to Fit. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 4 Maximize the Elevation: Exterior view. 6 Two dimension strings display with their labels. 5 Enter ZF. click New ➤ Family. The window type has a variable height and width. When you add labels to dimensions. equally spaced vertical mullions. Height and Default Sill Height. Create a new family based on the default window template 1 Close any open projects or families. is one of the type parameters. and the height of the top and bottom row of lights is adjustable.Specifying the New Window Parameters In this exercise. 512 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 2 On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Window.

click Family Types. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. 9 Enter 1000 mm for Height and 2000 mm for Width. 10 Click OK. This is the starting point for the new window. you create the solid geometry of the window frame with a sweep. 2 On the Design Bar.” and it is done to avoid conflicts and to ensure that all model geometry adjusts to changes as designed. “Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry” on page 513. 8 In the Family Types dialog. 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Sketch a rectangle to represent the sweep path starting at the upper left corner of the opening and ending at the lower right corner. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Creating sweep geometry requires first sketching the sweep path. 4 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry In this exercise. Click Apply. Change the height and width values again. The profile is swept along the path to create the solid geometry. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.Modify the new window type height and width parameters 7 On the Design Bar. click . click Lines. enter 1300 mm for Height. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. Notice how the window opening adapts to the changing dimension values. and click Apply. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 513 . then sketching the sweep profile. Snap the cursor to each corner. click Sketch 2D Path. This process is called “flexing the model. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window opening. Create a sweep path for the window frame solid geometry 1 On the Design Bar. and click Apply. Enter 1800 mm for Width.

13 On the Options Bar. click Finish Path. click Sketch Profile. click the Scale control. click . Add a reference plane for the sweep profile 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the View Control Bar. The red dot indicates the intersection of the sweep path and the profile plane. 514 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and specify an offset of 50 mm. click Ref Plane. 11 Zoom in on the red dot in the middle of the wall. select Elevation: Right. 9 In the Go To View dialog. and click Open View. 12 On the Design Bar. 14 Pick the exterior wall face so that a reference line is offset 50 mm to the left of the exterior wall face as shown. 7 On the Design Bar. and select 1:10.6 Click the locks so the sweep is locked to the opening size.

select Prefer: Wall faces. enter Sash for the Name. Sketch the window frame profile 23 On the Design Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Chain and click . 22 In the Element Properties dialog. 17 Add a dimension between the exterior wall face and the new reference plane. 21 On the Options Bar. 16 On the Options Bar. click Dimension. and select the dimension. and select the reference plane. click . Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 515 . click Lines. 24 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Design Bar. 25 Below the red dot. and click OK.15 On the Design Bar. 19 Drag the value control off to the side as shown. click Modify. under Identity Data. sketch the frame profile approximately as shown.

516 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . When the lock displays.NOTE When you sketch the frame profile. 26 On the Design Bar. When the lock displays. click it to constrain the frame to the exterior wall face. click Modify. the exact dimensions are not critical. However. the frame profile should extend beyond the edges of the wall. click it to constrain the left edge of the frame to the interior face. Precise dimensions are assigned to the frame profile in subsequent steps. 28 Select the left edge of the frame section. 27 Select the right edge of the frame section. and drag it to the exterior face of the wall. and drag it to the interior face of the wall.

30 On the Design Bar. click it to lock the line to the reference plane. When the lock displays. TIP After adding the dimension.29 Select the short line parallel and to the right of the Sash reference plane. select the line you want to move. click Dimension. as shown. Drag it to the left and align it with the Sash reference plane. Creating the Window Frame Solid Geometry | 517 . and specify the dimension value. 31 Add a vertical dimension of 40 mm to the left side of the frame and another vertical dimension of 20 mm to the right side of the frame. click Modify.

click Finish Sweep. 34 On the Tools toolbar. click . When the lock displays. 518 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Lock the alignment when the lock icon displays. click the lock to constrain the present value. 37 On the Design Bar. Next. TIP If you don’t see the lock icon. select the top horizontal line of the frame profile. 35 Select the horizontal reference plane that intersects the red dot. zoom out until it displays. 33 Select the 20 mm dimension. Align the new profile to the window opening edge 32 Select the 40 mm dimension. click Finish Profile.Modify each dimension if necessary. this is the top of the window opening. When the lock displays. 36 On the Design Bar. click the lock to constrain the present value.

4 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. click Set Work Plane. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry | 519 . 40 Proceed to the next exercise. and enter . “Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry” on page 519. you create the solid geometry of the window sash with an extrusion. spin the model so you can see the interior of the frame. 39 In the Project Browser. Creating the Window Sash Solid Geometry In this exercise. and select the option. under Elevations. and select Lock. select Reference Plane: Sash for Name. Specify the window sash extrusion parameters 1 On the Design Bar. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise.The window frame profile is swept around the window opening. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and double-click View 1.45 mm for Depth. If necessary. 5 On the Options Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. Pick the sash profile lines 6 Place the cursor over the left side of the frame. double-click Exterior. 2 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). press TAB to cycle through the selection options. expand 3D Views. click Lines. click . Chain of walls or lines.

and lock icons display on each line. and then specify the lower right inside corner for the second corner of the rectangle. 9 On the Design Bar. Draw offset extrusion lines 7 On the Options Bar.50 mm for Offset.The entire sash outline is selected. ■ Click . set the following options: Click . click Finish Sketch. 520 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . You specify a negative offset value to indicate an extrusion direction inside of the window frame. 8 Specify the upper left inside corner of the window frame for the first corner of the rectangle. ■ ■ Enter .

double-click Right. Notice the sash is aligned with the Sash reference plane. 11 In the Project Browser. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry In this exercise. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 521 . double-click View 1. “Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry” on page 521. under Elevations.10 In the Project Browser. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. under 3D Views. you create the solid geometry of the window glass with an extrusion. The window sash extrusion is now complete.

522 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. click Ref Plane. 4 Select the left edge of the sash so that a vertical reference plane is added 30 mm to the right. Add a reference plane to specify the glass work plane 1 In the Project Browser. and enter 30 mm for Offset. double-click Right.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 2 On the Design Bar. as shown. click .

and select Lock. click Set Work Plane. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Pick lines to define the glass extrusion 12 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click OK.5 On the Design Bar. and click OK. 6 Add a horizontal dimension of 30 mm between the left edge of the sash and the reference plane. under Elevations. 15 On the Design Bar. enter -12 mm for Depth. 16 On the Options Bar. 7 On the Design Bar. click . select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. double-click Exterior. enter Glazing for the Name instance parameter. 17 Select each of the sash extrusion lines to create the glass boundary. 13 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. click Modify. 9 On the Options Bar. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 523 . click . 8 Select the reference plane. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 In the Work Plane dialog.

click Modify. View the window model with frame. 20 Select the glass extrusion. sash. click . click Finish Sketch. double-click Right. you can control subcategory visual style using the Objects Styles dialog. NOTE Assigning subcategories to model elements is important. 22 In the Element Properties dialog.18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Design Bar. specify Glass for the Subcategory instance parameter. 524 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . under Identity Data. and glass 19 In the Project Browser. After the family is loaded into a project. under Elevations. and click OK. 21 On the Options Bar.

You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. For example. Click Apply. double-click View 1. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. Creating the Window Glass Solid Geometry | 525 .24 In the Project Browser. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Spin the model if necessary to view the sash and frame at various angles. enter 1500 mm for Height. Under Other. NOTE After flexing the model. Flex the window model 25 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. 26 In the Family Types dialog. under 3D Views. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. Move the Family Types dialog off to the side so you can see the window model. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. make sure the window frame stretched with the opening and that the glass extrusion remains attached to the interior edge of the sash.

Add reference planes to specify the location of the new window mullion centerlines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. 28 On the Edit toolbar. click Dimension. the exact location is not critical. double-click Exterior. click Ref Plane. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click to return the window to its original dimensions. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. 3 Add two horizontal and two vertical reference planes inside of the window opening to approximate the mullion centerline locations as shown. NOTE When you draw each reference plane. 526 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .27 Click Cancel. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry In this exercise. Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. 4 On the Design Bar. “Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry” on page 526. you create the solid geometry of the window mullions based on reference planes and extrusions.

8 Select the dimension on the upper-right that references the top two horizontal reference planes. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 527 . 6 Add a dimension between the bottom of the window opening (bottom reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane above it. click Modify. After adding the dimension. as shown. Do not be concerned with dimension values. Do not be concerned with dimension values. as shown. Add a mullion offset family parameter 7 On the Design Bar.Add a multi-segmented dimension referencing all of the vertical reference planes except the center (Left/Right) as shown. 5 Add a dimension between the top of the window opening (top reference plane) and the horizontal reference plane below it. click the EQ symbol to make the dimension segments equal.

13 Select the horizontal reference plane second from the bottom.. you may want to drag the dimension value as shown. select Family parameter. 528 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select <Add parameter. 12 In the Family Types dialog. 11 On the Design Bar.> for Label. Click OK. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. enter 350 mm for Mullion Offset. Select Instance. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog. and click OK.. enter Mullion Offset for Name. click Family Types. Under Parameter Data.9 On the Options Bar. TIP Due to the length of the dimension label. under Dimensions. Notice the dimension value becomes editable. Under Group parameter under. select Dimensions.

click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 16 Select the dimension on the lower-right. 18 On the Design Bar. However. and click . 17 On the Options Bar. As you did before. click Modify. Do not be concerned with precise dimensions. select Mullion Offset for Label. 20 On the Design Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 529 . Create the vertical mullion extrusions 19 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. 23 On the Options Bar. and enter 350 mm as the new value. click Lines. it is critical that the short horizontal lines align with the horizontal edges of the sash. 15 On the Design Bar. enter 14 mm for Depth. move the dimension value as shown. 22 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select Reference Plane: Glazing for Name. 21 In the Work Plane dialog. Watch the Status Bar to be sure that the lines are snapping to the sash. and click OK. 24 Sketch a rectangle centered on the left vertical mullion reference plane approximately as shown.14 Click the dimension value.

click Dimension. and to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. Click the EQ symbol to make both horizontal dimensions equal.After you complete the sketch. Move the dimension values as shown. 25 Click both of the locks so the mullion adapts to changes in window height. notice lock icons display on the interior horizontal edges of the sash. 26 On the Design Bar. 27 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane centered between the vertical mullion extrusion sketch lines. 530 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

select <Add parameter> for Label. Under Parameter Data. Under Group parameter under. and place it above the dimension you placed in the previous steps. Select Type. select Family parameter. click Modify. Click OK. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Mullion Width for Name. specify the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Type. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 531 . 30 On the Options Bar.28 Add a horizontal dimension from the left edge to the right edge of the mullion extrusion. 29 On the Design Bar. Move the Mullion Width value to the left as shown. select Dimensions. and select the dimension you added in the previous step.

follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion on the left. Remember.32 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the right vertical reference plane as shown. Specify the mullion width parameter 34 On the Design Bar. enter 40 mm for Mullion Width. and on the Options Bar. Move the dialog off to the side so you can see the window in the drawing area. Select the dimension. click Family Types. 532 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. select Mullion Width for Label. ■ ■ Do not be concerned with the value of the mullion width. click Finish Sketch. NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. 33 On the Design Bar. This is changed in later steps. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Add a dimension between the left and right mullion edges.

and aligned with the sash edge. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. and the mullions stretch with the new window height.Notice the mullions remain centered and equally spaced on the reference planes. click Set Work Plane. select Reference Plane : Glazing for Name. You should flex the model at regular intervals to catch problems early. enter 1500 mm for Height. Flex the window model 36 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Click Apply. 41 In the Work Plane dialog. NOTE After flexing the model. enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. 40 On the Design Bar. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 533 . Sketch the horizontal mullion extrusions 39 On the Design Bar. Under Other. it is important to verify that all model elements adapted to the changes as expected. evenly spaced. In this case. 38 On the Edit toolbar. under Specify a new Work Plane. and click OK. Most problems can be resolved by aligning and locking lines. or undoing the same. 37 Click Cancel. you should pay close attention to the new mullions and make sure they remain centered.

49 On the Design Bar. and select the dimension you added in the previous step. click Lines. 534 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 47 On the Design Bar. click . and move the EQ values off to each side as shown. Notice the Depth value on the Options Bar remains at the previously specified value. 48 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion. click Modify. and then to the bottom edge of the mullion extrusion.42 On the Design Bar. as shown. and then click the lock icons to lock the left and right edges to the edge of the sash. 43 On the Options Bar. 44 Sketch a rectangle centered on the upper horizontal mullion reference plane approximately as shown. click Dimension. Do not be concerned with the dimension value. 45 On the Design Bar. Click the EQ symbol to make both vertical dimensions equal. 46 Add a vertical dimension from the top edge of the mullion extrusion to the reference plane at the center of the mullion. click Dimension.

NOTE Do not lock the lines to the sash edge as you did previously. click Finish Sketch. Select the dimension. follow these basic steps: ■ Sketch the rectangle similar to the mullion you just completed.50 On the Options Bar. Remember. select Mullion Width for Label. 51 Repeat the previous steps to create an identical mullion centered on the lower horizontal reference plane as shown. ■ Dimension mullion edges and the reference plane at the center of the mullion and click the equality constraint. Move the dimension value as shown. Add a dimension between the upper and lower mullion edges. select Mullion Width for Label. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 535 . ■ ■ 52 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar.

Join the mullion geometry 53 On the Tools menu. 55 In the Project Browser. If necessary. 536 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . double-click View 1. spin the model to get a good view of the mullions. and select the vertical mullions. click Join Geometry. under 3D Views. 54 Select the horizontal mullions.The horizontal mullion extrusions are now complete.

enter 1500 mm for Height. Flex the window model 56 Adjust the location of the window model within the drawing area. click Family Types. 59 Click Cancel.Notice the mullion extrusions are joined. Under Other. 58 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. 57 On the Design Bar. so when you open the Family Types dialog. Creating the Window Mullion Solid Geometry | 537 . enter 500 mm for Default Sill Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 1500 mm for Width. Notice the window adapts to the new dimension parameters and the mullions stretch with the new window height. you can still see the window.

navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Pine. and mullions 7 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Material Library dialog. 4 In the Materials dialog. No Gloss.60 On the Edit toolbar. select Stained. 3 In the New Material dialog. 9 Select the window frame sweep. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Materials. and click OK. enter Pine Frame for Name. click OK. click to return the window to its original dimensions. Yellow/. the sash. under Elevations. Assigning Materials to the Window Components In this exercise. “Assigning Materials to the Window Components” on page 538. 61 Proceed to the next exercise. you assign materials to the frame. 6 In the Materials dialog. click Duplicate. click the Model Graphics Style control. sash. and mullions that you want to display in renderings of the new window. 2 In the Materials dialog. double-click Exterior. under AccuRender. 538 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click for Texture. Assign the Pine Frame material to the frame. and click OK. and the mullions. TIP Hold the CTRL key down as you select the sweep and various extrusions. Dark. Create a new material based on the existing yellow pine material 1 On the Settings menu. sash. 8 On the View Control Bar. and select Shading with Edges.

select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 17 In the Element Properties dialog. verify that Coarse. select Pine Frame for Name. and click OK. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. 18 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. click OK. double-click View 1. and click OK. verify that Coarse. The window frame is assigned the new Pine Frame material. 13 In the Materials dialog. Assigning Materials to the Window Components | 539 .10 On the Options Bar. select Front/Back and When cut in Plan/RCP (if category permits). 12 Under Materials and Finishes. under Identity Data. 16 Under Detail Levels. select Frame/Mullion for Subcategory. under View Specific Display. under View Specific Display. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. under Graphics. and Fine are selected. click . under 3D Views. double-click Right. 20 Select the glass extrusion. select Edit for Visibility. Medium. clear the other view options. 24 In the Project Browser. click Visibility. and click OK. Medium. click Modify. 23 Under Detail Levels. 15 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog. Modify the glass visibility 19 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Material. and Fine are selected.

You then create multiple window types that will be available to the user after the family is loaded into a project. and glass display their assigned materials. The window frame. 540 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . “Defining New Window Types” on page 540. Defining New Window Types In this exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. sash.25 Zoom in on a window corner. You begin by adding a formula to the mullion offset parameter to specify horizontal divisions of one third the overall height of the window. you define new window types based on the window model that you just created. mullions.

click Family Types. The horizontal mullions are now spaced apart at one third the height of the window. In the Family Types dialog. verify that 2000 mm is specified for Height.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. and click Apply. and click Apply. Defining New Window Types | 541 . 2 On the Design Bar. Add a mullion offset formula to the family type 1 Zoom to fit and move the window model off the side of the drawing area so it will be visible after you open the Family Types dialog. Flex the window model 4 In addition to flexing the model after the addition or modification of model geometry. enter Height/3 in the Formula column for Mullion Offset. it is also a good idea to flex the model after a new formula is applied. 3 In the Family Types dialog.

Enter 1250 mm for Height. 5 In the Family Types dialog. enter 1000 mm for Height.The window height is doubled. under Family Types. 8 In the Family Types dialog. verify that the following parameter values are specified: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2500 mm for Width. Define new window types with various heights and widths 6 In the Family Types dialog. 542 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . but the one third height spacing is maintained in the horizontal mullions. Click Apply. click New. and click Apply. and click OK. 7 In the Name dialog. enter 2500 w x 1250mm h for Name.

specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter 1800 mm for Width. 10 In the Name dialog. enter 1800 w x 1500mm h for Name and click OK. click to start a new project based on your default template. 15 On the File menu. click Save.9 Under Family Types. Define the final window type 12 Under Family Types. You now have three new window types defined within your window family. Enter 1500 mm for Height. Training Window. 14 In the Family Types dialog. 19 On the Options Bar. Click Apply. Defining New Window Types | 543 . and click OK. enter 2600 w x 1300mm h for Name. Click OK. click New. 13 In the Name dialog. Load the new window family into a new project 17 On the Standard toolbar. specify the following parameter values: ■ ■ ■ Enter 2600 mm for Width. Enter 1300 mm for Height. click Load.rfa. 11 In the Family Types dialog. 16 Navigate to the location of your choice and save the new window family with the name. 18 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click New. Click Apply. click Window.

24 On the Options Bar. clear Tag on Placement. Notice the detail that displays. 31 On the Design Bar.rfa file. 23 On the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. 25 In the Type Selector. 27 In the Type Selector. and click Open. and select Shading with Edges. 30 Add the third window to the right side of the wall. This is because you set the visibility values to display when cut in plan/RCP. 544 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .20 In the Open dialog. select it. click Window. 22 Draw a generic wall segment 12000 mm long. select Training Window : 1800 w x 1500mm h. navigate to the location of your Training Window. 26 Add the window to the left side of the wall. 28 Add this window to the center of the wall. 35 On the View Control Bar. select Training Window : 2500 w x 1250mm h. click . select Training Window :2600 w x 1300mm h. click the Model Graphics Style control. 34 On the View toolbar. click Modify. click Wall. Place new window types in the project 21 On the Design Bar. 32 On the View menu. 33 Zoom in on the center window. click Thin Lines.

elevation. This completes the Creating a Window Family lesson. For example. line patterns. The window family includes nested families for the outer sill and uses shared parameters for evaluation purposes. You can also switch on/off selected subcategories in a project. ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a Complex Model Family | 545 . and section views of a family. Solid Revolve. Creating solid geometry: Based on the 4 ways to create solid geometry in Revit Architecture (Solid Extrusion. and symbolic lines are usually assigned to selected Subcategories. that each family in a project can have a different value for an instance parameter. A large number of parameters reduce the performance of the family. you should sketch the design of the family and make notes of the desired behavior: ■ Subcategories: Solid geometry.You have three new fixed nine-light windows based on a new window family prototype. Solid Blend. Formulas between parameters drive the behavior of parts of the family. Parameters: You should carefully define the parameters in a family. Solid Sweep) you can decide in which view you start to create your solid geometry. Model lines are displayed in every view. Instance parameter means. model lines. line colors. Creating a Complex Model Family In the following exercises. and materials of the subcategories. where type parameters drive the geometry for each family type. Solid geometry: Use solid geometry as often as possible to represent a family because it automatically gives you the correct plan. This allows you to drive lineweights. sketch. a parameter drives geometry in a family. and create a complex window family with a complex opening. Revit Architecture allows you to specify a parameter as instance or type parameter. you plan. the easiest way to create a window frame is to create an extrusion including two rectangles for the frame edges in an elevation view of the family. Basically. Linework: You can create model lines and symbolic lines in a family. where symbolic lines are view direction specific: they show only in views that are parallel to the view where they have been created. Planning a Complex Model Family Before you start to create a complex model family.

and Elevation views. Level of detail: Revit Architecture allows you specify the visibility of each solid form and line geometry for the Detail Levels Coarse. Medium and Fine. By instance: Each single instance of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. where a Shared parameter can appear in schedule and tags and can be exported to ODBC. Various parameters drive the behavior of the family. A Family parameter does only appear in the family itself.■ Scheduling/exporting parameters: Revit Architecture differs between different parameter types. 546 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and should account for instances when either of the casements is toggled off. you should define different widths for each of the casements. Assigning material: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Directly: The solid geometry in the family has material explicitly assigned. Sketching the requirements The window family should be modelled with different detail levels in Plan. Detail Level View Plan Coarse Medium Fine Section Elevation Additionally. Section. By family type: Each type of the family can have different material assignments for selected solids in the family. you can use a parameter with the Parameter Data Type Yes / No. ■ Visibility settings: If specific visibility settings are required for selected geometry or linework. By category: The solid material gets its material from the selected category or subcategory in a project.

you open a template that you use as the basis for the complex window family. click Training Files. Selecting a Family Template | 547 . 1 Close all open projects or families. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. navigate to Metric ➤ Templates.rft. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. and click Open. You should test your family often as you incrementally build geometry in the next steps. The family editor is opened with a new window family. The family template uses a wall as host.The window contains the following parameters: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A: Insertion depth B: Frame depth C: Frame width D: Sash width E: Center post width F: Wall offset G: Left width H: Right width I: Width J: Wall offset top K: Top frame height L: Bottom frame height M: Height Outer sill: ■ ■ ■ Fixed front height: 30mm Fixed back height: 50mm Fixed offset: 30mm ■ Glass fixed width: 20mm Selecting a Family Template In this exercise. One test scenario consists in switching between the wall types with different thicknesses to check whether the constraints work correctly. select Metric Window. create a second wall type with a different wall thickness so that you can test the family.

This requires that the standard rectangular opening be deleted and replaced with voids cut out from the default wall. 10 Click OK 3 times.4 Select the wall. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. ■ ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 7 In the Name dialog. for Is Reference. . accept the default name. and click OK. In the Type Selector. click Edit. so you model the new opening first. enter Insertion Edge. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. in the Edit toolbar. select Weak Reference. click Edit/New. 3 Select the horizontal reference plane. for Name. Under Other. 5 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. refer to the command line to verify what is selected. and click . Click OK. and on the Options Bar. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Right reference plane. enter 400. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. and on the Options Bar. for Structure ➤ Thickness. . click Duplicate. 9 In the Edit Assembly dialog. select Defines Origin. This means that the exterior wall layers that have wraps assigned will end at this reference plane. 548 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Verify that Defines Origin is selected. 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ Under Construction. 9 Click Modify. Create reference planes for the opening 6 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. select Basic Wall : Wall 1. for Construction ➤ Structure. click 5 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. click 2 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening The window contains a more complex wall opening than a standard rectangular opening. under Other. select Wall Closure. 7 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Left reference plane. click . 11 Switch back to the previous wall settings: ■ ■ Select the wall. Prepare the centered reference planes 1 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.

By extending the reference pane. Dimension horizontal reference planes 15 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 18 Select the Exterior reference plane. For Group parameter under. you can more easily select it because it doesn’t overlap with other elements in the drawing. and click . Dimension vertical reference planes 21 On the Design Bar.10 Select the first reference plane you created. 20 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Dimension. 23 Click Modify. 16 Dimension the Exterior and Insertion Edge horizontal reference planes. TIP Press TAB until the reference plane is highlighted. use the blue circle grip to drag the left edge of the reference plane to line up with the left side of the Insertion Edge reference plane. The horizontal reference plane defines the inner edge and the new vertical reference planes define the left and right edges of the wall offset for the opening. for the temporary dimension. 17 Click Modify. 22 Dimension the Left and Wall Offset Left vertical reference planes. for Identity Data ➤ Name. for Label. enter 75. on the Options Bar. Next. 12 Using the same method. for Name. name the other new reference plane Wall Offset Right. enter Insertion Depth. 19 Select the dimension. and select Instance. Click OK. drag the Interior horizontal reference plane to the left side. Creating the Skeleton for a Complex Wall Opening | 549 . 14 Using the same method. select Add Parameter. refer to the status bar to verify what is selected. because each inserted value should have a different insertion depth. 13 Select the Exterior horizontal reference plane on the top wall edge. This parameter is defined as an instance parameter. select Constraints. enter Wall Offset Left. dimension the vertical reference planes. click Dimension.

you apply the same method to reference planes in an elevation view. select Add Parameter. and click . Click OK. enter Wall Offset. 33 Select the new reference plane. 25 Select the dimension. for Name. enter Wall Offset Top. 39 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. click Dimension. For Group parameter under. for the temporary dimension. click Ref Plane. enter Wall Offset Top. for Identity Data ➤ Name. 32 Click Modify. select Construction. for Label. 36 Dimension the Head and Wall Offset Top reference planes. under Elevations. 38 Select the dimension. 28 Select the dimension. on the Options Bar. enter 100. for Label. for Name. for Label. dimension the Right and Wall Offset Right reference planes. 31 Create a horizontal reference plane below the Head reference plane. select Construction. 30 On the Design Bar. 37 Select the Wall Offset Top reference plane. select Wall Offset. 550 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 35 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. The reference planes and parameters for the plan view are defined. For Group parameter under. Dimension reference planes in elevation 29 In the Project Browser. for the temporary dimension. and click OK. double-click Exterior. and press ENTER.24 Select the Wall Offset Left reference plane. on the Options Bar. Next. select Add Parameter. enter 100. 34 In the Element Properties dialog. 27 Using the same method. Click OK. The skeleton for the opening is complete.

Wall Offset Left. click (Plane). for Name. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion.rfa. 8 Using the same method. 1 In the Project Browser. click (Align). 4 On the Design Bar. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. Level. select the top edge of the sketch. NOTE Zoom in as necessary so that the rectangle does not snap to reference planes. 7 Select the Exterior reference plane. lock the other sketch lines to the Insertion Edge. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. under Floor Plans. select Reference Plane : Sill.40 Save the file as Casement Window. 6 On the Tools toolbar. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 551 . 2 On the Tools toolbar. double-click Ref. click . 5 On the Options Bar. and Wall Offset Right reference planes. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening You model the opening with voids that are cut from the wall geometry. and sketch the extrusion as shown. and lock the alignment.

Right. create and constrain a void extrusion for the inner part of the opening as shown. 12 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Using the same method.9 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. and lock the alignment. 11 In the Project Browser. 14 Align the bottom edge of the smaller void to the Sill reference plane. 10 Using the same method. Interior. 16 On the Views toolbar. click Finish Sketch. the voids need to be cut from the wall geometry. and lock the alignment. click (Align). and Left reference planes. align and constrain the top and bottom edges of the other void to the Head and Sill reference planes. Also. NOTE Create the void extrusion directly below the one you just created. 552 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . In order to use the voids as a new opening. click (3D). 13 Align the top edge of the smaller void to the Wall Offset Top reference plane. you need to delete the standard rectangular opening cut. double-click Exterior. 17 Select the left vertical edge of the default opening (Opening Cut). and press DELETE. Lock the sketch lines to the Insertion Edge.

19 Select the void. click (Cut Geometry). 18 On the Tools toolbar. you control correct behavior of the new wall opening by changing the wall offset parameters. Next. cut the second void from the wall.The opening in the wall is deleted. The first void is cut from the wall. Modelling a Complex Wall Opening | 553 . 20 Using the same method. and then select the wall geometry.

click Family Types. for the temporary dimension. 9 Select the reference plane. 3 Select the reference plane. Level. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . enter Frame Left. double-click Ref. For Identity Data ➤ Name. enter 100mm. 5 On the Design Bar. enter 50mm. 1 In the Project Browser. click Dimension. and click . 554 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Click OK. 6 Dimension the Left and Frame Left vertical reference planes. Note that the opening has changed correctly.Change wall offset parameters 21 On the Design Bar. enter 50mm. You can also test the opening by flexing the wall types and thicknesses. select Not a Reference. 7 Select the Frame Left reference plane. 22 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Construction ➤ Wall Offset Top. 8 Create a vertical reference plane to the left of the Wall Offset Right reference plane. under Floor Plans. Creating Window Frame Geometry The reference planes and parameters for the window frame are defined in the plan and exterior elevation views. For Wall Offset. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 2 Create a vertical reference plane to the right of the Wall Offset Left reference plane. Click OK.

for the temporary dimension. 16 Select the left dimension. For Other ➤ Is Reference. Creating Window Frame Geometry | 555 . on the Options Bar. enter Frame Width. for Label. 11 On the Design Bar. for Label. 17 Using the same method. 12 Dimension the Right and Frame Right vertical reference planes. For Group parameter under. for Name. select Add Parameter. enter 100mm. Click OK. Click OK. select Construction. select Frame Width. enter Frame Right. 13 Select the Frame Right reference plane. select Not a Reference. click Dimension. create a horizontal reference plane below the Insertion Edge reference plane. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. and create a Frame Depth type parameter dimension as shown.10 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Name. 14 Select the right dimension. on the Options Bar. name it Frame Interior.

dimension the planes at 120mm. name the reference planes Center Post Left and Center Post Right. and create a Center Post Width type parameter dimension. 556 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 19 Using the same method used previously. The exact vertical position of the reference planes is not important.18 Create 2 more vertical reference planes to the left of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane. NOTE The positioning of the center post will be specified later in the exercise.

and click 23 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . Creating Window Frame Geometry | 557 . 29 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 28 Select the lower dimension. select Add Parameter. For Group parameter under. and dimension the Head and Frame Top reference planes at 150mm. for the temporary dimension. Click OK. 22 Select the reference plane. for Label. select Construction.Create parameters in elevation 20 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar. for Label. 24 On the Design Bar. name it Frame Top. select Add Parameter. on the Options Bar. 31 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Click OK. enter Frame Bottom. 30 Select the other dimension. enter 150mm. enter Frame Height Top. 21 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Sill reference plane. enter Frame Height Bottom. For Other ➤ Is Reference. under Elevations. select Not a Reference. 25 Dimension the Sill and Frame Bottom horizontal reference planes. 27 Using the same method. For Group parameter under. 26 Select the Frame Bottom reference plane. Click OK. double-click Exterior. create a horizontal reference plane below the Wall Offset Top reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name. click Dimension. select Construction.

The skeleton of the window frame is complete. enter 70mm. enter 2000mm. enter 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 and Click OK. enter 50mm. 36 Under Family Types. enter 80mm. add 2 window types with different parameters to check whether the parameters work correctly. enter 80mm. for Insertion Depth. For Wall Offset. for Height. Before you model the frame geometry. 38 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. for Wall Offset Top. Create family types 32 On the Design Bar. enter 100mm. For Center Post Width. for Frame Depth. click New. For Frame Width. Additional values for new parameters will be set continuously after each reasonable step of completeness. enter 100mm. 558 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . enter 50mm. 34 Under Family Types. enter 80mm. enter 50mm. 33 In the Family Types dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. 37 In the Name dialog. You create 2 family types for the Casement Window family. A family type manages type parameters only. enter 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. enter 100mm. Under Dimensions. For Width. Under Construction. and click OK. enter 60mm. for Wall Offset Top. click New. Under Construction. Family types allow you to set different values for parameters and to save this state as a specific type of the window family. For Frame Width. For Frame Height Top. enter 1500mm. instance parameters can be changed on an instance level for each inserted window instance. For Frame Height Bottom. click Family Types. enter 100mm. 35 In the Name dialog. For Wall Offset. for Insertion Depth. Under Other.

Head. 42 In the Work Plane dialog. Under Other. for Frame Depth. for Name. For Center Post Width. Right. 43 On the Design Bar. enter 1400mm. enter 1500mm. select Reference Plane : Frame Interior. NOTE Create 3 rectangles: One on the left. Frame Bottom. 40 Under Name. and click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane. enter 80mm. Sill. NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. one on the right. For Frame Height Bottom.■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Frame Height Top. Under Dimensions. Frame Right. Frame Left. Left Creating Window Frame Geometry | 559 . select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Center Post Right. and a third rectangle outside the intersection of the reference planes. for Height. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimensions. 39 Click Apply. click . For Width. and lock the alignments to create a constraint for all edges as shown. Frame Top. enter 120mm. click (Plane). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 44 On the Options Bar. Center Post Left. enter 120mm. enter 70mm. and sketch the extrusion with 3 rectangles as shown. Frame Bottom. 45 On the Tools toolbar. Rectangle position in view Left Right Outside (larger rectangle) Lock to reference planes Frame Top. click (Align). 46 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. and click OK. Model frame geometry 41 On the Tools toolbar.

52 On the Views toolbar. 55 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. under Floor Plans. 56 Click OK twice. clear Coarse. 48 In the Project Browser.47 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. Level. For Graphics ➤ Visibility/Graphics Overrides. click 50 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). select Frame/Mullion. . double-click Ref. 49 On the Tools toolbar. Frame material will be assigned later in the tutorial. and lock the alignment. clear Plan/RCP. The window frame is complete. click (3D). click Edit. 53 Select the extrusion solid geometry. Under Detail Levels. click Finish Sketch. 560 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 57 On the View Control Bar. and click 54 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 51 Click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane.

enter Sash Left Left. 3 On the Views toolbar. double-click Ref. 2 On the View Control Bar. and click OK. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. you model each sash separately. 59 In the Family Types dialog. and click 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ . and click Apply. under Name. because the visibility settings are different for the left and right sashes. 60 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Changing the scale makes it easier to work in detail. Defining the Window Sash Parameters You use known modelling procedures to create the geometry for the window sash. 5 Select the leftmost reference plane you just created. Define parameters in plan view 1 In the Project Browser. 4 Create 4 vertical reference planes as shown. click (Thin Lines) to work with heavier lineweights. click Scale ➤ 1:10.Test the family again 58 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. click Family Types. Level. under Floor Plans. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 561 . However. For Identity Data ➤ Name.

for Label. select Construction. 9 Select the left dimension. 11 Select the next dimension. click Dimension. select Not a Reference. Click OK. specify each dimension as 50mm. under Elevations. on the Options Bar. Click OK. You can drag dimension text to the left or right side using the Drag Text grip. select Sash Width. add parameters to the remaining dimensions. select Not a Reference. 12 Using the same method. select Add Parameter. specify the properties for the remaining new reference planes. and click 17 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . double-click Exterior. enter Sash Bottom. 15 Click Modify. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 14 Create a horizontal reference plane above the Frame Bottom reference plane. For Identity Data ➤ Name.■ ■ For Other ➤ Is Reference. 7 Using the same method. working from left to right: Reference Plane 2 3 4 Properties Name: Sash Left Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Left Is Reference value: Not a Reference Name: Sash Right Right Is Reference value: Not a Reference 8 Dimension the reference planes with adjacent reference planes for the window frame as shown. For Group parameter under. Define parameters in elevation view 13 In the Project Browser. 16 Select the reference plane. Click OK. 562 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . for Label. on the Options Bar. 18 On the Design Bar. enter Sash Width. 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name.

25 For Name. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. 27 Click Apply. click (Align). for the temporary dimension. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. Before you model the sash geometry. Dimension the Frame Top and Sash Top reference planes. extend the 2 window types with different values for the new parameter to check whether the parameter work correctly. enter 50mm. enter 50mm. 32 Align all sketched edges to the reference planes. Specify it as Not a Reference. select both dimensions. Create solid extrusions 29 On the Design Bar. 23 While pressing CTRL. 20 Select the Sash Bottom reference plane.19 Dimension the Frame Bottom and Sash Bottom reference planes. click . on the Options Bar. 28 For Name. for Sash Width. 30 On the Options Bar. select Sash Width. 21 Using the same method. Note that the reference planes adjust to the new dimension. create a horizontal reference plane below the Frame Top reference plane: ■ ■ ■ Name it Sash Top. for Label. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. click Family Types. Defining the Window Sash Parameters | 563 . and sketch 2 rectangles to form the right sash extrusion as shown. 31 On the Tools toolbar. and lock the alignment to create a constraint for all edges as shown. The skeleton of the window sash is complete. enter 70mm. for the temporary dimension. 22 Select the Sash Top reference plane. 26 Under Construction. 24 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.

Sash Top. switch to the Exterior Elevation view and create the solid extrusion for the left sash. 36 In the Element Properties dialog. Sash Right Left. 564 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and lock the alignment. 38 On the Tools toolbar. 37 In the View Range dialog. 40 Click Modify. Sash Bottom. Frame Bottom. NOTE Modifying the cut plane offset value allows you to see the sash extrusion in the view. 41 Using the same method. 43 On the Views toolbar. 33 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click 39 Align edges: ■ ■ (Align). Rectangle position in view Outside Inside Lock to reference planes Frame Top. 42 Switch back to the Ref. Level. Center Post Right. and click OK twice. enter 1500. click (3D). 35 Click View menu ➤ View Properties. Align the top edge of the extrusion to the Insertion Edge reference plane. under Floor Plans. and lock the alignment. 34 In the Project Browser. Frame Right. double-click Ref.NOTE Refer to the following table for information on the alignment reference planes. Align the bottom edge of the extrusion to the Frame Interior reference plane. Level floor plan view to align the edges as you did for the right sash. click Finish Sketch. click Edit. for Extents ➤ View Range. Sash Right Right. for Cut plane ➤ Offset.

5 Click OK 3 times. enter Sash Right. 46 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. click Add parameter. clear Plan/RCP. create a visibility parameter for the left sash named Sash Left. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 7 On the Design Bar. 47 Click OK twice. select Frame/Mullion. and click 45 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ . select the 2 extrusions. 6 Using the same method. Defining Visibility Parameters You add visibility parameters so that you can display the left and right sashes separately. note the parameters you have just created with checkboxes in the Value column. select Construction. click Edit. clear Coarse. click the rectangular button on the right side. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. Defining Visibility Parameters | 565 .44 While pressing CTRL. 3 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. For Group Parameter under. and click . for Graphics ➤ Visible. Under Detail Levels. 2 In the Element Properties dialog. click Family Types. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. 1 Select the right solid geometry of the window sash.

1 In the Project Browser. Click OK. double-click Exterior. and Glass Axis Horizontal. click Dimension. 9 Create 3 more reference planes as shown. 8 In the Project Browser. and click OK. the geometry is only greyed out if the visibility parameter is not assigned. and click Apply. Glass Axis. Glass Axis Left. Creating Reference Planes for the Glass Geometry The glass geometry will be dimensioned directly in the sketch. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400.Test the family 8 For Name. 5 On the Design Bar. 7 Click EQ to center the reference plane for the glass axis between the reference planes for the window frame. 3 Select the reference plane. Level. For Other ➤ Is Reference. 9 Select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. and click 4 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ . 10 Under Construction. select Not a Reference. under Elevations. 6 Using one dimension string. NOTE Any 3D geometry assigned to a Yes/No parameter is still visible in the family editor. not aligned to reference planes. and Frame Interior reference planes. under Floor Plans. 566 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . This is because the glass width and height will be extended to the window frame if the sash is switched off. double-click Ref. and name them Glass Axis Right. The glass is located in the center of the frame / sash with a fixed thickness of 20mm. clear Sash Left. enter Glass Axis. For Identity Data ➤ Name. 2 Create a horizontal reference plane between the Insertion Edge and Frame Interior reference planes. dimension the Insertion Edge.

This centers the glass reference planes between the window sashes. click (Plane). Creating the Glass Geometry In this exercise. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. under Specify a new Work Plane. click . and sketch the right glass extrusion as shown. create EQ dimensions with the adjacent sash reference planes. and click OK. 3 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 2 In the Work Plane dialog. 4 On the Options Bar. you use extrusions to create the glass for the complex window family. Sketch the right glass extrusion 1 On the Tools toolbar. You create parameters that define the dimensions of the glass geometry.10 For each of the new reference planes. select Reference Plane : Glass Axis. for Name. Creating the Glass Geometry | 567 .

For Group Parameter under. Click OK. click Dimension. 8 Using the same method. 10 Dimension the left edge and right edge of the sketch. and the right edge of the sketch. dimension the top and the bottom of the sketch.Dimension the sketch 5 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 12 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. select Add Parameter. 7 Click EQ. 6 Using one dimension string. dimension the left edge of the sketch. for Label. 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. the Glass Axis Right reference plane. select Other. enter Glass Length Right. 11 Select the dimension line and. click Dimension. on the Options Bar. and create a Glass Height Right parameter. 568 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . dimension the top and bottom edge of the sketch. 13 Using the same method.

14 On the Design Bar.0. 21 On the Views toolbar. Assign properties 15 Select the glass geometry. For Graphics ➤ Visibility. click (3D). create the glass geometry for the left sash with the new parameters Glass Height Left and Glass Length Left. Under Detail Levels. clear Coarse. select Glass. enter -10. clear Plan/RCP. Creating the Glass Geometry | 569 . 17 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog: ■ ■ Under View Specific Display. 20 Assign the same Element properties to the left extrusion that you assigned to the right. click Finish Sketch. click Edit.0. and click 16 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ . For Extrusion Start. For Constraints ➤ Extrusion End. 18 Click OK twice. For Identity Data ➤ Subcategory. Create the left glass extrusion 19 Using the same method. enter 10.

Creating Formulas to Define Width Formulas are one of the many powerful aspects of Revit Architecture Families . Formulas are typed directly into the Family Types dialog box. They can also be used to control Yes/No parameters. as it will minimize performance hits.22 On the View Control Bar.used to control families in many ways. set the height to 2000) as well as mathematical expressions. However. Expressions for formulas Mathematical Function Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Logarithm Square Root Sine Cosine Tangent Arcsine Arccosine Arctangent e raised to an x power Absolute Value Expression + * / x^y. Formulas can use logic such as IF statements (IF the width is 1000. if you can build your family without using formulas. x raised to the power of y log sqrt(Value) sin cos tan asin acos atan exp abs 570 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading With Edges. where all of the parameters for a family are listed. you should do it. The formulas in the following chapters of this tutorial should give you mainly an impression of how complex formulas can be set.

for Label. 3'-0" ) Simple IF .(2*30) Simple IF IF ( <condition>. enter 1000. Click OK. 8' ) ) ) IF . For Group parameter under. This would overconstrain the family. NOTE Do not dimension the right sash using the same method. click Dimension. under Parameters. for the temporary dimension. 8 . 8 . 7 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 4 Click Modify. 9 In the Family Types dialog. 5' . 3 ) Yes/No Controlling the state of a Yes/No parameters A with a next Yes/No parameter B: Not (B) Position the center post 1 In the Project Browser. 8 . The width of the right sash will be determined using formulas. Level. double-click Ref. <result-if-true>. y = 2).6. 2'-6". 8 On the Design Bar. 3 ) Multiple IF IF ( Length< 35' . select Add Parameter. enter Width Sash Right. 2' 6" . Creating Formulas to Define Width | 571 . 10 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. under Floor Plans. IF ( Length < 45' . For Type of Parameter. 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. <result-if-false>) IF ( Length < 35' . click Add. 3 ) Simple IF . click Family Types. select Dimensions.11 Samples for formulas Standard Width . 3 Dimension the Frame Left and Center Post Left reference planes. 5 Select the Center Post Left reference plane. 3' .AND IF ( AND (x = 1 . 6 Select the dimension. on the Options Bar. select Length. IF ( Length < 55' ."A" is less than or equal to "B": IF ( NOT ( A > B ) .OR IF ( OR ( A = 1 . enter Width Sash Left. B = 3 ) .

Frame Height Bottom). enter if(Sash Right.2 * Sash Width).Frame Height Top Frame Height Bottom . (Width Sash Left .Width Sash Left) .2 * Sash Width). ■ Click Apply. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200. enter 1200. Test the family 13 Under Name. and press ENTER. The glass dimensions are now dependent on the visibility settings for the window sashes. In the Formula row for Glass Height Right. (Width Sash Right . In the Formula row for Glass Height Left.Frame Height Top .■ ■ For Group Parameter under. in the Formula row for Glass Length Right. Frame Width. Define glass width and length 18 On the Design Bar. The value for Width Sash Right is now calculated dependent on the values for Width. Height . Height . You can test the formulas by switching between the different window types in the Family Types dialog. Click OK. 19 In the Family Types dialog. 14 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left. enter if(Sash Right. enter if(Sash Left. 17 For Name. (Height . 11 In the Family Types dialog. for Dimensions ➤ Width Sash Right ➤ Formula.Center Post Width 12 Press ENTER. Width Sash Left. select 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400. (Height .Frame Height Top . click Family Types. enter the formula to get the calculated width: (Width . the new value is 560. and cannot be changed in the Family Types dialog. Width Sash Left).Frame Height Top . 572 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Dimensions. ■ Click Apply.Frame Height Bottom . enter if(Sash Left. select 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200.(Frame Width * 2) . and Center Post Width. the new value is 880. enter formulas: ■ Under Other. The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. enter 400. and click OK.2 * Sash Width). ■ ■ ■ 20 Click OK. 15 For Name. The value is greyed out.Frame Height Bottom). and press ENTER. Width Sash Right). 16 Adjust the parameters: ■ For Width Sash Left.2 * Sash Width). The value for Width Sash Right is updated by the formula entered previously. In the Formula row for Glass Length Left.

10 Create single symbolic lines as shown. expand Windows. clear Chain. under Category. and lock all alignment constraints. 8 In the Type Selector. select Elevation Swing [projection]. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. 5 On the Tools toolbar. select Reference Plane : Insertion Edge. and click OK. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. note the Elevation Swing subcategory. 3 Click OK. under Specify a new Work Plane.Creating Elevation Lines The best method to create the elevation lines for the sashes is to create them in the exterior elevation view. under Elevations. double-click Exterior. click Symbolic Lines. Creating Elevation Lines | 573 . 9 On the Options Bar. click (Plane). 7 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. They should be placed on a selected subcategory. for Name. 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 4 In the Project Browser.

15 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. for Visible. and on the Options Bar. Next. under Graphics. for Name. 4 In the New Material dialog. 12 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. When the family is added to a project and the subcategory does not exist in the project. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. and click . and click the button on the right side of the column. When you assign default materials in a family. select the rectangular button on the right side. If the subcategory already exists in the project. and click OK three times. associate the symbolic lines on the right side with the Sash Left family parameter. 16 Click OK twice. select all symbolic lines. expand accurender ➤ Solid Colors. click Visibility. select Default. Creating Material Parameters Material parameters for selected solid geometry make the family more flexible in terms of materials assignments for different window types. click . for Windows ➤ Frame/Mullion. 574 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and select Whites. 5 In the Materials dialog. under Detail Levels. 13 While pressing CTRL. sash. Assigning Default Materials You can assign a default material for each subcategory. and click Duplicate. Material parameters override the material assignment of the subcategories in the Object Styles dialog. 3 In the Materials dialog. 2 In the Object Styles dialog. you create material parameters for the frame. and click OK. 18 Save the file. enter Window Frame. under AccuRender. clear Coarse.11 In the drawing area.Matte. Assign a default material 1 Click Settings menu ➤ Object Styles. 7 Select Cool. the object styles settings of the project define the default material. The default material is assigned to the Frame/Mullion category. under Category. and glass. 6 In the Material Library dialog. and click OK. 17 Using the same method. unless the default value is < By Category >. for Name. check whether the solid geometry has the correct subcategory assigned. select the 2 symbolic lines on the left side. while pressing CTRL. select Sash Right. click in the Material column. this subcategory is added to the project and has the material assignment from the family.

The Back and Center (Left/Right) reference planes define the origin of the family. 3 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. 7 Using the same method. enter Frame. 9 Click OK. Level.1 On the Views toolbar. and associate the sash and glass solid geometry with the respective parameter. which nests them. select Materials and Finishes. a Width type parameter. 4 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. the solid geometry has the material that is assigned to its subcategory in the Object Styles dialog. For Group parameter under. you can switch between imported families of the same category. click Training Files. 6 Click OK three times. and a fixed dimension for the sill overhang. click Add parameter. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Concrete Sill. a Depth instance parameter. Creating Nested Families | 575 . and click 3 In the Element Properties dialog. click Family Types. Creating Sill Families There are 2 window sill families available in the training folders. When the family is loaded into a project. parameters of nested families can be associated with parameters of the main family.rfa. Using family type parameters in the main family. In this lesson. 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. You can then model parts of the family separately from the main family model. The default value is By Category. for Materials and Finishes ➤ Material. 2 Click File menu ➤ Open. Note the new Material parameters under Material and Finishes. 2 Select the solid geometry of the window frame. and click Open. 10 Save the file. you learn how to import window sill families into the window family and associate parameters of the nested families to the main family. Creating Nested Families Families can be imported into families. click (3D). . You can override it on a type level. Open the families and explore the design of them. create 2 material parameters named Sash and Glass. Concrete sill family 1 Close all open projects or families. double-click Ref. If this parameter is defined as shared. 4 In the Project Browser. click the rectangular button on the right side. The concrete sill family consists of a solid extrusion.

10 Click File menu ➤ Open. 11 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Select the solid geometry. double-click View 1. under 3D views.5 In the Project Browser. navigate to Metric/Families/Windows/m_Metal Sill. click Training Files. and is visible only in detail level Fine. and click . The Bottom reference plane defines the origin of the family. under Elevations. 576 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . has a fixed material Window Sill Concrete assigned. and click Open. and click . double-click Left. The elevation view shows reference planes with fixed dimensions. The sketch lines of the extrusion are locked to all exterior reference planes. 6 In the Project Browser. 12 Select the solid geometry. 8 Click OK.rfa. The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. Metal sill family 9 Close all open projects or families.

Loading Sill Families into the Window Family | 577 . and verify that m_Metal Sill. select Casement Window.rfa. 3 Using the same method. Load the metal sill 7 Click Window menu ➤ Metal Sill. and then load families into the casement window family you have created. The metal sill family is now loaded into the Window family. Loading Sill Families into the Window Family Families opened in the family editor can be loaded directly into other families. 11 Click Window menu ➤ Tile. 2 In the Open dialog. 8 On the Design Bar. has a fixed material Window Sill Metal assigned. click Load into Projects. 4 On the Family tab of the Design Bar.rfa. The category of a family can be changed under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.rfa -3D View: View1. 13 Click OK. You open the main family first. Load the concrete sill 1 Click File menu ➤ Open. Both sill families were created with the Generic Model family template and changed to a window family.rfa. 10 Click OK. and Origins are as in the concrete sill family. Parameters. 6 Click OK.The sill is placed on a subcategory Window Sill. 5 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Load into Projects. open m_Concrete Sill. The concrete sill family is now loaded into the Window family. select Casement Window. and is visible only in detail level Fine.rfa is cleared. and verify thatm_Concrete Sill. Reference Planes. navigate to Casement Window. 9 In the Load into Projects dialog.rfa is cleared.rfa. and click Open.

rfa. select Length.rfa. Click OK. Creating a Length Parameter The sill length needs to be equivalent to the exterior width of the window family.rfa and m_Concrete Sill. 13 Maximize Casement Window. under Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. you create a parameter that determines the true sill length in the window family. they appear in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Windows. click Add. select Construction. in the Formula column. enter Sill Length. Associate the parameter to nested families 6 In the Project Browser. As both sill families have been defined as Window families. 578 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Parameter Data ➤ Name. Create the parameter 1 On the Design Bar. double-click Concrete Sill.2* Wall Offset. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 5 Click OK. click Family Types. under Parameters. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. enter Width . for Construction ➤ Sill Length. For Type of Parameter. For Group parameter under.12 Close and save m_Metal Sill.

select Insertion Depth. 3 In the Project Browser. The Width instance parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the Insertion Depth parameter of the window family. 11 Select the Center (Left/Right) reference plane of the window family. and lock the alignment. Align the sill 10 On the Tools toolbar. 9 Click OK twice. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. select the hidden Center (Left/Right) reference plan of the Sill family. click (Align). The sill family needs to be positioned and aligned in plan and elevation views. Place the family 1 In the Project Browser. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. 9 Click OK twice. click the rectangular button on the right side. The Length type parameter of the nested families now has the same value as the calculated value of the Sill Length parameter of the window family. associate the Length parameter of the Metal Sill family. 10 Using the same method. 2 On the View Control Bar. 8 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. and click to place it. you place the concrete sill in the project.7 In the Type Properties dialog. Placing the Sill Family | 579 . Associate an instance parameter 6 Select the solid geometry of the concrete sill. 5 Click Modify. for Dimensions ➤ Width. double-click Ref. expand Families ➤ Windows ➤ Concrete Sill. select Sill Length. and click . under Floor Plans. aligning it to reference planes in both plan and elevation views. Placing the Sill Family In this exercise. Level. click the rectangular button on the right side. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. for Dimensions ➤ Length. 4 Drag Concrete Sill into the drawing area.

click Detail Level ➤ Fine. under 3D Views. 580 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Creating a Shared Parameter In order to switch the sill from concrete to metal on an instance level. TIP If the sill does not display. 14 On the View Control Bar. double-click Left. 15 On the Tools toolbar. click and spin the wall. 18 On the View Control Bar. 16 Select the Sill reference plane of the window family. align the bottom edge of the sill family. under Elevations. click (Align). and lock the alignment. and lock the alignment. 17 In the Project Browser. The sill is placed in the desired position. 13 In the Project Browser. align the lower horizontal edge of the sill to the Insertion Edge reference plane of the Window family. you add a Sill Type parameter. double-click View 1.12 Using the same method. click Detail Level ➤ Fine.

under Groups. under Parameters. 1 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. the parameter appears on the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog in the available fields list. 14 In the Shared Parameters dialog. 6 In the New Parameter Group dialog. click Create. and click Select. Create the shared parameter 1 Click File menu ➤ Shared Parameters. select Windows. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type (default). click New. 5 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select <Family Type>. 18 On the Options Bar. and click Save. you must define the parameter as a shared parameter. for Name. If the family is then loaded into a project. Testing Nested Families You can test the correct behavior of the nested families directly in the window family. Associate the parameter to geometry 17 In the drawing area. and select Instance. 13 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click OK. Under Type of Parameter. 2 In the Family Types dialog. The metal sill replaces the concrete sill. for Label. click Family Types. 2 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. enter Training Shared Parameter. Testing Nested Families | 581 . 4 Under File name. select Constraints. 10 Click OK 3 times. 12 In the Family Types dialog. Add the parameter to a family 11 On the Design Bar. 16 Click OK twice. enter Windows. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ For Name. 3 Click Apply. 7 In the Edit Shared Parameters dialog. select the Concrete Sill family. for Group parameter under. enter Sill Type. select Sill Type. Note that the last created Shared Parameter file has been automatically opened. under Parameters. select Metal Sill. click Shared parameter. navigate to Training. 3 In the Save As dialog. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click Add. click New.To display the custom parameter in a schedule. under Parameter Type. 9 In the Select Category dialog. and click OK. click Family Types.

click and spin the wall. click the Wall tool. 3 On the Design Bar. click (3D). click . insert a Casement Window : 1500 x 1400 1-Swing Sash 400 in the wall. 8 On the Views toolbar. Testing the Family in a Project Environment Finally.rfa -3D View: View 1. click Detail Level ➤ Fine. This creates a new project with the default template. check all views at all levels of detail. 5 On the Design Bar. 9 In the View Control Bar. 582 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 7 Using the same method.4 Click OK. click Load into Projects. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Test windows and sills 1 On the Standard toolbar. and create a horizontal wall. TIP If the sill does not display. 6 In the Type Selector. select Casement Window : 2000 x 1500 2-Swing Sash 1200 and place the window in the wall. click the Window tool. use best practice to test the window in multiple wall thicknesses in the project environment. 2 Click Window menu ➤ Casement Window.

select Metal Sill. Create a window schedule 12 Click View menu ➤ New ➤ Schedule/Quantities. and drawers as extrusions. Under Name. and click . add the fields Mark. you create a custom furniture family based on the definition of a rolltop desk. You then assign parameters to the furniture family to allow for the creation of different-sized versions of the prototype. drawer base. Note that the window sill has changed. enter Window Schedule with Sills. select Windows. You begin by creating the desktop. Height. rolltop. Sill Type is now displayed in the schedule table. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating a Furniture Family In this lesson. 13 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. 14 In the Schedule Properties dialog. and click OK. Creating a Furniture Family | 583 . Width. for Constraints ➤ Sill Type. and click OK.10 Select the smaller window. and Sill Type to the Scheduled fields list. Click OK.

you assign new dimension values to the furniture to create new types within the furniture family.Finally. you add reference planes and specify the parameters for the new rolltop desk furniture family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 584 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Precise dimensions are assigned to the reference planes in subsequent steps. their exact location is not critical. click Ref Plane. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. NOTE When you draw the reference planes. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Furniture. Create a new family based on the default furniture template 1 Close all open projects or families. click Training Files. they represent the furniture centerline axes. Floor Plan: Ref. 4 Maximize the view. Level.rft. The reference planes that display are part of the default furniture template. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters In this exercise. 7 Draw two horizontal reference planes. Draw additional horizontal and vertical reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. 2 On the File menu. one above and one below the existing horizontal centerline reference plane as shown. and specify values for the furniture length and depth. click New ➤ Family.

10 Near the bottom of the drawing area. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. one to the left and one to the right of the existing vertical centerline reference plane as shown. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 585 . as shown. click Dimension. add a horizontal dimension string beginning at the left reference plane. and ending at the right reference plane.8 Draw two vertical reference planes. Dimension the reference planes 9 On the Design Bar.

It should reference the left reference plane and the right reference plane as shown. 13 Select the left reference plane.Click the EQ symbol to make the segments equal. 586 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Modify. 14 Change the horizontal dimension to 2000 mm. 11 Add an overall horizontal dimension underneath the dimension you just added. 12 On the Design Bar.

add a vertical dimension string beginning at the upper reference plane. proceeding to the centerline reference plane. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 587 . and ending at the lower reference plane. add an overall vertical dimension from the upper reference plane to the lower reference plane. 16 On the right side of the drawing area. 17 To the right of the dimension you just created.15 On the Design Bar. as shown. click Dimension. as shown. Click the EQ symbol to make both segments equal.

22 Clean up the extents of the reference planes and the dimension witness lines as shown. 20 Change the vertical dimension to 1000 mm. 21 On the Design Bar. Afterwards. click Modify. select each reference plane and drag the extents to the new position. 19 Select the upper. 588 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . horizontal reference plane. TIP To do this.18 On the Design Bar. click Modify. select each dimension and drag the witness line controls as needed.

Select Type. Click OK. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.> for Label. enter Length for Name. Under Parameter Data. select Family parameter. 28 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select <Add parameter.. 27 On the Options Bar. Specifying the New Rolltop Desk Parameters | 589 . 24 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ Under Parameter type. select Family parameter.> for Label.. 25 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. 26 Select the 1000 mm dimension. For Group parameter under. select <Add parameter.Add length and depth family parameters 23 Select the 2000 mm dimension. select Dimensions..

do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. it will also adapt to the same changes. enter 3000 mm for Length. Flex the design 29 Adjust the location of the reference planes within the drawing area. so when you open the Family Types dialog. you can still see the model. you should flex the design now to ensure the reference planes and labelled dimensions adapt to changes as expected. When the solid geometry is snapped to the reference planes.■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. Click Apply. Click OK. select Dimensions. enter Depth for Name. These reference planes will be the skeleton that you snap the solid geometry to. For Group parameter under. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. 30 On the Design Bar. 590 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Select Type. 31 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. Therefore. Notice the reference planes adapt to the new dimension parameters.

and enter 100 mm for Depth. and then select the lower right reference plane intersection for the second corner of the rectangle. and click to select all four symbolic lines. Click OK. and click OK. enter 2000 mm for Length. press TAB until the chain of lines is offered as a selection option. Your lines may have a lighter weight. the symbolic line thickness was modified for training purposes. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 591 . NOTE In the image below. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Create the desktop using an extrusion 1 On the Design Bar. click .32 In the Family Types dialog. click Lines. Click Apply. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry In this exercise. click . select Level: Ref. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 9 Move the cursor over one of the symbolic lines. click Set Work Plane. “Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry” on page 591. 3 Select the upper left reference plane intersection for the first corner of the rectangle. you create the solid geometry of the desktop with an extrusion. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 33 Proceed to the next exercise. 5 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. click Symbolic Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 On the Design Bar.

13 Move the cursor over the top edge of the desktop. Move the desktop up 12 On the Design Bar. under Elevations. and select the top edge. click Dimension. Add height and thickness dimensions 17 On the Design Bar. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. double-click Front. click Modify. and select the bottom edge. press TAB until Extrusion : Shape handle displays in the Status Bar. 11 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 16 Drag the bottom edge of the desktop up until the desktop is 100 mm thick. The desktop extrusion extends 100 mm above the reference level. 14 Drag the top edge of the desktop upward until the temporary dimension value is 750 mm. 15 Move the cursor over the bottom edge of the desktop. 592 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .10 On the Design Bar.

27 On the Design Bar... Select Type.. select <Add parameter. enter Height for Name. 21 Select the 750 mm dimension. select Dimensions. select Family parameter. 25 On the Options Bar. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. 19 Add a vertical dimension from the bottom of the desktop to the top edge. 26 n the Parameter Properties dialog. select Dimensions. Under Parameter Data. 23 In the Parameter Properties dialog.. as shown. Creating the Desktop Solid Geometry | 593 . 24 Select the 100 mm dimension. select Family parameter. 22 On the Options Bar. Click OK. Add height and thickness family parameters 20 On the Design Bar. For Group parameter under.> for Label. For Group parameter under.> for Label. click Modify. Click OK. click Modify. Select Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type. Under Parameter Data.18 Add a vertical dimension from the reference level to the top edge of the desktop. select <Add parameter. enter Thickness for Name.

click . and click Apply. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Offset two reference planes to locate the first drawer base corner 1 In the Project Browser. so when you open the Family Types dialog. 594 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Enter 750 mm for Height. enter 4000 mm for Length. 4 Move the cursor over the left vertical reference plane. under Floor Plans. 29 On the Design Bar. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 1200 mm for Height. and enter 100 mm for Offset. click Ref Plane. 31 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 150 mm for Thickness. Notice the desk top adapts to the new dimension parameters. you can still see the model. 2 On the Design Bar. you create the solid geometry of the desk drawer base. enter 2000 mm for Length. and click Apply. 3 On the Options Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. Level. Click OK. double-click Ref. Enter 100 mm for Thickness.Flex the design 28 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area. and click to locate a new vertical reference plane offset 100 mm to the right. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. 30 In the Family Types dialog. Click Apply. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry” on page 594. and click Apply.

8 Add a dimension to the top horizontal reference plane and the offset plane below it. 6 On the Design Bar. click Dimension. and click to locate a new horizontal reference plane offset 100 mm below it. 7 Add a dimension referencing the left vertical reference plane and the offset plane you added.5 Move the cursor over the upper horizontal reference plane. Lock the dimension as shown. Click the lock icon as shown. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 595 .

and click OK. click .Sketch the left drawer base 9 On the Design Bar. Level for Name. and then specify a point 300 mm to the right and 800 mm down for the second corner of the rectangle. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. as shown. 596 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . two lock icons display. After you complete the rectangle. 12 On the Design Bar. 11 In the Work Plane dialog. under Specify a new Work Plane. click Lines. 14 Select the intersection of the new offset reference planes for the first corner of the rectangle. click Set Work Plane. select Level: Ref. 13 On the Options Bar. 10 On the Design Bar. 15 Click both of the lock icons to lock the edges of the extrusion to the reference planes.

click Modify. You can also highlight the entire line chain. 20 On the Tools toolbar. click Dimension. Mirror the left rectangle to create the right drawer base 18 On the Design Bar. 17 Add a vertical dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. using the TAB key. 19 Select the four sketched lines. 21 Select the vertical centerline reference plane as the mirror axis. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 597 . and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. click the Mirror tool. . TIP You can select multiple elements by holding the CTRL key down.16 On the Design Bar.

A duplicate of the left drawer base is mirrored to create the right drawer base. 23 For the align-to reference. select the horizontal reference plane second from the top. 22 On the Tools toolbar. 598 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 24 Select the top horizontal line of the right drawer extrusion as shown. as shown below at the cursor.

A lock icon displays. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. 25 Click the lock icon to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane. Add a dimension from the lower reference plane to the lower edge of the drawer base. click Dimension. 27 Add and lock the following two dimensions to the right drawer extrusion: ■ Add a dimension from the right vertical reference plane to the right edge of the drawer base. 26 On the Design Bar. and then click the lock icon to lock the dimension. ■ Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 599 .

31 In the Parameter Properties dialog. as shown. select Dimensions. select <Add parameter. 29 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the left extrusion. 30 On the Options Bar. one on each extrusion that references the width of the drawer base. Under Parameter Data. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter type.. Select Type.> for Label.28 Add two final dimensions. For Group parameter under.. 600 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . select Family parameter. enter Drawer Base Width for Name. Click OK.

under Elevations. click Finish Sketch.32 Select the dimension referring to the drawer width on the right extrusion. Creating the Desk Drawer Base Solid Geometry | 601 . 35 On the Design Bar. click . select Drawer Base Width for Label. 33 On the Options Bar. 38 Select the lower edge of the desktop as the align-to reference. 34 On the Design Bar. 37 On the Tools toolbar. click Modify. double-click Front. Extend the drawer base extrusions up to the desktop 36 In the Project Browser.

42 On the View menu. click Modify. and click OK. you can still see the model. 602 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 43 Click the Annotation Categories tab. click Visibility/Graphics. 40 On the Design Bar. The solid geometry for the desk drawer base is now complete. click the Scale control and select 1:20. click it to lock the alignment.39 Select the upper edge of the drawer base. click . 41 On the View toolbar. Flex the design 46 Adjust the location of the model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. 45 On the View Control Bar. However. 44 Clear Show annotation categories in this view. a lock icon displays. notice that annotations display in this view. After the alignment.

Enter 150 mm for Thickness. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you create the solid geometry of the desk rolltop. Click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry In this exercise. Enter 750 mm for Height. Notice the desk adapts to the new dimension parameters. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter 2000 mm for Length. Create the rolltop extrusion 1 In the Project Browser. and click Apply. under Elevations. 48 In the Family Types dialog. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. click Family Types. and click Apply. 50 Proceed to the next exercise. Enter 1200 mm for Height. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 603 . double-click Right. “Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry” on page 603. and click Apply.47 On the Design Bar. enter 4000 mm for Length. Click Apply. 49 In the Family Types dialog.

9 Select the desk top. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. and click to specify the upper left corner. select Reference Plane: Center (Left\Right) for Name. 604 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click .2 On the Design Bar. then move the cursor up 300mm and to the left 400mm. click Lines. 8 On the Tools toolbar. as shown. and click the lock icon to lock the alignment. then the lower horizontal sketch line. 5 On the Design Bar. click Set Work Plane. under Specify a new Work Plane. 7 Sketch the rectangle beginning at the intersection of the desktop and the right reference plane. 3 On the Design Bar. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 In the Work Plane dialog. and click OK. click .

10 Select the right vertical edge of the desktop extrusion. Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 605 . 11 On the Design Bar. and lock the alignment. and lock it. then select the right parallel sketch line. click Dimension. Add another dimension to both horizontal sketch lines. 12 Add one dimension referring to both vertical sketch lines. and lock it.

15 Select the left vertical sketch line. the upper sketch line. 16 On the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch. click Lines. and then select the fillet arc tool from the menu. click the Fillet arc tool. and then move the cursor down and to the right until you create and arc similar to the image below.13 On the Design Bar. TIP You may need to click the down arrow button. Do not be concerned with the precise dimension of the arc radius. . 606 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 14 On the Options Bar.

Creating the Rolltop Solid Geometry | 607 . select the left edge of the rolltop. and click the lock icon. 18 On the Tools toolbar. and click the lock icon. 20 Select the right edge of the right drawer base. double-click Front. Align the left and right edges of the rolltop with the drawer bases 17 In the Project Browser. select the right edge of the rolltop. under Elevations. 19 Select the left edge of the left drawer base.The rolltop extrusion outline is complete. click .

If not. you can still see the model. Enter 1500 mm for Height. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions.21 On the View toolbar. and click Apply. The solid geometry of the rolltop is now complete. 24 In the Family Types dialog. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. 608 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and click Apply. Flex the design 22 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. You can also use dimension constraints. click . 23 On the Design Bar. click Family Types. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. and click Apply. The desk should adapt to all the changes. and click Apply.

Click Apply. under Specify a new Work Plane. 4 Select the front plane of the right drawer base. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry In this exercise. Create the desk drawer extrusions 1 On the Design Bar. Enter 750 mm for Height. and click OK. Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 26 Proceed to the next exercise. select Pick a Plane. enter 2000 mm for Length. click Set Work Plane. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. “Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry” on page 609. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you create the solid geometry of the drawers and apply material to the desk.25 In the Family Types dialog. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 609 . Click OK. 2 On the Design Bar.

and repeat the previous step by selecting the right vertical lines of the 610 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . After selecting the line of an upper drawer. 11 On the Tools toolbar.5 In the Project Browser. There should be four dimensions as shown. . 9 On the Design Bar. If you cannot see the locks on the dimensions. select the left vertical line on the left lowest drawer first. click . Lock each dimension as you add it. click Lines. these locked dimension assure that the drawers flex as expected. click the lock that displays to lock the alignment. click . 8 Sketch six drawers similar to the image below. NOTE Adding and locking these dimensions is very important. and then select the corresponding left vertical lines of the two drawers above it. double-click Front. click drawer set on the left. 7 On the Options Bar. zoom the view until you do. select Multiple Alignment. 6 On the Design Bar. 10 Add a dimension between the vertical edges of the drawer base and the vertical lines of each bottom drawer. If you modify the desk length or the drawer base width. 12 On the Options Bar. under Elevations. 14 On the Tools toolbar. 13 To constrain the four upper drawers. click Dimension. NOTE The exact configuration of the rectangles representing the drawer fronts is not critical.

under Constraints. click 24 In the Materials dialog. and click OK. These steps ensure the top drawers remain aligned and flex with the constrained bottom drawer. click Modify. click . 26 In the Materials dialog. Apply material to the desk 21 Draw a pick box around the entire desk to select all the extrusions. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. Creating the Drawers Solid Geometry | 611 . click Finish Sketch. Polished. and select Shading with Edges. 30 In the Element Properties dialog. and repeat the previous two steps on the right set of drawers. click OK.15 On the Tools toolbar. 22 On the Options Bar. click . Cherry. 25 In the New Material dialog. 20 On the View toolbar. and click OK. 27 In the Material Library dialog. enter Desk .Wood. under AccuRender. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. navigate to AccuRender/Wood/Cherry and select Stained. 29 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. 31 On the View Control Bar. enter 20mm for Extrusion End. 28 Click OK. click OK. 18 In the Element Properties dialog. for Material. click Extrusion Properties. click for Texture. click the Model Graphics Style control. 16 On the Design Bar. Dark. click Duplicate. click .

Click OK.Flex the design 32 Adjust the location of the desk model within the drawing area so when you open the Family Types dialog. Enter 750 mm for Height. “Defining New Furniture Types” on page 612. and click Apply. 33 On the Design Bar. 34 In the Family Types dialog. You can also use dimension constraints. 36 Proceed with the final exercise in this lesson. The desk should adapt to all the changes. return the parameters to their original values: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. you can still see the model. Enter 1000 mm for Depth. 35 In the Family Types dialog. Enter 1500 mm for Depth. you may need to align and lock problematic edges that did not remain aligned. Enter 200 mm for Thickness. enter 2000 mm for Length. Click Apply. and click Apply. you define new furniture types based on the rolltop desk model that you just created. Enter 100 mm for Thickness. enter 4000 mm for Length. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Under Dimensions. If not. Defining New Furniture Types In this exercise. and click Apply. click Family Types. 612 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

2 In the Family Types dialog. enter Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm for Name. Define new furniture types with various widths and depths 1 On the Design Bar. to start a new project based on your default template. click Apply. select Rolltop Desk 200 x 1000mm. 18 In the Open dialog. and click OK. 5 Under Family Types. 7 In the Family Types dialog. click 14 On the View toolbar. verify that Length is 2000 mm and Depth is 1000 mm. 4 In the Family Types dialog. and click Open. 12 Navigate to the folder of your choice and save the new furniture family project with the name. 19 In the Type Selector. 15 On the View Control Bar. 6 In the Name dialog. click New. select it. and click OK. click . enter Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm for Name. enter Rolltop Desk 2000 x 1000mm for Name. Load the new furniture family into a new project 13 On the Standard toolbar. enter 2100 mm for Length and 1100 mm for Depth. You now have three new furniture types defined within your furniture family. 17 On the Options Bar. 20 Specify a point in the drawing area to add the first desk. click Family Types. click Save. 11 On the File menu. click Load. 3 In the Name dialog.rfa. under Family Types. click New.Dataset Continue using the family file from the previous exercise. 10 In the Family Types dialog. 8 Under Family Types. navigate to the location of your Training Furniture. Training Furniture. and click OK. 16 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Apply. click the Model Graphics Style control and select Shading with Edges. and click OK. enter 2250 mm for Length and 1250 mm for Depth.rfa file. Defining New Furniture Types | 613 . 9 In the Name dialog. and click Apply. click Component. click New.

24 Specify a point in the drawing area to the right of the previous two desks.21 In the Type Selector. You now have three new rolltop desks based on the new rolltop desk furniture family prototype. and click to add the third desk. 22 Specify a point to the right of the first desk. This completes the Creating a Furniture Family lesson. 23 In the Type Selector. select Rolltop Desk 2250 x 1250mm. you draw a baluster with an extrusion. Creating a Baluster Family In this lesson. 614 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Drawing a Baluster In this exercise. and add the second desk. you create a custom baluster and apply it to a set of stair railings. select Rolltop Desk 2100 x 1100mm. Balusters are simply profile extrusions with an assigned height family parameter.

Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 Expand the left elevation view. and double-click Ref. Draw your profile approximately 30mm wide by 60mm deep. 4 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Work Plane dialog. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Baluster. expand Floor Plans. The bottom of the baluster is at the reference level and the baluster has an assigned default height of 750mm. click Set Work Plane. The reference planes that display are part of the default baluster template.rft.Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. However. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. Level for Name. Top and bottom cut angles for the baluster are also displayed. 5 On the Design Bar. their exact location is not critical. Draw the baluster plan profile 3 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View menu. select Ref. Drawing a Baluster | 615 . Level. the baluster profile should be centered on the vertical and horizontal reference planes. click New ➤ Family. click Training Files. and click OK. click Lines. 8 Draw the closed baluster plan profile as shown. click Finish Sketch. 7 On the Design Bar. expand Views (all). 9 On the Design Bar.

click Training Files. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run In this exercise. 15 Save the new baluster family with the name Training Baluster. 616 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Stairs. Draw a straight stair run 3 On the Design Bar. 5 Draw a straight stair run as shown. click Modify and select the extrusion. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click New ➤ Project.rte. click .Extend the baluster extrusion to the top reference plane 10 In the Project Browser under Elevations. By default. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. click Finish Sketch. 14 Click the lock icon. 6 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Design Bar. Load the new baluster family into a new project 1 On the File menu. you assign the new baluster that you just created to a stair run. 2 In the left pane of the New Project dialog.rfa. 7 On the File menu. double-click Front. The new custom baluster is now complete. 4 On the Design Bar. click the Modelling tab. 13 Select the top reference plane and select the top edge of the extrusion. 12 On the Options Bar. the extrusion has a height of 250mm.

click . navigate to the location of your Training Baluster. click Orient ➤ Southwest. click OK. select Training Baluster : Training Baluster for the Regular baluster. 10 On the View menu. select it. click Modify and select the existing railing. 9 On the View toolbar. Assigning the New Baluster to a Stair Run | 617 . 19 Click OK. 20 In the Type Properties dialog. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. 16 In the Edit Baluster Placement dialog. 17 Clear Use Balusters Per Tread on Stairs. Apply the custom baluster to the stair run 12 On the Design Bar. click . click Shading with Edges. and click Open. click OK. 11 On the View menu. 13 On the Options Bar. under Baluster Family. click Edit for Baluster Placement. 18 Specify Start and End posts as Training Baluster.8 In the Open dialog. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. 14 In the Element Properties dialog. 22 Zoom in on the new balusters.rfa file. click Edit/New.

and a host sweep. This completes the Creating a Baluster Family lesson.rft. a stair nosing. 2 Starting at the reference plane intersection. click New ➤ Family. Creating Profile Families A profile is a series of closed two-dimensional lines and arcs. You then create an in-place sweep based on a 2D path and apply the host sweep to a wall.rft. Create a new family based on the default profile template 1 On the Design Bar. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Rail. 3 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . a railing. Drawing a Rail Profile In this exercise. In the left pane of the New dialog. and other sweep-defined objects. cornices. a reveal. you create five different profiles: a sweep. In the left pane of the New dialog. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. under Floor Plans.rfa. balusters. verify that Ref. 618 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Use profiles to define object cross sections such as railings. Level is open. the sweep profile should begin at the reference plane intersection. The new sweep profile is now complete. In this lesson. click Lines. Create a new family based on the default rail profile template 1 In the Project Browser. Create profiles to define frequently used shapes in your details. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs.The stair run is now assigned the new baluster that you created. soffits. their exact location is not critical. draw the sweep profile with line and arc segments as shown. click Training Files. you draw a sweep profile. click Training Files. click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Sweep Profile In this exercise. However. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. you create a rail profile. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile.Sweep.

The rail height is measured from the floor elevation to the rail top. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Stair Nosing.rft. click Training Files. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the rail centerline and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the rail top. click New ➤ Family. Create a new family based on the default stair nosing profile template 1 Notice the existing planes and text provided within the template.Rail. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile | 619 . Draw the rail profile 2 On the Design Bar. Additional text specifies the lower-left quadrant as the location for the stair nosing. The reference planes that display are part of the default stair nosing profile template. In the left pane of the New dialog. However. draw the rail profile with line segments as shown. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the riser face and the horizontal reference plane labeled as the tread surface. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. the top of the rail profile should coincide with the rail top reference plane. their exact location is not critical. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. The new rail profile is now complete.The reference planes that display are part of the default rail profile template. you create a stair nosing profile. Drawing a Stair Nosing Profile In this exercise. click Lines.rfa. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile .

Reveal profiles are used with the Reveal tool in the project environment to define a wall cutout. you create a reveal profile. draw the stair nosing profile with line and arc segments as shown.rft. click New ➤ Family. In addition. Drawing a Reveal Profile In this exercise. click Lines. Level is open. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. the top of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the tread surface reference plane and the right edge of the stair nosing profile should coincide with the riser face reference plane. The reference planes that display are part of the default reveal profile template. Create a new family based on the default reveal profile template 1 In the Project Browser. with the vertical reference plane labeled as the wall face.Stair Nosing. click Training Files. The horizontal reference plane represents the offset from floor level to the reveal. However. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines and arcs. In the left pane of the New dialog.rfa. under Floor Plans. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Reveal. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . verify that Ref. you must draw the stair nosing in the lower-left quadrant. their exact location is not critical. and the wall body indicated to the right of the wall face reference plane. The new stair nosing profile is now complete. 620 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Draw the stair nosing profile 2 On the Design Bar.

click New ➤ Family. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile | 621 . Create a new family based on the default host sweep profile template 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. draw the reveal profile with line segments as shown. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. you create a host sweep profile. However. In the left pane of the New dialog.rft. which may be any vertical surface. click Training Files. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile-Hosted. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines.Reveal. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . the left edge of the reveal profile must coincide with wall face reference plane and the reveal must be drawn within the wall body (to the right of the wall face reference plane). click Lines.Draw the reveal profile 2 On the Design Bar. Host Sweep profiles are similar to reveal profiles and are used with the Host Sweep tool in the project environment to define a shape to add to a host surface. Level is open. verify that Ref. under Floor Plans. Drawing a Host Sweep Profile In this exercise. The new reveal profile is now complete. their exact location is not critical. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu.

with the vertical reference plane labeled as the host face and the host body indicated to the left of the host face reference plane. click Training Files. Specify the family category 5 On the Modelling menu. click Create. you apply the sweep profile that you just created to a 2D path. the left edge of the host sweep profile must coincide with the host face reference plane. NOTE When you draw the closed profile lines. Draw the host sweep profile 2 On the Design Bar. their exact location is not critical. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path In this exercise. 3 Starting at the reference plane intersection. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. 4 In the New Project dialog. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. The new host sweep profile is now complete. The reference plane intersection is the origin of the host sweep profile. 4 Save the new profile family with the name Profile . However. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog.Host Sweep. click New ➤ Project.rte. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog.rfa. click Lines. click Browse. draw the reveal profile with line and arc segments as shown. 622 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .The reference planes that display are part of the default host sweep profile template. and the host sweep profile must be drawn outside of the host body (to the right of the host face reference plane).

click .Sweep. Modify the sweep profile configuration 18 In the Project Browser. 9 On the Design Bar.rfa. navigate to the location of Profile . expand Elevations. select Profile . beside Load Profiles. click Load Profiles. select it. and double-click South. 17 On the View toolbar. 20 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and click Open. click Sketch 2D Path. 16 On the Design Bar. the exact location of the path is not critical. click Finish Sweep.Sweep. expand Views (all). 7 In the Name dialog. 11 On the Design Bar. 14 In the Type Selector. Applying a Sweep Profile to a 2D Path | 623 . and click OK. 15 On the Design Bar. click Lines and sketch the 2D path approximately as shown. Sketch the 2D sweep path 8 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. 19 Zoom in on the right end of the sweep. click Ref Plane. 13 In the Open dialog. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Sweep. Apply the sweep profile to the 2D path 12 On the Options Bar. enter Sweep for Name.6 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. NOTE When you sketch the 2D path. and click OK. select Generic Models for Family Category. 10 On the Design Bar. click Finish Family. click Finish Path.

Under Constraints. you apply the host sweep profile that you created to a group of walls. click Edit. click Finish Family. 27 On the View toolbar. 23 Select the sweep profile again and.21 Draw a vertical reference plane coincident with the left edge of the profile as shown. Draw a wall group 5 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. enter 600 for Vertical Profile Offset. and open Metric Templates\DefaultMetric. do the following: ■ ■ ■ . The sweep profile application is now complete. 22 Select the sweep profile and. click OK. click 24 In the Element Properties dialog. Under Other. 624 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 26 On the Design Bar. 2 In the New Project dialog. 4 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. Create a new project 1 On the File menu. on the Options Bar. click New ➤ Project. click . Enter 25 degrees for Angle. on the Options Bar. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls In this exercise.rte. select Profile Is Flipped. 25 Click OK. click Browse. click Wall.

6 Draw four walls as shown. their exact location is not critical. 10 Select a point on the left wall for the wall sweep. 7 On the View toolbar. verify that Horizontal is selected. 9 On the Options Bar.NOTE When you draw the walls. 8 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click . 11 Select a point on the right wall for the next wall sweep. Applying a Host Sweep Profile to Walls | 625 . click Host Sweep ➤ Wall Sweep.

12 On the Design Bar. click Training Files. on the Options Bar. and click OK.rft. under Construction.Host Sweep. 14 In the Open dialog. click OK. you create a room tag which displays room name. and click Open. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. Specifying Room Tag Parameters In this exercise. click 16 In the Element Properties dialog. . navigate to the location of Profile . 21 Move the cursor to rotate your viewpoint to view the host sweep from underneath.Host Sweep : Profile . 15 Select the wall sweep and. 18 In the Element Properties dialog.rfa. and open Metric\Templates\M_Room Tag. 20 In the Dynamic View dialog. 19 On the View toolbar. click Spin [Shift]. Replace the default wall sweep with the new host wall sweep 13 On the File menu. In the left pane of the New dialog.Host Sweep for Profile. select Profile . select it. Create a new tag based on the default room tag template 1 On the View menu. click Modify. click . you specify the room tag parameters. click Edit/New. floor and ceiling finish. This completes the Creating Profile Families lesson. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Zoom ➤ Zoom All to Fit. Creating a Room Tag In this lesson. 626 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and area with labels added to extract project data. The default wall sweep is replaced with your host sweep profile. 17 In the Type Properties dialog. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. The reference planes that display are part of the default room tag template.

and click OK. and click OK. select Underline.Edit the 3mm label 2 On the Family tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. The name label is displayed with the text underlined. 8 In the Name dialog. 23 In the Select Parameter dialog. 19 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. 16 Zoom in on the label. click Duplicate. Combine labels into a room tag 11 On the Design Bar. clear Underline. click OK. and click OK. 21 In the Select Parameter dialog. click Label. verify that Label : 3mm is displayed. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. select Name. 13 On the Options Bar. 17 In the Type Selector. click Edit/New. 20 Specify a point below the Floor Finish label for the next label location. 14 Specify the location for the first label as shown. select Label : 2mm. Add a 2mm label 6 In the Element Properties dialog. select Ceiling Finish. 22 Specify a point below the Ceiling Finish label for the last label location. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click . verify that Center and Middle are selected for Text Alignment. Specifying Room Tag Parameters | 627 . 7 In the Type properties dialog. 3 On the Options Bar. select Area. 18 Specify a point below the Name label for the next label location. click Label. enter 2 for the Text Size parameter. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. and click OK. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. 12 In the Type Selector. enter 2mm for Name. select Floor Finish. 15 In the Select Parameter dialog.

click Lines. and open Metric\Templates\Generic Annotation. 4 Specify the reference plane intersection for the circle center point. 628 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Notes included with the template specify annotation parameters. The reference planes that display are part of the default generic annotation template. click . Creating an Annotation Symbol In this lesson. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol and place it in a new project. Sketch a north arrow symbol 2 On the Design Bar. notice that there is only one view available. 24 Save the new room tag with the name Finish Area Tag. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.The Area label has a predefined value of 150 SF.rft. click Training Files. click New ➤ Annotation Symbol. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. This completes the Creating a Room Tag lesson. Create a new annotation symbol based on the default generic annotation template 1 In the Project Browser.rfa. In the left pane of the New dialog. The new room tag is now ready for use. you create a custom north arrow annotation symbol with a circle and lines.

click Modify. 6 On the Options Bar. Creating a Custom North Arrow Annotation Symbol | 629 . click .5 Drag the cursor and specify a radius of 8mm. 8 Draw a vertical line from the top to the center point of the circle. 9 Draw a vertical line from the center point to the bottom of the circle. 10 On the Design Bar. 7 Draw a horizontal line from the left side to the right side of the circle through the center point.

Training North Arrow. verify that Generic Annotations is selected for Subcategory of. select A1 metric. select 3 for Line Weight. 12 In the Object Styles dialog.rfa. Apply the new line weight to the upper vertical line 15 On the Design Bar. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Object Styles. under Modify Subcategories. click Sheet.rte. and click OK. click Training Files. click Modify. 17 On the Design Bar. click OK. The north arrow annotation symbol is now complete. 18 Select the template notes and press DELETE. 630 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 7 Click OK. click New ➤ Project. Adding the New North Arrow to a Project In this exercise. 13 In the New Subcategory dialog.The new north arrow annotation symbol is ready to edit. enter North Line for Name. 19 Save the new north arrow with the name. 2 In the New Project dialog. and select the upper vertical line. click New. click Browse. Load the new north arrow into a new project 1 On the File menu. 9 On the File menu. in the North Line row. you add the new north arrow annotation symbol that you created to a project. 16 In the Type Selector. 4 In the New Project dialog. select North Line. 8 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. Add an annotation objects subcategory 11 On the Settings menu. click Modify. 14 In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric.

This completes the Creating an Annotation Symbol lesson. select Training North Arrow. select it. 12 In the Type Selector.rft. You customize the titleblock with a new text style. Creating a Titleblock Family | 631 . and labels. Dataset ■ ■ On the File menu. In the left pane of the New dialog. and open Metric\Templates\A0 Metric. click Training Files. graphics. and your project data. 14 On the Design Bar. The titleblock has linework. text.rfa. Creating a Titleblock Family In this lesson. 11 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. Create a new family based on the default titleblock template 1 The default titleblock template consists of 4 border lines.10 In the Open dialog. click New ➤ Titleblock. click Symbol. and click Open. click Modify. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet In this exercise. you create a custom titleblock sheet based on the A0 metric titleblock template. 13 Specify a point in the lower right corner of the sheet to place the symbol. you draw all of the linework necessary to create a custom A0-size sheet. navigate to the location of Training North Arrow.

click 8 Enter 0 for Offset. 632 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . . and enter -25 for Offset. and then specify the lower right corner of the sheet for the second corner of the rectangle. click Lines. and click to draw a new vertical line. 10 Draw a horizontal line 120mm below the last horizontal line as shown. Add vertical and horizontal lines 5 On the Options Bar. and enter 140 for Offset. 6 Move the cursor over the right inside border line. click . 11 Draw a horizontal line 120mm above the lower inside border as shown. and click . 9 Draw a horizontal line 140mm below the upper inside border as shown. 3 On the Options Bar. 4 Specify the upper left corner of the sheet for the first rectangle corner.Sketch the inside border 2 On the Design Bar. 7 On the Options Bar. click .

and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 21 On the Options Bar. 20 Move the cursor over the fifth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 14 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. 15 On the Design Bar. click . and click to draw a new horizontal line 30mm above the existing line. 13 In the Type Selector. 23 Move the cursor over the seventh horizontal line. Drawing Linework for a Titleblock Sheet | 633 . and enter 20 for Offset. 25 On the Design Bar. select Title Blocks. click Lines. 24 Move the cursor over the eighth horizontal line. 22 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. 19 Move the cursor over the fourth horizontal line. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. click Modify. press CTRL. 16 In the Type Selector. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line.12 On the Design Bar. and click to draw a new horizontal line 20mm below the existing line. 18 Move the cursor over the third horizontal line. select Wide Lines. 26 Zoom out to view the entire sheet. click Modify. enter 30 for Offset. and select the second and third horizontal lines. 17 On the Options Bar.

2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Add a company logo 1 On the File menu. 634 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . and open Common\Company Logo. click Training Files. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock In this exercise. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and labels to your titleblock. Create a new 10mm text style 5 On the Design Bar. 3 Place the image in the upper right corner of the sheet as shown. click Import/Link ➤ Image. click . click Text. click Duplicate. you add a company logo.The titleblock linework is now complete. text notes.jpg. 4 Zoom in on the logo. click Edit/New. 6 On the Options Bar.

17 On the Design Bar. and add an address and phone number as shown. in the text box. 13 Enter Arch Design Inc. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 635 . and select Bold. select Text : 8mm. under Text. and click OK. Add company name text 12 Draw a text box under the first horizontal line as shown. Add company address and phone number text 15 In the Type Selector.9 In the Name dialog. Press ENTER to add each new line of text and click outside of the text box to complete the text. and select the last text note. 14 Click outside of the text box to complete the text. enter 10mm Bold for Name. and drag the text note down as shown. click Modify. 16 Draw a text box below the initial text. enter 10 for Text Size. 18 Select the drag handle. 11 Click OK twice. 10 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Text. address. Add consultant name. and phone number text 20 On the Design Bar. 636 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 24 On the Options Bar. click Modify. select Constrain and Multiple. and enter the following text: ■ ■ ■ ■ Consultant: Address: Address: Telephone: 22 On the Design Bar.19 Click outside the text box to complete the modification. 23 On the Edit toolbar. 25 Click inside the Consultant text group. click . and select the consultant text note. 21 Draw a text box below the second horizontal line.

27 Move the cursor down another 120mm and click to specify the second copied text note location.26 Move the cursor down 120mm and click to specify the first copied text note position. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 637 .

30 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. 638 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 37 Draw a text box in the next space up. and enter Drawn By:. click Duplicate. and enter Date:. enter 5 for Text Size. 38 Draw a text box in the next space up. 32 In the Name dialog. 31 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. Add drawing data text 35 In the Type Selector. 36 Draw a text box in the lower right space of the titleblock. select Text : 5mm. click Text. and enter Sheet Number:. click . under Text. 34 Click OK twice. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 29 On the Options Bar.Create a new 5mm text style 28 On the Design Bar. and enter Checked By:. 39 Draw a text box in the next space up. enter 5mm for Name.

and click to specify the label location. click Label. select Right and Bottom for Text Alignment. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line.Add drawing data labels 40 On the Design Bar. 43 In the Select Parameter dialog. select Project Issue Date. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 639 . 41 On the Options Bar. 44 Select the left drag handle on the label. The label displays a default value wrapped to 3 lines. 42 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Date field. and click OK. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text.

51 In the Element Properties dialog. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. select Drawn By. enter 15mm Label for Name. NOTE Move the label if necessary to line up properly with the existing text. 54 In the Type Properties dialog. 61 In the Select Parameter dialog.45 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Drawn By field. 59 On the Options Bar. 52 In the Type Properties dialog. click Edit/New. 50 On the Options Bar. 57 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Sheet Number field. and click to specify the label location. select Sheet Number. 47 Place the cursor at the lower right corner of the Checked By field. and click to specify the label location. click Label. click Duplicate. 640 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 48 In the Select Parameter dialog. 58 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. and click OK. select Label : 15mm Label. click Center and Middle. 60 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Date field. select Project Number. enter 15 for Text Size. select Checked By and click OK. 46 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click OK. click . 55 Click OK twice. under Text. and click to specify the label location. and click to specify the label location. and click OK. Add sheet number and project data labels 56 In the Type Selector. Create a new 15mm label style 49 On the Design Bar. 53 In the Name dialog.

click Label. 66 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Name field. and click OK. select Project Name. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. 64 In the Select Parameter dialog. and click to specify the label location. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and drag to the left until the label displays on one line. and click to specify the label location. 63 Place the cursor near the center of the field above the Project Number field. select Client Name. 68 Select the left drag handle on the label. Create a 4mm label style 69 On the Design Bar. 67 In the Select Parameter dialog. 65 Select the left drag handle on the label. Adding Graphics and Text to a Titleblock | 641 .62 Select the left drag handle on the label. and click OK.

70 On the Options Bar. 74 In the Type Properties dialog.rfa file.rfa. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project In this exercise. click . select Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click Browse. and open Metric\Templates\DefaultMetric. 71 In the Element Properties dialog. 81 Save the new titleblock family with the name Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. 79 In the Select Parameter dialog. 78 Place the cursor in the border area below the left side of the Sheet Number field. select File Path. navigate to the location of Training A0Horizontal Titleblock. click OK. click Load. select it. 4 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. click Modify. 72 In the Type Properties dialog.rte. 77 On the Options Bar. and then adjust the width of the File Path field so that it is approximately equal to the width of the Sheet Number field. 9 Click OK. click Left and Middle. click Duplicate. The titleblock graphics. 6 In the Select a Titleblock dialog. under Text. select 4mm Label. Add Project Path label 76 In the Type Selector. and click OK. you add the titleblock that you created to a new project. 5 On the View tab of the Design Bar. and labels are now complete. 7 In the Open dialog. Load the new titleblock family into a new project 1 On the File menu. and click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. 642 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click Training Files. click Edit/New. 73 In the Name dialog. enter 4 for Text Size. text. and click Open. 75 Click OK twice. enter 4mm Label. click Sheet. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. 80 On the Design Bar. and click to specify the label location. click New ➤ Project.

2005 for Project Issue Date. 16 Click OK. Enter Jane Smith for Client Name. 14 On the Settings menu. Enter Office Building for Project Name.Modify titleblock properties 10 On the Design Bar. Enter In Progress for Project Status. 13 Zoom in on the lower right corner of the sheet. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter January 1. 11 On the Options Bar. click Project Information. click Modify and select the titleblock. 15 In the Type Properties dialog. click . Enter 2005-01 for Project Number. 12 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. enter Name for Drawn By. under Other. Adding the Titleblock to a New Project | 643 .

Sketch the roof cross-section with a closed profile in an elevation view. and set the suffix to None. you create the dome roof with a revolved form. and add a dome roof and a concave floor with revolved forms as in-place families. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family In this exercise. To change the units of measurement to meters. Open the existing Pantheon building model 1 On the View menu. You create an in-place family in your current project rather than in the Family Editor. NOTE This project was created using an imperial template and components. click Project Units. Creating In-Place Families In this lesson. 644 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . format the Area to use 2 decimal places. In-place families interact with the building model according to their assigned family category. and open Common\c_Pantheon.rvt. click Orient ➤ Southeast. In the left pane of the Open dialog. on the Settings menu. Set the Length units to millimeters.This completes the Creating a Titleblock Family lesson. set the Area to Square meters. you start with an incomplete building information model of the Pantheon. click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.

expand Views (all). 7 On the Design Bar. 9 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown.Center.Next. enter Dome for Name. 8 In the Work Plane dialog. expand Elevations. click Set Work Plane. and click OK. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 645 . select Roofs for Family Category. 2 In the Project Browser. Specify the dome roof revolved form parameters 6 On the Design Bar. and double-click South. click Create. Specify the Roofs family category 3 On the Modelling menu. 4 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 5 In the Name dialog. 10 In the Go To View dialog. and click OK. and click Open View. you add a dome roof with oculus (circular opening) to the Pantheon building model. and click OK. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. select Section: Wall Section . select Pick a Plane.

click Lines. 646 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Draw the axis of rotation for the dome roof revolved form 11 On the Design Bar. and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. 16 Specify the intersection of the Upper Cornice horizontal reference plane and vertical axis as the circle center point. 12 On the Options Bar. click . click Axis.The center wall section view is displayed. 13 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click . 15 On the Options Bar. Draw the lower face of the dome roof 14 On the Design Bar.

click . 19 On the Options Bar. 20 Specify the reference plane intersection for the start point of the rim profile as shown. 21 Snap to reference plane intersections. Draw the oculus rim profile 18 Zoom in on the top of the circle. The reference planes that display are guides for drawing the oculus rim profile.17 Move the cursor out. The circle is tangent to the interior wall face and the level 1 reference plane at the floor line. until it creates an intersection with the level 1 reference plane. Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 647 . and draw the five rim profile line segments in the shape of a reverse C as shown. and select Chain.

Draw the upper face of the dome roof 26 On the Design Bar. select Delete Inner Segment. click .Split the circle 22 On the Tools toolbar. 648 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . click . 25 Select the intersection of the circle and the lower left vertical line of the profile as shown. 27 On the Options Bar. The circle is trimmed between the rim profile and the first split point. 28 Specify the endpoint of the upper left rim profile line segment as the arc start point. 24 Select a point on the circle to the right of the rim profile. 23 On the Options Bar. click Lines.

Creating the Dome Roof In-Place Family | 649 . Trim the arc below the tangent point 34 On the Tools toolbar. 30 Specify a point on the arc approximately as shown. 33 Draw a horizontal line from the arc endpoint to the interior edge of the wall. click . click and select Chain. and then select a point on the arc above the tangent point as the segment to keep. 32 On the Options Bar. click Lines.29 Specify the top of the stairs in the wall section as the arc endpoint. and then draw a vertical line down the interior wall face to the lower dome roof face tangent point. Draw two lines to close the dome roof profile 31 On the Design Bar. 35 Select the interior face of the wall.

click Finish Family. click Revolution Properties. 41 On the Design Bar. 650 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . 38 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. click for Material. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family In this exercise. click .The dome roof closed profile is now complete. 42 On the View toolbar. click Create. click OK. Specify lightweight concrete for the dome roof material 36 On the Design Bar. select Floors for Family Category. and click OK. 2 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. and click OK.Cast-in-Place Lightweight Concrete for Name. click Finish Sketch. select Concrete . 40 On the Design Bar. The dome roof in-place family is now complete. Specify the concave floor revolved form parameters 1 On the Modelling menu. 39 In the Element Properties dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. you create the concave floor slab for the Pantheon building model.

4 In the Project Browser under Elevations. 8 Select the Center East/West reference plane as shown. 6 On the Design Bar.3 In the Name dialog. 9 In the Go To View dialog. select Pick a Plane. click Axis. select Section: Wall Section . and then specify the top endpoint of the reference plane for the endpoint of the axis. enter Concave Floor for Name. click . and click OK. Draw the axis of rotation for the floor revolved form 10 On the Design Bar. 5 On the Design Bar. and click Open View.Center. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Revolve. Creating the Concave Floor In-Place Family | 651 . 7 In the Work Plane dialog. 11 On the Options Bar. double-click South. and click OK. 12 Specify the bottom endpoint of the Center East/West reference plane for the start point of the axis. click Set Work Plane.

14 On the Options Bar. and specify the next point for the floor profile as shown.O. 17 Specify the intersection of the level 1 reference plane and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile as shown. and select Chain. Footing level line and the axis. 16 Drag the cursor up 800 mm. click Lines. 15 Specify the intersection of the T. NOTE You may need to zoom in closer to the intersection to select the first point. click . for the start point of the floor profile as shown.Draw the concave floor profile 13 On the Design Bar. 652 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

Footing level line and the axis for the last point of the floor profile. select Cobblestone for Name. When you create a new family. click Finish Sketch.Exploring Family Templates Revit Architecture ships with a large number of family templates. Revit Architecture differs between templates for model families. such as reference planes and sub-categories.18 Specify the intersection of the T. click Finish Family. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click for Material. 19 Specify the intersection of the of the T. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. Appendix A .Exploring Family Templates | 653 . Specify cobblestone for the concave floor material 20 On the Design Bar. Footing level line and the interior wall edge for the next point of the floor profile. annotation families. double-click 3D Section View. click Revolution Properties. 26 In the Project Browser under 3D Views. Based on the template you select. The concave floor closed profile is now complete. 22 In the Materials dialog. click OK. 25 On the Design Bar. you start with the selection of a family template.O. the new family has specific default contents. Appendix A . This completes the Creating In-Place Families lesson. and title blocks. and click OK.O. 24 On the Design Bar.

Post Family template for posts of balusters. 654 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. The following table gives an overview of the templates for model families: Template Name *.rft Baluster Description Family template for baluster families. Category: Casework Casework Family template for casework. Category: None Casework wall based Family template for casework.Model Family Templates The templates for model families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. Category: None Baluster . Contains sample wall geometry.

is used to create 2D detail components. Category: Columns Curtain Wall Panel Family template for filling elements of curtain walls. Category: Detail Items Model Family Templates | 655 . includes the filled region tool. the column inherits the material of the wall. If a column intersects a wall. Category: Curtain Panels Detail Component line based 2D family. Category: Detail Items Detail Component 2D family. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Includes the filled region tool.rft Description Column Family template to create columns.Template Name *.

Ceiling based families can only be placed on any ceiling in a project. Category: Electrical Equipment Electrical Fixture ceiling based Family template to create electrical equipment families. 656 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .rft Door .Template Name *. Category: Curtain Panels Door Family template for doors.Curtain Wall Description Family template for door elements of curtain walls. Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Doors Electrical Equipment Family template to create electrical equipment families.

Category: Electrical Fixtures Entourage Family template to create entourage families. Category: Furniture Model Family Templates | 657 . Category: Entourage Furniture System Family template to create furniture system families. Contains sample wall geometry.rft Description Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture wall based Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Electrical Fixtures Electrical Fixture Family template to create electrical equipment families. Category: Furniture Systems Furniture Family template to create furniture families.Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project.

Contains a sample ceiling geometry. Category: Generic Models Generic Model floor based Family template to create any generic model geometry.Template Name *. Category: Generic Models Generic Model face based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Face based families can only be placed on any face in a project. Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Category: Generic Models 658 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains sample floor geometry.rft Generic Model ceiling based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling in a project.

Category: Generic Models Generic Model roof based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Category: Generic Models Sample: Wall Opening with 2D graphics in plan view and a void extrusion. Geometry can use length parameter as “stretch” value. Roof based families can only be placed on any roof face in a project. Category: Generic Models Generic Model wall based Family template to create any generic model geometry. Includes the filled region tool.rft Generic Model line based Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. Contains sample wall geometry.Template Name *. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Contains sample roof geometry. Contains a reference line and left and right reference planes. Model Family Templates | 659 .

Floor based families can only be placed on a floor face in a project. Roof based families can only be placed on a roof face in a project. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures 660 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Contains sample roof geometry. Contains sample floor geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture roof based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Category: Generic Model Lighting Fixture floor based Family template to create lighting fixtures.rft Generic Model Description Family template to create any generic model geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *.

The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture roof based. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture Family template to create lighting fixtures. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools. Category: Lighting Fixtures Linear Lighting Fixture floor based. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Lighting Fixtures Lighting Fixture wall based Family template to create lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture Family templates to create linear lighting fixtures. Linear Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Ceiling based families can only be placed on a ceiling face in a project. Category: Lighting Fixtures Model Family Templates | 661 . Wall based families can only be placed on a wall face in a project. Linear Lighting Fixture wall based. Contains sample ceiling geometry. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.Template Name *. The family has illumination properties for the rendering tools.rft Lighting Fixture ceiling based Description Family template to create lighting fixtures.

Masses can report gross volume. Faces of masses can be used to create other model elements like walls. Mechanical Equipment ceiling based Family template to create mechanical equipment families.Template Name *. slabs. Contains sample ceiling geometry. Category: Mechanical Equipment 662 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. and gross floor areas. Category: Mechanical Equipment Mechanical Equipment wall based Family template to create mechanical equipment families.rft Mass Description Family template to create massing families. Category: Mass Sample: Mass families from the content library. gross surface area. and roofs Massing families can also be generating floor area faces. Contains sample wall geometry. Ceiling based families can only be placed on ceiling faces in a project.

Template Name *. Contains sample wall geometry. Category: Parking Planting Family template to create planting families.rft Mechanical Equipment Description Family template to create mechanical equipment families. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Plumbing Fixture Family template to create plumbing fixture families. Category: Mechanical Equipment Parking Family template to create parking families. Category: Plumbing Fixtures Model Family Templates | 663 . Category: Planting Plumbing Fixture wall based Family template to create plumbing fixture families.

A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. wall sweep) can be explicitly assigned under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Profiles. gutter. mullion. Category: Profiles. 664 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . A profile is only used in combination with system families. Contains default reference planes Rail Centerline and Rail Top. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Category: Profiles. A profile is only used in combination with system families. Profile-Hosted Family template to create 2D profiles for hosts. Families based on this template can be used in a project with the tools in the Modelling menu ➤ Host Sweeps.rft Profile Description Family template to create 2D profiles. Profile usage can be explicitly assigned. slab edge. Profile-Rail Family template to create 2D profiles for rails. Profile-Reveal Family template to create 2D profiles for wall sweeps and wall reveals. Profile usage (fascia.Template Name *. Category: Profiles.

Contains sample wall geometry. The family has an rpc file link included. Category: Entourage Site Family template to create Site families.rft Profile-Stair Nosing Description Family template to create 2D profiles for stair nosing. RPC Family Family template for models using the Real People Collection product family. Category: Site Speciality Equipment wall based Family template to create specialty equipment families. A profile is used only in combination with system families. Category: Specialty Equipment Model Family Templates | 665 . Category: Profiles. Wall based families can only be placed on wall faces in a project. Category: Specialty Equipment Speciality Equipment Family template to create specialty equipment families.Template Name *.

Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Beams can be placed on structural columns. Spot Lighting Fixture roof based. If a structural column intersects a wall. Category: Structural Foundations Structural Framing . such as beams and braces. 666 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor . Spot Lighting Fixture Structural Column Description Family templates to create spot lighting fixtures. Category: Structural Columns Structural Foundation Family templates to create structural foundation families. Spot Lighting Fixture wall based. Contains the same defaults as the Lighting Fixtures.Template Name *. The family templates contain specific reference planes for members and stick symbols. Category: Lighting Fixtures Family template to create structural columns. If a structural foundation family is placed below a column. specific setting for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined.rft Spot Lighting Fixture floor based. the column cuts out the wall. it moves its position if the base of the structural column is moved. A structural column can be defined as a room-bounding element if the structural material type is set to concrete or precast concrete. The family has illumination and spot properties for the rendering tools. Geometry can be locked to upper and lower reference level in elevation views. specific settings for symbolic representation and the structural material type can be defined.Beams and Braces Family template to create structural framing families. Spot Lighting Fixture ceiling based. Under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.

Curtain Wall Family template for window elements of curtain walls. Category: Windows Model Family Templates | 667 . Category: Structural Framing Window .Template Name *. such as trusses.rft Description Category: Structural Framing Structural Framing . Category: Curtain Panels Window with trim Family template for windows including trim on the exterior side.Complex and Trusses Family template to create structural framing families.

Category: Level Heads Family template for Multi-Category tags. Category: Door Tags Family template for generic annotations. Category: Generic Annotation Family template for tags. Category: Spot Elevation Symbols Generic Tag Grid Head Level Head Multi-Category Tag Room Tag Section Head Spot Elevation Symbol 668 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .Template Name *. Annotation families are scale-dependent. Category: Grid Heads Family template for level heads. Symbol size. Category: Section Marks Family template to define the symbol for spot elevations. Category: Callouts Family template for door tags. Annotation families consist mainly of lines.0mm on a plotted sheet. The following table gives an overview of the templates for annotation families: Template Name *. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. Category: Windows Annotation Family Templates The templates for annotation families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Annotation. parameter text created with a text height of 2.0mm has a size of 2. text size. and parameter text size are always related to the current scale of the View Control Bar. The category can be set under Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters. In the family the intersection of the horizontal and right reference planes define connection location with the system section line.rft Callout Head Door Tag Generic Annotation Description Family template for the tag of a callout. filled regions. Category: Room Tags Family template for section heads. Category: Multi-Category Tags Family template for room tags. Category: Generic Model Tags Family template for the grid heads. and parameters. Thus. On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the same shared parameter is added to a project as a project parameter and can be used to filter selected elements to be tagged with the MultiCategory tag. A MultiCategory tag needs a shared parameter as filter parameter. The intersection of 2 reference planes defines the insertion point of a tag.rft Window Description Family template for windows. text. click Tag ➤ Multi-Category to add a tag.

text.rft ■ New Site Metric.17 x 11. Imperial ■ A . and parameters.rft ■ C .rft Titleblock Family Templates | 669 . In a project.Template Name *.rft View Title Window Tag Description Family template to define view title of a view in a sheet. The following table gives an overview of the templates for title block families: Template Name Comments Family templates for title blocks using common standard sizes.36 x 24. You import images to your title block. Category: View Titles Family template for window tags.rft ■ A4 metric.24 x 18.42 x 30. all loaded title block families are listed for selection.11 x 8.rft ■ A3 metric. the title block can be assigned to a sheet using View menu ➤ New ➤ Sheet.5. In the Select a Titleblock dialog.rft ■ A2 metric.rft ■ B .rft Metric ■ A0 metric. filled regions.rft ■ A1 metric. Category: Window Tags Titleblock Family Templates The templates for titleblock families are in Documents and Settings/All Users/Application Data/Autodesk/RAC 2008/Metric Templates/Titleblocks.rft ■ E1 . Title block families consist mainly of lines for the plan border.rft ■ D .

670 | Chapter 16 Creating Components in the Family Editor .

In this case. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you the proper approach to parametric component creation. During this tutorial. formula-based parameters. you will understand the process. and the specific techniques for creating a parametric component. the length of the trimmable truss determines the size and grade of the truss chords. not specifically how to make a floor truss. The truss also has multiple types. In exercises that become increasingly complex.Parametric Component Design Techniques 17 In this tutorial. In the center of the truss is a mechanical service clearance to accommodate HVAC systems. you learn specific techniques and best practices that you can apply broadly when creating other families in Revit Architecture 2008. you learn the process and methodology of creating a new family. At the end of this tutorial. The parametric component that you design in this tutorial is an open web wood floor truss. assigned subcatecories. methodology. and detail level controls. 671 . This type of component uses a broad spectrum of design techniques within the Family Editor. you create a new parametric component within the Family Editor.

For training purposes. a generic floor-based component might work. In this case. If the component did not have to interact so closely with other structural components. Take this into consideration during your design planning. In the next exercise. you determine the requirements of the new component. This decision dictates which family template you begin with. planning ahead is one of the most important steps. A rectangular mechanical clearance opening must be centered within the beam. you select the best available template with which to begin the new structural beam family. a 2x3 truss and a 2x4 truss. The design requirements dictate how simple or complex a family must be. the component should use the point-to-point insertion method with the joist web members adjusting parametrically. 2 What additional design requirements affect the design plan for this beam family? Additional design requirements ■ ■ ■ The truss should automatically adjust depth as the length changes.Planning a Parametric Component Family Creating a new parametric component family is no different than any other design process. Decide component type and design requirements 1 What type of component are you designing? In this case. you should avoid over-designing the component. it is not the best solution. In addition. NOTE When creating a new family. Two types should be created. you accomplish two main tasks: you determine the component needs and select the family template that is suited to those needs. it is an open-joist wood floor truss. It should also be an available option within a beam system. Using the new family within a project 3 How will you use the family within a project? 672 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Although this solution is possible. and also works intuitively with them. In this case. Your assignment is to create a truss that adapts parametrically to changes in the building design. then you should design only what is needed to satisfy the requirements. If the design requirements can be met with a simple design. there is a computing performance cost that must be paid within the project. For every complexity added to a family. the design specification requires that the floor truss snaps to columns. Knowing why you are creating a particular family and what you need it to do will drive the specific design process. Determining Component Needs In this exercise. imagine that your firm specializes in light commercial and residential design. and structural walls. beams. In this lesson. this must be a structural beam component. Because this component has to interact closely with other structural components. the beam design must be advanced in order to have the flexibility that the specs require.

4 Continue with the next exercise. You have completed the planning stage for the new family. ■ How will the component need to be scheduled? This is an important question. Selecting the Family Template | 673 . In addition. In the previous exercise. you determine which family template provides the best starting point for the new beam family. This critical decision reduces the quantity of template options. Depending on the family you are designing. These materials can be applied using Object Styles.For instance: ■ What materials need the most control? These materials. the means by which you gather the information you require within the schedule needs to be built into the component. you determined that the component type is a structural beam. such as wood type. ■ What materials remain constant throughout a project? The chord and web material will always be wood. would require Instance or Type parameters. only the 2x3 and 2x4 trusses with wood web members are required. especially if you are going to be nesting subcomponents that may require separate scheduling. “Selecting the Family Template” on page 673. ■ What types are most commonly used? In this training case. the planning stage and questions may differ. Selecting the Family Template In this exercise.

you will access them from the Training Files folder. You should be in the Metric Templates folder. to ensure you are using the templates referenced in this tutorial. Select it so that the preview displays. and open Metric\Templates. 6 In the New dialog. this is where you access family templates.Beams and Braces. the template name often includes information how the component would be used with a project. There are two structural framing templates provided. 3 In the left pane of the New dialog. it provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). However. 2 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. Usually.Review the template options 1 Close any open projects or families. notice the preview.rft. click Training Files. NOTE Do not double-click the template or open it.rft 674 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Notice that most of the template names include the component type. The New dialog opens to the templates folder that is specified in your Settings ➤ Options dialog. for example: wall based or floor based. Like most generic family templates. scroll to the structural framing templates. 5 Select Metric Generic Model floor based. 4 Scroll through the various template options. On the right side of the New dialog. In addition. ■ Metric Structural Framing .

Although the template name suggests this is the appropriate template. it is not the best starting point for the beam family. and notice the preview. it is not designed to create a component capable of point-to-point insertion. Level Selecting the Family Template | 675 . 7 Select Metric Structural Framing . Floor Plan: Ref.rft and notice the preview. spacing.rft.Complex and Trusses. Floor Plan: Ref. and display functions required by structural beams. Because of its simplicity.rft to open it.Beams and Braces. Notice this template offers three vertical planes on each side of the center (left/right) reference plane. ■ Metric Structural Framing . These planes are designed specifically to accommodate point-to-point beam insertion and the special snapping and display requirements of beam components. 8 Select Metric Structural Framing .Beams and Braces. This template is the best starting point for the new family. It provides two intersecting reference planes: Center (left/right) and Center (front/back). 10 Maximize the view.Complex and Trusses. Level.rft This template is designed for complex framing components and trusses. Open the family template 9 Double-click Metric Structural Framing .This template is design specifically to accommodate point-to-point insertion and the specific snapping.

it is not necessary to create a skeleton of reference planes or lines and then align and lock the solid geometry to it. 11 In the Project Browser. TIP The name also displays on the Status Bar. lines. under Elevations. Like many templates. under 3D Views. 2 Place the cursor over the leftmost vertical reference plane until the tooltip displays the name of the plane. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you started in the previous exercise. using reference planes and lines is considered more reliable and is therefore a best practice. Dimensioning the solid geometry directly also works. Creating the Component Skeleton In this lesson. you add reference planes to the beam design. double-click Front. however. the geometry supplied can be used or discarded as needed. 676 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . These reference planes act as part of the skeleton to which the solid geometry will align and lock. Notice that the beam extrusion is centered on the level line. the top of the beam extrusion is aligned to the associated level of the plan view. Therefore. double-click View 1. Reference Plane: Left. As you add solid geometry later in the tutorial. Review existing reference planes 1 In the Project Browser. “Creating the Component Skeleton” on page 676.In this view. 13 Proceed to the next lesson. creating a skeleton to build upon is the foundation of a new component family. and dimensions that provide a skeleton for the solid geometry. you snap and lock the solid geometry to these reference planes and lines. you add the reference planes. This beam extrusion is supplied within the template as a starting point. When a beam family based on this template is added to a project. 12 In the Project Browser. NOTE When creating or modifying a family. you can see the rectangular beam extrusion and a symbolic line. Adding Reference Planes In this exercise. under Floor Plans. double-click Ref. Level.

In the image below. two steel columns and a steel beam have been added to a project. notice the location of the beam extents. NOTE The reference planes shown in the project image below were added as a training reference. The two arrows point to the snap points that the left and right reference planes refer to. ■ Member Left and Member Right: These two planes refer to the left and right extent of the beam solid geometry when displayed in a medium or fine display view of a project. Reference planes that display within a family file do not display within a project. In the project plan view image below. The reference planes and their respective explanations are listed below.3 Repeat this step for the other two vertical planes on the left side. The six reference planes shown in the project below were added as a training reference. ■ Stick Symbol Left and Stick Symbol Right: Adding Reference Planes | 677 . they do not display when the family is loaded into a project. The reference planes in this template are designed to accommodate the point-to-point insertion of a beam component. ■ Left and Right: These two planes mark the points where the beam intersects with other columns.

These two planes refer to the extents of the stick symbol when it is loaded into a project and the plan view display setting is coarse. Add new reference planes 6 On the Design Bar. it is important to be familiar with the template so you do not create duplicate or conflicting planes. Each family template has a different set of reference planes established within it. NOTE Be careful not to select the symbolic line. 7 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm above the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). Delete existing solid geometry 4 Select the rectangular beam extrusion. Before adding new reference planes. You will use these two reference planes to control the beam width and keep it centered on the reference plane: Center (Front/Back). click Ref Plane. 678 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 5 On the Edit Toolbar. In a later exercise. 8 Add a reference plane approximately 50 mm below the horizontal reference plane: Center (Front/Back). you add the solid geometry for the truss as a sweep. click .

These two reference planes mark the top and bottom extents of the beam. and specify an Offset of 38 mm. under Elevations. TIP You can also use the mirror tool to accomplish this task. click on the Edit toolbar. and select the Level: Ref. Level. click to place it. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. To do this. 15 Place the cursor over the top horizontal reference plane. Adding Reference Planes | 679 . TIP You can control the direction of the offset by moving the cursor slightly to either side of the line you intend to pick. click . 12 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm above the Level: Ref. 11 Add a reference plane approximately 150 mm below the Level: Ref. click Ref Plane.Add ref. click Ref Plane. select the lower horizontal reference plane. 10 On the Design Bar. Level as the mirror axis. Level. When a copy of the reference plane displays below it. planes to control beam depth 9 In the Project Browser. double-click Front. The next four reference planes that you add mark the thickness of the truss chords. This beam requires additional reference planes to complete the truss skeleton.

680 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . click to place it as shown. 19 On the Options Bar. click to place it as shown.16 Place the cursor over the lower horizontal reference plane and when a copy of the reference plane displays above it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. 17 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Left. 18 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Member Right. specify an Offset of 200 mm. you must add four additional reference planes to accommodate the center chase. click to place it as shown. You have completed the reference planes that make up the skeleton of the chords. Before you move on to the next exercise.

click to place it as shown. specify an Offset of 238 mm. click to place it as shown. 24 In the Project Browser. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the right of it. double-click Ref. 21 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). Adding Reference Planes | 681 . Although there is nothing technically incorrect regarding the reference planes in this view. Level. 22 On the Options Bar. under Floor Plans.20 Place the cursor over Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right). cleaning up some of the extents would make the view easier. 23 Use the Reference Plane: Center (Left/Right) to add reference planes to the left and right of it as shown below. which you do in the next exercise. and when a copy of the reference plane displays to the left of it. Notice the reference planes that you added in the elevation view.

Repeat this step for the remaining extents so that your plan view resembles the image below. By applying dimensions and constraints directly to the skeleton of the family. click Modify. NOTE You use this family for the remainder of this tutorial. enter Wood Floor Truss for File name. navigate to the folder of your choice. and click Save. Make sure you remember where you saved it. select the reference plane and adjust the extents similar to the image below.25 On the Design Bar. “Adding Dimensions and Constraints” on page 682. 27 Click File menu ➤ Save. 26 Starting with one of the reference planes you added to define the center chase. 28 In the Save As dialog. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. you add some of the dimensions and constraints that control how the open web floor truss adapts to changes in its geometry. you add dimensions and constraints to the to the skeleton. In the following exercise. Adding Dimensions and Constraints In this exercise. You have finished creating the initial skeleton of the open web wood floor truss. 682 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . you can make sure the new family adapts to changes in geometry as expected before adding solid geometry to it.

click Dimension. After adding the dimension. click Dimension. separate the overriding values by dragging the value controls as shown. Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 683 . 6 On the Design Bar. and click the EQ symbol when it displays. 5 Select the dimension you added in the previous step. 3 Select each of the horizontal reference planes and place the dimension to the left as shown.Dataset Continue to use the dataset. This tool is the aligned dimension tool. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Modify. Dimension chord width 1 On the Design Bar. click . It allows you to dimension between parallel lines.rfa. 4 On the Design Bar. 2 On the Options Bar. This ensures that changes to the chord width are distributed equally across the center reference plane. Wood Floor Truss. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings during this procedure.

and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. Level. 684 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . 10 Select the upper horizontal reference plane. You may need to use the TAB key to toggle the selection to the reference plane.7 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane. under Elevations. 9 On the Design Bar. Add the depth dimension and equality constraint 8 In the Project Browser. place the dimension to the left as shown. double-click Front. and the lower horizontal reference plane. 11 Add a dimension referring to the upper horizontal reference plane and the lower horizontal reference plane and move it to the left of the equality constrained dimension you added previously. NOTE The center horizontal reference plane overlaps the level line: Ref. Place the dimension as shown. the Center reference plane. click Dimension.

Adding Dimensions and Constraints | 685 . Dimension chord thickness 14 On the right side of the model. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness of the vertical members and the members that border the center chase. 13 Add a dimension referring to the reference planes to the left and right of the Center (Left/Right) reference plane.Dimension and constrain the center chase width 12 Add a dimension referring to the three vertical reference planes in the center of the model. and place it below the dimension you added previously. place the dimension under the lines as shown and click the EQ symbol to apply the equality constraint. 15 Add four dimensions as shown. These dimensions refer to the chord thickness. add two dimensions as shown.

These parameters are the key to providing flexibility within a project. You choose whether to make it an instance or type parameter. double-click Ref. You should lean towards simplicity whenever possible. you label the dimensions to create instance and type parameters. you create new length parameters that control the basic dimensions of the floor truss.rfa. Creating New Length Parameters In this exercise. 2 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the chord as shown.You have finished adding the dimensions and constraints that control how the truss skeleton adapts to changes. dimensions. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. 686 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . Create the chord width parameter 1 In the Project Browser. Wood Floor Truss. you label the dimensions that you added in the previous exercise. In addition. under Floor Plans. If the parameter controls something that usually remains constant by its nature. The parameters that you create when designing a family are the same parameters used within a project to control the instance and type parameters of that family. consider making it an instance parameter. Level. In this exercise. consider making it a type parameter. 16 Click File menu ➤ Save. ■ Dataset Continue to use the dataset. it becomes a parameter. If the component is something that is cut or otherwise extremely flexible. it is important to decide how much control over the component will be required after the component is loaded into a project. and constraints as needed. “Creating New Length Parameters” on page 686. There are many types of parameters and various ways to create them. Throughout the tutorial. Things to consider when deciding “instance” or “type:” ■ ■ ■ If the component comes in standard sizes that must be maintained. consider making it a type parameter. they allow you to “flex” the model in order to test your design. When you label a dimension in the Family Editor. When you design a new family. In the next exercise. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. you will add additional reference planes. If the component has material that varies per component. consider making the material parameter an instance parameter.

specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. enter Chord Width for Name. enter Depth for Name. This indicates whether the parameter is a type or instance parameter. double-click Front. 6 Select the dimension on the left that refers to the depth of the truss. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog. Select Type.3 On the Options Bar. select Family parameter. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Type. Click OK. select Add parameter for Label. select Add parameter for Label. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. ■ Click OK. Create truss depth parameter 5 In the Project Browser. Under Parameter Data. Creating New Length Parameters | 687 . under Elevations. 8 In the Parameter Properties dialog. select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data. 7 On the Options Bar.

Create center chase width parameter
9 Select the dimension that refers to the width of the center chase interior.

10 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 11 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter. Under Parameter Data, enter Center Chase Width for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

Create chord thickness parameter
12 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the lower horizontal truss chord as shown.

13 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 14 In the Parameter Properties dialog, specify the following:

Under Parameter Type, select Family parameter.

688 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

■ ■ ■ ■

Under Parameter Data, enter Chord Thickness for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Type. Click OK.

TIP You may need to drag the text label downward as shown.

Apply chord thickness label to other dimensions
15 On the right side of the model, select the dimension that refers to the thickness of the upper horizontal truss chord. 16 On the Options Bar, select Chord Thickness for Label.

17 Apply the Chord Thickness label to the vertical chords and the vertical members on the left and right side of the center chase as shown.

Creating New Length Parameters | 689

18 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. In the Family Types dialog, notice the labelled dimensions display under the list of parameters and under the group, Dimensions. When you load this family into a project, these parameters will be available within the Type Properties dialog for the beam. 19 Click Cancel. 20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Flexing the Component Model” on page 690.

Flexing the Component Model
One of the most important steps in the process of creating a new parametric component is the flexing of the model. Flexing the model means to change parameter values, thus forcing the model to adapt to the changes. This is not limited to length parameters. If you add a new material parameter, you should also test it to make sure it works as expected. You should flex the model after any major change to the design.

You should flex a new family after:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Adding or modifying an element. Adding or modifying a parameter. Adding a new constraint. Nesting a component. Adding or modifying a parameter formula.

When you flex a family, you should always do it from the Family Types dialog, rather than by manually stretching or manipulating the objects within the family. When you change a parameter value and apply the change, this is the most accurate way of testing how the family will behave within a project.

690 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this exercise, you flex the model to test the various length parameters that you added in the previous exercise. Even though you have yet to add any model geometry to the family, it is important to verify that the reference lines adjust to changes as constraints are maintained. After you verify this, you can add the model geometry to the skeleton and be relatively certain that it will also flex as expected. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Preparing the family for flexing
1 When flexing the model, you need to be able to see the model within the drawing area and also apply new values within the Family Types dialog:

Maximize the Revit window and adjust the zoom settings so the model is in one corner of the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it to the opposing corner. or

Reduce the Revit window and keep the model centered in the drawing area. When you open the Family Types dialog, you can drag it off the Revit window as shown.

Adjust your display using one of the two methods before opening the Family Types dialog. 2 On the Design Bar, click Family Types, and drag the dialog so that you can view the model.

Flex the truss depth
3 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 600 mm for Depth, and click Apply. Notice the depth of the truss adapts to the change in dimension value. Also notice the equality constraint spreads the additional depth evenly above and below the Ref. Level. In addition, notice that the reference planes marking the chord thickness adapted to the change in depth while maintaining their specified value. Verifying that the entire model adapts to changes and making sure nothing “breaks” is the essence of flexing.

Flexing the Component Model | 691

4 Enter 450 mm for Depth, 80 mm for Chord Thickness, 800 mm for Center Chase Width, and click Apply. Notice that the model adapts to all of the changes.

Reset parameters
5 In the Family Types dialog, reset the parameters back to their original values:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 300 mm for Depth. Enter 38 mm for Chord Thickness. Enter 400 mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply. Click OK.

When working within the Family Editor, you should always flex the design after you add new elements or modify the existing design in any way. 6 On the File menu, click Save. 7 Proceed to the next lesson, “Adding Solid Geometry” on page 693.

692 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Adding Solid Geometry
In this lesson, you add the solid geometry using extrusions for the chords and trimmable plywood ends. After creating the extrusions, you constrain them using a combination of locked alignments and labelled dimensions. After flexing the design, you load the truss into a project to verify that it works as designed.

Creating Solid Extrusions
In this exercise, you create the top and bottom chords of the truss. After adding the chords, you align and lock their position. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add chord extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 2 Zoom in around the center of the truss design.

3 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 In the Work Plane dialog, click Name, select Reference Plane: Member Left, and click OK. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and select Lock.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the top chord as shown.

Adding Solid Geometry | 693

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

When using the Trim tool, click the part of the line you want to keep. 9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the top chord sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the bottom chord as shown. NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the bottom chord sketch as shown.

694 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. Notice the chord extrusions and the symbolic line. The chords need to be aligned and locked to the correct reference planes in order for them to flex with changes in the geometry.

17 On the File menu, click Save. 18 Proceed to the next exercise, “Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry” on page 695.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add constraints to the chord extrusions and then flex the family to verify that it works as designed. Dataset Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Constrain the extrusion ends
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Enter SD; this is the keyboard shortcut for Shading with Edges. This makes the chord extrusions more visible within the view. 3 Select the chord extrusions.

4 Drag the right arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Right, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 695

5 Drag the left arrow control to the right until it snaps to the reference plane: Member Left, as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the extrusion edge to the reference plane.

Flex the design
6 Prepare the view for flexing in the same way you did during the flexing exercise. You’ll want to set up your screen so you can see the model truss while the Family Types dialog is open. On the Design Bar, click Family Types.

7 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions did not move or change their length. This is because the length dimension references the extreme left and right reference planes, not the member right or member left reference planes. Therefore, you must add a new constraint before flexing the length. 8 In the Family Types dialog, enter 3000 for Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Add a new dimension and constraint
9 On the Design Bar, click Dimension. 10 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Left and the reference plane: Member Left as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

696 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

11 Add a dimension between the reference plane: Right and the reference plane: Member Right as shown. Click the lock symbol to lock the dimension value.

In this particular case, adding this constraint to the model has no impact on how it works within a project. This is a two-point placement beam family that uses the member left and member right reference planes as the determining extents of this component. Later in this lesson, you load this family into a project to test how it works within a project environment.

Flex the length
12 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 13 In the Family Types dialog, enter 6000 for Length, and click Apply. Notice that the extrusions adjusted to the change in length. This tells you that the constraints on the extrusion ends are working.

TIP If one of the extrusion ends did not adjust as expected, use the Align tool and add the constraint. Afterwards, flex the model once again to make sure the fix works as expected. 14 Click OK.

Adding Constraints to the Solid Geometry | 697

In a later exercise, you add the web members. Therefore, you need a truss long enough to add web arrays and do not need to return the truss back to its original length value.

Flex the chord width, depth, and thickness
15 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1. 16 Enter SD for Shading with Edges.

17 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 18 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 600mm for Depth. Enter 200mm for Chord Width. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. TIP When flexing, it is important to remember the original values so you can reset them afterwards. Therefore, try picking a method, such as doubling, that allows you to easily return to the original values.

Click Apply.

The chords should adjust to each of the new values. 19 Specify the beam values shown below:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 89mm for Chord Width. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply, and click OK.

20 On the File menu, click Save. 21 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Additional Solid Geometry” on page 698.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry
In this exercise, you add the extrusions for the truss ends and the center chase.

Dataset

698 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Continue to use the dataset, Wood Floor Truss.rfa, that you saved at the end of the previous exercise.

Add the center chase extrusions
1 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Ref. Level. 2 Zoom in on the center of the truss and select the model line that represents the beam stick symbol. 3 On the View Control Bar, click the Hide/Isolate control, and click Hide Element. This will make it easier to sketch the center chase extrusions. 4 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 5 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 6 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

7 Select the four reference planes that border the left, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Notice that the sketch lines are automatically locked to the reference planes. 8 On the Tools toolbar, click .

9 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to create the left, vertical member of the center chase sketch as shown.

10 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 11 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

12 Select the four reference planes that border the right, vertical member of the center chase as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 699

NOTE A warning dialog displays notifying you that there are overlapping lines. You can ignore this warning because after you finish trimming, the lines will no longer overlap.

13 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

14 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the center chase sketch as shown.

15 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch. 16 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 17 Zoom in on the center chase.

Align and lock the new extrusions
18 On the Tools menu, click Align. This next process is very important. The ends of the chase extrusions must be aligned and locked to the horizontal reference planes coincident with the interior edges of the chords. Although you can align and lock extrusion to extrusion, it is considered a best practice to align and lock to reference planes. 19 For the align-to reference, select the reference line on the top of the lower chord as shown. You may need to press TAB to toggle the selection options.

700 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

20 Click the bottom edge of one of the chase extrusions, and after the alignment, click the lock symbol to lock the alignment.

21 Align the top edge of the chase extrusions with the reference line coincident with the lower edge of the upper chord, and lock the alignment as shown.

22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the center chase
23 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 24 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 800mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, redo any problematic alignments and constraints. 25 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

Clean up the view
26 Zoom to Fit.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 701

27 Clean up the view by moving the dimensions off to the side as shown. This will make subsequent work much easier.

Add the truss end extrusions
28 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-left corner as shown.

29 On the Options Bar, select Add Parameter for Label. 30 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Trimmable End Length for Name. Select Dimensions for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

31 Select the Chord Thickness dimension in the lower-right corner of the view. 32 On the Options Bar, select Trimmable End Length for Label. 33 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 34 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length, click Apply, and click OK.

Sketch the right end extrusion
35 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Right. 36 Zoom around the truss elements. 37 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 38 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Right for Name, and click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 40 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

702 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

41 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch.

42 On the Options Bar, enter19mm for Offset. 43 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

44 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

45 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 703

46 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 47 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, verify that 300mm is specified for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. 48 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Sketch the left end extrusion
49 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Left. 50 Zoom around the truss elements. 51 On the Design Bar, click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 52 In the Work Plane dialog, select Reference Plane: Member Left for Name, and click OK. 53 On the Design Bar, click Lines. 54 On the Options Bar, click , and verify that Lock is selected.

55 On the upper chord, select the lower horizontal reference plane; on the lower chord, select the upper horizontal reference plane. These two lines represent the upper and lower boundary of the sketch. 56 On the Options Bar, enter 19mm for Offset. 57 Select the Center (Front/Back) reference plane twice to add a sketch line to each side as shown.

704 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

58 On the Tools toolbar, click

.

59 Select perpendicular intersecting lines to complete the end sketch as shown.

60 On the Design Bar, click Extrusion Properties. 61 In the Element Properties dialog, under Constraints, specify -300mm for the Extrusion End value, and click OK. NOTE This extrusion value must be negative in order to push the extrusion towards the center of the truss. 62 On the Design Bar, click Finish Sketch.

Add alignment constraints
63 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front.

Although the truss ends line up with the reference planes controlling the length of the trimmable ends, they are not aligned and locked to those reference planes and would not pass a flex test. 64 Zoom in on the left end of the truss. 65 On the Tools menu, click Align. 66 Select the Member Left reference plane as the align-to point.

67 Select the left edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

Creating Additional Solid Geometry | 705

68 Select the reference plane coincident with the right edge of the left end extrusion; this is the align-to point. 69 Select the right edge of the left end extrusion, and lock the alignment.

70 Repeat the previous five steps for the right end of the truss. Make adjustments to account for the right side. TIP When you finish the alignments, if you select the end extrusion, a lock displays on each side indicating the constraints to the reference planes. 71 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Flex the design
72 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 73 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 486mm for Depth. Enter 600mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints. 74 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 300mm for Trimmable End Length. Click Apply, and click OK.

75 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

76 Save the Family. A new dataset is provided for you beginning with the next lesson. It is identical to the truss you have been designing. If you are comfortable with your design, you can continue using it in the next lesson. If you have experienced any errors or have deviated from the exercises in any way, you should close the file and begin with a fresh dataset. 77 Proceed to the next lesson, “Testing the Family in a Project” on page 707.

706 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Testing the Family in a Project
In this lesson, you load the family into a project to test it in a real-world environment. After you load it into the project, you add several beam instances and then modify the shape of the foundation to see how the beams adapt.

Loading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you load the truss family into a project that consists of foundation walls, a sill, and a rim joist. NOTE Close any open families or projects. The truss family that you use in this lesson is identical to the truss you have created in the previous exercises. Although you could continue using the previous family, it is recommended that you use the new family in order to ensure consistency. Datasets

Open the truss family
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\Families\m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa.

Open the project file

Click File menu ➤ Open.

Testing the Family in a Project | 707

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF1.rvt.

Load the truss family into the project
1 On the Window menu, clickm_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. The truss family is loaded directly into the only other open file. If you had multiple projects or families open, a dialog would have displayed asking for you to specify which projects you wanted to load the family into. Notice that the project file is now active. 3 In the Project Browser, expand Families, expand Structural Framing, and notice that the Wood Floor Truss_1 family has been loaded. 4 Proceed to the next exercise, “Testing a Family Instance in a Project” on page 708.

Testing a Family Instance in a Project
In this exercise, you add several instances of the truss family to the project, and then modify the project to see how the beams adapt. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you used in the previous exercise.

708 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

6 Using point-to-point insertion. 5 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. and click Structural. This project consists of foundation walls. right-click in the Design Bar. 2 In the Project Browser. a wood sill. add three vertical beams that snap to the rim joist at each end.Southeast Isometric. 4 In the Type Selector. and double-click 3D .Add beams to project 1 In the Project Browser. TIP If the Structural tab of the Design Bar is not active. expand 3D Views. double-click Level 1. verify that Chain is not selected. and a wood rim joist. select m_Wood Floor Truss_1. the truss family you loaded will interact with it as one beam does to another. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 709 . expand Views. The rim joist was added as a beam. under Floor Plans. a slab. therefore. click Beam.

NOTE Do not be concerned with the exact location of the three beams.Southeast Isometric. 710 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . NOTE Make sure you drag the grid line. double-click Level 1. You do not need to be precise. double-click 3D . 8 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views. 9 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until the walls form an approximate square. Notice the wood truss sits on top of the sill and attaches to the rim joist as expected. under Floor Plans. you are merely testing the new floor truss to verify that it adapts to the changes. 7 In the Project Browser. not the wall or rim joist. Try to make them approximately equidistant as shown.

The center chase remained the same width while remaining centered. 12 On the File menu. In the next lesson. IMPORTANT Do not change the name of the family. Testing a Family Instance in a Project | 711 . Notice the wood truss adjusted to the changes. under 3D Views.10 In the Project Browser. click Undo Drag. you nest the web components into the truss and create an array that adapts to changes in length. This should return the project to its original dimension.Southeast Isometric. 13 In the Save as dialog. The project and family need to interact based on a consistent file name. 11 On the Edit menu. ■ ■ The truss ends remained constant and adapted to the new beam length. navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project with its existing name. double-click 3D . click Save as.

2 In the Project Browser. 17 Proceed to the next lesson. 5 On the File menu. under Floor Plans. 712 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . and open Metric\Families\m_Wood_Web. and create a formula controlled array to fill in the truss. 4 On the View Control Bar. Load the wood web family ■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. You then align and lock the web extents before applying a formula-controlled array.rfa is the active file.rfa. Working with Nested Subcomponents In this lesson. click Hide/Isolate. Level. you nest wood web members into the floor truss. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. Dataset Continue to use the datasets from the previous exercise. 15 On the Options Bar. “Working with Nested Subcomponents” on page 712. 3 Select the symbolic line in the center of the truss.Edit a family from within a project 14 Select one of the wooden truss components. click Edit Family. Prepare the view for nesting 1 Make sure that m_Wood Floor Truss_1. click Yes. and click Hide Element. Because the family is already open. double-click Ref. Adding a Nested Component In this exercise. click Training Files. you nest two wooden web members into the truss. the wood floor truss family becomes the active view. 16 When prompted to open the truss family for editing. This will aid in the placement of the wood web.

verify that m_Wood_Web: Wood Web is selected. Notice the model lines that surround the web component. click Component. under Elevations. 10 In the Project Browser. 11 Place the cursor over the left wood web. 13 For the align-to point. this is the keyboard shortcut for Align. 8 Add two instances of the wood web component as shown. 7 In the Type Selector. You will align the left web component first. they are visible only when you place the cursor over the component. Align the nested web components 12 Enter AL. The extrusion is aligned and locked to invisible model lines that make it easier to array within the truss. IMPORTANT Make sure you snap the center line of the web components to the center reference line of the truss. select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the left center chase extrusion. Also notice that the depth of the web members needs to be changed. This will make aligning the wood web easier. click Modify. double-click Front. Add two wood web components 6 On the Design Bar. Snap the center line of the web to the center reference plane of the truss. Place one wood web on each side of the center chase. Leave a slight gap between the chase and the web. you align the web panel using these lines rather than the extrusion edges. This will be accomplished in the next exercise when you link the nested parameter with the host parameter. Adding a Nested Component | 713 . In the following steps.This family is a single extrusion as shown. 9 On the Design Bar. The geometry is driven by formula-based parameters that link to the host family. Do not select it.

Add reference planes for array anchors 17 On the Design Bar.14 Select the right vertical model line of the left web component as shown. Place each reference plane just to the outside of the center of the web components. click Ref Plane. 16 On the Design Bar. it is important to note that you should avoid adding unnecessary constraints. click Modify. 714 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . IMPORTANT Do not lock the alignment 15 Repeat the previous two steps to align the left edge of the right web component to the right edge of the center chase as shown. 18 Add two reference planes as shown. Each of these web components represents the starting point of the web arrays that you add later in this lesson. NOTE You do not have to align the top or bottom the web components because the height of the web members will adapt to the truss height after you create and link the parameters in the next exercise. In addition.

21 Select the reference plane that you added to the left of the web components center as shown. In the steps that follow.19 On the Tools menu. you align the reference planes to the center of the web components. Dimension and label array anchors 24 On the Design Bar. 22 Click the lock to lock the reference plane to the centerline of the web component. 25 Add the following two dimensions: Adding a Nested Component | 715 . 20 Select the center of the left web component as the align-to point. click Dimension. 23 Repeat the previous two steps to align and lock the right web component and the reference plane as shown. click Align. The reference plane you added in the previous step represents half the web width.

under Parameters. length. you add new parameters to control the web components. click Add. Create a new parameter for web depth 1 On the Design Bar. or the width of the center chase. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the right edge of the left web component and the outside edge of the center chase. Place the dimension as shown. Select the reference plane that is coincident with the left edge of the right web component and the outside edge of the center chase. click Modify. ■ Right web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the right web component. navigate to the same directory in which you saved the project file and save this family there with its current name.Left web dimension ■ ■ Select the reference plane that you aligned to the center of the left web component. click Family Types. ■ In the next exercise. click Save As. You also add a formula to the parameter in order to maintain the web position as the truss changes depth. 2 In the Family Types dialog. 27 On the File menu. 716 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . You then link the nested web parameters to the new host parameters. “Creating Formula-controlled Parameters” on page 716. you label these dimensions. 28 In the Save As dialog. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters In this exercise. 26 On the Design Bar. 29 Proceed to the next exercise. Place the dimension as shown. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

12 On the Design Bar. In the Type Properties dialog. ensure you enter it exactly as it is named. under Other. and click Element Properties. Click OK. Select Common for Discipline. click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. Link the nested component to the new parameter 6 Right-click the left web component. click Edit/New. Select Length for Type. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Enter WebDepth for Name. under Parameter Data. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 717 . under Constraints. In addition. This formula ensures that the web depth will account for any changes in the chord thickness or truss depth. Select Type. 9 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog. notice that “= “displays within the WebHeight button. When you refer to another parameter within a formula. click Modify. Notice the web members are resized to fit more precisely between the chords. 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click OK. NOTE Formulas are case sensitive. notice the center of each nested web component is locked to the reference plane that bisects it. enter Depth . 4 In the Family Types dialog.3 In the Parameter Properties dialog. click the button to the right of the WebHeight value. TIP You can expand the width of the Family Types dialog to facilitate typing within the formula field. 5 Click OK.(Chord Thickness * 2) for the WebDepth Formula. 10 In the Type Properties dialog. select WebDepth.

Create new formula-controlled parameter for center chase
13 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 14 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 15 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:

Enter CC for Name. This parameter is primarily for convenience. It will use a formula to add the center chase width and the thickness of the two bordering chords.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Select Other for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

16 Under Other, enter Center Chase Width + (2*Chord Thickness) for CC Formula. After you enter the formula, the resulting value is displayed as an inactive field.

Create WebArrayLength formula-controlled parameter
17 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 18 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayLength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Length for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

19 Under Constraints, enter (Length - (CC+300))/2 for WebArrayLength Formula. This formula subtracts the length of the center chase and its two bordering chords plus an additional 300mm before dividing it in two to specify the length of each array. The additional 300mm is to account for the ends, which must remain at least 150mm long.

Create WebArrayNum formula-controlled parameter
20 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 21 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter WebArrayNum for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Integer for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

22 Under Constraints, enter WebArrayLength/(2*WebDepth) for WebArrayNum Formula. 23 Click OK.

718 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Add parameter to anchor web array
24 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the left web as shown.

25 On the Options Bar, select Add parameter for Label. 26 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Webhalflength for Name. Select Constraints for Group parameter under. Select Instance. Click OK.

27 Select the dimension that refers to the midpoint of the right web. 28 On the Options Bar, select Webhalflength for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Add formula for Webhalflength
30 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 31 Under Constraints, enter (WebArrayLength/WebArrayNum)/2 for Webhalflength Formula. 32 Click OK. Notice the location of the web components has adapted to the formula.

Creating Formula-controlled Parameters | 719

Associate web component parameters
33 Right-click the left web component, and click Element Properties. 34 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 35 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebArrayLength value. 36 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select WebArrayLength, and click OK. In the Type Properties dialog, the button next to the WebArrayLength value should have an equals sign within it. 37 In the Type Properties dialog, click OK. 38 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 39 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 40 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1.

Because you have added and constrained new components, it is very important that you flex the model to ensure the nested components and the formulas that controls them work as expected. It is especially important to flex the model before arraying the truss so that you don’t multiply any existing problems.

Flex the design
41 Adjust the view so you can flex the truss while in the Family Types dialog. 42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 76mm for Chord Thickness. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

44 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 38mm for Chord Thickness.

720 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Click Apply, and click OK.

45 On the File menu, click Save. 46 Proceed to the next exercise, “Arraying Nested Subcomponents” on page 721.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents
In this exercise, you array the nested web components, add alignment constraints, and link the arrays to the WebArrayNum parameter. Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise.

Array the left web component
1 In the Project Browser, under Elevations, double-click Front. 2 Select the nested web component left of the center chase.

3 On the Edit menu, click Array. Creating an array requires two basic steps. First, you specify the move start point; then you specify the move end point. You must use precision when arraying because any error is multiplied as the array grows. 4 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

5 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 721

6 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

7 Press ENTER to complete the array. 8 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Array the right nested web component
9 Select the nested web component right of the center chase. 10 On the Edit menu, click Array. 11 On the Options Bar, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Verify that Group and Associate is selected. Enter 3 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. Select Constrain.

12 Select the bottom-left corner of the nested web extrusion as the move start point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family. 13 Select the bottom-right corner of the nested web extrusion as the move end point. When picking the corner, use the TAB key to toggle to the endpoint of the vertical model line within the nested family.

14 Press ENTER to complete the array. 15 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 16 Zoom out to view the truss.

Align and lock the arrays
17 Zoom in on the left array of web components. 18 On the Tools menu, click Align.

722 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

19 In the left array, place the cursor over the boundary between the two left web components until the reference highlights, then select the line twice.

Because there are two overlapping lines at this location, you are aligning the two bordering web components to each other. 20 Click the lock symbol to keep the web components locked at their edges.

21 Within the left array, align and lock the two right web components.

22 Within the right array, align and lock the two boundaries between the three web components. Use the same techniques as you did in the previous three steps. NOTE This step is very important. If you do not lock the edges of the array, the web components overlap each other when you change the depth of the truss.

Label the arrays
23 Select the middle web component of the left array. 24 Notice the array line displays above the components with the array value. Place the cursor over the array line as shown and select it.

NOTE Do not select the array value. 25 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 26 Select the middle web component of the right array. 27 Select the array line over the web components on the right. 28 On the Options Bar, select WebArrayNum for Label. 29 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 723

30 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Notice the arrays appear to be too long. This is because earlier in the tutorial, you added a dimension to lock the Member Left and Member Right reference plane to the outer Left and Right reference planes. The primary reason for this was to allow for flexing the length. 31 Zoom around the left side of the truss. 32 Select the dimension between reference plane Left and Member Left as shown.

33 Delete the dimension. 34 On the Tools menu, click Align. 35 Select the reference plane, Left, as the align-to point. 36 Select the reference plane, Member Left, and lock the alignment as shown.

Notice the end of the array still overlaps the trimmable end. You will fix this in later steps by changing the parameter value.

724 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

NOTE With most beam families, you would not want to align and lock these two reference planes; however, in this case, the wood floor truss normally sits on a sill bordering a rim joist. Therefore, this solution has little, if any, significant impact. 37 On the Design Bar, click Modify. 38 Zoom in around the right side of the truss. 39 Delete the dimension between reference plane Right and Member Right. 40 Align and lock reference plane Right and Member Right.

41 Zoom out until you can see the entire truss.

Change trimmable end length value
42 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 43 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 150mm for Trimmable End Length. 44 Click Apply, and click OK. Notice the web arrays fit within the truss without overlapping the ends.

Flex the design
45 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click View 1, and prepare the view for flexing. 46 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 47 In the Family Types dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 686mm for Depth. Enter 12000mm for Length. Enter 900mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply.

The truss should adapt to all the changes. If it does not, fix any problematic alignments and constraints.

Arraying Nested Subcomponents | 725

TIP When flexing a complex model such as this, you should flex the model in as many ways as possible to verify it is working correctly; however, for training and time purposes, these steps have been reduced. 48 In the Family Types dialog, reset the values as follows:
■ ■ ■ ■

Enter 286mm for Depth. Enter 6000mm for Length. Enter 400mm for Center Chase Width. Click Apply, and click OK.

You have completed the design of the primary components of the truss. 49 On the File menu, click Save. 50 Proceed to the next exercise, “Reloading a Family into a Project” on page 726.

Reloading a Family into a Project
In this exercise, you reload the truss family into the project. You then increase the distance between the foundation walls to see how the truss adapts to the changes in length.

726 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Dataset Continue to use the datasets that you saved in the previous exercise. In addition to the truss family, the project, m_WWF1.rvt, should be open. Close any other open projects.

Reload the truss into the project.
1 Verify that the truss family is active and the 3D View, View 1, displays. 2 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 3 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the project file becomes active and the beam has updated with the latest changes.

4 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 5 Drag Grid 2 downward until the shape of the building footprint is almost square. 6 In the Project Browser, under 3D Views, double-click 3D - Southeast Isometric. Notice the truss has adapted to the changes.

Reloading a Family into a Project | 727

7 On the Edit menu, click Undo Drag. 8 Save and close the project file and the family file. In the next lesson, you begin with a new dataset which is identical to both of these files. 9 Proceed to the next lesson, “Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters” on page 728.

Applying Subcategories, Materials, and Parameters
In this lesson, you create and apply subcategories and materials. You then create a parameter to specifically control material application.

Creating and Applying Subcategories
In this exercise, you create new subcategories within the truss family. You then reload the family into the project and apply a material to the subcategory. Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF2.rvt.

728 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

In this dataset, the truss was added to a beam system that occupies approximately half the building footprint. In addition, four instances of the floor truss were added to the other end of the structure.

Apply Object Styles
1 Zoom in around beam system. Notice no material has been applied to the truss. Within the family, the material values were set to By Category by default.

2 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 3 In the Object Styles dialog, verify that the Model Objects tab is selected, and expand the category Structural Framing. Notice that the Structural Framing category and all of the subcategories have no material value defined. In addition, notice that the subcategories do not apply to the wood floor truss that you have designed. 4 On the Structural Framing category line, click in the material field until the button displays as shown.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 729

5 Click the button that displays in the Structural Framing Material field. 6 In the Materials dialog, click Wood - Timber for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. Notice the Wood - Timber material has been applied to all Structural Framing components.

When you apply a material to the Structural Framing category, all subcomponents of that category are assigned that material. If there was a metal beam in this building model, it would also have the wood material applied to it. If you create subcategories as you design in the Family Editor, you have more control over component visibility within a project. 8 On the Edit menu, click Undo Object Styles.

Create subcategories within the truss family
9 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 10 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 11 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 12 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 13 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 14 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss for Name, and click OK.

Apply material to subcategory
15 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 16 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 17 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. 18 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

19 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 20 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 21 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK.

Apply the subcategory to the truss components
22 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 23 On the Options Bar, click .

24 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Other, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected.

730 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

25 On the Options Bar, click

.

26 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss for Subcategory, and click OK. 27 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Apply a subcategory to the nested web components
28 Place the cursor over one of the arrayed web components, press TAB to toggle to the web component and click to select it. 29 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 30 Click Yes to open the family for editing. The web component family opens in a 3D view.

31 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 32 In the Object Styles dialog, under Modify Subcategories, click New. 33 In the New Subcategory dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Name, and click OK. By creating a separate subcategory for the web components, you can apply a different material to all web components when using this truss within a project.

Creating and Applying Subcategories | 731

34 Click in the Material field for the Wood Floor Truss - Webs subcategory, and click the button to open the Materials dialog. 35 In the Materials dialog, click Duplicate. 36 In the New Material dialog, enter Wood Floor Truss - Webs, and click OK. 37 In the Materials dialog, under AccuRender, click .

38 In the Material Library dialog, navigate to _accurender\Wood\Pine, Yellow, select Natural,No Gloss for Name, and click OK. 39 In the Materials dialog, click OK. 40 In the Object Styles dialog, click OK. 41 Select the web extrusion. 42 On the Options Bar, click .

43 In the Element Properties dialog, under Identity Data, select Wood Floor Truss - Webs for Subcategory, and click OK.

Reload web component into truss family
44 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 45 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 46 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes.

Reload truss into project
47 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 48 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 49 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the new object subcategory styles are applied to the truss components.

50 On the Settings menu, click Object Styles. 51 In the Object Styles dialog, under Categories, expand Structural Framing.

732 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Notice the two new subcategories are listed. You can change the style of only the wood truss components without impacting other structural framing components. 52 Click OK. 53 On the View menu, click Visibility/Graphics. 54 In the Visibility Graphics dialog, under Visibility, expand Structural Framing, clear Wood Floor Truss Webs, and click OK. Notice the web extrusions no longer display; however, the stick symbols continue to display.

55 On the Edit menu, click Undo Visibility/Graphics. 56 On the File menu, click Save As. 57 In the Save as dialog, navigate to a folder of your preference and save the project with the current name. 58 Proceed to the next exercise, “Creating Material Parameters” on page 733.

Creating Material Parameters
In this exercise, you add a new material parameter that allows you to specify a material for each truss instance. Dataset Continue to use the dataset that you saved in the previous exercise.

Open truss family for editing
1 Select a truss that is not part of the beam system. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create material parameter
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Parameters, click Add. 6 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Enter Floor Truss Material for Name. Select Materials and Finishes for Group parameter under. Select Common for Discipline. Select Material for Type. Select Instance. Click OK.

7 In the Family Types dialog, notice the default material is By Category.

Creating Material Parameters | 733

In this case, do not assign a material to the parameter. When reloaded into a project, this component will continue to use the material assigned to the subcategory by default. This material parameter allows you to assign a material on an instance parameter. 8 Click OK.

Link truss extrusions to material parameter
9 Draw a pick box around the entire truss. 10 On the Options Bar, click .

11 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Wood Floor Truss, and click OK. Notice the chords and end extrusions remain selected. 12 On the Options Bar, click .

13 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the button to the right of the Material value field. 14 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 15 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 16 Place the cursor over one of the web components, press TAB, and select the component. 17 On the Options Bar, click .

18 In the Element Properties dialog, click Edit/New. 19 In the Type Properties dialog, under Other, click the button to the right of the WebMaterial value field. 20 In the Associate Family Parameter dialog, select Floor Truss Material, and click OK. 21 Click OK twice. 22 On the Design Bar, click Modify.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF2.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed. 26 Select a floor truss that is not part of the beam system. 27 On the Options Bar, click .

28 In the Element Properties dialog, under Materials and Finishes, click the Floor Truss Material field and click the button that displays. 29 In the Materials dialog, select Metal - Steel for Name, and click OK. 30 In the Element Properties dialog, click OK. 31 On the Design Bar, click Modify. Notice the material is applied only to the selected beam.

734 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

32 On the File menu, click Save. 33 On the File menu, click Close. 34 Close any open files. You can save the open files if you wish. In the next lesson, a new dataset is supplied. 35 Proceed to the next lesson, “Controlling Component Visibility” on page 735.

Controlling Component Visibility
In this lesson, you add controls to specify the views in which each element displays and at what detail level.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls
In this exercise, you designate the display of elements in specific views and at specific detail levels.

Datasets
■ ■

Click File menu ➤ Open. In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Metric\m_WWF3.rvt.

Change detail levels
1 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Controlling Component Visibility | 735

Notice the rim joist no longer displays. However, notice the floor truss has not changed appearance, because you have yet to assign a detail level to each of the elements within the truss family. Currently within the truss, all elements display at all times in all views.

2 Select a floor truss. 3 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 4 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Apply detail level controls to web components
5 Select a web component. 6 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 7 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 8 Select the web extrusion. 9 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 10 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

11 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 12 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_Wood Floor Truss_1.rfa, and click OK. 13 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice the appearance of the floor trusses has not changed.

Assign detail level to center chase extrusions
14 Select the center chase extrusions. 15 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 16 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Clear Left/Right. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

736 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

Assign detail level to truss ends
17 Select the end extrusions. 18 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 19 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■ ■

Under View Specific Display, clear Plan/RCP. Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Assign detail level to truss chords
20 Select the truss chords. 21 On the Options Bar, click Visibility. 22 In the Family Element Visibility Settings dialog, specify the following:
■ ■

Under Detail Levels, clear Coarse. Click OK.

Reload truss into project
23 On the Design Bar, click Load into Projects. 24 In the Load into Projects dialog, select m_WWF3.rvt, and click OK. 25 In the Reload Family dialog, select Override parameter values of existing types, and click Yes. Notice that the floor truss solid geometry is not displayed.

26 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Medium. Notice the floor truss solid geometry is displayed. 27 In the Project Browser, under Floor Plans, double-click Level 1. 28 On the View Control Bar, click Detail Level, and click Coarse.

Assigning Detail Level and View Controls | 737

Notice the symbolic representation of the beams.

29 On the File menu, click Save As. 30 In the Save As dialog, navigate to your preferred location and save the project with the current name. 31 Proceed to the next lesson, “Creating Component Types” on page 738.

Creating Component Types
In this lesson, you create multiple floor truss types to speed up the design process when working in a project. In the final exercise, you create a conditional formula that adjusts the truss depth based on the truss length.

Creating Multiple Component Types
In this exercise, you create multiple types for a 89x38 truss and a 64x38 truss. Although you can change the parameters of a truss within a project, creating predefined types can speed up the design process.

Open the truss family for editing
1 Select a floor truss. 2 On the Options Bar, click Edit Family. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing.

Create new types
4 On the Design Bar, click Family Types. 5 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 6 In the New dialog, enter 89x38 for Name, and click OK. 7 In the Family Types dialog, under Family Types, click New. 8 In the New dialog, enter 64x38 for Name, and click OK. 9 In the Family Types dialog, under Dimensions, enter 64mm for Chord Width, and click Apply. Notice the chord changes width. 10 Select 89x38 for Name, and click Apply. The truss returns to its original designed value. NOTE When creating new components, create types for those most frequently used in your projects. 11 Click OK.

738 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques

<result-if-false>) 5 In the Family Types dialog. 17 Add a beam in the center of the open space.TIP You can also use new types to flex the model. double-click 3D . You are going to enter a conditional formula that follows this basic rule: IF ( <condition>. Creating Conditional Formulas In this exercise. <result-if-true>. Open the truss for editing 1 Select a floor truss. 23 Proceed to the final exercise. under 3D Views. 21 In the Project Browser. 20 On the Design Bar. and click Yes. click Family Types. enter the follow formula for Depth: if(Length < 6600. select Override parameter values of existing types. Notice the two beam types. Creating Conditional Formulas | 739 . if(Length < 7500. 400. and click OK. 286. 14 In the Reload Family dialog. Load new types into the project 12 On the Design Bar. “Creating Conditional Formulas” on page 739. 3 Click Yes to open the family for editing. 400))) 6 Click Apply. select m_WWF3. select 89x38. 13 In the Load into Projects dialog. click Beam.rvt. click Save. Adding a conditional formula 4 On the Design Bar. under Dimensions.Southeast Isometric. 19 Add a beam next to the 64x38. click Modify. 350. you create a conditional formula that changes the depth automatically as the truss increases in length. select 64x38. click Edit Family. click Load into Projects. 15 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 16 In the Type Selector. 22 On the File menu. if(Length < 9000. 18 In the Type Selector. 2 On the Options Bar.

rvt. 8 In the Family Types dialog. NOTE You would have to change the depth of the sill and rim joist to accommodate this change. select Override parameter values of existing types. 15 Notice the change in floor truss depth. 13 Select Grid 2 and drag it downward until it is between 8000-9000mm from Grid 1.Southeast Isometric. 11 In the Reload Family dialog. under 3D Views. 10 In the Load into Projects dialog. 17 Close any open files. click Load into Projects. under Floor Plans. and click Yes. double-click 3D . click Apply. 740 | Chapter 17 Parametric Component Design Techniques . enter 8000 for length. select m_WWF3. IMPORTANT When you changed the width of the building footprint. double-click Level 1. and click Apply. you probably noticed a change in the amount of time the view needed to regenerate. Test the conditional formula within a project 12 In the Project Browser. click Save. 16 On the File menu. Load the truss into the project 9 On the Design Bar. Notice the truss depth increases. 14 In the Project Browser.Flex the design 7 In the Family Types dialog. enter 6000 for length. You have completed this tutorial. and click OK. and click OK. Regeneration time and overall performance can be affected by over-designed families.

Using Advanced Features 7 741 .

742 | Chapter 18 Using Advanced Features .

you select the grid. To change grids. they can define space and separate the exterior from the interior. to resize the system. Like walls. For example. grid lines. This affects the entire curtain system. they can usually include mullions and have glazed panels. you need to change the length of the wall. Like windows. You can add curtain systems with the wall command. you need to select a panel. and you can change these elements individually.Curtain Systems 18 Curtain systems are not walls. and mullions. panel. 743 . or you can use a specific curtain system command. and they are not windows. Unlike windows. They are typically not load-bearing and are not cut for doors or windows. curtain systems are usually assembled on site as a single unit. To switch panel types. A typical curtain system comprises a wall.

and open Metric\m_Curtain_Walls. 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Start the curtain system where shown. expand Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans. click Wall. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you create a curtain system using the wall command. This type of curtain system is also referred to as a curtain wall. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. 4 In the Type Selector. This floor edge will be the entrance to the building. click Training Files. Creating a curtain system using the wall command 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and double-click Ground Floor. Creating an Entrance In this exercise. 744 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 2 Zoom in to Grid F where it meets the arc in the floor.rvt. you further develop the building information model by creating a flat curtain system at the entrance of the model.Flat Curtain System In this lesson.

and double-click Southeast Isometric. and finish at the outside face of the exterior wall as shown. expand Views (all) ➤ 3D Views.6 Move the cursor down along the edge of the floor. 7 Zoom in to the join between the curtain system and the exterior wall. Creating an Entrance | 745 . 10 Zoom in to the curtain system you just added. 8 In the Project Browser. 9 Click View menu ➤ Orient ➤ Northeast.

11 Select the curtain system. and click (Properties). Note that a curtain system created from the wall command has similar properties to other walls: base constraint. top and base attachments. using curtain grids. 746 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The curtain system is now at the same height as the other existing curtain systems. You want the curtain system to attach to the roof. and room bounding. top constraint. select Up to level: TOP OF ROOF. 12 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Constraints ➤ Top Constraint. under Floor Plans. Click OK. 13 The curtain system is a single glazed panel. you are going to subdivide the panel into several smaller panels. Adding curtain grids 14 In the Project Browser. For Top Offset. enter 1200. double-click GROUND FLOOR.

and click Rename. click Curtain Grid. 17 Click the elevation arrow to display the crop boundary. and resize the crop boundary as shown. 19 Enter Entrance Elevation. FOURTH FLOOR. 23 Place another grid 1500 mm above the first grid. and click OK. SIXTH FLOOR. right-click Elevation 1 .15 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 20 In the drawing area. select the 3 grid lines you just placed.a. 18 In the Project Browser. and click OK. or press CTRL + C on the keyboard. Creating an Entrance | 747 . click Modify. 28 Click Edit menu ➤ Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. 26 While pressing CTRL. THIRD FLOOR. 29 In the Select Levels dialog. double-click the elevation symbol arrow to open the new elevation view. 27 Click Edit menu ➤ Copy to Clipboard. select SECOND FLOOR. 22 Move the cursor along the edge of the wall. FIFTH FLOOR. 24 Place another grid so that it snaps to the SECOND FLOOR level line. while pressing CTRL. 16 Place the elevation symbol in front of the curtain wall and click Modify on the Design Bar. 21 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and SEVENTH FLOOR. and click to place a horizontal curtain grid 1200 mm above the ground floor level line. 25 On the Design Bar. click Elevation.

This divides the curtain wall vertically into 2 panels. click Modify. 748 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . watch the tooltips and the Status Bar. Click to place another grid line.The selected grid lines are now at each of these levels. 33 On the Design Bar. 32 Move the cursor along the GROUND FLOOR level (left of the vertical grid line) until it snaps to the midpoint of the larger vertical panel. 30 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. one larger than the other. Click to create a vertical grid. TIP To be sure that the curtain grid is at the midpoint of the panel. 31 Place the cursor on grid 2 so that it highlights. click Curtain Grid.

click Add or Remove Segments. you add a doorway to the curtain system. 36 Select the lowest segment of the left grid line. 37 Click in any white space to exit the editor. Creating an Entrance | 749 . You enter an editor that lets you select segments of the grid line to remove them. The segment line style changes to dashed. and then select the segment above it. you set up a doorway on a curtain panel. 35 Select the left vertical grid line. and then you replace that panel with a curtain system door panel. Instead of using the Door command. The two segments are removed. and on the Options Bar.Next. Adding the doorway 34 Zoom in to the ground floor level in the Entrance Elevation view.

39 On the Design Bar. click Curtain Grid. 41 Place 4 vertical grid lines as shown. 40 On the Options Bar.38 Using the same method. select One Segment. 42 Place dimensions as shown. remove the horizontal segment that intersects the vertical segment removed in the previous step. TIP You may need to adjust your zoom settings to view the dimensions. 750 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . and lock them.

rfa. click OK to leave the curtain grids constrained. 49 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. Watch the Status Bar to be sure you are highlighting the panel. 52 On the Type Selector. 48 When the grids are placed (line style have changed to solid). Next.43 Delete the dimensions. 45 Select the horizontal grid line that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 50 In the left pane of the Open dialog. you replace the 2 larger 1800 mm panels with curtain system doors. click Training Files. Creating an Entrance | 751 . Use the following image as a guide. and open Metric\Families\Doors\M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl. To get the horizontal grid to display between the vertical grids. TIP The middle grid lines are centered between the long vertical grid above them. click M_Curtain Wall-Store Front-Dbl: Store Front Double Door. You now have two 1800 mm wide panels between smaller rectangular panels. 46 Click Add or Remove Segments on the Options Bar. Do not click between the 1800 mm panels. 44 When the warning about locked dimensions being deleted displays. You will have to press TAB to highlight it. The panel changes to a double door. 47 Click the horizontal grid line between the smaller panels. click Modify. The line style changes from dashed to solid to indicate a grid segment has been added. 54 On the Design Bar. click once to the right of the long grid and then click once to the left of it. click in any white space to exit the editor. 53 Use the same method to replace the other panel with a double door. You are going to add more segments to an existing curtain grid. 51 Select the left 1800 mm panel.

59 Select one of the panels below the FIFTH FLOOR level line. 752 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . double-click GROUND FLOOR to see the plan view door swings of the curtain wall doors. and the solid panels display in white. They are part of the curtain panel category. you change panels in front of ceilings from glazed to solid. under Floor Plans. 60 On the Type Selector. Thickness specifies the depth of the panel. This changes the graphics style of the view. and click Wireframe. 62 In the Element Properties dialog. The glazed panel is changed to a solid panel. click . click Edit/New to open the Type Properties of the panel. double-click Entrance Elevation. click . The glazed panels display in blue. you replace some of the transparent panels with solid ones. under Elevations. and Material specifies the shading and patterning. not as curtain panels. click System Panel : Solid.These panels schedule as doors. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. Changing panels 58 Zoom in to the FIFTH FLOOR level. The Offset property specifies the distance from the centerline of the curtain wall. Now. 55 In the Project Browser. on the new curtain system you added. 63 Click OK twice. 61 With the panel still selected. Next. 65 On the View Control Bar. 56 In the Project Browser. 64 Replace the two adjacent glazed panels with solid panels. 57 On the View Control Bar.

67 Change the remaining glazed panels in front of ceilings to solid panels. 3 Place a mullion on the grid segment at the ground floor immediately to the right of the right set of doors. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.rvt. 5 Place a mullion on the horizontal grid that is 1200 mm above the ground floor. 68 On the File menu. you place mullions on curtain panel grids. select Entire Grid Line. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. This completes the exercise for creating an entrance. click Save As. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System | 753 . 2 On the Options Bar. Adding Mullions to the Curtain System In this exercise. click Mullion.66 Change the graphics style back to Wireframe. Name the file m_Curtain_Walls-in_progress. select Grid Line Segment. 4 On the Options Bar.

click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. select All Empty Segments. 12 Click the lower mullion join control. The two mullions below the doors are not necessary. however. so you remove them next. 11 Select the vertical mullion above and between the set of double doors. because their width reduces the size of the doors. 7 Place the cursor on any empty grid segment on the curtain system and click. Mullions can change their joins to other mullions. 9 Delete the mullions below them. Now all empty grid segments have mullions on them. 754 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . Two mullion join controls display. Removing mullions 8 Zoom in to the set of doors. You are going to change some mullion joins. Changing mullion joins 10 On the View Control Bar. there are a few that you do not want.6 On the Options Bar.

you learned how to add mullions and change their joins. The top of the vertical mullion now meets the bottom of the horizontal mullion above. TIP After selecting the vertical mullion. you add a curtain system using the wall command. This also completes the lesson on creating a flat curtain system. Adding a Curved Curtain System In this exercise. You also learned how to modify grids and change panels. 13 Click the top mullion control. Curved Curtain System | 755 . The curtain wall is sketched as an arc. You learned how to create a basic curtain wall system and how to subdivide it with grids. Finally. click Modify. You also create a custom curtain panel for the system. 16 Save the file.The bottom of the mullion meets the top of the horizontal mullion. double-click Southeast Isometric. 15 In the Project Browser. Curved Curtain System In this lesson. you create a curved curtain system near the entrance of the model that was just completed. and click Join Conditions ➤ Break at Join to break the mullion at both joins. 14 On the Design Bar. you can also right-click. you add both predefined and custom mullions to the system. This completes the exercise for adding mullions. Finally.

756 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 7 On the Options Bar. (Arc passing through three points). under Floor Plans. select Curtain Wall : Curtain Wall 1. for Top Constraint. 10 Finish the wall by clicking at the top of the arc.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 2 Zoom in to the circular space above the entrance that was just completed. 5 Click . 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 4 In the Type Selector. 9 Place the second point at the lower right side. click 8 Start the wall by clicking at the left edge of the circle at the centerline of the intersecting wall. enter 1200. specify Up to level: FIFTH FLOOR. For Top Offset. 1 In the Project Browser. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 6 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Click OK. click Wall.

Adding a Curved Curtain System | 757 . 13 Continue to place more grids by using the snap points on the arc. under Elevations. click Modify. double-click East.The curtain wall displays as one flat panel between the first and second points placed. You are going to use one of these snaps points. The curtain grid command snaps only to the curved arc. click Curtain Grid. 16 On the Design Bar. and then sixteenths. Divide the halves into quarters. 14 In the Project Browser. you place grids on the system. 15 Zoom in to the cylinder. 12 Snap the cursor to the midpoint of the curved arc and click. Next. Do not add a grid on the GROUND FLOOR level. Watch the Status Bar to ensure you are at the midpoint. Next. eighths. 11 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and snap the cursor to each level line and click to add horizontal curtain grids. you change some panels in the system.

under Elevations. Next you create a custom panel and add it to the system. Remember to click elements from the selection except Curtain Panels. click Training Files. enter 100. 3 In the Project Browser.Using walls as panels 17 Using a selection box. 1 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 18 In the Type Selector. double-click Exterior. 4 On the Design Bar. and on the Options Bar. click Lines. 758 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . 2 In the left pane of the New dialog. select Basic Wall: Generic .300mm. 7 Start the sketch at the upper left reference line intersection and finish at the lower right reference line intersection. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel In this exercise. you create a custom curtain panel and place it into the curved curtain system. and open Metric\Templates\Metric Curtain Wall Panel.rft. 5 On the Design Bar. to filter out all other 19 Save the file. for Depth. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 On the Options Bar. select the bottom layer of panels. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. This completes the first exercise for creating a curved system. click .

Pattern. select Curtain Panel . 14 On the Design Bar. 18 Load the Curtain Panel . and click 13 Sketch 2 lines that crisscross the extrusion.Pattern. 21 In the Type Selector. and click OK. select Glass.8 On the Design Bar. Adding a Custom Curtain Panel | 759 . 16 Click File menu ➤ Close. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. and click . . All the panels change to the custom panel you created. 17 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family.rfa family. under Floor Plans. and return to the project file. clear Chain. 12 On the Options Bar. right-click. All fourth floor panels are selected. click Model Lines. 19 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. 11 On the Design Bar. 20 Press TAB until a panel in the arc is highlighted. 9 Select the extrusion. for Identity Data ➤ Subcategory.rfa. and save the family as Curtain Panel . 10 In the Element Properties dialog. double-click FOURTH FLOOR. click Modify. 15 Click File menu ➤ Save As.Pattern.

27 Highlight a panel in the arc. 760 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . The finished arc wall should look like the following image. All the panels change to the solid panel. click (Default 3D View). Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel In this exercise. All fifth floor panels are selected. double-click FIFTH FLOOR. select System Panel . and click Select Panels ➤ Along Horizontal Grid. 25 Hold SHIFT and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. This completes the exercise for adding a custom curtain panel. you add both custom and predefined mullions to the curved curtain panel.22 Select the curved arc curtain wall. The structure of the curved curtain system now matches that of the main part of the building. and then click (Dynamically Modify View).Solid. 29 Save the file. 28 In the Type Selector. and click Flip Orientation. 26 In the Project Browser. 24 On the View toolbar. right-click. under Floor Plans. 23 Right-click.

and open Metric\Templates\Metric Profile. and enter 50 mm for the radius. for Profile Usage. 2 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. click Training Files. double-click East. you use the Family Editor to create a custom mullion. 7 In the Family Category and Parameters dialog. 5 In the left pane of the New dialog. . 8 On the Design Bar. click Mullion. For vertical mullions. If Polygon does not display on the Options Bar. click Lines. except at the GROUND FLOOR level. Select Radius. select Mullion. 3 Select each horizontal grid line on the curved curtain panel. Creating a custom mullion in the Family Editor 4 Click File menu ➤ New ➤ Family. 9 On the Options Bar: ■ Click (Polygon). Notice that both the starting and ending points are in the same location. enter 8. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 761 . Click again to specify the ending point. and click OK. under Elevations. and select it. 10 Place the cursor at the intersection of the reference planes and click to enter the octagon starting point. 1 In the Project Browser. click ■ ■ For Sides.rft. 6 Click Settings menu ➤ Family Category and Parameters.

and click OK. click Visibility. 18 Place the detail component so that it snaps to the mullion profile as shown. 12 Select the lines in the octagon.detail.11 On the Design Bar. click Modify. After the new profile is loaded. 19 On the Design Bar. 17 On the Design Bar. and return to the project file. 762 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . select Circular Mullion for Family. 14 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. and click Visibility.rfa. 20 Select the detail component. 30 Click . 25 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 21 In the Family element visibility settings dialog. 31 In the Element Properties dialog. This controls the detail level at which the mullion profile displays. 24 Click File menu ➤ Close. 15 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load Family. click Mullion. clear Coarse and Medium. double-click Southeast Isometric. 26 Load the Cylinder Mullion. it can be added as a mullion type. and spin the model so that you can see the curved curtain system. 22 Click File menu ➤ Save As. 27 In the Project Browser. and open Metric\Families\Detail Components\m_Cylinder Mullion . 13 On the Options Bar. click Training Files. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa family.rfa. 28 Click . under 3D Views. and click OK. click Detail Component. The detail component becomes the true representation in plan view. clear Fine. click Modify. 29 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 23 Save the family as Cylinder Mullion.

and click Select Mullions ➤ On Gridline. 40 In the Project Browser. You have placed more mullions than you want. 43 Save the file. and click OK. select Cylinder Mullion : Cylinder Mullion. 36 Click OK twice. 38 Click on any grid line in the entry cylinder. under Floor Plans. and then apply those custom elements to the system. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 34 Enter Cylinder Mullion for Name. In this lesson. so you remove the unwanted ones. This completes the exercise for adding mullions.32 Click Edit/New. for Profile. Adding Mullions to the Curved Curtain Panel | 763 . 37 On the Options Bar. you learned to create a curved curtain system. right-click. make custom curtain panels and mullions. click Duplicate. as well as the lesson on creating a curved curtain system. click Modify. 42 Press DELETE. 33 In the Type Properties dialog. 39 On the Design Bar. 35 Under Construction. select All Empty Segments. 41 Highlight a mullion in the arc.

Additional Curtain Systems In this lesson. All the inside faces highlight. 6 Select the inside faces of the base walls. 7 On the Design Bar. and you can click to select them all. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Sloped Glazings Sloped glazings are useful when you are creating skylights and other glazed roofing systems. 2 Zoom in to the skylight at the center of the building between Grids 2 and 3 and D and E. double-click TOP OF ROOF. place the cursor on the inside face of one of the walls. and press TAB. 3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Roof Properties. select Defines slope. Click OK. enter 600. click Pick Walls. 8 In the Element Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Family. 764 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . you create additional types of curtain systems: a sloped glazing system. and a ruled curtain system. 1 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. select System Family: Sloped Glazing. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous lesson. 4 On the Design Bar. TIP To chain select all the walls. 9 On the Design Bar. a storefront system. For Constraints ➤ Base Offset From Level. click Finish Roof. 5 On the Options Bar.

Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 12 Zoom in to the skylight. Storefront System In this exercise. This completes the exercise for creating a sloped glazing system. double-click Southeast Isometric. select Entire Grid Line. 1 In the Project Browser. under 3D Views.10 In the Project Browser. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. Storefront System | 765 . 16 On the Design Bar. 18 Save the file. 2 Zoom in to the wall at the right of the model. 14 On the Options Bar. double-click GROUND FLOOR. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Shading with Edges. 13 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Mullion. you embed curtain walls into other walls to create a storefront system. 15 Select the grid lines that define the edges of each panel in the sloped glazing. click Modify. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line.

3 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. You can place the curtain wall right inside this wall. 7 Sketch a curtain wall along the wall centerline to the approximate length shown. select Unconnected for Height. 6 Start the wall 1200 mm from one end of the wall on the wall centerline. and enter 2400. click Wall. 766 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .You are going to place a storefront system in this wall.

The storefront wall already has a curtain grid layout. the Layout (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to Maximum Spacing. The Layout (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to Fixed Distance. 10 In the Project Browser. This indicates that the curtain grids are placed at even intervals along the length of the curtain wall at a distance up to 1524 mm. even if the wall height changes. click OK to close the Type Properties dialog and return to the Element Properties dialog that displays the instance parameters. The type parameters under the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern headings create the predefined layout. enter 10200 mm. 9 On the Design Bar. which is specified in the type. This specifies an exact length for the wall.The curtain wall cuts the original wall. 12 Select the storefront wall. 11 Zoom in to the new storefront wall. Storefront System | 767 . This means that the panel heights will be exactly 2400 mm. To see how the grid layout is defined. For this wall. you can look at the properties of the storefront wall. and the Spacing (Horizontal Grid Pattern) is set to 2400 mm. click Edit/New. and press ENTER. double-click Southeast Isometric. click Modify. 8 Click the temporary dimension. 14 After you have looked at the Vertical Grid Pattern and Horizontal Grid Pattern parameters. and click . and the Spacing (Vertical Grid Pattern) is set to 1524 mm. under 3D Views. 13 In the Element Properties dialog.

The Horizontal Grid Pattern counterparts are the same but for the perpendicular direction. the Number is the number of vertical curtain grids you want on the curtain instance. The Offset is the distance the spacing starts from the justification point. you create a curtain wall based on 2 lines that have been sketched at different elevations on the model. double-click Southeast Isometric. Justification. This completes the exercise on creating a storefront. you are rotating the grid lines to an angle on the face of the panel. The Justification specifies the vertical spacing at the beginning. By setting the Angle value. 17 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. select All Empty Segments. 2 Orient the view to the storefront wall you added in the last exercise. Angle. Curtain System by Lines In this exercise. Under the Vertical Grid Pattern heading. click Mullion. Under Vertical Grid Pattern. you learned how to embed a curtain wall and set up a grid layout. You see these same parameters for Horizontal Grid Pattern. enter 15. or end. and Offset. 15 To see how these parameters can affect the wall. 18 On the Options Bar. This type of curtain system is known as a ruled curtain system.The Instance Parameters list includes additional parameters that define the curtain grid layout. enter 45 and for Horizontal Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. under 3D Views. Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 20 Save the file. 1 In the Project Browser. In this exercise. you find Number. 19 Select a curtain grid. 16 Click OK. 768 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . center. For more information about these curtain wall parameters. for Vertical Grid Pattern ➤ Angle. see the Revit Architecture help.

and highlight the model line. 5 Place the cursor at the top edge of the SECOND FLOOR slab. 7 Place the cursor at the top edge of the TOP OF ROOF level. click Curtain System ➤ Curtain System by Lines. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Hidden Line. Watch the Status Bar and Tooltips to be sure you are highlighting the model line. making sure Lines : Model Lines : Line is highlighted. 6 Click the highlighted line. Press TAB to select the line if it does not immediately highlight. Curtain System by Lines | 769 . 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar.3 On the View Control Bar.

9 On the Design Bar. quarters. and then eighths. 770 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems . but now that you have created a ruled curtain system. 11 Click OK. click Curtain Grid. click Modify.8 Select the highlighted line. Next. A panel between the 2 lines is created. Notice there are very few properties for the ruled curtain system. place horizontal grids that divide the panel into halves. and click . A ruled curtain system does not have all the properties of a curtain wall. you can vary the steps to style the system the way you want. 12 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. 13 Using the midpoint curtain grid snaps. 10 Select the panel. NOTE The next few steps are intended as a guide to finish the system. you subdivide the ruled curtain system using curtain grids.

Finally. you replace some of the glazed panels in front of the ceilings with solid panels. In this lesson you learned to create a sloped glazing system. right-click. 16 In the Type Selector. select System Panel : Solid. quarters. 17 Change the THIRD FLOOR level panels to solid. 18 Save the file. 14 Place vertical grids that snap to the midpoints on the panel and divide the panel into halves.This is similar to placing the grids on the curved curtain system. Curtain System by Lines | 771 . and then eighths. and click Select Panels ➤ Along Grid 2. This completes the exercise for creating a ruled curtain system. and define a ruled curtain system. embed a curtain system inside another wall. and the lesson on creating additional curtain systems. 15 Highlight a top level glazed panel.

772 | Chapter 18 Curtain Systems .

you learn how to add fascia. and soffits to the roofs that you create. gutters. In addition.Roofs 19 In this tutorial. 773 . you learn how to create different types of roofs in Revit Architecture 2008.

select Name. and click OK. You do not need to create the work plane. verify that Section: Section1 is selected. and mansard roofs. including hip. 774 | Chapter 19 Roofs . expand Floor Plans. click Training Files.rvt. click Roof ➤ Roof by Extrusion. and then click Open View to select a section view parallel to the work plane in which to sketch the roof. You create the roof by sketching the top roof profile and extruding it over the length of the breezeway. 6 In the Roof Reference Level and Offset dialog. you need to select a work plane to use as a sketching guide. a work plane named Breezeway exists for the purpose of this exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. and then select Reference Plane : Breezeway.Creating Roofs In this lesson. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 5 In the Go To View dialog. Before you can sketch the roof profile. verify Level 3 is selected for Level. gable. Creating an Extruded Roof In this exercise. you create an extruded roof over a breezeway between a house and a garage. and open Metric\m_Roofs. In this lesson. expand Views (all). you create roofs from footprints and by extrusion. and double-click Level 1. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. 3 In the Work Plane dialog. you learn to create several different types of roofs. In the left pane of the Open dialog. shed. 4 Click OK.

10 Sketch a vertical reference plane centered between the two vertical walls. This helps ensure that the plane is measured from the face of the wall rather than from the wall centerline. click Ref Plane. click the blue square on the witness line. To change where the temporary dimension is measured from (face. you can place it in the general location and then zoom in and use temporary dimensions. and so on). centerline.The section view is automatically cropped around the area where you want to sketch the roof. 8 Sketch the first reference plane 450 mm to the left of the left exterior breezeway wall face. TIP Instead of trying to place the reference plane in its exact location initially. Before you can sketch the profile of the roof. 9 Sketch a similar reference plane 450 mm to the right of the right exterior breezeway wall face. you need to define four reference planes to help determine key points on the profile sketch. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Creating an Extruded Roof | 775 .

Begin the sketch at the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the horizontal plane. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Sketch to complete the roof.11 Sketch a horizontal reference plane 450 mm below Level 2. Next. click Lines. 14 Sketch two sloped lines to create the roof profile. 13 On the Options Bar. sketch the roof profile. 776 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Use automatic snaps to link the chain to the reference plane intersections. select Chain.

press TAB.The roof is automatically extruded from the Breezeway work plane in one direction. use the Join Roofs command to adjust the length of the roof and join the roof edges to the exterior walls. and then select the exterior face of the wall. Use the Join Roof command again to join the opposite end of the breezeway roof to the exterior wall of the house that joins the breezeway. 16 On the View toolbar. click . 17 On the Tools toolbar. 20 Select the breezeway roof edge. click to display the model. Notice that the breezeway roof penetrates the house walls inappropriately. Creating an Extruded Roof | 777 . and then select the exterior wall face of the garage to join the roof to the garage wall. Next. 19 On the Tools toolbar. click . 18 Select the edge of the roof. The roof should resemble the following illustration.

25 Select the roof to join the wall tops to the roof. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 21 In the Project Browser. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. You use roof slope lines to define the roof gable ends. click to view the completed breezeway roof in the model. 24 On the Options Bar. press CTRL. “Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint” on page 778. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. click Attach for Top/Base. and double-click Section 1. 23 Select one of the breezeway walls. expand Sections (Type 1). expand Views (all). you create a gable roof over a garage from a footprint. 26 On the View toolbar. click Modify. and select the second wall. 778 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. so you next attach the breezeway walls to the breezeway roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint.The breezeway walls still penetrate the roof.

2 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Modify. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the right of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you set the roof slope as a property of the footprint slope lines. 6 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the left vertical wall of the garage to define the first roof slope line. The Element Properties dialog is displayed.To complete the gable roof with the correct pitch. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. click . select both slope definition lines. By default. Next. Creating a Gable Roof from a Footprint | 779 . edit the properties of the two vertical slope definition lines to change the roof pitch. 3 On the Options Bar. 5 Select the parallel wall on the right to define the second roof slope line.rvt. Verify that a dashed green line displays to the left of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the wall. 9 Press CTRL. clear Defines slope. and on the Options Bar. 1 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 7 Select the two horizontal walls to create a closed loop and complete the roof footprint. m_Roofs. verify that Defines slope is selected. the roof slope has a 750 mm rise over a 1000 mm run. and enter 600 for Overhang.

click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. click Pick Walls. The roof requires an opening to accommodate a chimney. 780 | Chapter 19 Roofs . and click OK. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. click Finish Roof. You begin by sketching the perimeter of the roof in plan view to create the roof footprint. and double-click Level 3. click Yes to attach the highlighted exterior garage walls to the roof. 1 In the Project Browser. under Dimensions. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. expand Floor Plans. After you define the roof slope lines and complete the footprint. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint In this exercise. 3 On the Options Bar.10 In the Element Properties dialog. you add a main gable roof to a house from a footprint. NOTE You add the slope defining lines in a later step. clear Defines slope. expand Views (all). 12 When you see the informational dialog. 13 On the View toolbar. enter 500 mm for Rise/1000 to change the roof slope.rvt. m_Roofs. When you complete the roof. and enter 600 for Overhang. the opening that you sketched becomes a void in the roof. you sketch a closed rectangular opening around the chimney. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 11 On the Design Bar. click to view the gable roof and attached walls in the model. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. “Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint” on page 780.

sketch a rectangle from the upper left corner of the exterior chimney face to the lower right corner of the exterior chimney face. and then verify that a dashed green line displays to the exterior side of the walls. click Modify. Creating a Roof with a Vertical Penetration from a Footprint | 781 . Next. sketch the chimney opening. 9 Using automatic snaps. 12 Select the uppermost horizontal line. press TAB.5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls. 14 Select one of the shorter line segments shown in the following illustration. click Lines. 11 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 10 On the View menu. click . 13 On the Options Bar. 6 Click to select all the walls. 8 On the Options Bar. select Defines Slope. click Zoom ➤ Zoom To Fit to view the entire floor plan. 7 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. add new slope lines to the roof. Next.

3 On the Options Bar. 17 When you see the informational dialog. click Finish Roof. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. The sketched lines cannot overlap or intersect each other. 4 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. “Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint” on page 782. m_Roofs. click Pick Walls. Next. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Verify that a dashed green line displays on the exterior side of the wall from the edge of the roof as you select the walls. 19 Proceed to the next exercise. select Defines Slope. expand Views (all). 5 Select the exterior edges of the three walls that create the rear addition to the house. click to view the new roof in the model.15 On the Options bar. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. you create a hip roof over the rear of a house from a footprint. 782 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 18 On the View toolbar. click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. Roof sketches must create a closed loop before you can create the roof.rvt. and enter 600 for Overhang. and double-click Level 2. close the roof sketch.

click Lines. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. 16 On the View toolbar. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. 11 To trim the first line segment. and click OK. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. The Element Properties dialog is displayed. 9 On the Tools toolbar. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. click to display the model. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. Creating a Hip Roof from a Footprint | 783 . and click . enter 600 for Base Offset From Level. click Roof Properties. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. using the following illustration for guidance. raise the roof 600 mm above the current level. click . select the left vertical slope definition line. 7 On the Options Bar. 14 Under Constraints.6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. Next. clear Defines Slope. and then specify a point near the midpoint of the line that you sketched along the wall of the main building. 10 On the Options Bar. click Finish Roof. 12 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. 8 Select the exterior edge of the uppermost horizontal wall of the main building. Next.

click Attach for Top/Base on the Options Bar. click Modify. 784 | Chapter 19 Roofs . Press and hold CTRL to select and join the two remaining walls at the same time. and then select the edge of the main roof to join the roofs. Notice that the walls do not join to the roof. 19 Select one of the walls under the hip roof. 18 On the Design Bar. click . 22 Using the same method that you used previously. 23 On the Tools toolbar. and then verify that Attach Wall: Top is selected. 21 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the remaining walls that support the hip roof. 20 Select the roof to join the wall top to the roof. use the Join Roof command to fix the roof.17 Click to use the Dynamic View tool to view the back of the house. Notice that the new hip roof does not properly join to the back of the house. Use the Attach Top/Base command to join the walls to the roof. join the two remaining walls to the roof. Next. 24 Select the edge of the hip roof.

clear Defines Slope. 3 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.The properly joined roof should resemble the following illustration. and double-click Level 2. Verify that a green dashed line displays around the exterior side of the walls before clicking to select the walls. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint In this exercise. 25 Proceed to the next exercise. 1 In the Project Browser. click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint.rvt. “Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint” on page 785. click Pick Walls. and then click to select all three of the entry way walls. expand Views (all). press TAB. and enter 300 for Overhang. you create a shed roof over the entrance to a house from a footprint. 6 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. 5 Place the cursor over one of the exterior walls that defines the entry way. m_Roofs. enter 0 for Overhang. Creating a Shed Roof from a Footprint | 785 . 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.

13 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 Under Constraints. 9 On the Options Bar. 786 | Chapter 19 Roofs .7 Select the exterior face of the main wall to close the sketch. Next. 8 On the Tools toolbar. Next. trim the extra line segments that result from the intersection of the sketch lines. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click . 14 Enter 500 mm for the rise value to change the roof slope. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. You must trim these lines to create a valid sketch. and click OK. select the left vertical roof line. and then select a point near the midpoint of the upper horizontal line you sketched earlier. 15 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. select Defines slope. Notice the rise value is displayed next to the slope marker. to use the Dynamic View tool to rotate the model. and press ENTER. Make sure you select the segment on the side that you want to keep. you add a slope-defining line. verify that the Trim/Extend to Corner option is selected. 19 Click 20 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. 11 Repeat the trim procedure on the adjacent corner to create a closed loop without intersections. enter -600 for Base Offset From Level. and select the lower horizontal line at the front of the roof. 18 Click Yes to attach the walls to the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. click Roof Properties. 10 To trim the first line segment.

14 On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). and zoom in around the shed roof footprint. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. you need to add two reference planes.rvt. Before you can add slope arrows. verify is selected. click Modify. expand 3D Views. 5 On the View menu. Verify that the reference planes are located inside the shed roof sketch. 12 On the Options Bar. 3 On the Options Bar. 2 Select the shed roof over the entrance of the house. and enter 600 for Offset. change the longest slope line segment (the middle segment) so that it no longer defines slope. you add slope arrows to the shed roof. 8 Select the two vertical sketch lines. 9 On the Tools menu. 7 On the Options Bar. 1 In the Project Browser. click Edit to activate the roof footprint sketch. click .21 Proceed to the next exercise. clear Defines Slope. 4 In the Project Browser. To help locate the position of each split. 13 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. click Slope Arrow. add two new slope arrows. “Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof” on page 787. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. and double-click Level 2. 10 Split the slope defining line where the reference planes intersect as shown in the following illustration. you need to split the slope defining line into three segments. Next. click Split Walls and Lines. Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof | 787 . Adding Slope Arrows to a Shed Roof In this exercise. m_Roofs. and select the middle segment of the slope defining line. and double-click 3D. Next. expand Views (all). 6 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. 11 On the Design Bar.

click Edit. . When you sketch a hip roof. 3 On the Options Bar. you convert the gable roof over the garage to a hip roof and use the Align Eaves tool to adjust the eave heights. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select both slope arrows. 5 On the Options Bar. 4 Select the two gable end lines (the lines without slope definition). enter 500 for Rise/1000.15 to add the second slope arrow. The head should snap to the midpoint of the line as in the previous steps. 23 Proceed to the next exercise. use the Attach Top/Base command to join the wall to the roof. and double-click Garage Roof.15 Sketch a slope arrow from the reference plane to the midpoint of the lower horizontal roof line: ■ Select the intersection of the left vertical reference plane and the roof line to specify the location of the slope arrow tail. Begin the tail at the right reference plane. 1 In the Project Browser. and click 19 Under Constraints. Move the cursor along the roof line until the midpoint displays.rvt. and then click OK. select Slope for Specify. “Aligning Roof Eaves” on page 788. click Modify. 17 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. expand Views (all). 22 Click on the View toolbar to display the model. and move the cursor to place the arrow. ■ 16 Repeat steps 13 . 18 Press CTRL. the adjacent eave heights must align. 2 Select the gable roof over the garage. and then select it to specify the location of the slope arrow head. 788 | Chapter 19 Roofs . 20 Under Dimensions. m_Roofs. Aligning Roof Eaves In this exercise. 21 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. NOTE If the front wall is separated from the roof. click Finish Roof to complete the roof. you can use the Align Eaves tool to align them. When eave heights differ. select Defines Slope.

“Creating a Mansard Roof” on page 789. This dimension is the height of the eave measured from the sketch plane. 13 On the View toolbar. click .6 With the two gable end lines selected. The eave lines display with a dimension. on the Options Bar. select Adjust Overhang to align the eaves by adjusting the overhang to match the eave height of the first eave. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice how the overhang adjusts to match the eave height of the first eave. Next. and save the exercise file with a unique name. When aligning eaves. 16 Proceed to the next exercise. under Dimensions. select a method to align the eaves. 14 If you want to save your changes. and click OK. Creating a Mansard Roof In this exercise. click Align Eaves. Creating a Mansard Roof | 789 . 9 Select the left vertical eave to use to align the eaves. 10 On the Options Bar. you must select one eave to use to align both eaves. 15 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. you create a mansard roof by cutting off a hip roof at a specific level and adding another roof on top of it. click Finish Roof. click Save As. 8 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. click to display the model. on the File menu. 11 Select both the horizontal eave lines. 12 On the Design Bar. enter 800 mm for Rise/1000.

under Constraints. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. select Level 3 for Cutoff Level. and open Metric\m_Mansard_Roof. click . on the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 5 Click OK to cut the top of the roof off at level 3. and double-click North. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. click Modify. Notice the model has four defined levels: In the next steps. expand Elevations. click to display the model.rvt. 1 In the Project Browser. you constrain the current roof so it does not rise above Level 3. 790 | Chapter 19 Roofs . click Training Files. 6 On the View toolbar. 3 Select the roof and.

press TAB. 7 In the Project Browser. 8 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 18 If you want to save your changes. gutters. click Finish Roof. 11 Select the four edges of the roof cutoff. Creating Fascia. and select the remaining three lines. and then select Defines slope. Gutters. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click . 9 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.Next. gutters. and soffits. 15 In the Element Properties dialog. click . enter 750 mm for Rise/1000. create a new roof that starts at level 3 and completes the mansard roof. 12 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. and soffits in Revit Architecture. and Soffits In this lesson. and Soffits | 791 . under Dimensions. 14 On the Options Bar. click to display the model with the complete mansard roof. 17 On the View toolbar. you learn how to create roof fascia. click Save As. and double-click Level 3. 19 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. and click OK. Creating Fascia. expand Views (all). click Roof ➤ Roof by Footprint. Gutters. 13 Select one of the roof cutoff lines. 10 On the Options Bar. click Modify. you can easily create its fascia. on the File menu. click Lines. 16 On the Sketch tab of the Design Bar. After you create a roof.

rfa and M_Gutter-Cove. select M_Fascia-Built-Up. and click Open. click Training Files. select M_Fascia-Built-Up: 38 x 184mm x 38 x 286 for Profile. 11 Select the top edge of the roof to place the fascia. 6 In the Element Properties dialog. 5 On the Options Bar. and open Metric\Families\Profiles\Roofs. enter Built-up Fascia. click Edit/New to access the type properties of the fascia. 4 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.Creating Roof Fascia In this exercise. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Fascia. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rfa. 8 In the Name dialog. 3 Press CTRL.rvt. you learn to use the Host Sweep command to create fascia on the roof of a condominium. 1 Click File menu ➤ Load From Library ➤ Load Family. and open Common\c_Condominium. and click OK twice. click . 10 Move the cursor to the top edge of the roof. 12 Select all of the roof top edges to place the fascia around the building. 792 | Chapter 19 Roofs . under Construction. and click OK. 9 In the Type Properties dialog. click Duplicate. 7 In the Type Properties dialog.

click Modify to exit the Fascia command. 4 In the Type Properties dialog. and click OK three times. you use the Host Sweep command to place a gutter at the bottom edge of the roof on a condominium building model. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise.13 On the Design Bar. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. 14 Proceed to the next exercise. 2 On the Options Bar. click Host Sweep ➤ Roof Gutter. click Edit/New. Creating Gutters | 793 . c_Condominium. 1 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. select M_Gutter-Cove: 125 x 125mm for Profile. 3 In the Properties dialog. click in the Value field for Material. “Creating Gutters” on page 793. 10 Click to place the gutter. . 9 Move the cursor to the bottom edge of the roof. 7 Under Materials and Finishes. select Metal-Aluminum for Name. 5 Enter Cove Shape Gutter for Name. and then click 8 In the Materials dialog. click . Creating Gutters In this exercise. under Construction.rvt. click Duplicate.

Creating Soffits In this exercise. 12 Proceed to the next exercise. click Pick Roofs.rvt.11 Continue to add gutters to the other roof edges of the building model. 1 In the Project Browser. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You add the soffit underneath the roof of the condominium building model that you used in the previous exercise. and double-click Roof. “Creating Soffits” on page 794. c_Condominium. 2 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 794 | Chapter 19 Roofs . expand Views. 3 On the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans. you learn how to place a roof soffit. click Roof ➤ Roof Soffit. 4 Select the roof.

click Save As.5 On the Design Bar. on the File menu. Notice that the geometry of the roof and the soffit overlap. Creating Soffits | 795 . 8 Select the roof. and double-click 3D. 7 On the Tools menu. and save the exercise file with a unique name. click Join Geometry. expand 3D Views. expand Views (all). and then select the soffit to join them. 10 Close the exercise file without saving your changes. 6 In the Project Browser. 9 If you want to save your changes. click Finish Sketch.

796 | Chapter 19 Roofs .

You then create area plans for each scheme as needed. you learn how to use area analysis tools to define and label spatial relationships. The first step in area analysis is the definition of area schemes. Two schemes are provided by default: Gross Building and Rentable.Area Analysis 20 In this tutorial. You can edit the rentable scheme and create additional schemes. you create area schedules and color fill plans based on the area schemes and plans. Finally. Each area scheme can have multiple area plans. 797 .

click Training Files. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. ■ ■ Gross Building: Total constructed area of a building. your values will be different. These schemes define spatial relationships. select mm. click the Area Schemes tab. select Square meters. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Units. For Unit Suffix. There are two schemes currently defined: Gross Building and Rentable. expand Views (all). 4 In the Project Units dialog. select 2 decimal places. In the final exercise. select m2 Click OK. 7 In the Room and Area Settings dialog.Using Area Analysis Tools In this lesson. click OK. Set units of measurement to metric 1 On the Settings menu. 2 In the Project Units dialog. For Unit Suffix. For Rounding. You add and modify the area boundaries and add areas. NOTE Images in this exercise reflect Imperial values. Rentable: Area measurements based on the standard method for measuring floor area in office buildings. Creating Area Schemes and Plans In this exercise. click Settings.rvt. click Format and specify the following: ■ ■ ■ For Units. and click Room and Area. 798 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . and verify that Level 1 is the active view. Click OK. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. and open Common\c_Area. select Millimeters. If you are using metric units. TIP If the Room and Area tab is not visible. expand Floor Plans. 6 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. you use the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. right-click in the Design Bar. 3 Under Area. under Length. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create a color fill plan and area schedule based on the area schemes and plans. click Project Units. View predefined area schemes 5 In the Project Browser.

If you select No. Create a gross building area plan 10 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 12 When the informational dialog displays. notice there is a new view type called Area Plans (Gross Building). You can specify the height where the room area is calculated. 13 In the Project Browser. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. 9 Click Cancel. 8 In the Room and Area Setting dialog. click the Room Calculations tab. 11 In the New Area Plan dialog. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. NOTE If you clear Do not duplicate existing views. click Yes to create the boundary lines automatically.Although you can create new schemes that are based on the Rentable scheme. ■ ■ Verify that the scale is 1/8'' = 1'-0''. When you select Yes in this dialog. ■ At system computed height: Generally defaults to or 1000 mm above the level. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. the system-computed height defaults to the level. you must manually add these boundary lines. forming a closed loop. Click OK. it is not necessary in this exercise. Expand Area Plans (Gross Building). under Views (all). NOTE If the room area includes a room separation line. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 799 . You can specify the boundary location to be used for room area calculations. click Area Plan. as well as selecting whether to have room volumes calculated automatically. you can create a copy of the area plan with subsequent changes to the original area plan duplicated in the copied plan. or 0. area boundary lines are automatically placed on the exterior walls of the building model. ■ At specified height: You specify the height above the level that area is calculated. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Select Gross Building for Type.

Click OK. you create a new area plan for rentable space. 17 In the New Area Plan dialog. 800 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . Next. The area reference lines are for design purposes only and do not print. Create a rentable area scheme and plan 16 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 18 Click Yes to automatically define the area boundary lines.14 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. do the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Rentable for Type. NOTE The Area command is used to create and tag new areas. Verify that Do not duplicate existing views is selected. To modify the area. rather than the area tag. NOTE An area tag measures area based on the area plan boundary lines. common areas. Select Level 1 for Area Plan views. The Area Tag command is used to tag existing areas. An area is represented by two crossed reference lines. 15 Click in the middle of the room on the lower left corner of the building model to place the tag. you must select one of the reference lines. A room tag measures the area enclosed within the room-defining walls at the boundary location specified in Room and Area Settings. and store area. click Area Plan. click Area. You add and use area boundary lines to define the office areas.

When you add area boundary lines. Add area boundary lines 20 On the Design Bar. click inside the middle of the room to place the tag. you can either draw them or pick them. Notice that there is a new view type called Area Plans (Rentable). if the window glass is greater than 50% of the wall height. click Area.Notice that the area boundary lines are on the inner face of the exterior walls. When you pick the walls. Although the rule for these lines is to follow the inside face of the wall. you can select the option "Apply Area Rules" so that the area boundary lines adjust to the area type. If you do not select this option. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 801 . 22 Select all the interior walls by clicking them one at a time. click Area Boundary. 19 Zoom out until you can see the entire building model. and notice that the Level 1 area plan is the active view. verify that Pick Lines and Apply Area Rules are selected. 24 In the upper left corner of the building model. Expand Area Plans (Rentable). the area boundary lines do not update automatically. 21 On the Options Bar. NOTE The area lines follow some of the windows hosted by the exterior wall. the area boundary lines are placed on the face of the glass. 23 On the Design Bar.

and click to select the area. 30 Add the area to the room on the lower left corner of the building model. Select Office area for Area Type. 26 Select the area you added to the room in the upper left corner of the building model. 31 On the Design Bar. click . 29 On the Design Bar.25 On the Design Bar. 32 On the Options Bar. NOTE If you have difficulty selecting the area. click Modify and select the area. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 1 for Name. 28 In the Element Properties dialog. Click OK. click . click Modify. 802 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . click Area. 27 On the Options Bar. place the cursor over the Area Tag and press Tab until Area displays in the status bar.

Select Office area for Area Type. 36 Add the last two areas to the two spaces on the right side of the building model. 34 Using the techniques learned in previous steps. Click OK. Tenant 3 should be in the upper right. Select Building Common Area for Area Type. Creating Area Schemes and Plans | 803 . and Tenant 4 in the lower right. Name the areas Tenant 3 and Tenant 4. In the Element Properties dialog. and select Store Area for Area Type. add an area in the common space to the right of the double doors hosted by the west exterior wall. 35 Add an area to the building model core. and select Major Vertical Penetration for Area Type. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Tenant 2 for Name. enter Core for Name. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Enter Circulation for Name. Click OK.33 In the Element Properties dialog.

you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule.Notice that within the two store areas. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans In this exercise. you create a color fill area plan and an area schedule. In this exercise. click Save. name the project Area-in progress. 38 Navigate to your preferred directory. 2 Move the cursor under the left corner of the building model. you used the two predefined area schemes to create respective area plans to define gross area and a rentable area. NOTE This project is required in its current state if you intend to continue with the next exercise. You added and modified the area boundaries and applied area tags to define spaces.rvt. and click to place the legend. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise. and click Save. the area boundary lines have adjusted to the new area type. click Color Scheme Legend. Create a color scheme legend 1 On the Room and Area tab of the Design Bar. 804 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis . In the next exercise. 37 On the File menu.

3 When the dialog displays. click OK to make the required visibility setting changes. Create an area schedule 4 On the View tab of the Design Bar. select Area Type and click Add. 9 Click OK. Creating Area Schedules and Color Fill Area Plans | 805 . click the Fields tab. 7 Under Available fields. under Category. 6 In the Schedules Properties dialog. select Areas (Rentable). click Schedule/Quantities. 5 In the New Schedule dialog. and click OK. The fields you selected in the Schedule Properties dialog are displayed as column headings within the schedule. 8 Add the fields Area and Name.

806 | Chapter 20 Area Analysis .

Massing elements and building elements are not linked automatically. floors. or both. building elements. you then need to update the building face. After you create the basic geometric shape of the building model. 807 . you create a new building model using the various massing tools to add and cut mass.Massing 21 You can use massing tools during the initial design process to convey a potential design concept without the level of detail usually found in a project. you can pick massing faces and make building model elements such as walls. In this tutorial. and roofs. you convert to the basic shell elements of the building model. you can specify the view to display massing elements. curtain systems. After you make building elements. You can create and modify the geometric shapes that aggregate to form the building model shell. At any time. You then modify the building model in both the massing view and the shell view to see how changes propagate throughout the project. If you modify a massing face.

and roof types so that when you convert the massing elements to shell elements in the final exercise. double-click Level 1. the building model uses those element types to define the walls. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Adding a mass element 1 In the Project Browser. floor. click Training Files. and open Metric\m_Massing_Start. under Views (all). You assign the default wall. 3 Click OK in the Show Mass mode informational dialog.Using Massing Tools In this lesson. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion. 4 Click OK in the Name dialog to accept the default name Mass 1. and cutting geometry. TIP If the Massing tab is not available on the Design Bar. and click Massing. under Floor Plans. roofs. 5 On the Design Bar. 808 | Chapter 21 Massing . The Design Bar title changes to Mass. click Create Mass. sweeps. you create the basic geometric shape of the building model using various massing tools. you create the basic geometric shape of a building model by adding solid and void extrusions. right-click anywhere over the Design Bar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. and floors. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model In this exercise.

on the Options Bar. click Extrusion Properties. 18 Place the cursor in the drawing area on an edge of the existing form so that the edge is highlighted. 19 Click the edges of the form to create sketch lines as shown. Create next extrusion form 14 In the Project Browser. under Materials and Finishes. click Finish Sketch. TIP You may want to dimension and constrain the lines to maintain the exact dimensions. and click 7 Sketch the shape as shown using the exact values. under Floor Plans. on the Options Bar. and click OK. 16 On the Sketch Design Bar. 8 On the Design Bar. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 809 . 15 On the Design Bar. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. click . click Lines. This means the sketch line is placed 1550 mm from the position you pick with the cursor. and click 17 On the Options Bar. and then click . 11 In the Element Properties dialog. click Lines. Watch the Status Bar in the lower-left corner of the screen to be sure you are highlighting the Form : Extrusion : Shape Handle. select Mass (Opaque) for Name. 10 In the Materials dialog. enter 25000 for Extrusion End. click the Value for Material. 13 On the View toolbar. enter 1550 mm for the Offset. click Solid Form ➤ Solid Extrusion.6 On the Sketch Design Bar. double-click Level 1. under Constraints. 12 On the Design Bar. and click OK. under Views (all).

20 On the Design Bar. and click OK.Be sure to click to the inside of the extrusion. select Pick a plane. under Views (all). click Solid Form ➤ Solid Blend. The second form is on top of the first form. under Constraints. TIP If necessary. double-click West. Continue creation of next massing form 26 In the Project Browser. 24 On the Design Bar. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 22 In the Materials dialog. under Materials and Finishes. highlight the larger form. select Mass (Transparent) for Name. and click OK. 21 In the Element Properties dialog. and then click . 29 In the drawing area. 28 In the Work Plane dialog. click the Value for Material. 27 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). press TAB to highlight the entire face. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. click Extrusion Properties. enter 25000 for Extrusion Start and 27500 for Extrusion End. 810 | Chapter 21 Massing . 30 Click to select the face. 25 In the Project Browser. click Finish Sketch. double-click {3D} to see the results.

you draw a sketch line that acts as a construction line to create an arc. click Lines. and click Arc passing through three points from the menu. and click on the Options Bar. Next. Adding Massing Elements to a Building Model | 811 . The triangle indicates that the cursor is at the midpoint. click . 37 Sketch the arc as shown with the top of the arc snapping to the top of the construction line. 36 On the Options Bar. TIP If you do not see this option.31 On the Sketch Design Bar. click . and click to select the line start point. click the arrow next to the drawing options. 35 Sketch a line 6000 mm up as shown. Sketch the blend base 32 Select the top of the larger extrusion as shown. 33 On the Options Bar. 34 Place the cursor at the midpoint of the sketch line as shown.

click 46 Sketch the horizontal line as shown. 47 On the Options Bar. 42 Move the cursor straight up and click at the top horizontal line of the smaller extrusion as shown.38 On the Design Bar. click Edit Top. under Elevations (Building Elevation). 45 On the Design Bar. 41 Click the cursor at the midpoint of the horizontal sketch line as shown. 812 | Chapter 21 Massing . 39 Select the arc and the horizontal line. 40 On the Edit toolbar. double-click East. click 48 Create an arc as shown. click Lines and. . . and delete the vertical construction line. Sketching the blend top 43 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). click . click Modify. 44 In the Project Browser. on the Options Bar.

52 On the View toolbar. you use the massing tools to cut geometry from the shapes you have created. NOTE This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the resulting building model. In the next exercise. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model In this exercise. 51 On the Design Bar. verify that Mass (Opaque) is selected for Material and that -92000 is specified for Second End. 53 Proceed to the next exercise.49 On the Design Bar. Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model | 813 . Using Massing Tools to Cut Geometry from the Building Model. click Finish Sketch. click . you created two extrusions and a blend that form the basic geometric shape of the building model. and click OK. In this exercise. 50 In the Element Properties dialog. click Blend Properties. you use a void extrusion to cut geometry from one of the massing shapes you added in the previous exercise.

814 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Finish Sketch. under Views (all). 14 Click OK. 12 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Design Bar. on the Options Bar. as shown. 2 In the drawing area. 6 Place another reference plane 15000 mm to the right of the first reference plane. on the View Control Bar. and then click Hidden Line. enter 12000 for Extrusion End. Sketch extrusion voids 8 On the Design Bar. click Lines and. 13 Under Constraints. 4 On the Options bar. When sketching the void extrusions in the steps that follow. 11 Sketch two additional void extrusions as shown. double-click Level 1. When sketching each extrusion. select the mass. under Floor Plans. These reference planes act primarily as sketching aids. and place the first reference plane 15000 mm to the right. 1 In the Project Browser. 7 Using the same technique. and sketch the first void extrusion as shown. click Void Form ➤ Void Extrusion. click NOTE If the file is currently in shaded mode. click Extrusion Properties. click and enter 15000 for Offset.rvt. you specify the intersection of the reference planes and the top and bottom edges of the massing element. and 0 for Extrusion Start.Dataset ■ Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. snap the corners to the intersections. Add reference planes 3 On the Mass tab of the Design bar. 5 Place the cursor near the left edge of the massing element so that the edge is highlighted. 9 On the Design Bar. click Ref Plane. 10 Enter SI for intersection snap. place three more reference planes 15000 mm apart from left to right. m_Massing_Start. click and select Chain.

Creating three new family types 1 On the Design Bar. you open a predefined mass family file and create new types from it. Creating New Mass Family Types In this exercise. Using Mass Family Files in a Project In this lesson. You place several instances of the mass families into the project. 12000 mm for Height. 18 On the File menu. click New. 3 In the Name dialog. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you use the Join Geometry command to join several instances of the mass elements. 19 Save the file as m_Massing_Complete. You then load that mass family file and others into a project. you create new family types from a mass family file. and click OK. you cut voids through an extrusion you added in the first exercise. under Other.16 On the View toolbar. In this exercise. click . enter 15000 mm for Width. Finally. 17 On the Mass Design Bar. click Training Files. and 18000 mm for Depth. and click Apply. click Save As.rvt. click Finish Mass. Using Mass Family Files in a Project | 815 . and open Metric\Families\Massing\Box.rfa. enter 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm for Name. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 In the Family Types dialog. click Family Types. 2 In the Family Types dialog.

10 On the File menu.rvt. 11 Save the file as Box-Training. 7 Click New and enter 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm for Name. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. In this exercise. 1 If not already selected. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model.rfa. 18000 mm for Height. and 9000 mm for Depth. and 6000 mm for Depth. 11000 mm for Height. click Training Files. 9 Click OK. and click Apply. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 8 Enter 46000 mm for Width. you load and place the new family types that you created from the previous exercise. and open Metric\m_Massing_In-place.5 Click New and enter 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm for Name. click Save As. 6 Enter 68000 mm for Width. click on the View toolbar to show the massing model. and click OK. you opened a mass family file and created three new types of this family file. Loading and Placing New Mass Families In this exercise. You also load other existing mass families and place them. 816 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click Apply. and click OK.

rfa. 9 Place the box mass family on the in-place mass family as shown. 13 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. Semi Barrel Vault. 7 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click OK twice. click Place Mass. click Modify. click Modify. and use the Move command on the Edit toolbar to place the triangle as shown. click Modify. 14 In the Type Selector. click Load from Library ➤ Load Family. 11 Select the box. click Place Mass.2 In the Project Browser. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. and click to place the mass. 4 On the File menu. select Rotate after placement.rfa. Arc Dome. Loading and Placing New Mass Families | 817 . 6 Open the Box-Training. select Box-Training: 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm. 17 Press CTRL. 15 Place 3 of these box families on the larger box family as shown. 12 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. enter 90 for Angle. select the triangle. 18 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 20 In the Type Selector. and Triangle. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to accurately place the mass families. 16 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice.rfa. 24 On the Design Bar. 5 In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open the Metric\Families\Massing folder. click Place Mass. select Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm.rfa family files. and click . 25 In the drawing area. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. select the 3 boxes. click Training Files. under Views (all). 3 On the View Control Bar. 21 On the Options Bar. 22 Place the cursor in the drawing area. double-click Site. 23 On the Options Bar. 8 In the Type Selector. select Triangle: 15000 x 45000 x 10500. and click . 10 On the Design Bar.

33 On the View toolbar. click Place Mass. 28 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 29 In the Type Selector. In the next exercise. 32 Specify Mass (Opaque) for the Material instance parameter. 27 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material instance parameter. You also loaded other existing mass families and added them to the building model. 30 Place the box mass family as shown.26 Select the triangle. and click . 31 Select the box and click . and click OK twice. you loaded and placed the new family types that you created in the previous exercise. you join these mass elements. 818 | Chapter 21 Massing . Notice that the triangle and the box masses that you just placed all overlap. select Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm. and click OK twice. In this exercise. 34 On the View menu. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click .

the first mass element selected cuts volume from any subsequently selected mass element. and then press ESC to see the result.rvt file. Dataset ■ Continue using the m_Massing_In-place. . NOTE When you join geometry. Joining Mass Elements | 819 . click 2 On the Tools toolbar. Join geometry 1 On the View toolbar.Joining Mass Elements In this exercise. you join and modify the mass elements you placed from the previous exercise. 3 Select the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm mass element as shown. click . 4 Select the triangle.

6 Select the right edge of the Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm and drag it to the left edge of the middle Box-Training: 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm as shown. on the Edit toolbar. click 8 On the Options Bar. click for Axis.Modify existing massing elements 5 In the Project Browser. 11 Drag the cursor down to create a vertical axis of reflection as shown. 9 Position the cursor over the upper edge of the middle box. double-click Site. TIP Pressing SHIFT while dragging the cursor locks the axis orthogonally. and snap to the midpoint of the edge. enter SM. 10 Click to select the mirror axis start point. under Views (all). Mirror the modified mass element 7 With the smaller box still selected. 820 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Floor Plans.

you joined mass elements together. 17 Press ESC to see the result. . Joining Mass Elements | 821 . The first selected mass element cut geometry from the subsequently selected mass element. You also modified and mirrored a mass element before joining its geometry with that of another element. In this exercise. Join geometry 13 On the View toolbar. click 14 On the Tools toolbar. 15 Select one instance of the modified Box-Training: 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm first. and then select the triangle.12 Click to mirror the existing massing element. click . 16 Repeat for the other instance of the modified mass element and the triangle.

11 Place a semi barrel vault where shown. You add mass elements to design options to experiment with different versions of the design. You then switch between different design options to get different versions of the design. 1 On the Design Bar.Using Mass Elements with Design Options In this lesson.) 3 On the Design Options toolbar. under Views (all). 8 On the Options Bar. and then click OK. 9 Place the cursor in the drawing area and click to place the mass. You then make one of the design options the primary one for the model. Placing semi barrel vaults 6 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. Mass Elements in Design Options In this exercise. click Modify. 2 On the Window menu. 4 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog. do not clear the check mark.rvt. (If Design Options is already selected. you continue using the same file from the previous lesson. click Place Mass. click . Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_In-place. click Toolbar ➤ Design Options. 5 In the Project Browser. under Floor Plans. TIP You may want to use the Move tool to place the mass precisely. double-click Site. select Semi Barrel Vault: 10000 x 15000 x 7500. 822 | Chapter 21 Massing . and select the triangle mass element. you place the mass elements from the previous exercise into Design Options. select Sloped (primary). clear Curved. 10 On the Options Bar. select Rotate after placement. enter 90 degrees for Angle. 7 In the Type Selector.

21 In the drawing area. 23 In the Project Browser. under Views (all). and click OK twice. 18 In the Type Selector. click . Mass Elements in Design Options | 823 . click Modify. and click Wireframe. select Arc Dome: 6000R x 2750H.12 Place another semi barrel vault as shown. Placing arc dome mass elements 17 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 19 Place 3 arc domes as shown. click Modify. click Place Mass. 14 In the drawing area. 13 On the Design Bar. and click OK twice. 16 On the View Control Bar. and click . 22 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. 15 Specify Mass (Transparent) for the Material property. select the three arc domes. and click . 20 On the Design Bar. TIP Use the snap control lines to assist in placing the domes. double-click North. select the 2 semi barrel vaults. under Elevations.

30 On the View menu. double-click {3D}. and click OK. click to select each of the arc domes and semi barrel values. under Views (all).24 On the View Control Bar. click . 29 In the Project Browser. 31 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Design Options tab. and watch the status bar. Create a Design Option set 26 Select the 3 arc domes and the 2 semi barrel vaults. TIP To find the correct shapes. 824 | Chapter 21 Massing . select Curved from the Design Option menu. and click OK. click Visibility/Graphics. under 3D Views. 27 On the Design Options toolbar. clear Sloped. 32 Click the value for Design Option. and click Wireframe. move the cursor over shapes in the drawing. select Curved. click . While pressing CTRL. 25 Move the three arc domes to the position shown. It will indicate when you locate an arc dome or semi barrel vault. 28 In the Add to Design Option Set dialog.

34 In the Design Options dialog. Creating Walls by Picking Faces In this exercise. you use building component creation tools to make building components from mass faces.rvt. 33 On the Design Options toolbar. and open Metric\m_Massing_Building_Components. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select Curved and.You can now see the shapes that are part of the curved design option.rvt. under Option. 36 On the File menu. click . Creating Building Components from Mass Elements In this lesson. click Training Files. 35 Close the warning that displays. In this exercise. click Make Primary. you placed mass elements into Design Options. You then switched between different design options to get different versions of the design. and click Close. Creating Building Components from Mass Elements | 825 . click Save As and save the file as m_Massing_Design_Options. you pick massing faces to create walls. Because it is likely that your client prefers the design option with curved shapes. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you can make it the primary option.

Creating walls 4 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Wall by Face. TIP Zoom out to see the entire massing model. 10 Select all the faces shown in red. 6 On the Options Bar. double-click Level 3. under Floor Plans. and select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click to show the massing model. select Basic Wall: Exterior . 7 Place the cursor in the drawing area and select the face of the in-place mass family as shown.Brick on CMU. click Wall by Face. The southeast wall of the mass model is now Brick on CMU. under Views (all). under Views (all).1 In the Project Browser. double-click {3D}. 2 On the View toolbar. 3 On the View menu. 8 In the Project Browser. click Orient ➤ Southeast. 9 On the Design Bar. 5 In the Type Selector. click . 826 | Chapter 21 Massing .

ignore the warning and continue selecting wall faces. 18 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 1. click Wall by Face. alerting you that the highlighted walls overlap. under Views (all).NOTE If a Warning dialog is displayed. 14 In the Project Browser. click Wall by Face. 17 Select the 3 faces shown in red. under Floor Plans. 12 On the Design Bar. select Curtain Wall : Storefront. 15 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 11 In the Project Browser. 16 In the Type Selector. Creating Walls by Picking Faces | 827 . under Floor Plans. 13 Select the face indicated by the arrow as shown. double-click Level 5.

In this exercise. If desired. 20 On the View Control Bar. click . click Wall by Face. you pick massing faces to create floors. You can then edit the profile to clean up the overlapping geometry. 19 In the Project Browser.You can ignore the warnings about walls overlapping. and click Wireframe. 22 Select all the faces shown in red. double-click Level 9. under Floor Plans. 828 | Chapter 21 Massing . under Views (all). you picked several massing faces and created both basic walls and curtain walls. Creating Floors by Picking Faces In this exercise. 21 On the Design Bar. 23 Open the 3D view to see the results. and click Edit Profile on the Options Bar. you can select the overlapping curtain wall.

and click OK. 4 Click OK. 3 On the Model Categories tab. 1 In the Project Browser. click Floor Area Faces. Creating floors 5 Select the in-place mass family Mass 1. double-click {3D}. click Visibility/Graphics.rvt. Curtain Systems. 7 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 829 . 2 On the View menu. under Views (all). select all levels. 6 On the Options Bar. clear Curtain Panels. and Walls.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.

10 Press CTRL. 11 On the Options Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 12 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. and select the three 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements and the mirrored 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box masses as shown. 9 On the View menu. 830 | Chapter 21 Massing . and click OK.8 On the Design Bar. select Levels 1-4. click Orient ➤ Northeast. click Modify.

click . 18 In the Project Browser.13 On the Design Bar. under Views (all). 14 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 16 On the Options Bar. and select the semi vault barrel mass elements and the 68000 mm x 9000 mm x 18000 mm box mass element as shown. 15 Press CTRL. select Level 1. click Floor by Face. 22 On the Options Bar. verify that Select Multiple is selected. 20 On the Options Bar. Creating Floors by Picking Faces | 831 . 17 In the Floor Area Faces dialog. and click OK. click Create Floors. double-click Level 1. 19 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. click Floor Area Faces. 23 On the View toolbar. clear Exclude Options. under Floor Plans. 21 Drag a pick box over the entire model to select all the floor area faces.

You then viewed a massing schedule that listed the gross floor area of each mass in the model. In this exercise. 832 | Chapter 21 Massing . double-click Mass Schedule. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces In this exercise. under Schedules/Quantities. you created floors by first creating floor area faces and then picking those faces to create floors. you pick massing faces to create roofs.24 In the Project Browser. This shows you the gross floor area of each mass.

select Basic Roof : Generic . and also on the top faces of the 46000 mm x 6000 mm x 11000 mm box mass elements. under Views (all). 3 Select the top face of the left 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element as shown. double-click {3D}.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. Creating roofs 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. NOTE Each time you select a face on an instance of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass element family. click Create Roof. click Create Roof.400mm. This creates the roof and lets you pick another face to create a new roof. Creating Roofs by Picking Faces | 833 . click Roof by Face. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 On the Options Bar. 6 Create the same roof on the remaining 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. 1 In the Project Browser.rvt.

834 | Chapter 21 Massing . and then click OK. Creating Curtain Systems In this exercise. and Walls. 12 Click the Model Categories tab. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. 7 With the Roof by Face command still selected. 9 On the Options Bar. 10 Repeat these steps to create a sloped glazing roof on the other semi barrel vault mass element. select Sloped Glazing in the Type Selector. 11 On the View menu.Your model should now look as shown. click Create Roof. In this exercise. you created roofs by picking faces of massing families. 8 Select the left semi barrel vault mass element. click Visibility/Graphics. Curtain Systems. select Curtain Panels.

3 In the Type Selector. be sure that Select Multiple is selected.rvt. and select both halves of the left arc dome mass element as shown. 5 Press CTRL. Creating Curtain Systems | 835 . double-click {3D}. under Views (all). 4 On the Options Bar. select Curtain System: 1500 x 1500mm.Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. click Create System. 6 On the Options Bar. click Curtain System by Face. 2 On the Massing tab of the Design Bar. 1 In the Project Browser.

select the blended form on the in-place mass. 8 With the Curtain System by Face command still selected. 836 | Chapter 21 Massing .7 Repeat the same steps for the two other domes.

Editing Elements Created from Massings | 837 . In this exercise. 10 Click Modify to exit the command. Editing Elements Created from Massings In this exercise. you create curtain systems by picking non-planar massing faces. you created curtain systems on non-planar faces.9 On the Options Bar. click Create System.

click Visibility/Graphics. 9 In the Element Properties dialog. 838 | Chapter 21 Massing . click Duplicate. clear Curtain Panels. and Walls. Next. Roofs. 2 On the View menu. Curtain Systems. and click OK.rvt. click OK. 4 Select the box mass family as shown and click . 7 Enter Larger Size for Name. click Edit/New. and click OK. 8 In the Type Properties dialog. under Views (all).Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components. 5 In the Element Properties dialog. enter 30000 for Width. 6 In the Type Properties dialog. double-click Site. 1 In the Project Browser. Floors. and then click OK. you resize one of the 15000 mm x 18000 mm x 12000 mm box mass elements. under Floor Plans. 3 On the Model Categories tab.

12 Drag a selection box over the box family and the dome family. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 839 .10 On the Design Bar. 11 On the Options Bar. 13 Use the Move tool to position the box and dome families as shown. clear Exclude Options. 14 Open the 3D view to see the result. click Modify.

The curtain system is no longer aligned with the dome family. 19 On the View toolbar. 840 | Chapter 21 Massing . TIP To select the curtain wall. you remake several of the building elements to fit to the new size of the massing family. under Views (all). remember that there are two curtain walls of this type that are overlapping here. 18 In the Exclude Hosts dialog. press TAB several times until the Status Bar indicates you are highlighting the Walls : Curtain Wall : Storefront. under Floor Plans. click . 17 On the Options Bar. In the next steps. 15 In the Project Browser. click OK. double-click Level 1. Also. 16 Zoom in to the upper right-hand portion of the model and select the three walls shown. click Remake. you want to select the smaller one.

you will notice that Revit Architecture resized the floors. click Remake. 20 Select the roof as shown. Editing Elements Created from Massings | 841 .TIP If you temporarily hide one of the resized walls. 21 On the Options Bar.

you changed the size of an existing mass family. 1 Open the 3D view. and click Remake. Dataset ■ Continue using the file m_Massing_Building_Components.22 Select the arc dome curtain system. you switch the visibility of the view between the massing elements and the model (shell) elements. In this exercise.rvt. 842 | Chapter 21 Massing . Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility In this exercise. You then modified building elements to resize with the new mass family.

click All to select all categories. 3 In the Project Browser. and click OK.Massing only. The 3D view now shows only the building shell. 8 Click None to clear the selection. 9 Select Mass.Turn off massing 2 Click on the View toolbar to turn off massing. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. 6 On the Model Categories tab. 7 Clear one of the check boxes. right-click on the 3D view. Now you create a 3D view that shows only the massing. Controlling Mass/Shell Visibility | 843 . click Visibility/Graphics. 5 On the View menu. 4 Rename the view 3D .

to the building shell. If desired. This concludes the massing tutorial. you can continue adding additional Revit modeling components. You might create the model shown.In this exercise. such as columns and an extruded roof. you switched the visibility of the 3D view to show either the building shell or the mass model. 844 | Chapter 21 Massing .

and then you nest the kitchen in a 2 bedroom condominium unit group. all instances in the building model are updated. Modifications to the nested group are automatically included in the host group. and all new instances that you place contain the modifications. 845 . Saving a group to a library gives you the ability to share the group with other team members working on the same project.Grouping 22 Using the grouping functionality in Revit® Architecture 2008. you can create reusable entities that represent layouts common to many building projects. and modify repetitive units. It also gives all those with access to the library the ability to load any group from the library into their project drawing. You can also nest groups within other groups. you also simplify the modification process. For example. In this tutorial. when you make changes to a single instance of a model group. By grouping objects. creating a library of groups for your office can reduce the amount of work needed to create. you create a model group for a typical kitchen. place. you not only simplify their placement. Because existing groups can be duplicated and then customized for another purpose. This functionality ensures consistency within and across projects. or with those working on a different project.

Creating and Placing a Group In this exercise. and open Metric\m_Groups-Condominium. In another exercise. and double-click First Floor. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and rotate the other instance to modify the layout position. and Nesting Groups In this lesson. Create a group for the typical kitchen layout 1 In the Project Browser. and typical office layouts. Modifying. you add the new model group to a previously created group. the host group is also updated automatically. The new group is considered nested within the host group. expand Views (all).rvt. you learn how to use model groups to collect related elements to simplify placement of repetitive units. you can place instances of the group in the building model using various methods. You mirror one instance of the group. In this exercise. 846 | Chapter 22 Grouping . You create the group by selecting drawing objects and grouping them as a single entity. you create a model group for a typical kitchen for a condominium unit. and is contained in every instance of the host group that you place in the building model. After you create a model group.Creating. Examples of the types of units for which groups are intended include condominium units. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. expand Floor Plans. You can also update all instances of a group in the building model by editing a single instance of the group and saving the changes. click Training Files. hotel rooms. When you make changes to a nested group. you place 2 new instances of the kitchen group in the floor plan.

4 On the Edit toolbar.2 Enter ZR. enter Typical Kitchen. 5 In the Create Model Group dialog. click (Group). Creating and Placing a Group | 847 . and click OK. and zoom to the kitchen in the upper-left area of the floor plan. 3 Draw a selection box around the kitchen.

The objects are now grouped and can be placed in the drawing as a single entity. 8 On the View toolbar. click Zoom To Fit. 7 On the Design Bar. select the center control for the group origin. 848 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Zoom flyout. Change the origin point for the group 6 In the drawing area. click Modify. and drag it to the upper-right corner of the kitchen.

click Modify. under Groups. right-click Typical Kitchen. 10 Zoom to the center of the floor plan. and click the upper-left corner of the lower unit to place the kitchen group. and click Create Instance.Place instances of the group 9 In the Project Browser. Creating and Placing a Group | 849 . 11 Click in the upper-right corner of the stairwell to place a second instance. 12 On the Design Bar. expand Model.

13 Select the first instance of the Typical Kitchen group that you just placed. 15 On the Options Bar. 16 Select the adjacent wall near the sink as the axis of reflection. click (Mirror). 850 | Chapter 22 Grouping . clear Copy. The kitchen is now positioned correctly in the floor plan. 14 On the Edit toolbar.

Creating and Placing a Group | 851 . and on the toolbar. 18 Click in the drawing area to the left of the kitchen. click (Rotate).17 Select the kitchen in the stairwell.

click Modify. 20 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Zoom flyout. click Zoom To Fit.19 Click above the right area of the kitchen to rotate the placement. 852 | Chapter 22 Grouping .

all instances of the same group in the drawing are updated.rvt. and click Save. as shown. name the file m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Modifying a Group | 853 . m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. and one rotated. Modify visibility of elements in a group 1 Zoom in to the kitchen on the right above the stair. click Save As. 23 Navigate to your preferred directory. one mirrored. you make changes to an instance of a group.rvt.You should now have three instances of the Typical Kitchen group in your model: one with the original orientation. When you finish editing. Save the dataset 22 On the File menu. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. Modifying a Group In this exercise.

This element remains in the group but is not visible in the project view for this group instance. and click 4 Move the cursor over the door. 854 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 6 Move the cursor over the horizontal wall. and click to select the door. (Include group member). press TAB to highlight the wall. select the element. and click to select it. 7 Click (Exclude group member). and click to select the wall.2 Move the cursor over the wall to the left of the kitchen. 3 Click (Exclude group member). press TAB. 5 Click (Exclude group member). NOTE To display an excluded element. press TAB.

and click to draw a horizontal wall that extends to the left vertical wall. click Modify. clear Tag on Placement. 16 Click in the new wall on the left and on the right to place 2 sets of folding doors for a closet. Modifying a Group | 855 . click Door. move the cursor to the left. select Bifold-4 Panel : 1220 x 2134mm. 14 In the Type Selector. select Basic Wall : Generic . click Modify.8 On the Design Bar.127mm. 15 On the Options Bar. 11 Click at the endpoint of the short vertical wall in the kitchen entrance. click Wall. 12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the Design Bar. Add elements for a unique condition 9 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. 10 In the Type Selector.

17 On the Design Bar. move the cursor up. 23 In the drawing area. The elements in this instance of the group remain displayed in their object style. select the vertical wall to the left of the long counter top. 21 On the Options Bar. select Opening ➤ Wall Opening. Modify geometry of a group and have changes display in all group instances 19 Zoom in to the kitchen in the left area of the floor plan. the background color of the drawing area is pale yellow. 18 On the View toolbar. Zoom flyout. In edit group mode. 24 Click near the bottom corner of the wall. click Modify. All other elements in the model are grayed out. click Zoom To Fit. 22 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. click Edit Group. and the group editor toolbar initially displays in the upper left corner. 856 | Chapter 22 Grouping . and click near the top corner of the wall to create an opening. 20 Select the Typical Kitchen group.

click Properties. click Modify.25 On the Design Bar. When you nest the kitchen in the 2 bedroom unit. 27 In the Element Properties dialog.rvt. in the Project Browser. under Constraints. to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. All instances of the Typical Kitchen are updated to reflect the change. and the wall and folding doors for the closet. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. and click OK. under Floor Plans. which acts as the host. Nesting Groups | 857 . enter 1000. you add the Typical Kitchen group. all instances of the host group are updated to contain the nested group. 29 In the group editor toolbar. Add elements to an existing group 1 If necessary. 30 Click File menu ➤ Save. and on the Options Bar. 28 For Base Offset. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 26 Select the opening. enter 2134. The kitchen group is then nested within the 2 bedroom unit group. Nesting Groups In this exercise. double-click First Floor. for Unconnected Height. created in an earlier lesson. click Finish.

2 Select the 2 Bedroom Unit group in the top area of the floor plan. click (Add to Group). 4 In the group editor toolbar. select the Typical Kitchen group. 858 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 3 On the Options Bar. click Edit Group. 5 In the drawing area.

You work with the attached detail group in a different way than you had previously worked with host and nested groups because attached detail groups require more manual manipulation. Working with Detail Groups In this lesson. Detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements. you work with groups in order to use them in the most efficient manner within and across projects. Attached detail groups are created when you group view-specific elements that are associated with a specific model group. such as door and window tags. double-click Second Floor. you add door tags to a group. click Finish. In the next exercise. such as text. Notice that the Typical Kitchen and pantry are nested within the 2 bedroom group. You create a detail group in the First Floor plan and add the group to the Second Floor plan of the building model. and filled regions. under Floor Plans. and each of the bifold doors. select the wall between the folding doors. Working with Detail Groups | 859 . 8 In the Project Browser. 7 In the group editor toolbar. 9 Select the 2 bedroom group.6 Press TAB. 10 Click File menu ➤ Save. and create an attached detail group containing the tags.

You can add the detail group to other views of the building model. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. click Filled Region. You then save the region and the text note as a detail group. 860 | Chapter 22 Grouping . Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. 4 On the Options Bar.Creating a Detail Group In this exercise. 2 Zoom in to the stair area in the center of the floor plan. you sketch and annotate a rectangular filled region that represents an area of tiled flooring in front of the elevators in the building model. 3 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 5 Click the upper-right endpoint below the elevators as the start point of the rectangle.rvt. under Floor Plans. Draw a filled region 1 In the Project Browser. double-click First Floor. click to draw a rectangular region.

6 Move the cursor down and to the left. click to add an arc leader. A rectangular region with a diagonal cross hatch pattern is added in front of the elevator doors. 12 Enter Tile. and on the Design Bar. 10 Click in the filled region to specify the leader start point. Add a text note 8 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 On the Options Bar. and select a point below the left elevator. 11 Click below the filled region to end the leader and specify the text start point. click Modify. 7 On the Design Bar. Creating a Detail Group | 861 . click Text. click Finish Sketch.

15 In the Create Detail Group dialog. expand Detail. Add a group instance to a different drawing view 19 In the Project Browser. click Modify. 20 In the Project Browser. 862 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 18 On the Design Bar. enter Elevator Lobby Tile. and select the note and the filled region. right-click Elevator Lobby Tile.The text note with arc leader is added to the building model. under Floor Plans. and click OK. as shown. select the instance of the Elevator lobby tile group. 14 On the Edit toolbar. double-click Second Floor. Create a detail group 13 Press and hold CTRL. 16 In the drawing area. and click Create Instance. under Groups. click (Group). 17 Move the origin of the group to the corner of the elevator shaft.

clear Leader.21 In the drawing area. click Modify 23 On the Zoom flyout. you must manually attach it to each instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and then use the door tags to create an attached detail group. Because the detail group contains variables. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Zoom To Fit. click Tag ➤ By Category. double-click First Floor. 24 Click File menu ➤ Save. 3 On the Options Bar. Using Attached Detail Groups | 863 . Place door tags 1 In the Project Browser. Using Attached Detail Groups In this exercise. click to place the detail group. it cannot be added to a group in the same manner that a drawing component can be added. m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. 22 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. you add door tags to the 2 Bedroom Unit group.rvt. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar.

864 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 7 On the Options Bar.4 Place door tags in the original instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit. click (Filter Selection). draw a selection box around the right area of the floor plan including the door tags. select Door Tags. and click OK. as shown: 5 On the Design Bar. click Check None. click Modify. Create an attached detail group 6 In the drawing area. 8 In the Filter dialog. 9 On the Edit toolbar. click (Group).

expand Groups\Model\2 Bedroom Unit. Door Tags are placed on the Second Floor instance of the 2 Bedroom Unit group. 13 Select the model group 2 Bedroom Unit. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 14 On the Options Bar. and click OK. enter 2 Bedroom Door Tags. click Place Detail. for Attached Detail Group Name. select Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags. NOTE Component instance numbering is sequential.10 In the Create Model Group and Attached Detail Group dialog. 15 In the Attached Detail Group Placement dialog. double-click Second Floor. therefore. Place a detail group in another group instance 12 In the Project Browser. 11 In the Project Browser. and view that Floor Plan: 2 Bedroom Door Tags is attached. Using Attached Detail Groups | 865 . the doors are numbered based upon the order in which you placed each group.

click OK. right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. Load the group in a new project 4 On the File menu. Saving and Loading Groups In this exercise. or a Revit family file (RFA) if you are working in the Family Editor. verify that Same as group name is selected. browse to the Desktop. the file is saved as a Revit project file (RVT). m_Groups-Condominium_in_progress. Dataset Continue using the dataset saved at the end of the previous exercise. click New ➤ Project. click Desktop. and click OK. under Groups\Model. When you load the group from the library into a new project. You can save a group as a Revit project file (RVT) if you are working in a project. you can then work with it in the context of the new project.16 On the Design Bar. click Modify. You also convert the group instance to a linked file to replace the group with an alternative unit layout. This enables you to create a library of groups that can be shared with other team members and used on multiple projects. Saving and Loading Groups In this lesson. Save a group to a library 1 In the Project Browser. 866 | Chapter 22 Grouping . select 2 Bedroom Unit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Load from Library ➤ Load File as Group. Using groups from a library ensures consistency and increases productivity for projects that reuse similar typical layouts for repetitive units. 7 In the Load File as Group dialog. you save a group to a library so that you can use the group in a new project. 2 In the left pane of the Save Group dialog. and click Save. In this case. accept the default template file. you save a typical condominium layout to a library where it can be accessed by other team members for use in other projects. 3 For File name. verify that Project is selected. and click Open.rvt. 5 In the New Project dialog. 8 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 17 Click File menu ➤ Save.rvt. and click Save Group. for Create new.

12 On the Design Bar. or the group instance can be replaced with an existing linked file. 13 Zoom in to the 2 Bedroom Unit group. and click Create Instance. click Modify. When a group is converted to a link. click Training Files. click Use Existing. 16 In the left pane of the Open dialog. either the selected group can be used to make a new linked file. and open Common\c_2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. Saving and Loading Groups | 867 . 11 Click in the drawing area to place the group instance. 10 Right-click 2 Bedroom Unit. click Link. Place an instance of the loaded group 9 In the Project Browser. Convert group instance to a linked file 14 Select the group.rvt. explaining that duplicate types were found and the types from the new project will be used.A warning dialog is displayed. expand Groups. 15 In the Convert Group to Link dialog. and expand Model. and on the Options Bar.

rvt file is added as a link to the project. 25 The linked file is converted to a new model group stored in the project.17 On the Design Bar. Convert the linked model to a group 19 In the drawing area. click Yes to replace the existing Typical Kitchen group with the alternate Typical Kitchen group. click Remove Link. click Modify. The 2 Bedroom Unit-Alternate. This message indicates that all instances of the linked model will be deleted from the project. verify that Attached Details is selected only. click Bind. or you can remove it at a later time from the Manage Links dialog. click OK. You can remove the linked file from the project by clicking Remove Link. 22 In the Duplicate Types dialog. 20 On the Options Bar. and click OK. 868 | Chapter 22 Grouping . 21 In the Bind Link Options dialog. 24 In the message dialog. expand Revit Links. but the linked model file will still be loaded in the project. 23 In the confirmation dialog. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. and the link is removed. select the linked Revit model. 18 In the Project Browser.

Site 23 In this tutorial. 869 . you use the site tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to add and modify site components within a project.

You start by importing the site contour data and converting it to 3D contour data. Creating a Toposurface In this exercise. 4 On the Options Bar. You add property lines manually. click Training Files. you use site tools to add and modify site components within a project. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 870 | Chapter 23 Site . convert the data to a table. expand Views (all). you create a toposurface by manually placing elevation points in the site plan. 3 On the Design Bar. you add a building pad to the site. islands. In the final exercises. The scale of this view is 1 : 100. The exercises are sequential and must be done in order. click Toposurface. right-click in the Design Bar. After grading the topography to create a slightly elevated and flat surface. and double-click Site. You add subregions to the area to define parking areas. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. expand Floor Plans.Using Site Tools In this lesson. enter an absolute elevation of 3000 mm. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Point. Using the first method. and open Metric\m_First_Project. TIP If the Site tab is not displayed. Create a toposurface by adding elevation points 1 In the Project Browser. This project file was created using the default metric template. and click Site. In the second part of this exercise. you add parking and planting components and create a parking space schedule. you import contour data from a DWG file and use it to create the project toposurface.rvt. and then modify the data. and walkways. you create a toposurface using two different methods.

5 Click in the drawing area to specify a point. Creating a Toposurface | 871 . enter an absolute elevation of 6000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 6 Add two additional points to create a triangle. 8 On the Options Bar. 7 Add additional points to create a contour circle similar to the following illustration. A toposurface must have at least three elevation points. Triangulation boundaries display only after you add the third elevation point. The circle should be approximately 55000 mm wide. 9 Add a concentric circle of 6000 mm elevation points inside the 3000 mm contour.

12000 mm. under Increment. under Additional Contours. 13 In the Site Settings dialog. and click OK.TIP Do not be concerned with the exact quantity or placement of the points. 10 Repeat the previous step for 9000 mm. Use the following illustration as a reference. 12 On the Settings menu. and 18000 mm absolute elevations. 872 | Chapter 23 Site . 11 On the Design Bar. Try to add each circle concentrically inside the previously created circle. 15000 mm. click Site Settings. click Finish Surface. enter 1500 mm.

18 In the Project Browser. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. and press ENTER. click Modify. enter 1000 mm. 14 On the View toolbar. click Yes. Use imported contour data to create a toposurface 17 Select the toposurface and. Before importing the contour data.This setting reduces the quantity of contour lines in the view. click to delete it. expand Elevations (Building Elevation). 15 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the View toolbar. 19 On the Design Bar. 22 When you are asked if you want to rename corresponding views. and press ENTER. Creating a Toposurface | 873 . 20 Zoom in around the Level 2 head. 21 Click the Level 2 text. click the elevation value. and double-click South. on the Standard toolbar. Click Yes when prompted to rename corresponding views. modify the level names and elevations. click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. under Views (all). and press ENTER. rename the level Basement. click . rename the level Base Site Elevation. 23 Click the Level 1 text.

and zoom out until you can see the entire topography within the view. Select the c_Import_Site file located in the Common folder. click Training Files. and click OK. under Floor Plans. 31 On the Design Bar. clear layer 0 and layer C_bench_mark. 874 | Chapter 23 Site . clear Current view only and choose Select for Layers. 29 Select the imported topography. Until it is exploded. 25 On the File menu. 27 In the Select Layers/Levels to Import/Link dialog. 26 In the Import/Link dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 28 On the Design Bar. This ensures the import symbol is not accidently moved. select Preserve colors. under Views (all). 30 On the Edit menu. click Modify. Under Layer/Level Colors. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. double-click Site.24 In the Project Browser. it is considered an import symbol. click Pin Position. Click Open. Under Import or Link. You are immediately prompted to select the layers you want to import. click Modify.

click Use Imported ➤ Import Instance. click Visibility/Graphics. and then click OK. you are prompted to select the layer that will generate the elevation points. 34 Under Visibility. select it.Notice the elevation symbols are displayed. clear C_INDX. When you select the import symbol. 33 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. clear Elevations. click Toposurface. 35 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. and click OK. when the edges highlight. click the Annotation Categories tab. Creating a Toposurface | 875 . 36 On the Design Bar. 37 Place the cursor over the imported symbol and. 38 In the Add Points from Selected Layers dialog. 32 On the View menu.

NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. name the project Site-in progress. and click Save. 44 Navigate to your preferred folder.rvt. click . click Finish Surface. Using the first method. 45 Proceed to the next exercise. you add property lines using two methods. 42 On the View toolbar. Using the second method. Adding Property Lines In this exercise. click Save As. 876 | Chapter 23 Site . click and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. you create property lines by entering survey data into a table of distances and bearings. Notice the change in this toposurface elevation is minor. 40 On the View toolbar. you sketch the property lines and then convert the sketch into survey data. this project file is required in its current state. 41 Enter ZF to zoom to the extents of the image. 43 On the File menu.The import symbol is converted to elevation points and contours. 39 On the Design Bar. “Adding Property Lines” on page 876.

Site-in progress. Click Modify. click Lines. add an arc line on the right.This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and the project file in its current state. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 3 In the Property Line Creation dialog. under Floor Plans. select Create property lines by sketching. Select and delete the right vertical line. click Lines. If you have not completed the previous exercise.rvt. sketch the shape shown in the following illustration. Using the 3-point Arc tool. you can quickly create the shape by doing the following: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Sketch the rectangle first. NOTE The weight of the sketch lines has been increased in the illustration for training purposes. Sketch property lines 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. On the Design Bar. do so before continuing. double-click Site. Although you can use your preferred sketching method. and click OK. click Property Line. Adding Property Lines | 877 . 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar.

click 12 On the Design Bar. 8 On the Options Bar. enter the following deed data for rows 1 through 4: ■ ■ ■ ■ to delete them. on the Standard toolbar.6 On the Design Bar. NOTE The values displayed in the Property Lines dialog depend on the exact dimensions and location of your sketch. 13 In the Property Line Creation dialog. select Edit Table. 14 In the Property Lines dialog. 100000 S 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" W 100000 N 0°0'0" E 80000 N 90°0'0" E 878 | Chapter 23 Site . Create property lines using a table of distances and bearings 11 Select the property lines and. A warning dialog is displayed. click OK. 15 Starting in Row #1. when they highlight. 9 In the warning dialog. 10 In the Property Lines dialog. click Insert three times until there are four rows of deed data. select the lines. click OK. 7 Move the cursor over the property lines and. The property lines are displayed with a dash-dot line type on the topography. click Finish Sketch. select Create property lines by table of distances and bearings. informing you that converting a property line sketch to a table cannot be undone. and click OK. click Property Line.

the original DWG file remains visible in the view. The property lines are displayed at the tip of the cursor.rfa. Tag property lines 18 On the Settings menu. 17 Move the cursor over the topographic surface and using the following illustration as a reference. clear the checkbox for c_Import_Site. click Visibility/Graphics. the visibility of the imported symbol needs to be turned off. scroll down the list of categories until you find Property Lines and notice there are no tags loaded for Property Line Segments.dwg and click OK. review your data entry and make necessary corrections.Notice that after you complete the last line. and click OK. click to place the property lines. the distance that displayed under From last to first point now displays Closed. 21 In the left pane of the Open dialog. notice a tag is now loaded for property line segments. This means there is no gap in the property lines. 19 In the Tags dialog. 16 Click OK. 22 In the Tags dialog. 25 Under Visibility. click Training Files. Even though you converted the symbol to elevations points and contours. 20 Click Load. click Annotations ➤ Loaded Tags. If the gap is not closed. 23 On the View menu. 24 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Imported Categories tab. Before adding property line segment tags. and open Metric\Families\Annotations\Civil\M_Property Line Tag. Adding Property Lines | 879 .

and click Drafting. this project file is required in its current state. right-click in the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. you created two sets of property lines. You also modify the site settings so that the new subcategory is displayed at the specific elevation. In this exercise. In the next exercise. click Save. The first set you sketched and then converted into deed data. you modify site settings and contour line visibility.26 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. click to place it. click Model Graphics Style. click Tag ➤ By Category. 27 On the Options Bar. you loaded and tagged the property line segments. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. clear Leader. You created the second set of property lines directly from deed data and located it on the topography. In the final step. 28 Zoom in and place the cursor over the center of the north property line. 32 Proceed to the next exercise. When the tag displays at the tip of the cursor. 30 On the View Control Bar. Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings In this exercise. 880 | Chapter 23 Site . you create a new object style subcategory to mark a specific elevation. The tags display more prominently in this view. “Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings” on page 880. NOTE If the Drafting tab of the Design Bar is not visible. 31 On the File menu. 29 Tag the three remaining property lines.

Modifying Contour Visibility and Site Settings | 881 .0 mm. select Working Contour. enter the name Working Contour. click Object Styles. Under Range Type. click New. specify the following values: ■ ■ ■ Under Start. click Model Graphics Style. In the Object Styles dialog. and click OK.rvt. Under Subcategory.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. select Topography. 3 On the Model Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. select a shade of Brown. 10 Under Additional Contours. 7 Click OK. specify an interval of 1000 mm passing through elevation 0. 4 Under Modify Subcategories. select Dash dot. enter 1000. Under Line Color. 6 In the Object Styles dialog. and click Wireframe. the new object style subcategory is displayed under Topography. Modify site settings 8 On the Settings menu. select Single Value. Under Line Pattern. 5 In the New Subcategory dialog. 9 In the Site Settings dialog. specify the following settings for the Working Contour subcategory: ■ ■ ■ Verify that the Line Weights are 1. Create an object style subcategory for specific elevation 1 On the View Control Bar. under Contour Line Display. for Subcategory. 2 On the Settings menu. scroll down the list of categories and expand Topography. click Site Settings. Site-in progress.

Click Yes when prompted to save changes. Working Contour. displays on the topography only at the elevation you specified. and islands. The next exercise requires a new dataset. Creating Topographic Subregions In this exercise. such as material. click Close. You then modified the site setting to distinguish a specific contour interval using this subcategory. The object style subcategory. and islands. you create topographic subregions to define roads. you create subregions in order to define roads. Creating a subregion does not result in separate surfaces. 13 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Topographic Subregions” on page 882. 882 | Chapter 23 Site . parking areas. parking areas. 12 On the File menu. it merely defines an area of the surface where you can apply a different set of properties. In the next exercise. In this exercise. you created a new object style subcategory for topography.11 Click OK.

and open Metric\m_Site. and use the fillet arc sketching tool to add the curved corner. Creating Topographic Subregions | 883 . The horizontal rectangle is approximately 7500 mm wide. 2 On the Design Bar. Although the exact dimensions are not important. the vertical rectangle is approximately 19500 mm wide. Sketch initial parking area 1 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. try to replicate the location and proportion. sketch the shape highlighted in the illustration below. use the trim tool to create just one closed loop.Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. TIP You can either sketch the shape freehand or draw two perpendicular rectangles.rvt. click Training Files. click Lines. click Subregion. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 3 Using the sketching tools on the Options Bar.

under Materials and Finishes. 6 In the Materials dialog. click the Value for Material. click Properties. click Shading with Edges. the subregion will end at the edge of the defined topography. When you finish the sketch in a later step. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog.Tarmacadam for Name.NOTE In the Metric dataset. you may see fewer contour lines than in the images shown in this exercise. and click OK. select Site . and click OK. 7 In the Element Properties dialog. click Finish Sketch. 9 On the View menu. Specify subregion properties for parking area 4 On the Design Bar. enter Parking for Name. 884 | Chapter 23 Site . 5 In the Element Properties dialog. Notice that the left edge of the subregion overhangs the site topography. 8 On the Design Bar. under Identity Data.

You can create a toposurface schedule to report information regarding each toposurface region.Tarmacadam. double-click Site. Mirror the arc line to create an exact duplicate. and click Hidden Line. Modify the subregion 11 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. As you create new subregions.Notice that the new subregion uses the material Site . under Schedules/Quantities. and use the split and trim tools to clean up the sketch. Although you can select each toposurface region separately and apply different properties to each. 18 In the Project Browser. This topography schedule uses a filter to omit unnamed topographic regions. click Edit Boundary. NOTE Your values may differ depending on your sketch. 17 On the View Control Bar. under Floor Plans. double-click Topography Schedule. Open the topography schedule 10 In the Project Browser. click Model Graphics Style. and double-click Topography Schedule. Creating Topographic Subregions | 885 . they display within this schedule. 15 Add new lines and modify the existing lines to create a boundary similar to the one shown in the following illustration. Delete overlapping lines. expand Schedules/Quantities. 14 On the Options Bar. 13 Select the subregion you created in the previous steps. the toposurface and its contour data remain one element. Notice that the project area has increased. and click Shading with Edges. click Finish Sketch. TIP Add the two upper parking areas as rectangles. 12 On the View Control Bar. 16 On the Design Bar. The two additional parking areas in the top portion of the sketch must be at least 5500 mm deep to accommodate parking spaces.

25 In the Element Properties dialog. and click Shading with Edges. click Model Graphics Style. 27 In the Element Properties dialog. Within each subregion. and then click the down arrow to open the Material dialog. 20 On the View Control Bar. additional subregions are required to create a more attractive parking area.Grass for Name. under Materials and Finishes. you apply different materials such as grass and concrete.Grass for Name. and click OK. Precise dimensions are not important at this time. 30 In the Project Browser. 886 | Chapter 23 Site . click the Value for Material. 28 On the Design Bar. select Site . 22 On the Design Bar. 21 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. double-click Site. under Floor Plans. click Subregion. 29 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style.Add additional subregions 19 In the Project Browser. and click Hidden Line. click Properties. under Schedules/Quantities. enter Island . 24 On the Design Bar. use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the parking island shown in the following illustration. click Lines. In this training project. under Identity Data. 23 In the upper-right parking area. and click OK. double-click Topography Schedule. click Finish Sketch. 26 In the Materials dialog. Notice that the schedule has been updated with the new information.

32 In the Project Browser. Using the techniques learned in previous steps. You must sketch each region separately. double-click Site.Grass. Notice that the schedule has been updated. click Subregion. Creating Topographic Subregions | 887 . double-click Site. under Schedules/Quantities. 34 On the Design Bar. double-click Topography Schedule. under Floor Plans. click Lines. 36 Use the sketching tools available on the Options Bar to sketch the new concrete walkway shown in the following illustration. Add the concrete walkway 33 In the Project Browser.Cast-in-Situ Concrete . Name each region Island .walkway.Grass.31 In the Project Browser. and apply the material Concrete . Name the subregion Walkway. add the three additional subregions shown in the following illustration. 35 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. and apply the material Site .

WARNING Subregions cannot intersect. 888 | Chapter 23 Site . 39 On the File menu. there is still only one toposurface. under Schedules/Quantities. click Finish Sketch. click Save As. 37 On the Design Bar. 38 In the Project Browser. double-click Topography Schedule. Notice that the schedule has been updated. If you want to modify the elevation points of a particular subregion. so you need to offset coincident lines between the subregions by 100 mm. NOTE Although several toposurface subregions now exist within this project. you must either edit the entire toposurface or split the toposurface.

this project file is required in its current state. Grading the Toposurface In this exercise.40 Navigate to your preferred folder. and click OK. name the project Site tutorial-in progress. Grading the Toposurface | 889 . 3 On the Options Bar. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Site tutorial-in progress. under Phasing. see the tutorial. When you use the grading tool.rvt. RELATED For more information regarding phasing. 4 In the Element Properties dialog. stating that subregions must have the same Phase Created parameter and the same Phase Demolished parameter as the host toposurface.rvt. “Grading the Toposurface” on page 889. you grade the toposurface to create a slightly elevated and flat parking area. select Existing for Phase Created. A warning dialog is displayed. double-click Site. the existing topography is demolished and a new toposurface is created where you can edit the elevation points. 2 Select the toposurface. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and click Save. The display settings are controlled by the phase filter. click Modify. “Using Phasing” on page 992. Click OK to set the subregion phase to match the toposurface. 41 Proceed to the next exercise. click . Modify toposurface phase assignment 1 In the Project Browser. Notice that the toposurface displays differently. 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.

The intent is to select all the elevation points inside and around the parking area. and click Select and Edit. Delete elevation points 9 Draw a pick box outside the main parking area as in the following illustration. select Copy Internal Points. click Graded Region. 890 | Chapter 23 Site . 8 Select the topographic surface. Make sure the pick box allows a significant buffer around the area. Copying internal points lets you delete only the points in the parking area without altering the remaining elevation points. 7 In the Graded Region dialog.6 On the Design Bar.

12 Draw another pick box around the driveway and remaining parking area as in the following illustration. Grading the Toposurface | 891 . and click Hidden Line.10 Press DELETE. 13 Press DELETE. 11 On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style. and new. demolished. Notice the toposurface displays with different colors representing the different phases: existing.

17 On the Design Bar. and click Shading with Edges. 16 Add elevation points outside the perimeter of the entire parking area and walkway as in the following illustration. 19 On the View Control Bar. 20 On the View toolbar. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click . 18 On the View toolbar. 892 | Chapter 23 Site . 15 On the Options Bar. click Finish Surface. click .Add new elevation points 14 On the Design Bar. specify an Absolute Elevation of 5500 mm. Place the points until there are no contour lines crossing the parking area or walkway. click Point. The parking and walkway areas are now elevated and flat. click Model Graphics Style.

Only the graded topography displays. it automatically cuts a hole in the toposurface and places it at the depth you specify. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. nor can you add it without first adding a topographic surface. 26 On the File menu. because you assigned it to the Existing phase before grading. under Phasing. Site tutorial-in progress. click Save. Therefore. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 27 Proceed to the next exercise. 25 In the Element Properties dialog. click View Properties. When you add a building pad. Adding a Building Pad | 893 . only the original toposurface displays. Adding a Building Pad In this exercise. click View Properties.rvt. Because this toposurface is no longer required for this project. Only the components created in or assigned to the Existing phase display in this view. “Adding a Building Pad” on page 893. specify New Construction for Phase. 23 Select the toposurface.The phase filter for this view allows both the new and demolished surfaces to display. under Phasing. A building pad is a toposurface hosted element and cannot be added to any other element. you create a building pad. This accounts for the red surface that you see in this view. 22 In the Element Properties dialog. and click OK. and delete it. 24 On the View menu. specify Existing for Phase. you can delete it. this project file is required in its current state. and click OK. Delete the demolished toposurface from the project 21 On the View menu.

and click Hidden Line. double-click Site.Add a building pad to the project 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the View Control Bar. 4 On the Design Bar. 5 Using the sketching tools available on the Options Bar. you can pick the exterior walls to define the building pad. click Pad. 3 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. If you have an existing building model. under Floor Plans. The building pad should border the concrete walkway on the right and the upper parking area. NOTE By default. click Model Graphics Style. click Lines. 894 | Chapter 23 Site . sketch an approximate replica of the outline shown in the following illustration. the Pick Walls command is active.

you add parking and planting components to the site surface. click Save. 11 Proceed to the next exercise. and click Shading with Edges. . click building pad. this project file is required in its current state. Adding Site Components In this exercise. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. click Finish Sketch. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 895 . click 9 On the View toolbar. click Model Graphics Style. Notice the new 10 On the File menu. 7 On the View Control Bar. “Adding Site Components” on page 895.6 On the Design Bar. .

2 On the Site tab of the Design Bar. Site tutorial-in progress. select M_Parking Space: 4800 x 2400mm . 5 On the Design Bar. under Floor Plans.Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. 6 Use the flip arrows so it displays as shown below and move it toward the lower left corner of the parking area. 4 Zoom in on the upper parking area that borders the building pad and add a parking component to the area. click Modify. and select the parking space. double-click Site. click Parking Component. NOTE Make sure you place the parking space a slight distance above the building pad. 896 | Chapter 23 Site . Add parking components 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Type Selector.90 deg.rvt.

under Floor Plans. click parking spaces.7 Add 6 additional parking spaces to the right of the first space. . click 9 On the View toolbar. Verify that the spaces are horizontally aligned and the left edge of each space is aligned with the right edge of the previous space. TIP You could also use the Array tool to accomplish this task. click Site Component. 8 On the View toolbar. Adding Site Components | 897 . and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. Notice the new Add planting components to the site 10 In the Project Browser. . double-click Site. 11 On the Site tab of the Design Bar.

14 On the View toolbar. choose any tree type. 898 | Chapter 23 Site . 13 Add some more trees outside the parking area as shown below. click .12 In the Type Selector. and add a tree to each of the two round parking islands as shown below.

15 On the View toolbar. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Notice how the trees vertically attach to the toposurface. you tag the planting and parking components that you added previously. click Tag All Not Tagged. Site tutorial-in progress. 17 Proceed to the next exercise. 16 On the File menu. “Tagging Site and Parking Components” on page 899. Tag site components 1 In the Project Browser. 2 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. the landscape shown in the previous illustration has been rendered. and spin the toposurface to view it at various angles. NOTE Plants are displayed as simple geometry unless rendered. In the following illustration.rvt. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. Tagging Site and Parking Components In this exercise. this project file is required in its current state. under Floor Plans. double-click Site. Tagging Site and Parking Components | 899 . click Save. click .

and click Apply. and click OK. click Apply.3 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. you create a parking schedule. 4 Under Available fields. Site tutorial-in progress.rvt. click Schedule/Quantities. and click Add. NOTE If you intend to complete the next exercise. Create a parking schedule 1 On the View tab of the Design Bar. 5 On the View menu. In the following exercise. 8 Proceed to the next exercise. “Creating Parking Space Schedules” on page 900. 2 In the New Schedule dialog. this project file is required in its current state. and click OK. you use a parking schedule to number the parking spaces. 3 In the Schedule Properties dialog. Notice each is tagged with no instance mark. click the Fields tab. click Hidden Line. click Save. select Parking for Category. Creating Parking Space Schedules In the final exercise of this tutorial. Dataset Continue to use the dataset you used in the previous exercise. You can use a parking schedule to report the quantity and area of each type of parking space. 7 On the File menu. 6 Zoom in to the upper parking area and around the trees. NOTE Site components can also be numbered by clicking the tag number and changing the value. select Mark. select the line for the category Parking Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Parking Tag: Boxed. 900 | Chapter 23 Site . 4 Select the line for the category Planting Tags that uses the loaded tag M_Planting Tag: Boxed.

the selected space highlights in the Site plan. This allows you to know which space you are numbering. 7 Under Fields. Also notice that when you place the cursor in the parking schedule. enter Space. click Tile. This closes all the views except the parking schedule. finish numbering the remaining spaces. If necessary. 8 Under Fields. double-click Site. 11 On the Window menu. select Mark. under Views (all). Notice that the parking spaces in the Site plan update automatically. select Type. The parking schedule is displayed. under Space. and under Heading. click Save. Creating Parking Space Schedules | 901 . enter Size. 15 On the File menu. and click Add. and click OK. under Floor Plans. and under Heading. under Space. 10 In the Project Browser. 13 In the Parking Schedule. 6 Click the Formatting tab. zoom in around the upper parking lot where you previously added the parking spaces. 14 In the Parking Schedule. 12 In the Site plan. click Close Hidden Windows. 9 On the Window menu.5 Under Available fields. This tiles the Site plan next to the parking schedule. number the first three spaces consecutively. select Type. you can resize the column width by dragging the column edges.

902 | Chapter 23 Site .

You begin by adding the structural walls. In the final lesson. and beams to Level 1. After completing level 1. 903 . you use the structural tools in Revit Architecture 2008 to create a building model skeleton.Structural 24 In this tutorial. columns. you copy the entire structure and use the paste-align command to add the structure to the three levels above it. you create framing elevations and add structural braces to the building model.

Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. click Training Files. under Floor Plans. and select Metric\m_Wall_Import. 2 On the File menu. 4 In the Import/Link dialog. you import a DWG file into the Level 2 floor plan. You use an imported DWG file as an underlay to trace the initial outline of the structural walls. The DWG file contains walls that you trace in the next exercise to create the structural walls. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 904 | Chapter 24 Structural . 3 In the left pane of the Import/Link dialog.Adding Structural Walls In this lesson. under Views (all). If necessary. under Import or Link. you add structural walls to a project file where only the grid lines have been added. Importing a DWG for Use as an Underlay In this exercise.rvt. go to the Project Browser. and open Metric\m_Structural. specify the following: ■ Select Link (instead of import).dwg. click Import/Link ➤ CAD Formats. click Training Files. You then sketch additional walls to which you add dimensions and constraints. Import the DWG file 1 Before importing the DWG file. and double-click Level 2. verify that the Level 2 floor plan is open.

After you trace the walls. Sketching Structural Walls | 905 . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. and select Origin to origin. “Sketching Structural Walls” on page 905. 7 Click Open. Display the Structural tab of the Design Bar 1 If the structural tab is not displayed. select Automatically place. you use the linked DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. This file is used in the next exercise. right-click in the Design Bar and click Structural. Select All for Layers.■ ■ Select Current view only. In this exercise. Sketching Structural Walls In this exercise. 5 Under Layer/Level Colors. click Save As. you turn off the visibility of the DWG file. Structural_tutorial. This project file is required for all subsequent exercises in this tutorial. select Invert colors. The DWG file is displayed on the Level 2 floor plan. 6 Under Positioning.rvt.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. and add the remaining structural walls to the building model. you imported a DWG file. 8 On the File menu. to trace the initial set of structural walls. 9 Navigate to a folder of your choice and save the project as Structural_tutorial.

8 Move the cursor over the top right intersection of the line. click Structural Wall. In the steps that follow. 3 Draw a zoom region around the upper set of lines. click Zoom ➤ Zoom in Region. 4 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Basic Wall: Generic . rather than the height. This requires the bottom of the primary view range to be set to the level below in order to see the walls as you sketch them. 5 In the Type Selector. specify the following: ■ Select Depth. 7 Begin the first wall by selecting the intersection of the upper left corner of the line chain. you add a structural wall by specifying the depth of the wall. ■ ■ ■ Select Chain. their Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Bearing. you sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. In addition.200mm. 6 On the Options Bar. First. Select Finish Face: Exterior for Loc Line. and click to specify the wall endpoint. 906 | Chapter 24 Structural . Structural walls differ from non-structural walls in several ways.Sketch structural walls by tracing the DWG 2 On the View menu. Click .

12 On the Design Bar. 13 On the View toolbar. and click to specify the next wall endpoint.9 Move the cursor downward to the next line intersection. 10 Move the curser to the right. click . and click the next line intersection. click Modify to finish the sketch. Sketching Structural Walls | 907 . 11 Move the cursor to the top of the line chain until a reference plane displays indicating the cursor is on a parallel plane with the slanted wall on the left. and click to complete the chain of walls.

On the Options Bar. expand Views (all). 15 Zoom around the second chain of lines. When you reach the endpoint on the lower right corner of the chain. zoom in to ensure you select the intersection of the imported lines and grid C. you can spin the model in a 3D view by clicking View tools to modify the 3D view. expand Floor Plans. and double-click Level 2. ■ Begin the wall chain by clicking the lower left intersection where the end of the line chain adjoins grid C. notice that the wall options you used previously are still selected. ■ ■ 908 | Chapter 24 Structural .TIP If necessary. Click each exterior line intersection in a clockwise direction. sketch a chain of walls over the path highlighted in the following illustration. 17 Using the bulleted steps below. 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. in the View toolbar. click Structural Wall. Use the Dynamic 14 In the Project Browser.

click Visibility/Graphics. double-click Level 2. 22 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Imported Categories tab. 25 In the Type Selector.18 On the Design Bar. clear m_Wall_Import. select Basic Wall: Generic . 21 On the View menu. Unselected categories are not visible in the referenced view. click . specify the following: ■ ■ Clear Chain. click Structural Wall. ■ Sketching Structural Walls | 909 .200mm. Sketch additional structural walls 24 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 26 On the Options Bar. Select Wall Centerline for Loc Line. click Modify to end the wall chain. Click to create a three-point arc. Turn off the DWG visibility 20 In the Project Browser. 23 Under Visibility.dwg and click OK. under Floor Plans. 19 On the View toolbar.

31 Add a vertical wall between the two horizontal walls as shown. This is the left extent of the arc. 30 Move the cursor to the right until it intersects with the slanted wall on the right. 29 Add a horizontal wall beginning at the midpoint of the left vertical wall as shown. Move the cursor upward and specify an arc radius of 180 degrees. Select the right endpoint of the horizontal wall. This is the right extent of the arc. 28 On the Options Bar. ■ ■ ■ Select the endpoint of the left vertical wall. click . 910 | Chapter 24 Structural .27 Follow the sequence of steps in the illustration below to add a 180 degree three point arc.

If it is not. and press Enter. 34 Select the horizontal wall. click the temporary dimension value between it and grid C. click Modify. enter 1500. 33 Select the vertical wall you added in the previous step and make sure the temporary dimension between the wall and the centerline of the left vertical wall is equal to 1500 mm. click the value.32 On the Design Bar. and press ENTER. Sketching Structural Walls | 911 . enter 1500.

38 Draw the 1200 mm wall parallel to the adjoining wall as shown.35 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. you create the final structural walls for the project. Both walls are 1200 mm long. Create the final structural walls 37 Begin the first wall on the endpoint and wall centerline shown in the illustration below. clear Chain. In the steps that follow. click Structural Wall and on the Options Bar. 912 | Chapter 24 Structural . 36 On the Design Bar.

you dimension the structural walls and add an equality constraint to the dimension to keep the walls equidistant. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls In this exercise. You also reposition the walls to see how they adapt to changes in the design. In the next exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. click Save. You then make minor modifications to their position. 42 On the File menu. Begin the wall at the top of the right vertical wall and draw it inward so that it is parallel with the wall you sketched in the previous steps. Add an aligned dimension 1 In the Project Browser. click Modify. Structural_tutorial. click . 40 On the Design Bar.rvt. you add dimensions and equality constraints to the walls. 41 On the View toolbar. This project file is required. After turning off the visibility of the linked DWG. “Dimensioning and Modifying Walls” on page 913. in its current state.39 Create an additional 1200 mm wall as shown. under Views (all). you added the remaining structural walls required for this building model. Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 913 . Floor Plans. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this exercise. you used the DWG file to trace the initial set of structural walls. 2 Zoom around the lower set of walls. double-click Level 2.

Select Wall Centerlines for Prefer. select it. the Options button becomes available.3 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. and when it highlights. click Options to specify the wall pick options. and click OK. 914 | Chapter 24 Structural . In the Auto Dimension Options dialog. Create an equality constraint 7 On the Design Bar. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. 6 Move the cursor to the left. 5 Move the cursor over the left vertical wall. click Modify. specify the following: ■ ■ ■ Select . and click to place the dimension as shown. Select Entire Walls for Pick. After you select Entire Walls. click Dimension. select Intersecting Walls. 4 On the Options Bar.

Dimensioning and Modifying Walls | 915 . Modify wall position 10 Select the upper horizontal wall as shown.8 Select the dimension you added in the previous steps. 9 Click the EQ symbol to make each of the segments equal.

916 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Save. Adding Structural Columns and Beams In this lesson. click Undo Edit Dimension Length.11 Click the temporary dimension value. and purlins to complete the Level 1 structure. joists. in its current state. 13 On the File menu. This project file is required. to continue with the next lesson in this tutorial. “Adding Structural Columns and Beams” on page 916. In this exercise. you added a dimension to the structural walls and used an equality constraint to keep the walls equidistant. and enter 4000 for the distance between the wall centerline and grid B. several different beam types. you add structural columns and different beam types to the building model. 12 On the Edit menu. In the next lesson. You also repositioned the walls and observed how they adapted to the change in the design. you add structural columns. Notice the horizontal walls remain equally spaced.

and you add a column outside the grids. if the column orientation is not similar to the callout shown below. you use the grid intersection tool. 2 On the View menu. Add columns to grid intersections manually 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 1. Structural_tutorial. If necessary. 6 Add a column to C1 as shown. In addition. select Height and specify Level 2. you rotate columns by pressing the SPACEBAR when necessary. zoom in to place the column. click Structural Column. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. 5 On the Options Bar.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. Adding Structural Columns | 917 .Adding Structural Columns In this exercise. select M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80. TIP When adding the column. you use several different methods to add structural columns: you manually select grid intersections. press the SPACEBAR to rotate the column. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. Dataset This exercise requires the project file.

and C5. and select grids 1-5.7 Add similar columns to C2. Add columns using selected grid intersections 8 On the Options Bar. click Grid Intersection. This option allows you to place columns at the intersections of selected column grids. 918 | Chapter 24 Structural . C3. and A. 9 Use a crossing selection.

Columns A3-5 are shown below. 10 Notice columns are added to A1-5. Rotate the columns 11 Press the SPACEBAR. 13 Press the SPACEBAR until the columns return to their original position. specify a point under grid A and to the right of grid 5. Notice the columns rotate until they are parallel with grid A. 12 Press the SPACEBAR again. and drag your cursor up and to the left as shown below. All of the columns on grid A rotate until they are parallel with the vertical grids.TIP To create the crossing selection. Adding Structural Columns | 919 .

click Modify. 23 Add a M_W-Wide Flange-Column: W250x80 between B4 and C5. 18 If the columns are not aligned as in the illustration below. This completes this set of columns. zoom out until you can see all the grids. Add a column outside of the grid 22 On the Design Bar. press the SPACEBAR to rotate them. click Grid Intersection. Columns B3-5 are shown below. 17 Create a crossing selection that includes B1-5. The column should be 4200 mm to the left of grid 5. click Finish. That is why you finished the first set and then reentered the grid intersection mode to add columns B1-5. click Structural Column. Although you could have added columns B1-5 with the first set of columns. 19 On the Options Bar. Add columns B1-5 16 On the Options Bar.14 If necessary. 20 On the Design Bar. 15 On the Options Bar. 920 | Chapter 24 Structural . you could not have rotated them independently of each other. and 6900 mm below the exterior face of the horizontal wall above it. click Finish. TIP Notice that as you rotate these columns using the SPACEBAR. the columns on A1-5 do not rotate. 21 Select column A5 and delete it.

you add beams manually. “Adding Structural Beams and Girders” on page 921. you add structural beams to the building model. In this exercise. Adding Structural Beams and Girders In this exercise. This project file is required. 26 On the File menu. click Save. click Modify. and use the grid tools to add beams automatically. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 921 . Different structural conditions exist within the building model that require specific beam conditions. 25 On the View toolbar. you used various methods to add structural columns. As you use the beam tool. In the next exercise. and you rotate the columns using the SPACEBAR. you learn how to work with these varied conditions.24 On the Design Bar. click . in its current state.

3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. Add beams using point-to-point insertion 1 In the Project Browser. 8 Zoom around the upper set of walls as shown. Structural_tutorial. 7 On the Design Bar. 2 On the View menu. under Floor Plans.Dataset This exercise requires the project file. you specify the start and endpoint of the beam. To add a beam using point-to-point insertion. 922 | Chapter 24 Structural . double-click Level 2. 4 In the Type Selector. 5 Zoom around the right side of the building model. click Modify.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click Zoom ➤ Zoom to Fit. 6 Add a beam between the column shown below and the horizontal wall above it. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. Start the beam at the column midpoint and move your cursor up until it connects with the wall centerline. click Beam.

Column Brace Horizontal Bracing Horizontal Bracing Other Horizontal Bracing Girder Joist Purlin Other Column* Girder Other Girder Joist Purlin Other Brace Horizontal Brace Girder Joist Purlin Other Other Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Other Horizontal Bracing Joist Purlin Other Horizontal Bracing Purlin Purlin Purlin Other Other Other Other Other Other *Structural walls produce the same result as columns. 10 In the Type Selector. if a beam is joined column-to-column. Use the grid tool to add beams between columns 13 In the Type Selector. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. click Beam. click Grid. For example. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32. 15 Create a crossing selection that includes grids 1 and 2. 11 On the Options Bar. the Structural Usage parameter of each beam is automatically specified depending on the join conditions. 12 Add a beam between the midpoint of the structural wall shown and grid A. When you use the grid tool to place beams.9 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. select Girder for Usage. and then move the cursor up to grid A. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 923 . Use the following table for other conditions. 14 On the Options Bar. the Structural Usage parameter is automatically set to Girder. TIP Select the midpoint of the wall first.7.

click Beam. Add beams to an intersecting structural wall 20 Select the structural wall that spans grids 3 and 4. press and hold CTRL. click Finish. 17 On the Options Bar. 924 | Chapter 24 Structural . click the temporary dimension value. click Modify.16 Notice that beams are added at the grids and connected to each column. 22 In the Type Selector. enter 8200. 21 On the Design Bar. and select grid C. and press ENTER. 18 On the Design Bar. 23 On the Options Bar. click Grid. 19 Zoom in the upper-right quadrant of the building model. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67. 24 Select grid 3.

■ ■ ■ ■ Click column C5 to start the beam chain. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 925 . Click column B5 to add the first beam. refer to the following steps and illustration to add two beams to grid 5. notice that beams connect to the structural walls that intersect grids. Add a chain of beams 26 On the Options Bar. click Finish. In addition. select Chain. select Girder. Click the intersection of grid 5 and the structural wall as shown to add the final beam in the chain. and for Usage.Notice beams are added between columns. Press ESC to end the chain. 25 On the Options Bar. 27 Using point-to-point insertion.

28 On the Options Bar. 926 | Chapter 24 Structural . Press ESC to end the chain. Press ESC to end the chain. 30 On the Options Bar. You can also use the shortcut key. 29 Add a beam between A4 and the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. connecting the column at B4. select Girder for Usage. and ending with the structural wall that intersects grid 4 as shown. make sure you select the intersection of the grid lines. SI. NOTE When you begin the beam chain at C4. to snap only to intersections. 31 Add a chain of beams beginning with the end of the structural wall at C4. select Girder for Usage. You may need to zoom in significantly to accomplish this.

and the W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 would have been two separate beams. The W310x67 beam spanning A3-4 supports the W310x32. it would have become the supporting beam because it was placed first.7 beam had crossed grid A. click Finish. 33 Select grid A. click Grid.Add beams that intersect other beams 32 On the Options Bar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 927 . 36 On the Options Bar.7 beam that intersects it perpendicularly. 35 Zoom around the beam between A3-4. click Grid. If the W310x32. 34 On the Options Bar.

select M_Concrete-Rectangular Beam: 200 x 500mm. 43 In the Type Selector. double-click Level 2. 928 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Finish. 42 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 39 On the View toolbar. under Floor Plans. 38 On the Options Bar.37 Select grid B. 45 Specify the beam start point at the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 4 as shown below. you use point-to-point insertion to add the beam between the two short wall segments that adjoin grid 4 and 5. 44 On the Options Bar. click Beam. In the steps that follow. select Girder for Usage. click . Add a concrete beam 40 In the Project Browser. 41 Zoom around the upper structural walls between A4-5.

Notice the concrete beam you added in the previous step.46 Move the cursor to the right. and click the endpoint of the short wall segment adjacent to grid 5 as shown below. 47 On the Design Bar. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 929 . click Modify. click . 48 On the View toolbar. enter SE (shortcut key for endpoints).

55 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. you add two W310x67 beams parallel to the wall that intersects grid 3. for Usage. select Girder. 52 In the Type Selector. and select Chain. double-click Level 2. 930 | Chapter 24 Structural . under Floor Plans. and click when it intersects grid 2. 51 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 54 Begin the beam chain by selecting the intersection of the wall and grid 3. In the steps that follow. click Beam. 50 Zoom around the A1-B3 region.Add remaining girders 49 In the Project Browser. 53 On the Options Bar. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x67.

Press ESC twice to end the beam placement mode. and click when it intersects grid 1. Adding Structural Beams and Girders | 931 .56 Move the cursor to the left and parallel to the wall. 57 On the View toolbar. click .

Do not worry about the exact placement at this time. Add the beam a few feet to the right of grid one. while allowing the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. select Automatic. Adding Joists and Purlins In this exercise. Add a W-Wide Flange joist 1 In the Project Browser. 2 Zoom around the A1 . In this exercise.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You then create a joist array. when you use the automatic beam tool to add beams between joists. select M_W-Wide Flange: W310x32.58 On the File menu. in its current state. This project file is required. you add joists and purlins to the building model. 4 In the Type Selector. 932 | Chapter 24 Structural . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 6 Add one beam between the A1-2 girder and the parallel girder below it. You used the grid tool to add beams to selected grids and learned how varied structural conditions affect the outcome of the automatically placed beams. for Usage. You begin by adding W-Wide Flange joists. Structural_tutorial. you add joists and purlins to the building model. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. under Floor Plans. the structural usage of the beams is automatically set to purlin. you added beams and girders using the point-to-point insertion method.B3 quadrants. In the next exercise. For example.7. click Save. and their display within the plan view adjusts accordingly. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. double-click Level 2. click Beam. “Adding Joists and Purlins ” on page 932. 5 On the Options Bar.

Modify the temporary dimension value if necessary. Adding Joists and Purlins | 933 . click Modify. The beam needs to be 1250 mm right of grid 1. 10 In the Element Properties dialog. under Structural. any beam added between two girders becomes a joist when the Automatic option is selected. 9 With the beam selected. click on the Options Bar. Create a joist array 12 With the joist selected. on the Edit menu. 8 Select the beam you added in the previous steps. 11 Click OK. This value was set automatically because when you created the beam. click Array. notice that the Structural Usage value is Joist.7 On the Design Bar. you selected the Automatic option. According to the table shown at the beginning of this lesson.

Make sure the cursor is over grid A. 14 Click the intersection of the upper extent of the joist and grid A as shown to specify the array start point. Select 2nd for Move to. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Once the direction is set. Enter 14 for Number. 934 | Chapter 24 Structural . 15 Move the cursor to the right and parallel to grid A.13 On the Options Bar. This creates an array of 14 joists that are parallel to grid A. enter 1250 and press ENTER. specify the following: Click .

click Beam. 17 Add a beam from the midpoint of the first joist to the right of grid 2 that stretches perpendicularly to the next joist on the right as shown.Add purlins 16 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 18 Zoom in around the area surrounding the purlin. Adding Joists and Purlins | 935 .

Their display in plan view is dependent on their Structural Usage parameter value. and click. Enter 7 for Number. Select 2nd for Move to. 19 Select the purlin you created in the previous steps. click Array. and color within the Object Styles dialog. 21 On the Options Bar. NOTE You can control the structural framing line weight. 22 Click the endpoint of the left joist as shown to specify the array start point. specify the following: Click . and purlins. 936 | Chapter 24 Structural . 20 On the Edit menu. style. 23 Move the cursor to the endpoint of the next joist on the right. ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate.Notice the difference between the line weights and patterns of the girders. joists.

25 On the Options Bar. 26 In the Filter dialog. click . 28 In the Element Properties dialog.The purlins array along the midpoints of the joists. click . and click OK. Turn on connection symbol visibility 24 Zoom in around the structural framing below A1-2. under Other. and create a crossing selection that includes all the structural framing members in this portion of the view. 27 On the Options Bar. change the following instance parameters: ■ Select Moment Connection Last. clear all options except Structural Framing (Girder) and Structural Framing (Joist). Adding Joists and Purlins | 937 .

In the next lesson. 31 On the File menu.■ ■ Select Moment Connection First. you added different joist types and allowed the automatic beam tool to assign the Structural Usage parameter value depending on the join conditions. and notice the connection symbols display. Click OK. In this exercise. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. This project file is required. This technique saves significant design time and ensures consistency on each level. and adjust the view until it resembles the image below. click Save. 30 On the View toolbar. you create new levels and copy the level one structure to the upper levels of the building model. 938 | Chapter 24 Structural . “Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels” on page 938. You then copy the entire structure that you have designed up to this point and use the paste-align command to create the structure on the upper levels. click . in its current state. Copying Level 1 Structure to Upper Levels In this lesson. click Modify. 29 On the Design Bar. you create new levels.

Structural_tutorial. click Level. select Make Plan View. 6 Sketch the new level line 3000 mm above Level 2 as shown below using the following steps: ■ ■ ■ Click the level line starting point 3000 mm above the left extent of Level 2. These levels are required in the next exercise where you copy the existing structural components to the new levels. Create three new levels 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Building Elevation. 3 Drag the upper grid control up to move the grid heads out of the way of the new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. under Elevations. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 2 Select grid 1. You need at least 3 meters of space. you create several new levels. 4 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Defining New Levels | 939 . Click to add Level 3. Move the cursor over the right extent of Level 2.Defining New Levels In this exercise. 5 On the Options Bar.

“Duplicating the Existing Design” on page 940.In the Project Browser. Structural_tutorial. you created three new levels.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. click . 940 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Save. These levels that are required in the next exercise. 7 Repeat the steps above to create Levels 4 and 5 as shown. in its current state. Each level is 3000 mm high. This technique saves you significant time compared to manually recreating the design on each level. Duplicating the Existing Design In this exercise. notice that the Level 3 floor plan is displayed. you copy the structural elements and use the paste-align command to add them to the new levels. In this exercise. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Copy the structural elements 1 On the View toolbar. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. where you copy the structural elements and paste align them to the new levels. This project file is required. 8 On the File menu.

click Paste Aligned ➤ Select Levels by Name. click OK. 8 On the File menu. and select Levels 4 and 5. Make sure the entire building model is included. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you copied the existing structural elements on Level 1 and used the paste-align command to create the structural framing on the upper levels. In this exercise. Duplicating the Existing Design | 941 . 5 In the Select Levels dialog. 7 In the Project Browser. press and hold CTRL. 6 In the Select Levels dialog. click Save. under Elevations. This project file is required. select Level 3. click Copy to Clipboard.2 Draw a selection box around the entire design. you create a framing elevation in order to add structural braces. Paste the structural components on the new levels 4 On the Edit menu. Although you can select and copy the components from any view. “Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation” on page 942. In the next lesson. in its current state. 3 On the Edit menu. it is often easier and more certain to copy from a 3D view if your intent is to select the entire building model. double-click Building Elevation.

in the Project Browser. You use this elevation view in the next exercise to place structural braces. at the midpoint between grids 2 and 3. Elevation 1-a.Adding Braces in a Framing Elevation In this lesson. under Floor Plans. 4 On the Options Bar. click Modify. 5 Place the cursor over grid C. Dataset This exercise requires the project file. 3 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. 942 | Chapter 24 Structural . click Framing Elevation. Structural_tutorial. 2 Zoom out so you can see the entire building model. you create a framing elevation in order to provide a view in which to place structural bracing members. 6 On the Design Bar. you create a framing elevation. Create a framing elevation 1 In the Project Browser. double-click Level 2. Creating a Framing Elevation In this exercise. make sure Attach to Grid is selected.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. You can now view the new elevation. You then add C-channel bracing to one level and array it to the remaining levels. and click.

8 On the File menu. click Save. you add structural braces to the building model. Adding Structural Braces In the final exercise of this tutorial.7 Double-click the elevation head in order to open the view. This project file is required.rvt that you saved at the end of the previous exercise. In this exercise. In the next exercise. You begin by adding a set of braces to level 4. Adding Structural Braces | 943 . Dataset This exercise requires the project file. Structural_tutorial. Also notice that grid 3 is identified within the view. to continue with the subsequent exercises in this tutorial. you created an elevation view design specifically to add structural braces. Notice the stick framing representation. you add c-channel bracing to the building model. This is because the Detail Level of this view is automatically set to coarse. in its current state. You are ready to add the structural braces. You then array the braces to the remaining levels. “Adding Structural Braces” on page 943.

select the view crop box. 944 | Chapter 24 Structural . 3 In the Type Selector. selectM_ C-Channel: C75x7. Also select grids 2 and 3 and drag them until they appear as shown. When adding the braces. ■ ■ SM: Snap only to midpoints of objects. 4 Enter SE and click the beam endpoint below the intersection of grid 2 and Level 4.4. drag the left and right extents until you can see the grid heads for 2 and 3 as shown. Because it is often necessary to make sure you snap to the endpoints and midpoints. you should use the following snap shortcut keys when applicable.Expand the view extents 1 Before adding the braces. SE: Snap only to endpoints of objects. 5 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5. and using the shape grips. 2 On the Structural tab of the Design Bar. you use point-to-point insertion. click Brace.

Adding Structural Braces | 945 . The second brace is displayed.The brace displays. 7 Enter SE and click the endpoint below the intersection of grid 3 and Level 4. 6 Enter SM and click the midpoint of the girder located on Level 5.

11 On the Options Bar. 13 Click the intersection of Level 4 and grid 2 to specify the array endpoint. 946 | Chapter 24 Structural . Select Constrain. click Array. 14 On the Drafting tab of the Design Bar. 9 Select both braces on Level 4. click Modify. specify the following: Click . click Tag All Not Tagged. 12 Click the intersection of Level 5 and grid 2 to specify the array start point. The braces are arrayed to Level 1. Select 2nd for Move to. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Clear Group and Associate. Enter 4 for Number.Array the braces 8 On the Design Bar. 10 On the Edit menu.

click Save. you added structural braces to the design and created a brace array.15 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. 17 On the File menu. click . and click OK. In this exercise. 16 On the View toolbar. Adding Structural Braces | 947 . select Structural Framing Tags.

948 | Chapter 24 Structural .

team members adding and changing elements in worksets can save their work to a local file on the network or their own hard drive and publish work to a central file whenever they choose. stairs. All other team members can view this workset. 949 . floors. Using Worksharing. This involves simultaneously working on and saving different portions of the project at the same time. A workset is a collection of building elements. You can enable Worksharing for any project.Sharing Projects 25 When working with large building projects. If you need to modify an element that belongs to a workset that someone else is actively working on. They can update their local files at any time in order to see the changes other team members have published. doors. you learn how to use Worksharing to divide a project into worksets so multiple users can access the project and have all their changes coordinated by Revit Architecture 2008. however. they cannot make changes to it. architects commonly work in teams with each person assigned to a specific functional area. you can borrow that element without requiring the workset owner to relinquish control of the entire workset. such as walls. called Worksharing. In this tutorial. This prevents possible conflicts within the project. Only one user can edit each workset at a given time. and so on.

you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing application. Elements specific to a view. You learn what to consider before enabling and using Worksharing. Using Worksharing in a Project In this lesson. Working in a shared project In a shared project. use Element Borrowing. In the next exercise. you learn the fundamentals of Worksharing. you can select which worksets are open or closed. are automatically assigned to the view workset of the current view. You can close or open worksets at any time using the Worksets dialog. a dialog displays allowing you to set up the initial sharing of the project. Each workset can only be editable by one user at a time. you specify an active workset. such as annotations and dimensions. Elements in closed worksets are not read from disk until they are required. you learn how to work as an individual with the central and local project files. When you are working on a shared project. you learn some of the strategies that maximize your use of worksets. This reduces the time it takes to open the file and the amount of memory it uses. After learning the fundamentals. You gain valuable practical experience setting up a project for worksets and working within that project. After the project is shared. The first time you activate worksets within a project. you must first enable Worksharing. To make a workset editable. each building element in the project is contained in exactly one workset. You then learn how to work within a Worksharing-enabled project with multiple users and borrow particular elements from other users.Overview Sharing a project for the first time To share a project. Project size 950 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . You can improve the display-related performance of Revit Architecture by opening only those worksets required for your work. Establishing practical policies on how all team members access and create new worksets in the project will maintain performance for existing users and ease the process of introducing new team members to the project. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals In this conceptual exercise. Increasing performance using selective open When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. select the desired workset. and click Editable. You can change the workset assignment of any modeling element within the property dialog for that element. When setting up Worksharing. go to the Worksets dialog. you should take several considerations into account: General Considerations: ■ ■ ■ ■ Project size Team size Team member roles Default workset visibility You can maximize long-term project performance more easily if you plan Worksharing appropriately and use the feature correctly. In the lessons and exercises that follow. You learn the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios. When planning a Worksharing-enabled project The decisions you make when sharing a project and setting up its worksets can have long-lasting effects on the project team. you can only make changes to the worksets that are editable by you. This includes how to plan and execute the use of worksets in a project in order to maximize project and team performance. If you only need to modify a single element within a workset that someone else has checked out. Any new model elements are automatically assigned to the active workset. you enable Worksharing within a project and set up the initial workset environment.

the worksets they add often do not need to be visible by default. make sure visibility defaults are set appropriately. This project file should incorporate as many office/project standards as possible and it should include many of the families required by the project. and View worksets. When you create a new workset. with each assigned a specific functional task. You should have at least one workset for each person. the project coordinator should create the additional worksets required by the team. Unlike AutoCAD Xrefs. such as a tenant interior. each team member has control over a portion of the design. Notice that the workset names refer to functional roles. Team size You should take into consideration the size of the project team at the time you enable Worksharing. a Worksets tab displays on the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Experience has shown that. Step 1: Start the project with one user One user starts to work on the project. Step 3: Create additional worksets After enabling Worksharing. When creating the new worksets. you can change the visibility setting in the Visibility/Graphics dialog. On this tab. TIP As new team members create new worksets for their own use. Long-term performance is improved if new worksets are not visible by default unless they need to be. Understanding Worksharing Fundamentals | 951 . Conceptual stages of project sharing The following steps explain the basic stages of project sharing. you can turn off the visibility of that workset within that view. Team size usually increases as the project progresses from the design stage to the documentation stage. Step 2:Activate Worksharing After the building model is ready for multiple user access. Default workset visibility After a project has been shared. designers work in teams. Regardless of the default setting. The building model should also reach a reasonable point of development before you enable Worksharing. In a multi-story structure. the project coordinator should enable Worksharing. As new members create worksets for their own use. Instead. you decide whether or not the elements in that workset are visible by default in each view. you could create separate worksets for a set of building elements that will only appear on one floor. Shared Levels and Grids. A typical scenario for a multi-story commercial building is shown in the following illustration. If you are sure that the elements of a particular workset should not appear in a view. greater subdivision improves workflow by reducing interference between team members. you may want to create separate worksets for each portion. for a typical project. you do not need to make separate worksets for each floor of the building. If the project floor plan is so large that you need to split it with match lines to fit it on sheets. you control workset visibility on a per view basis. remember to create worksets for functional roles and properly assign default visibility.The size of your building may affect the way you decide to segment the worksets for your team. In most projects. not including the Project Standards. you should separate the project into worksets that allow team members to work without interfering with each other. the optimum number of worksets is approximately four for each team member. By subdividing the project based on these task roles. Team member roles Typically. This allows Revit Architecture to display the view faster because computing time is not spent figuring out if the element belongs to a workset that should be displayed.

proceeds as usual. On the Options Bar. you can select which workset is active. they are not propagated to the rest of the team. Step 10: Saving your changes As you work on the project throughout the day. the file is saved as the central file. it is essential that you save the central file to a location accessible to all team members. This is called “Selective Open. Step 8: Check out worksets from the central file When you “check out” a workset. Generally. Step 5: Create the central file The first time you save a project after Worksharing has been enabled. After saving to the central file. each user saves their changes back to the central file where the changes can be propagated to all team members. This makes them available to other team members. As you work. When you save to the central file. When you save locally (to your local file). your changes propagate to the entire team. you should relinquish any worksets that you no longer need. you make that workset editable by you. For example. however. you should save the file locally and to the central file at regular intervals. The central file coordinates and propagates the changes of each user and keeps track of which worksets are available. Tips and common scenarios 1 When working on a Worksharing-enabled project. Local files are user-specific and can only be accessed by the users that created them. Step 11: Closing a local file At the end of a work session. you can shorten the time required to open the file by selecting to open only the worksets required to complete your assigned tasks. There is no limit to the number of worksets you can have editable at one time. Step 9:Work on the project Work on the project. if a workset named Interior was created.” When opening a Worksharing-enabled project. 952 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . your changes are saved. within the local file.Step 4: Subdivide the building model into worksets After you have created the initial worksets. the central file is not a file that a team member would open and work in directly. The tips discussed below provide useful information for working creatively with worksets. you would want to assign the interior walls and other interior components to that workset. you must assign building model elements to their respective workset. This gives you the right to make changes to the elements in the workset and to add to the workset. you can still work remotely as an individual and as a team. you have the option to choose which worksets to open. no other users can make modifications to any elements in those worksets until you check them back into the central file. You can make a workset active only if it is editable by you. When you save to the central file. This ensures that your local file is synchronized with the central file. Any changes that other users have made to the building model become visible to you after you save to the central file or when you select Reload Latest. new building elements are assigned to the workset that is active at the moment. you should save to the central file and relinquish control of all worksets that you set as editable. Step 7: Open worksets Whenever you open a central or local file. Step 6: Create local files Each team member creates a local file that makes it possible to check out worksets and work on their respective portion of the building model. However. you should then save to your local file. Therefore. When finished or at regular intervals. You create a local file by opening the central file and using “Save As” to create a local copy of the central file.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. you enable Worksharing within an existing project. using VPN. you will not be able to save your changes back to the central file if another user has changed the same workset and already published those changes back to the central file. and open Common\c_Worksets. Multiple users working remotely 3 Users can work remotely provided the remote users have high-speed network access to the central file. If you choose Editable at Risk and the owner of the at-risk workset has already published their files to the central file. WARNING You should avoid editing a workset “at risk” whenever possible. and then save the local file. If the owner of the at-risk workset agrees to relinquish editability of the contested workset. and transfer the updated local file back to the remote user. you learned what to consider before enabling Worksharing. ■ If you realize that you need to modify elements in a workset that you did not make editable before going remote. If you have a colleague who is in the office with access to the central file. In the next exercise. you should use it only when: ■ ■ You do not intend to save your changes back to the central file. In this situation. Since making a workset Editable at Risk carries a high risk that work will be lost. Alternatively. you can make the workset Editable at Risk. you work no differently then you would in the office. In this instance. change the username to your name under Settings ➤ Options. reload the latest changes from the central file. you will lose the changes you made to all your worksets. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 953 . you can save your changes back to the central file but then the other owner loses all their work. save to the central file. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets In this exercise. or You are very confident that no other user will make that workset editable in your absence. a user can transfer a local file to someone with network access who can then publish the changes back to the central file." Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open.rvt. you will not only lose the changes to that workset. When working remotely. You can work on the project from a remote location by doing the following: ■ Before leaving the office and disconnecting from the networked access to the central file. You can modify any elements in an editable workset and all new elements are added to the active workset.Taking your computer to a remote location with the project 2 You do not need to have access to the central file in order to work on the project. Remote rendering 4 While rendering remotely using AccuRender® is supported. if you know who checked out the required workset. click Training Files. You can also add new elements to any View or Project Standards workset even if they are not editable. for instance. you should check out the Materials workset. you enable Worksharing in a project and set up some initial worksets. To do this. make any required worksets editable. it is not recommended unless you understand the implications for the rest of the team. This will guarantee that no other user can make it editable during the remainder of your absence. you will probably be changing material definitions and other project settings. You subdivide the project into worksets and save the project as the "Central File. and make that workset editable. you may want to request that someone start a session of Revit Architecture. If you intend to render the building model while away from the office. In this conceptual exercise. you may want to phone them and make arrangements rather than waste valuable work time. This means that other team members will not be able to change any materials while you have the Materials workset checked out. You learned the basic steps of project sharing as well as tips for dealing with common workplace scenarios.

In this case. Do not change your username during this exercise unless explicitly instructed to do so. The Worksets dialog is displayed. It also informs you that existing elements in your project move to a default workset.Enable Worksharing 1 On the File menu. ■ 6 Under Show. Revit Architecture creates new worksets and moves project elements and settings into the new worksets: ■ ■ Families: Loaded families in the project move into separate worksets. 954 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . For training purposes. In this simple training project. select: ■ ■ ■ Families Project Standards Views 5 Scroll down the list of workset names. Project Standards. 3 Notice that all worksets are open and editable by you. For example. another is assigned the interior layout. click Worksets. you must create worksets that allow each team member to work independently. Only User-Created worksets should display. Project Standards: All project-wide settings defined from the Settings menu move to Project Standards worksets. imagine four users including yourself. Therefore. TIP You can change your username by selecting Options under the Settings menu. A confirmation dialog displays indicating that you are about to enable Worksharing. a small number of team members are working on the building model. The project must be subdivided in such a way as to reflect the tasks of each user. 2 Click OK to accept the default workset name. 4 In the Worksets dialog. When you enable worksharing. under Show. and the remainder of the team must work on wall section details. and Views. Floor Plan Level 1 view moves into a workset called View: "Floor Plan Level 1". Your username displays as the present owner. Views: Each view moves into a separate View workset. a third team member is assigned furniture placement. one user is assigned to the development of the exterior. clear Families. You cannot change your username with an unsaved Worksharing-enabled project open. and notice all are editable by you.

furniture components have not been added to the building model and therefore do not need to be moved to the respective workset. click OK. Rather than create a new workset for these elements. all building model elements are placed into Workset1 by default. it is better to make them visible by default. In this training file. Because you renamed Workset1 to Exterior Shell. This improves performance since fewer components need to be generated in each view. 21 Select one of the interior walls. Notice that Visible by default in all views is checked. and click OK. 15 In the Worksets dialog. 22 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Worksets dialog. 10 Click New. and click OK You have created the required worksets for each team member working on this project. all building model elements are assigned to that workset. The next workset you create is for the furniture layout. clear Visible by default in all views. 14 In the Rename dialog. and click OK. 23 In the Element Properties dialog. select any of the exterior walls of the building model. and walls. currently named Workset1. type the name Exterior Shell. under Identity Data. you should turn off Visible by default in all views. Because the interior walls appear in many views. however. This is why all worksets are editable immediately after you enable worksets. 24 Select all of the interior elements. notice that the Workset parameter is set to Exterior Shell. 11 Enter Furniture Layout. expand Views (all). 17 In the drawing area. 8 Enter the name Interior Layout. 20 Click OK. Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets | 955 . select Workset1. select Interior Layout for Workset. expand Floor Plans. click . need to reassign the interior elements to the Interior Layout workset. click New. 9 Click OK. Subdividing the project into worksets 16 In the Project Browser. click . The next step is to assign elements within the building model to specific worksets. stairs. including the interior doors. When you initially activate Worksharing. You do. and double-click Level 1. 19 In the Element Properties dialog. The final new workset is for the exterior shell of the building model. under Identity Data. you can rename the default workset. Because furniture should only be visible in specific views.Creating new worksets 7 In the Worksets dialog. 13 Click Rename. 18 On the Options Bar.

click Visibility/Graphics. The Level 1 floor plan should display with only the exterior shell visible. 25 On the Options Bar. 29 Clear Interior Layout to turn off the visibility of that workset in the view. Notice that the visibility of the Furniture Layout workset is turned off in this view. click . You can verify that all interior elements have been reassigned to the Interior Layout workset by turning off the visibility of that workset. click Visibility/Graphics. select Interior Layout for Workset. 27 On the View menu. 26 In the Element Properties dialog. under Identity Data. 31 On the View menu. Hold Shift down to deselect an element. 32 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. TIP You can also hold CTRL down to select multiple elements. select them and change their workset assignment to Interior Layout. This is because you turned off “Visible by default in all views” when you created the workset. and click OK.The easiest way to do this is to drag a pick box beginning inside the lower right corner and up to the upper left corner. 28 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click the Worksets tab. 956 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click the Worksets tab. 30 Click OK. If any interior elements remain.

34 In the Project Browser. 35 In the drawing area. and click OK. 45 On the File menu. you must relinquish workset editability so that other users can have access to the worksets they need. under Open Worksets. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file created in the previous exercise. Checking in the worksets 41 On the File menu. Notice that your name has been removed as the owner of the worksets and all Editable values are set to No. double-click Level 2. and then assigned building model elements to the worksets. created new worksets to accommodate each team member. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. click Non Editable. 36 On the Options Bar. click . click Open. “Enabling Worksharing and Setting Up Worksets” on page 953. In this exercise. under Views (all). and publish your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. 39 In the Save As dialog. 37 In the Element Properties dialog. please do so before continuing. under Floor Plans. In addition. Navigate to a location on a network drive that all team members have access to. Working Individually with Worksets | 957 . make modifications to the building model. but be sure not to save the file in the training files location. 43 On the right side of the dialog. 42 In the Worksets dialog. This exercise requires the completion of the previous exercise and access to the resulting central file. enter Worksets Project-Central as the file name.33 Select Interior Layout. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. select Interior Layout for Workset. you create your local file. check out worksets. 2 In the Open dialog. click Worksets. If you do not have access to a network and still want to complete that exercise. under Identity Data. You then created the central file and checked in all worksets. select all of the interior elements of the building model. Create the central file 38 On the File menu. click Save As. The central file is created automatically the first time you save the project after enabling worksets. If you have not yet completed the exercise. 3 Click Open. 40 Click Save. You must access it in each of the remaining exercises. you enabled Worksharing on a project. select all the User-Created worksets by pressing CTRL + A. If you intend on completing the remaining exercises in this tutorial. make sure you remember the location of this central file. Now that you have created the central file. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Creating a local file 1 On the File menu. This is imperative if you and another user intend to complete the multi-user exercise later in this tutorial. 44 Click OK. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. This project is now ready for individuals to access it and check out their required worksets. this can be accomplished by saving the central file to your hard drive and changing your user name before accessing the project. select Specify. select the central file and. click Close. and click OK. Working Individually with Worksets In this exercise.

Before working on the model. 11 Click OK. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. you should activate the Worksets toolbar. click Toolbar ➤ Worksets. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 On the Worksets toolbar. you can only select editable elements within the drawing area. 17 On the Options Bar. In this case. and select Yes for Editable. select Interior Layout. and double-click Level 1. 958 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . click . Your name displays as the owner of the Interior Layout workset. The project sharing environment allows you to choose which worksets are opened during a working session. click Modify. notice the Editable Only option. 12 On the Window menu. and click OK. Checking out worksets 9 On the File menu. Any new elements that you add to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Verify that it is cleared. click Options. 15 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. expand Views (all). click Worksets. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. you are assigned the task of designing the interior layout of the building model. 16 Select the upper exterior wall and notice a symbol displays indicating that the element belongs to a workset that is not currently editable. Next. On the Options Bar. and click OK. 6 In the Save As dialog.4 In the Opening Worksets dialog. expand Floor Plans. You are now ready to modify the interior layout of the building model. If this is selected. 7 In the File Save Options dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. 10 In the Worksets dialog. and click Save. select Interior Layout for Name. Only the worksets that are opened are visible during that session. 5 On the File menu. You have created a local file which is for your use only. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. click Save As. The Worksets toolbar displays with a drop-down list that allows you to specify the active workset.

and click OK. a message would display and you would have the option to cancel the change or make the element editable. you have borrowed the ownership of the upper exterior wall. 22 On the File menu. 29 Using the following illustration as a guide. 19 Under Constraints. 21 Click OK. notice that this element is assigned to the Exterior Shell workset and that the Edited by value is blank. Even though you have not checked out the Exterior Shell workset. but you are listed as a borrower of that workset. Because this element is not owned by another user. however.126mm Partition (2-hr). Modify the building model 24 Select the door on the right side of the corridor. add a horizontal wall in the lower right corner. 27 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. Working Individually with Worksets | 959 . Revit Architecture borrows it for you and applies your changes. In this case. click Worksets. the Edited by value is now assigned to you. 23 Click OK. 28 In the Type Selector. If it was owned by another user. The precise location is not important. Notice that the wall still belongs to the Exterior Shell workset. select Finish Face: Exterior for Location Line. click Wall. 20 On the Options Bar. click . select Basic Wall: Interior . you can still edit this wall. notice that you do not own the Exterior Shell workset.18 In the Element Properties dialog. and modify the length so that the corridor is open. In the Worksets dialog. 25 Delete the door. The upper exterior wall should still be selected. under Identity Data. 26 Select the wall that hosted the deleted door.

you should perform regular saves. save to central. 34 Using the following illustration as a guide. select: ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets 960 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . which matches the information in the Status Bar. and extend the lower end until it intersects the horizontal wall you added previously. In this particular case. If you place the cursor over any of the new elements. At the end of a work session. you can relinquish the user-created worksets as well as any borrowed elements. 36 In the Save to Central dialog.30 On the Design Bar. it is recommended. 32 On the Basics tab of the Design Bar. displays the workset as well as the element type. The Save to Central dialog is displayed with the path to the central file automatically filled in. Saving your work 35 On the File menu. 33 In the Type Selector. a tooltip. you should relinquish all worksets. select M_Sgl Flush: 864 x 2032mm. All of the new elements that you added were automatically assigned to the Interior Layout workset. Borrowed Elements is selected. and save locally immediately afterward. click Door. you borrowed the upper exterior wall in order to modify it. click Modify. Whenever you save. 31 Select the vertical interior wall in the upper right corner. It is recommended that you locally save your work approximately every 30 minutes and save to central every 1-2 hours. Although this is not a necessary option if you are in the middle of a work session. In addition. You should check this element back into central so that others can use it if necessary. notice that there is an option to save the local file immediately after the save to central. By default. click Save to Central. When working in your local file. add two door openings into the rooms you created.

and click OK. please do so before continuing. two users access the central file through a network connection. This exercise requires the completion of the previous workset exercises and access to the resulting local and central files. Creating a local copy 5 In this exercise. Regardless of which central file you choose to use. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. If you have not yet completed these exercises. and click OK. and borrowed an element from a workset you did not own. If both users have completed the previous worksets exercises and created central files on the network. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and check out worksets 6 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. under Open Worksets. 7 In the Open dialog. select one of those central files to be used in this exercise. a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. 3 On the Settings menu. select Specify. For training purposes. you created your local file. return to the Settings dialog. select all the User-Created worksets. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file.rvt. leave this file open in its current state.■ Save the local file after “Save to Central” 37 Click OK. two users work on the building model residing in the central file you created and saved in a previous exercise. User 2: Create a local file. each user must check out worksets. For training purposes. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. Throughout the remainder of this exercise. one user has already created a local file. In addition. instructions are staggered. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. You modified the building model. and refer explicitly to User 1 and User 2. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. skip the following section. click Open. The next series of steps create a local file for User 2. and reload the latest changes. select the central file and. If you intend to complete the remainder of this tutorial by proceeding to the multi-user exercise. 8 Click Open. The user who has not yet created a local file for the chosen central file is User 2. click Options. under Username. and published your changes back to the central file where other team members can see them. Using Worksets with Multiple Users In this exercise. make elements editable. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 4 Click the General Tab and. enter User 2. This is a system setting. and proceed to Creating a local copy. Throughout the process. checked out worksets. consider that person to be User 1. Using a second Revit Architecture session to mimic User 2 1 Minimize the current Revit Architecture window. specifically sequenced. Each modifies the building model within their local file and publishes it back to the central file where the other user can see the changes. In the following section of this exercise. 2 Start a new Revit Architecture session by double-clicking the Revit Architecture icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. and navigate to the location where you saved the central file named Worksets Project-Central. In this exercise. 9 In the Opening Worksets dialog. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 961 .

and double-click Level 1. If it is not open. 21 Select the Interior Layout workset. 13 Navigate to your preferred location on the hard drive. expand Floor Plans. click Worksets. A warning is displayed informing you that a conflict exists. Notice that the changes made by User 1 do not immediately display in the local file of User 2. You now have a local copy of the project. and select Yes for Editable. expand Views (all). A warning is displayed informing you that you cannot check out this workset because it is already checked out by another user. click Options. and select Yes for Editable.” 28 Click OK. 24 Select the vertical interior wall shown in the following illustration. 15 Select the Exterior Shell workset. If you only have one workset checked out. 26 On the File menu. expand Views (all).10 On the File menu. You are now the owner of that workset. 19 Try to change the Editable status for Exterior Shell to Yes. name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and click Save. and move it to the left until it approaches the centerline of the exterior double door on the south wall. and click OK. 14 On the File menu. User 1: Check out worksets. 962 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . 12 In the File Save Options dialog. Notice that you own this workset and the active workset is now Interior Layout. modify the building model. 20 Click OK to return to the Worksets dialog. That is because changes made to the central file display in local files only when the worksets are explicitly updated. 23 In the Project Browser. User 2: Modify the building model and publish changes 29 In the Project Browser. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. click Save to Central. and publish changes 17 User 1 should still have the local file open. 16 Click OK. it becomes the active workset. 22 Click OK. Notice that the Exterior Shell workset is checked out by User 2. 27 In the Save to Central dialog. This file is for your use only. 11 In the Save As dialog. expand Floor Plans. 18 On the File menu. open it now. click Worksets. 25 Click anywhere in the empty drawing area to ignore the warning. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. and double-click Level 1. click Save As.

44 In the Rename View dialog.” 38 Click OK. This is because windows are wall-hosted components and cannot float in the air without a wall to host them. However. 46 On the Modelling tab of the Design Bar. and check out additional worksets 39 On the File menu. and click Rename. Before adding any furniture. under Floor Plans. The wall conflict with the door opening that User 1 introduced now displays. and click OK. click Save to Central. click Reload Latest. and move it upward approximately 2 meters. right-click Copy of Level 1. under Views (all). Click Yes. any elements added to the building model are automatically assigned to the active workset. 33 In the Save to Central dialog. 32 On the File menu. and click OK. 42 On the Project Browser. and move the door to the right in order to avoid the conflict.30 Using the following illustration as a guide. under Floor Plans. select Yes for Editable. The changes User 2 made are apparent. A message displays warning you that several windows are not cutting anything. 45 On the Project Browser. 37 In the Save to Central dialog. enter Level 1 Furniture Plan. Even though the Furniture Layout workset is active. right-click Level 1. delete the left window on the lower exterior wall. under Floor Plans. and click Duplicate. 43 On the Project Browser. you still have complete access to the elements belonging to the Interior Layout workset. User 1: Reload latest worksets. Because you now have more than one workset checked out. you publish your changes and load the changes other users have made to the building model. you are asked if you want to make the Furniture Layout workset the active workset. select the lower exterior wall. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. 36 On the File menu.” 34 Click OK. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central. When you save to central. you should create a furniture plan view. Using Worksets with Multiple Users | 963 . 35 Using the following illustration as a guide. click Component. double-click Level 1 Furniture Plan. 41 Select Furniture Layout. click Worksets. 40 On the File menu. 31 Click Delete Instances to delete the windows. click Save to Central.

57 In the Element Properties dialog. 48 On the Design Bar. the visibility of the workset is not turned on even though it is checked out and is the active workset. such as Wall Types. 59 In the Rename dialog. 56 Right-click the upper exterior wall. click Reload Latest. 52 On the File menu. select Project Standards. rather than Families. and click OK. enter Exterior Wall . You should turn on the visibility before adding furniture. Notice the new Level 1 Furniture Plan view in the Project Browser. Notice you have borrowed a portion of the workset. the Visible by default option was not selected. click the Worksets tab. and click Properties. select Furniture Layout to turn on its visibility. 964 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . and click inside any room. 51 Notice that the desk you added previously now displays. 61 On the File menu. User 2: Make an element editable on the fly 55 On the File menu. click Worksets.” 54 Click OK. 58 In the Type Properties dialog. If you intend to complete the final portion of this tutorial by proceeding to the Element Borrowing exercise. 64 Click OK. click Modify. 65 On the File menu. 62 In the Worksets dialog. This is because when the Furniture Layout workset was created. 60 Click OK 3 times. Therefore. choose any desk. and click OK. 50 In the Visibility/Graphics dialog. select Save the Local File after “Save to Central.47 In the Type Selector. are placed under Project Standards. 63 Scroll down to the bottom of the list until you see Wall Types. click Rename. 66 In the Save to Central dialog. under Show. click Edit/New. 49 On the View menu. click Visibility/Graphics. 53 In the Save to Central dialog. click Save to Central. select: ■ ■ ■ Borrowed Elements User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” 67 Click OK. NOTE System families. A message displays informing you that the component you are trying to place is not visible in that view.200mm. leave this file open in its current state. click Save to Central.

a single user can complete this exercise by opening up an additional session of Revit Architecture and setting the username to User 2. “Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users” on page 965. 2 Navigate to a directory on the network that both users have access to. you need to set up your central and local files. Each user checked out worksets. and save 68 On the File menu.rvt. select the following. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users In this exercise. NOTE When you open the training dataset for this tutorial. throughout this training. select Make this a Central File after save. Each user must have network access to the central file. ■ ■ User-created Worksets Save the local file after “Save to Central” In this exercise. they are referred to as User 1 and User 2. you learn how to borrow elements from worksets that other users are actively working on. 5 Click Save. Checking out worksets. 70 In the Save to Central dialog. If you have not completed the previous workset exercises. click Training Files. Click OK to this message and subsequent messages. NOTE If you are working with a second user (User 2). and still have your local files open. proceed directly to the section Checking out worksets. and click OK. Although this exercise is designed specifically for two separate users with network access to the central file. finished the previous workset exercises. two users are working on the same project with separate local files. In the final exercise of this tutorial. leave this file open in its current state. This exercise requires two users and. and click OK. This exercise also requires two users and you can skip the first sections of the exercise and proceed directly to the section. 3 In the Save As dialog. two users worked on the same building model using worksets. click Options. instructions are provided on how to accomplish this. Save training file as the central file on the network 1 On the File menu. Only one user needs to open the dataset and save the central file to a network location.User 1: Reload latest. 4 In the File Save Options dialog. you may receive a message informing you that the central file has been relocated. 69 On the File menu. As each of you work. and published their changes back to the central file. you must borrow elements that belong to worksets that the other user has checked out. and these problems are rectified. and open Common\c_Worksets Project-Central. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 965 . modified the building model. select Reload Latest. click Save As. These messages are a result of the central file being relocated (to your PC). In the left pane of the Open dialog. You learn how to make borrowing requests and how to grant them. At the appropriate point in this exercise. Dataset ■ ■ Click File menu ➤ Open. you save the dataset as a central file. There are specific instructions for each user. If you intend to complete the final exercise of this tutorial. In subsequent steps. select Save to Central. You have created a new central file for User 1 and User 2.

Set the Username to User 2. In addition. 16 Select all the User-Created worksets. Only the worksets you select and any worksets already editable by you are opened. 8 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. select Specify. and click OK. Next. The central file should still be open. you check out worksets so you can modify the building model. 10 In the File Save Options dialog. the steps for each user have to be followed in sequence. and click Open. click Options. click Save As. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. 17 On the File menu. and reset the Username to your computer login name. click Options. This is the local file for User 1. and click OK. WARNING After completing this tutorial and closing the project file. User 2: Create local file 12 If you are a single user and want to replicate the multi-user experience. select them. and click Save. the user that saved the central file should be User 1. perform the following steps to create a session for User 2: ■ Start a second session of Revit Architecture by double-clicking the icon on the desktop or by selecting it from the Start menu. 11 Name the file Worksets Project_Local-User1. 15 Click Open. and click Save. click Save As. 18 In the Save As dialog. any referenced workset is opened but hidden. Using selective open allows you to choose which worksets you want to open. and click OK. click Open. 23 In the Worksets dialog. 19 In the File Save Options dialog. if any User-Created worksets are not open. Checking out worksets 21 Both User 1 and User 2 can check out their worksets at the same time. This is a system setting. This reduces the amount of time required to open very large project files and increases performance while you work. return to the Settings dialog. Click the General tab of the Options dialog. 7 On the File menu. 966 | Chapter 25 Sharing Projects . name the file Worksets Project_Local-User2. and navigate to the network location where User 1 saved the central file. select the central file and under Open Worksets. 14 In the Open dialog. click Options. and click OK. You have created a local file which is for your use only. click Worksets. ■ ■ ■ This Revit Architecture session is now set up for User 2. User 1: Check out worksets 22 On the File menu. 20 Navigate to a directory on your hard drive. On the Settings menu.User 1: Create local file 6 For the sake of simplicity. 13 On the File menu. 9 In the Save As dialog. verify that Make this a Central File after save is not selected. Afterwards.

select the Interior Layout workset. You are now the owner of that workset. select Interior Layout. Borrowing Elements from the Worksets of Other Users | 967 . double-click Level 1. This allows you to select elements that belong to worksets that you do not own. 31 On the left exterior wall. 28 Under Active Workset. select the second window from the top. 32 Move the window 500 mm toward the upper exterior wall. You can do this by dragging the window or by modifying one of the temporary dimension values. Leave this dialog open until User 1 grants permission. verify that Editable Only is cleared. select Exterior Shell. and then click OK.24 Select the Exterior Shell workset. under Floor Plans. 27 In the Worksets dialog. a message informs you that you are waiting for permission from User 1. click the File menu. User 2: Check out worksets 26 On the File menu. A symbol appears letting you know that it belongs to a workset you do not own. User 2: Borrow an element from User 1 29 On the Project Browser. click Worksets. A warning message informs you that you must obtain permission from User 1. 33 Click Place Request to ask User 1 for permission to edit the window. and then click OK. you should inform User 1 that you are waiting for permission to edit a borrowed element. At this point. and select Yes for Editable. You are now the owner of that workset. 25 Under Active Workset. and click Editing Requests. User 1: Grant User 2 permission to borrow